JP2019072013A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that employs a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player and realizes further innovative game properties.SOLUTION: In a case of a special-symbol time-reduction first state where game balls are launched toward a special-symbol start pocket at prescribed intervals, the expectation value of the number of prize balls given to a player by execution of small-jackpot games per unit time is less than the number of game balls launched per unit time. On the other hand, in a case of a special-symbol time-reduction second state with the same condition, the expectation value of the number of prize balls given to a player by execution of small-jackpot games per unit time is greater than the number of game balls launched per unit time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  As a pachinko gaming machine in recent years, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made with the game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game The pachinko game machine which can shift to the state and open the large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls is the mainstream. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, a time-saving gaming state that raises the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the probability variation gaming state that raises the winning probability in the big hit lottery There are also gaming machines that have the above-mentioned gaming states and create a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

JP 2005-312674 A JP, 2011-45518, A JP, 2008-167875, A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that can realize further innovative game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to a predetermined ball entry port (for example, the second main game start port B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the predetermined ball socket (for example, The game ball is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10) or compared to the closed or closed state, and when it is shifted to the closed state, a predetermined ball entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d) configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball impossible or opened state, and
A variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second main game identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a ball into the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed in the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display of main game identification information;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
The second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information on the basis of the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, and then performs control to stop the second main game identification information Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, to the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) The unit game which can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous for the player a plurality of times until there is a predetermined number of entered balls or a predetermined period elapses After the special game to be executed can be executed and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening For the player, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) until there is a specific number of balls entering C10 or the second large winning opening C20) or the specific period elapses One unit game that can be put into an advantageous state It is capable of executing the variable winning opening open game executing the special game control means,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit side,
It is possible to start variable display of the second main game identification information even while the first main game identification information is variable display, and even if the second main game identification information is variable display of the first main game identification information It is configured to be able to start variable display,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, Alternatively, the first main game identification information can not be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. ,
The game states related to the openability of the variable member include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group becomes the predetermined probability, the first main game identification information or the second main game And a high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state Is configured to be relatively longer than
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state Is configured to be relatively longer than
In the case where the game ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting opening, the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state than in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state One is configured such that the expectation value related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player by the execution of the variable winning opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed becomes larger,
In the case where the gaming ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting opening, the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state than in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state One is configured such that the expectation value related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player by the execution of the variable winning opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed becomes larger,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
The effect display unit includes effect display content control means capable of displaying the secondary game identification information in the effect display unit based on the information regarding the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means,
In the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, when the information on the first main game identification information is received, the subsidiary game identification information based on the information on the first main game identification information is displayed on the display unit If the information regarding the second main game identification information is received in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, the secondary game identification based on the information regarding the second main game identification information is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to display information in a display mode which does not display information on the effect display unit or which is more difficult to view than the secondary game identification information based on the information on the first main game identification information. .

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in a gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a prize ball dispensing unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an operation diagram according to a winning ball dispensing unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an entire electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of an NMI interrupt process (during power failure) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of winning ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a pair payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is an image diagram related to a prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart of a pair payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the ball entering detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of auxiliary game start opening ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main game start opening ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the first (second) winning prize entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the general winning and entering ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an out-enter ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of winning ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table used in the first (second) main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of an error management process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of emission control signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of the external terminal transmission content determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of payout control substrate side main processing on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a payout abnormality detection error control process on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of payout motor abnormality detection on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of payment required stop abnormality detection on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout related information transmitting / receiving process (anti-main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the prize ball payout control processing (at the time of award ball payout start / motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a winning ball payout control process (at the time of motor driving end and the winning ball payout end) on the payout control substrate side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout control process (during motor drive execution) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of motor error processing on the side of the payout control board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of an instruction image display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of special game effect display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is an operation diagram according to the first (second) large winning opening and the right general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an operation diagram according to the first (second) large winning opening and the right general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect execution determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a table of effect content determination tables on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is an operation view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is an operation view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of end demonstration time control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a main gaming table used in a first (second) main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is an effect content determination table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a main gaming table used in a first (second) main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of end demonstration time control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a view exemplifying an open pattern of the special winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of start demonstration time control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of start demonstration effect execution processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 99 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 100 is an operation diagram according to the second big winning opening C20 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of upper shielding member drive control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of lower shielding member drive control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a V winning a prize entrance determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of V winning detection effect display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of small hit game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 112 is an operation diagram according to a winning on the V winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a processing image diagram 1 between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a processing image diagram 2 between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board of the pachinko gaming machine of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a game ball circulation image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a main flow chart on the side of the winning ball payout control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of power failure return initialization processing on the winning ball payout control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the game ball number management processing on the prize ball payout control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the number-of-ball-hands management processing on the prize ball payout control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of game ball launch control processing on the prize ball payout control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of a power failure time process on the side of the winning ball payout control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 a is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 124 b is a view showing a state in which the main control board is accommodated in the case and a cross section around the setting operation unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of setting change processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of entering state display device computing processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a second RAM area clear check process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of zone determination on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of zone A hour determination on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the determination on and after zone B on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of SW tabulation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of counter addition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of arithmetic processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of entering state display device display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of display content update processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 138 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an overall electrical configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the effect display device during setting change and setting confirmation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 shows a first main game pass / fail lottery table (second main game hit / off lottery table) in the case of changing the winning probability of the main game symbol according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of pre-reading determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect execution determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a first main game pass / fail lottery table (second main game pass / off lottery table) included in the main control board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration for a main control board to obtain a lottery table for each setting value without grasping the setting value in the pachinko game according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of initial setting processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a table showing a random number upper limit value of a winning lottery random number set in an initial setting process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of setting value parameters in a pachinko gaming machine according to a modification of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 152 shows an example of a first main game acceptance lottery table (second main game acceptance lottery table) in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an example of a functional configuration diagram according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an example of a memory map in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a table configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a table configuration diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to a sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a functional block of the main control board and the sub control board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of setting change processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of an input determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of history storage processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 169 shows a history storage area image 1 on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 170 shows history storage area image 2 at the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of setting confirmation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 173 is an image diagram according to setting change button type 1 (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 174 is an image diagram according to setting change button type 1 (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 175 is an image diagram according to setting change button type 2 (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 176 is an image diagram according to setting change button type 2 (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 177 is an image diagram according to a setting change button type (setting confirmation) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 178 is an image diagram concerning a setting switch type (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 179 is an image diagram concerning a setting switch type (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 180 is an image diagram according to setting switch type (setting confirmation) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 181 is an image diagram according to a RAM clear button type (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 182 is an image diagram according to a RAM clear button type (setting confirmation) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 183 is an image diagram concerning a keyed cover type (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 184 is an image diagram concerning a keyed cover type (setting change) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. 185 is an image diagram according to a keyed cover type (setting confirmation) in a pachinko gaming machine according to an eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 186 is an image diagram according to a keyed cover type (setting confirmation) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 187 is a game board side view according to a modification of the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 188 is an explanatory drawing showing the number per unit set value in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 189 is an explanatory drawing showing a flow of gaming machine in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a hit determination table of a pachinko game machine according to another mode of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 191 is a view showing a lottery table of special notice effects of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification of the sixth embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably it is visual, eg, numbers, letters, symbols And the like. In addition, in the present specification, "identification information" may be referred to as a main gaming symbol / special symbol (special drawing) or a decorative symbol (graphic drawing), but "special symbol (special drawing)" is a main control board It is identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and "decorative symbol (dressing)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the side of the sub control board. “Identifiable information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method. For example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7 segments) (including not only the presence or absence of light but also the difference in color), physical Display (for example, stop display of a symbol drawn on a reel band at a predetermined position) and the like can be mentioned. "Effect" refers to display content that enhances the interest of a game, and includes, for example, identification information change, stop, notice, etc., moving images and pictures such as animations and live-actions, still images such as pictures, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "opened state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = no prize in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called, attacker). It will be easy. Also, for example, a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) projected from the game board (the player side) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) In a configuration (so-called Vero type attacker) capable of taking the above condition, the advancing state = the winning easy state, and the retreating state = the winning non-easiness state. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, the "playing state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the big winning opening can be in an open state, a non-probability fluctuation gaming state in which the transition lottery probability to the special gaming state is a predetermined value. Transition to special gaming state Probability fluctuation gaming state with high lottery probability, auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning to the start opening that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time short state, for example, variable to the start opening In the case where the member is attached, the variable member open period is long, the variable member open winning probability is high, the time for notifying the result of the variable member open lottery is short, etc., etc., etc. is there. The "playing area" is an area where the game ball can roll, and is not limited to just in front of the game board D35 (as viewed from the player), and for example, the back side of the game board D35 (as viewed from the player) It may be an area where a game ball including both of the game board D35 and the near side (as viewed from the player) of the game board D35 can roll. The “left-handed” is to launch the gaming balls by adjusting the firing strength of the gaming balls so that the gaming balls flow down the left side (left-handed route ML10) of the gaming area D30 described later. The “right strike” is to launch the gaming ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the right side (right strike route MR10) of the game area D30 described later. The “left-handed area” is the area on the left side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is the reference. The “right-handed area” is an area on the right side of the game area D30 when the center of the game area is referred to. The “expected average execution time of easily enterable ball games per unit time” assumes a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary gaming symbol is performed continuously (for example, the condition in which the suspension relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol always exists) In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting opening, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the gaming state mentioned above, When the variable member is attached to the starting opening, long and short of the open period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operation state / non-operation state), winning of the ordinary symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member High and low probability (so-called flat figure high probability lottery state · low probability lottery state), long and short variation time of the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member Condensation function inoperative state, operating state) is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the fluctuation display period every fluctuation display of the identification information and taking an average value based on the actually measured value. More specifically, in the case where the variable display period is configured to be determined for each variable display of identification information, there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). Although the expected value (sum of “selection probability × variation display period”) based on the plurality of types of fluctuation display periods is obtained, if there is one type of the variation display period candidate to be selected, one type The variable display period itself of (ie, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of losing, or the concept restricted to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting, or only the fluctuation display period having the highest selection probability It should be added that the meaning of this wording is to use it as an index that indicates the progressing speed of the game that the player can feel, so that the meaning of the term “variation display period of the identification information As a method of realizing the “average value” different, the candidate of the variable display period and / or the selection probability are made different, or even if the candidate of the variable display period and / or the selection probability is the same, a further variable display period is added There are various methods such as changing the period value at the time of performing, but the method is not limited to any one). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variation display periods of the identification information is different from the first period "Having at least a fluctuation period state" means not only the two states concerned but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, according to the number of times of display of variation of identification information, “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” It also includes those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the fluctuation display periods of the identification information in each state is configured to be “first fluctuation period state” <“second fluctuation period state” <“third fluctuation period state”, State transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state can be constructed {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it becomes suitable when combined with the probability fluctuation gaming state + electric cho specific gaming state which continues until the next big hit (the next big hit can not be obtained despite the situation where the next big hit occurrence is definite) As the situation continues, the progressing speed of the game will be improved, so it may be possible to eliminate the feeling of fatigue at the so-called cheating time. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the “first fluctuation period state”, the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of losing and the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting In the “third fluctuation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, an average value of fluctuation display periods of identification information at the time of losing and an average value of fluctuation display periods of identification information at hitting In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of losing is particularly likely to be relatively long compared to the “first fluctuation period state” In other words, in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting is relatively long particularly in the “second fluctuation period state” compared to other states. (I.e., the short display of fluctuation with a definite loss) The display of a fluctuation of a short display with a loss or the display of a display with a middle fluctuation that suggests a hit is not selected (or not selected), but the fluctuation of reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that the feature is selected (or easily selected) only during the display period. The "specific period in the high probability lottery state after the end of the special game execution" may be a period immediately after the end of the special game execution until the symbol variation for a predetermined number of times is made, or the special game It may be a period until the symbol variation is made a predetermined number of times after one or more symbol variations are made after the end of the execution (ie, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the completion of the special game execution) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range, therefore, the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state"-> "second fluctuation period state"-> "third fluctuation period state" When the state transition with can be taken, the specific period may mean the staying period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. "When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the information about the hold" means that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the holding process, for example, but the special game may occur There is no particular limitation on the judgment criteria. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop pattern, It is also possible to use a random number value such as "per symbol design random number" to decide whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability fluctuation game) after a special game, or an event content derived from these random values The length of fluctuation time, the type of stop symbol, whether to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment standard. In the case of suggesting or announcing the existence of the hold, for example, it is performed in conjunction with the effect (the pattern variation mode of the decorative symbol, or the like during the holding digestion until the hold is reached). Background information etc) can be changed, and when reporting, for example, the display mode of the suspension indicator light (may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) at the time of the suspension occurrence (In this case, change the display color, change the display shape, etc.), change the sound such as the hold occurrence sound or BGM at the hold occurrence time, the lamp for effect at the hold occurrence time Execution mode of other effects (pattern variation mode of decorative symbol, background effect performed in conjunction with it, etc.) being executed at the time of the hold occurrence, changing the lighting mode of (frame lamp etc.) The To reduction, and the like.

  Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is an aspect that is associated. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications {e.g. winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.} This is merely an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, the conditions of the probability change game and the non-probability change game, time reduction game and the non-probability change game) It is understood that the size relationship and combination of the numerical values shown in the conditions for the time reduction game, etc. may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the magnitude relationship in the expected value of the maximum round number at the special game time are: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be appropriately changed such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (other figures, same for conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuations of the probability variation gaming state based on the purport of continuing until the next big hit occurs, does “65535” be set as the number of continuations (constructed so as to be substantially continued), Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose of maintaining the probability fluctuation gaming state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, it does not greatly deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. It should be understood that it may be changed as appropriate.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine mainly includes a game machine frame and a game board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like, and is supported by a door D18 (sometimes referred to as a glass door D18). The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the shooting rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper right and upper left of the game board D35, and sound effects corresponding to the game state and the like are output.

  The game board D35 and a transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) on the front of the game machine are attached to the game machine frame so as to be parallel to maintain a distance (19 mm in this example) exceeding 13 mm and not exceeding 25 mm. It is done. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism so as not to be easily shaken.

  In addition, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) is colorless and transparent so that the entire game area is colorless and uneven so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed without obstructing the prospect of the entire structure of the game board It is formed.

  The ball bowl (for example, the upper bowl D20, the lower bowl D22) is such that the gaming balls on the bowl are visible to the player (the number of gaming balls can be generally confirmed), and the player receives the game It has a shape that does not hinder the removal of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be freely removed).

  Next, the game board D35 is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34, and the game balls flow down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) through the transparent plate D16. You can check the position of. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left hitting area DL10 and a right hitting area DR10. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a left hitting route ML10, a right hitting route MR10, a first main game start opening A10 and a second main game Start opening B10, auxiliary game start opening H10, first large winning opening C10, second large winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol A display device H20, a center decoration D38, a movable object YK, a right general winning opening lamp LP10, a left general winning opening P10, a right general winning opening P20, a sub input button SB and an out opening D36 are provided. In the present embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as a first downflow route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as a second downflow route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d is changed into a closed state in which the game ball is hard to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the closed state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the left side (left hitting area DL10) of the game area D30 1) While being easily guided to the main game start opening A10, the game ball flowing down the right side (right hitting area DR10) of the game area D30 is configured to be difficult to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. Further, both the gaming balls flowing down the left side of the gaming area D30 and the gaming balls flowing down the right side of the gaming area D30 can be guided to the second main game start port B10.

  In the present embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, but not limited to this, the first main game start opening A10 and the first The two main game starting openings B10 may be arranged separately.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down is configured to be less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball flowing down the right and left sides (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

  Next, the left general winning opening P10 is equipped with a left general winning opening entrance detection device P11s. The left general winning a prize entrance detection device P11 s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the left general winning opening P10, and generates left general winning mouth entry information indicating the entering upon entering the ball. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three balls) of game balls will be paid out as a prize ball by entering the game ball into the left general winning opening P10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easy to enter the left general winning opening P10, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is left It is configured to be difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when a left strike is performed (a game ball is adjusted to have a game ball launch intensity so as to allow the game ball to flow down so that the game ball flows down the left strike area DL10 (left hit route ML10) on the left side of the game area D30). The left general winning opening P10 is configured to be easily entered.

  Next, the right general winning opening P20 includes the right general winning opening entrance detection device P21 s. The right general winning a prize entrance detection device P21 s is a sensor for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the right general winning opening P20, and generates right general winning mouth entry information indicating the entering when entering the ball. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is disposed in the right-handed area DR10 and has both the role of an auxiliary game starting opening for acquiring an auxiliary gaming random number and the role of a general winning opening for winning a prize ball. There is. That is, the entry of the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start opening electric combination B11d attached to the second main game start opening B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls will be paid out as a prize ball by entering the game ball into the right general winning opening P20. The game ball (for example, 2 balls) paid out as a winning ball from the right general winning opening P20 by entering the game ball into the right general winning opening P20 is entered by the game ball into the left general winning opening P10. , It is configured to be less than the game balls (for example, three balls) paid out as a winning ball from the left general winning opening P10. In the present embodiment, the game ball on which the right-handed game is executed can be entered into the right general winning opening P20. In other words, when executing a right-handed (adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball and striking the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the right-handed region DR10 (right-handed route MR10) which is the right side of the gaming region D30) The right general winning opening P20 is configured to be easily entered.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the ball entry which can enter the ball when the right-handed execution is carried out, in order from the upstream, “auxiliary game starting port H10 → right general winning opening P20 → second large winning opening C20 → The first large winning opening C10 → the second main game starting opening B10 → the out opening D36 ”is in this order. In addition, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has passed the auxiliary game start port H10 will further flow down on the game area, and the ball entry port located downstream is described It becomes possible to enter the general winning opening P20 etc.). On the other hand, the game ball entering the right general winning opening P20 will flow into the back side of the game board, and will not subsequently enter the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 Game balls that have not entered the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20).

  In addition, at the time of execution of the left strike in the non-time shortening gaming state (in the non-time shortening gaming state, the game proceeds with left strike), the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20) Because it is difficult to open the second main game start opening electric role B11d is difficult to open, as a start opening on the main game side will proceed to play the game by entering the first main game start opening A10 mainly, while, At the time of execution of the right strike in the time saving gaming state (in the time shortening gaming state, the game proceeds by right hitting), because the game ball is easy to enter the auxiliary game start opening H10 (and the right general winning opening P20) 2 main game start opening electric role B11d is easy to open, it will be to advance the game by entering the ball into the second main game start opening B10 mainly as a start opening on the main game side. In addition, the game ball is fired by right-handing in the time-saving gaming state than the ease of entering the first main game starting port A10 when the game ball is continuously fired by left-handing in the non-time shortening gaming state The ease of entering the second main game start opening B10 when continuing to play is higher, in other words, the first main game start when continuing to fire the game ball in the left strike in the non-time shortening gaming state The first main game start opening A10 or the second main game start when you continue to shoot the game ball by right-handed in the time-saving game state than the ease of entering the mouth A10 or the second main game start port B10 The ease of entering the ball into the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of winning balls (three balls in this example) when entering the left general winning opening P10 when the left hitting execution is easier to enter than the right hitting execution is three Designing more than the number of prize balls (two balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20, which is easier to enter than the left-handed one, when running the game, thereby reducing non-time-saving gaming state The difference between the average number of winning balls paid out by entering the winning opening between the case where the game is advanced by left strike and the case where the game is advanced by right strike in the time-saving gaming state, ie, the base It is possible to prevent the difference between values (expected values of the number of prize balls to be paid out with respect to the fired game balls 100 balls) from becoming too large.

  The right general winning opening lamp LP10 is formed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, etc., and is configured to be able to be lit by the game ball entering the right general winning opening during execution of the special game. . In addition, although details will be described later, it may be suggested that transition to the probability variation gaming state or transition to the non-probability variation gaming state is made after the special game is ended by the difference in the lighting color of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. It is configured. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided on the left hitting area DL10 or on the right hitting area DR10 on the gaming area D30. Also, it may be provided in an area other than the game area D30. In this example, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is referred to as a normal state, a normal gaming state, a normal time, a low probability, a low probability state, a low probability gaming state, a low probability time, a non probability change, a low probability lottery state, etc. Sometimes. In addition, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability, a high probability state, a high probability gaming state, a high probability time, a definite variation, a high probability lottery state or the like. In addition, the time reduction gaming state may be referred to as a time saving state, a time saving, a time saving, and the like. In addition, the non-time saving gaming state may be referred to as non-short time state, non-time middle, non-time short, and the like. Also, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state may be referred to as a normal state, a normal gaming state, a normal time, and the like.

  In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the right-handed route MR10 passes through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flows near the right general winning opening P20, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20, etc. It will be.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right of the out port D36, and the gaming ball flowing down the right side (based on the middle of the gaming area) of the gaming area D30 is Before reaching the out port D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 is in the form of a horizontal rectangle that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and the out-port It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of D36. Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11 s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11 d {and the first large winning And a motor electric product solenoid C13}. Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The winning prize opening electric combination product solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called Even if the opening on the passage where the game ball can roll and the opening where the game ball can roll is made a big winning opening, it is possible to take a state in which the opening is closed and a state in which it is opened (a so-called sliding attacker). It is preferable in the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric role C21d {and the second large winning And a motor electric product solenoid C23}. Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21 s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called An opening on the passage through which the game ball can roll is a large winning opening, and it is also possible to use a state in which the opening is closed and a state in which the opening is open (so-called slide-type attacker). It is preferable in the case where it is desired to secure the number of ball entry into the special winning opening to a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In addition, since the main game symbol does not necessarily have a role to be rendered, in the present embodiment, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to an inconspicuous level. However, in the case of adopting a method in which the main game symbol itself is given an effective role and the decorative symbol is not displayed, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later. You may configure it.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display or the like of a effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying moving images of a plurality of decorative symbol variations imitating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display unit SG12 for displaying main game hold information, and And a second hold display unit SG13. In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, each of the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13 is composed of four lamps, which are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is configured of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed). In the present embodiment, two ball entrances of the auxiliary game starting port H10 and the right general winning port P20 are provided as ball entrances capable of acquiring the auxiliary game random number, and any of the two ball entrances Even when the player enters the ball, the display regarding the acquired auxiliary game random number is displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 and / or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking and the like.

  Next, the movable object combination YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device SG, and plays a role of driving and boosting the game at the time of effect execution accompanying the symbol variation. It is preferable to configure so as to stand out by moving up and down, rotationally driving, and lighting, and to be easily driven by symbol fluctuation having a high hit probability.

  Next, the sub input button SB is an operation member electrically connected to the sub control board S, which is to be operated (pressed) to execute effects based on the operation. As the operation mode of the sub input button SB, single press (operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed only once in a short time), continuous hit (operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed a plurality of times), and long press (An operation mode in which the sub input button SB is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time). In addition, the operation member electrically connected to the sub control board S and to be executed based on the operation by the operation (pressing) is not limited to the sub input button SB alone, and is not limited to the upper and lower portions. There are four operation units, left and right, and by operating the operation unit, the cross key configured to be able to select the effect (such as advance notice effect) to be performed, the effect (movable It may be configured to have a lever, etc. on which the body part is actuated, etc.).

  Next, the out port D36 is a ball entry port provided below the game area D30, and the game ball which has flowed down without entering any winning port provided in the game area D30 enters the ball entrance When the game ball enters the out slot D36, various lottery based on random numbers or prize balls based on the ball are not executed, and the game ball is discharged out of the gaming machine. Become. In the present embodiment, an out port D36 is provided only at the lowermost portion on the game board, and the game ball that did not win a prize in the winning port enters, but an out port is provided at a predetermined location at the top of the game board. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not a winning opening, it is desirable not to be confused with the winning opening, such as displaying "OUT" using a seal.

  Although not shown, the size of the game board D35 (game area D30) is set such that it does not exceed a square frame whose one side is 500 mm and includes a circle whose diameter is 300 mm.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning opening (when it is possible to win the gaming ball) in other words (when the prize is not activated (when the variable winning opening such as the large winning opening C10 is closed), in other words Even if there is a physically possible locus about the launched game ball, it is not impossible to win a prize, for example, the number of the first main game start aperture A10 (the number of entrances of the prize aperture) is five ( There is one first main game start opening A10, three left general winning openings P10, and one right general winning opening P20). Although the number of winning openings can be set as appropriate, a range of 5 to 15 is desirable from the viewpoint of the winning ratio and the suppression of complication of the game. Here, the entrance of the winning opening is a passing surface of the gaming ball constituted by the winning opening and the game nails etc. (the game nails continuously arranged in such a manner that the game ball can not pass between) Among them, it refers to the part that is the farthest from the winning opening. It should be noted that the size of the entrance of the winning opening when the prize is not activated (the maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 among the entrance of the winning opening, and if it is set by the game nail, nail and nail It is desirable to configure the inner method of the above not to exceed 13 mm, and the size of the entrance of the winning opening of the variable winning devices other than the big winning opening (motorized and non-motorized) (as mentioned above) It is desirable not to exceed 55 mm. In addition, it is desirable that the size of the entrance of the special winning opening (maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board) exceeds 55 mm and does not exceed 135 mm in order to distinguish from other prizes.

  Furthermore, the size of the gate (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) that triggers the normal symbol display device to operate (the gate and game nails connected to the gate etc. The maximum value of the distance parallel to the game board D35 at the position farthest from the gate, that is, the entrance of the substantial gate) does not exceed 13 mm among the passage faces of the game ball composed of It is desirable to do so.

  In the present embodiment, two large winning openings (two of the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) are provided, but in view of the proviso, not more than two. It is desirable to configure. Further, as in the present embodiment, it is desirable that the structure clearly be clearly separated physically regardless of whether or not the two big winning openings are open. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, it is desirable that the game ball be able to pass between the two big winning openings without the two big winning openings being horizontally adjacent to each other. Further, in the present embodiment, two of the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B20 are provided as starting openings, but the number of general winning openings (in the present embodiment, four general winning openings are provided). In consideration of the balance with the individual), it is desirable to configure so as not to exceed three.

  In addition, a movable object may be provided in the starting opening, and the movement of the gaming ball having already won the starting opening may be changed by the movable object. In this case, it is desirable that the movable object always have a constant operation (including one that repeats a series of operations) so that adjustment of the operation is impossible.

  Furthermore, as described above, a large number of game nails and the like are arranged in the game area D30, but this arrangement makes the falling of the game balls irregular within a certain range, but not extremely irregular. Is desirable. Specifically, the game ball collides with an electric or other power (a device for giving a change in the direction of the fall of the windmill or other game balls, so that the game ball is in a direction different from the direction of the fall) A device that elevates the gaming ball by a change (except for the one that raises the gaming ball slightly but does not make the falling direction of the gaming ball extremely irregular) etc. It is desirable not to provide such a device because the order of the game balls and the order of entering the winning opening or out may be largely different. The gaming nails and the windmill are generally vertically (about ± 5 degrees) driven into the gaming board. Also, it goes without saying that the structure provided on the game board, such as game nails, is durable enough that the shape etc. does not change due to the collision of the game balls (for example, in the game nail of this example, the Vickers hardness is 150 Hv to 230 Hv Made of brass) is secured.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the elderly, sub main control unit SM that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that imparts interest to the game content, and the like Sub-sub control unit SS that performs effect display, error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs to notify an error occurrence, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize ball according to a prize on each prize opening A prize ball dispenser (set base) KE having a payout unit KE10 etc. for dispensing game balls supplied from the tank KT to the upper bowl D20, an error release switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and a prize ball A prize ball dispensing control substrate KH for controlling the dispensing operation by the dispensing unit KE10, an error indicator KH3 displaying the occurrence status of an error relating to dispensing (for example, 7-segment display), and an award controlling the dispensing operation by the dispensing unit KE10 A ball payout control board KH, a launcher D42 for launching the game balls (storage balls) of the upper bowl D20 into the game area D30 one ball at a time, a launch control board D40 for controlling the launch operation of the launcher D42, and a pachinko game A power supply unit E for supplying power to each part of the machine and a power switch Ea which is a switch for turning on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine are provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

  In addition, on the main control board M, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the left general winning opening P10, the right general winning opening P20, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening A ball entry status display device J10 capable of displaying the ball entry status of the game ball to a winning opening such as C20, etc. is provided, and a 4-digit 8-segment display is attached in a row in a row. Note that the ball entry state display device J10 in the same figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M on the back side direction of the gaming machine, and unlocks the door unit D18 with the key possessed by the game hall side to open the door unit. Since it is necessary to open D18 and check the substrates attached to the back of the door unit D18 (game board), the player can not check. In addition, as an example of the ball entry status displayed on the ball entry status display device J10, a section information by a total out number or a base ratio (“(low probability payout number / low probability out number) × 100”) Etc.). The ROM / RAM area for executing the process of step 1550-10 and the ROM / RAM area for executing the process of step 1000-1 to step 3500 are configured to be different areas (the addresses do not overlap each other). You may

  Next, with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE 10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operation principle of payout of the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 3, the winning ball payout unit KE10 includes a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE 10m which is driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 3, the prize ball dispensing unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball dispensing unit KE10 having such a structure operates in accordance with the following principle. First, when the gaming ball enters the winning opening in the gaming area, the winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and transmits the signal of the winning balls to the winning ball payout control board KH Do. Alternatively, a request for ball lending is made from the gaming ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game balls. As shown in FIG. 4, when the stepping motor KE10m rotates, the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2 and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) is rotated, and the gaming ball is rotated. One ball is paid out. Further, the game balls paid out are detected by a payout count sensor KE 10 s provided continuously downstream of the winning ball payout unit KE 10. As for the cross section CC, as shown in the drawing, it should be added that the cross section along the flow path of the gaming ball (the flow path can be easily seen) is illustrated.

  The lower part of FIG. 3 is a view schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (dispensing motor position sensor) KE 10 ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE 10 p (an example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE 10 ms has a pair of measurement units, and is a photosensor that detects an object between the measurement units by emitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are disposed with the rotation confirmation member KE10 p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is formed with six recesses along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is turned on (the lower state in FIG. 3).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M to control the award ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, A sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are disposed on one board) which controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of an error notification etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and an error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the computer (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM), and a backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information at the time of power interruption ing.

  The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below. First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first 1 large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s, general winning opening entrance detection device P11s}, drive solenoid (not shown, the first large winning opening solenoid C13 described above, second large winning combination Game peripheral devices (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B in the figure, which are input / output devices that are essential for the progress of the game, such as mouth solenoid C23), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the first and second main game common peripheral devices C and the auxiliary game peripheral devices H), and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from the respective input devices. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. Information (commands) on the prize ball payout control board KH, information on the progress status of the effects and games, etc. (commands and also referred to as display instruction related information) and information on displays such as prize ball payouts (commands, The transfer operation related information (also referred to as “disbursement operation related information”) can be transmitted to the sub control board S, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bi-directional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. Further, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game related information and payout related information as external output information to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G (output to the hall computer HC side) One-way communication) is configured.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. The game ball lending device R (which may be referred to as a card unit R) to be transmitted is connected. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (the launch control board D40) of the launcher is juxtaposed in the prize ball delivery control board KH, and the prize ball delivery control board KH and the launcher D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Here, when it is detected that the player directly manipulates the launch handle D44 (touch detection), the launch device D42 determines the launch intensity (launch position) based on the operation amount of the launch handle, and the game area D30 The game ball can be fired one ball at a time to any position of the counter, so that the game ball can not fire more than 100 balls in one minute even when the game ball is fired continuously. The game ball is configured to be fired at a constant interval (for example, 599.9 ms / one) by the like. In other words, regardless of the gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state or the gaming state such as whether or not the special game is executed, the game balls are always fired at regular intervals (the firing speeds do not differ). Thus, the player's firing skill is properly reflected regardless of the state of the game. More specifically, if the player desires to hit the right, the player can hit the right by operating the firing handle D44 to a position corresponding to the firing intensity at which the right can be hit, and the player can hit the left If it is desired to operate the firing handle D44 to a position corresponding to the firing intensity at which the left strike can be executed, it is possible to execute the left strike and whether the special game is being executed, etc. Regardless of the state, the game ball is configured to be shootable at a firing strength based on the operation of the firing handle D44 at all times.

  The launch handle D44 is provided with a launch stop switch (not shown) so that the player can stop the launch of the game ball at any timing (can be launched in units of one sphere). ing. Specifically, even when the player is operating the launch handle D44 (it is detected that the direct operation of the launch handle D44 is detected (touch detection)), by operating the launch stop switch, It is possible to stop the launch. Here, "direct operation" means that a part of the player's body is used to contact a gaming machine to play a game. Also, in this example, from the viewpoint of prosperity, the launch motor, the launch handle (strength adjustment so that the performance of the launcher D 42 does not change over a predetermined period or due to extraneous noise etc., and the durability is secured. Function), the control circuit of the launcher is designed respectively. In addition, it is desirable that the launch handle D44 not be equipped with a function or the like that causes the launch handle D44 to vibrate so as not to hinder the adjustment of the launch position by the player.

  Further, a portion for giving kinetic energy to the game balls in the launch device D42 which is an overall device related to the launch of the game balls is constituted by one launch motor. Also, the firing handle D44 returns to 0 when the player does not directly operate it (is biased to the reference position direction by a spring etc. and is returned to the reference position when the hand is released from the discharge handle D44) The player's skill in adjusting the intensity can be reflected in the game result.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball having a diameter of 11 mm and a mass of 5.4 g or more and 5.7 g or less is used as the gaming ball to be used.

  Next, as described above, the sub control board S displays the decoration display etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other driving devices for effects (not shown, but so-called effects And movable motors and solenoids). Also, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), the sub input button SB which can execute start or end of measurement of a base value, execution of a predetermined effect, or start of display of a maintenance mode, etc. The sub control board S is also connected. In addition, it is possible to determine that the sub input button SB has been operated by the detection of the sub input button detection device SBs. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and control of determination of display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, with reference to the flow path image diagram of the gaming ball at the bottom of the figure, the flow path of the gaming ball provided for the game will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls launched into the game area D30 are each ball entry port {first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first large winning port C10, first 2) Enter the ball into one of the large winning opening C20, the general winning opening P10, and the out opening C80}, pass through the ball entry sensor corresponding to each ball entry, and are guided into the gaming machine (within the gaming machine frame D) . Here, about the game ball which entered into the 1st main game starting opening A10, it passes the 1st main game starting opening confirmation sensor A11 s2 provided for fraud detection. Thereafter, all gaming balls guided into the gaming machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C 90 s and are discharged out of the gaming machine. In addition, although not particularly illustrated in this example, a switch for confirming ball entry {each ball socket (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the first big winning port C10, the first 2) A switch through which the game ball entered in a large winning opening C20, a general winning opening) passes, and has one or more switches different from the switches for detecting the ball entering each ball entry) It shall be.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after performing initialization (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and resets the power supply unit E reset button (RAM clear It is determined whether or not the manager of the game arcade has intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (sent at that timing. The command may be set at this timing and may be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1007 whether or not the information indicating that the power has been normally disconnected is not stored in the RAM. If Yes in step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, it is stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, based on the check result, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (that is, whether the information at the time of power failure is backed up in the RAM). Do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the information indicating No in step 1007, that is, power is normally cut off, is stored, or if the data in step 1010 is No, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, The CPUMC of the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power interruption stored (back up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (The command may be sent at this timing and the command may be set and sent in the control command sending process described later), and in step 1014-1, the main control The CPU MC of the substrate M sets the return setting of the solenoid {second main game start opening electric role object B11 of the second main game start opening B10 , The power opening or closing state of the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) and the movable piece (for example, the upper shielding member C24, lower shielding member C25, etc. in FIG. 100) described later In order to return to the state before disconnection, it is judged whether or not the solenoid operation bit is on in the order of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d, the big winning opening and the movable piece, and if it is on, In order to determine that the second main game start opening / big winning opening / movable piece is open, and to open it again) stores the solenoid operation flag in the corresponding address, and shifts to the processing of step 1015 . At step 1015, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores the information indicating that the power is normally turned on in the RAM, and shifts to the processing of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) and as a result {(b) of FIG. Transition. Note that after step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, an increment process of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an input process described later in step 1000-1. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes various random number update processing described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an initial value update type random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an initial value random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a later-described start opening 2 effective period setting process (a process of setting an effective period of the second main game start opening B10). Next, in step 1000-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a prize monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is won in each winning opening is four for the first main game starting opening A10, one for the second main gaming starting opening B10, and the first big winning opening C10 and the second. The large winning opening C20 has 13 balls, the left general winning opening (sometimes referred to as a general winning opening) P10 has three balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has two balls. In addition, the number of winning balls paid out is an example, and the number of winning balls paid out is different between when entering the first main game starting slot A10 and when entering the second main gaming starting slot B10. The number of winning balls paid out may be different between when the player enters the first large winning opening C10 and when entering the second large winning opening C20. When the game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a hit / off lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of balls to be paid out (three balls in this example) is awarded to the player. It is configured. Also, when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, the random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired, and a predetermined number of balls to be paid out (two balls in this example) is awarded to the player. It is configured. However, the number of winning balls on all winning openings provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment does not exceed 15 for 1 winning (entering) and is constant regardless of the gaming state (abnormal It is configured to be invalidated under circumstances, errors occurring, etc.), and it is also configured such that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, thus realizing various game states. The direct game result is summarized as "whether or not the launched game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

  In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control processing is performed not on the main control board M but on the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. When there are obstacles due to sudden matters such as a power failure during payout for one game ball, there may be cases where the correct number of balls can not be made. For this reason, in this example, the abnormal time retry function (for example, when the game ball is won in the first main game start port A10 and a game ball is paid out) The power is cut off after that, and after the power is restored, it has the function of executing the payout of the remaining three balls. Needless to say, it is also possible to realize the correct number of award ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control substrate KH, and in this case, in the case of an abnormality retry. It is not necessary to provide a function.

  Next, in step 2000, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a ball entering detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a special winning opening valid period setting process. Next, in step 1550, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an entering passage passing time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a game state display process. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a handle state signal inspection process. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an out port monitoring process. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes LED output processing. Next, in step 1900, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, at step 1550-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a later-described emission control signal output process. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes test signal output processing. Next, at step 1550-9, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a solenoid output process. Next, in step 1999, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later. Next, at step 1550-10, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an entering state control process. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPU MC of the main control board M is set to allow the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before the execution of the interrupt process.

  The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal, and in this example, it is attached to the game board Switches (for example, first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s, second main game start opening entrance detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entrance detection device H11s, first large winning opening winning detection device C11s, Second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s, general winning detection device etc), out ball count switch to detect entering the ball into the out opening D36, open circuit short circuit power source abnormality detection signal, open signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18 Etc.), detection of magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal and magnetic detection signal 2 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 2) It is a process to monitor. In the present embodiment, with regard to special inputs such as a RAM clear switch, input determination and the like are performed by processing different from the input processing.

  The various random number update process is a process of relatively simply updating (for example, adding a constant) the random number used for the lottery having a very low impact on the balls, and in the present example, the normal symbol variation pattern random number (For example, the supplementary game symbol variation mode random number) and the variation pattern random number (for example, variation mode random number) are updated.

  The initial value update type random number update process is a process (a process different from the above-described various random number update processes) of updating random numbers used in a lottery in which the influence on balls is produced to a certain extent. , Normal symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), special symbol symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), soft random number per special symbol described later Is a process for updating the

  The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated in the initial value update type random number update process used for the lottery in which the above-described influence on the ball is generated to a certain extent. In this example, as an example of the random number to be updated, an initial value random number per symbol normally, an ordinary symbol pattern initial value random number, a special symbol symbol initial value random number and a software initial value random number per special symbol can be illustrated. In addition, the initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol initial value random number are random numbers updated in the initial value random number update process when configured to have a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers.

  Also, with the timer subtraction process, 2-byte timer (for example, the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, the second main game start port electric combination open timer MP22t-B, special game timer MP34t , An open time timer, etc.).

  In addition, with the starting opening 2 effective period setting processing, the winning a prize opening which becomes easy to be able to be prized by the fact that the ordinary electromotive winning combination operates with the operation state of the ordinary electromotive combination (for example, 2nd main game starting opening electromotive combination B11d) This is a process of setting an effective period of (for example, the second main game start port B10).

  Further, the prize monitoring process is a process of updating the passage counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and making a transmission request of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

  The special winning opening valid period setting process is processing for storing the result of the determination of the effective period of the special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). As in the third embodiment described later, when the special winning opening is configured to have the specific area C22, the special winning opening valid period setting process is configured to save the result of the valid period determination of the specific area C22. You may

  In addition, abnormality detection processing is processing that performs monitoring of magnetism, monitoring of disconnection and short circuit, monitoring of power source, monitoring of radio waves, monitoring of the open / close state of the frame of glass frame set / game board D35, and monitoring of shock. .

  Also, with the ball passing time abnormality detection process, each switch level is detected in order to detect a ball passing time abnormality when the game ball enters the ball into various ball entrances (for example, the first main game starting port A10). The continuous on-time (continuous on-time of the ball entry sensor) is monitored.

  Also, with the game state display process, the number of times the special electric character works continuously (number of execution rounds in the big hit), error state, the number of operation suspension balls of the normal symbol display device (displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 Current auxiliary game holding ball number) and the operation holding ball number of the special symbol display device (the current main game holding ball number displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20) It is a process of making a display request.

  The handle state signal inspection process is a process of monitoring the touch state of the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44).

  Further, the out-port monitoring processing is processing for monitoring an out-port (for example, out-port D36) in order to create a security output request.

  In addition, with LED output processing, the display in the special symbol display device (for example, the display of the first main game symbol in the first main game symbol display device A20, the display of the second main game symbol in the second main game symbol display device B20 , Display of the number of operation pending balls on the first main game side in the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of operation pending balls on the second main game side in the second main game symbol display device B20), Normal symbol display device In the display (display of the auxiliary symbol in the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20, the display of the number of operation pending balls on the auxiliary gaming side in the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20), the display of the error state, the display of the gaming state, the display of the separation (for example , To indicate that it is a situation to hit right, a situation to hit left) and the number of times the special motorized component is operated continuously (display of the number of rounds in the big hit) Performed for initialization of the display is sequentially performs processing control of the LED output to be controlled by the main control board M of the output of the display data.

  Further, the emission control signal output processing is processing for outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the emission of the game ball, and the details will be described later.

  The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting the signal to a corresponding output port.

  In addition, with solenoid output processing, it is normal electric combination (for example, 2nd main game start mouth electric combination B11d) solenoid and large winning a prize opening (for example, 1st big winning a prize opening C10, 2nd big winning a prize opening C20) solenoid It is a process of outputting output data. When the shielding members (upper shielding member C24 and lower shielding member C25) are provided in the large winning opening as in the fourth embodiment to be described later, output of output data of the movable piece solenoid in solenoid output processing Run.

  Further, in the ball entering state control process, calculation of a base value to be displayed on the ball entering state display device J10, storage of the calculation result, display control of the calculation result, and the like are executed. At this time, when setting change means to be described later is provided, the normal prize ball number counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc. It is also possible to configure to display on the ball entry status display device. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current setting (for example, the probability of winning a big hit and the number of winning balls for each winning opening) is read, and a storage area corresponding to the current setting (for example, A storage area for storing a normal prize ball number counter value, a normal out number counter value, a total out number counter value, a final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc. is set. Then, based on the values stored in the respective storage areas, generation and display of the incoming state information is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately generate and display the ball entry state information (for example, the base value) for each setting. In addition, with regard to the ball entry state information displayed on the ball entry state display device, the display contents are switched by operating the dedicated ball entry state display switching button or by operating the setting change button (for example, When the current setting is 1, when the ball entry state display switching button is operated once, the ball entry state information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated once more, the ball entry state information of setting 3 is By being displayed, the latest information for each setting may be confirmed. Here, when using the setting change button, the configuration using the setting key described above (for example, turning on the power and turning the setting key switch to the left) so that the setting is not changed by operating the setting change button. It is preferable that the display contents be switched by operating the setting change button in the above state. When the display of the entering state information is switched by the entering state display switching button or the setting change button, the display of the current setting may be returned when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing a flow of NMI interrupt processing (during power interruption) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the NMI interrupt), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines at step 1019-1 whether or not the timer interrupt is in progress. If Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned on is stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No at step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. In the case of Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is abnormally shut off in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally off in the RAM, and in step 1020, the main control board M The CPU MC sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing. Although an example of executing the power-off process (FIG. 8) by inputting the power-off signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power-off signal may be input to a specific input port. The power failure processing may be performed by determining the power failure by setting and monitoring a specific input port in the main control substrate side main processing (FIG. 6) or the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a winning ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes an after-disbursement control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes an after-disbursement control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of a pair payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. If Yes in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an unpaid award ball (a prize ball which has not yet transmitted a prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side) in step 3110 Determine if In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that it is an inappropriate error to perform the prize ball payout, such as a prize ball payout related error (for example, an error related to a malfunction of the payout motor; It is determined whether or not a ball breakage error etc. has occurred. If Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues award ball payout commands for the number of award ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid award ball information in the order in which the present payout process is executed (see FIG. 12). Set). Then, in step 3125, the CPU MC of the main control board M erases the unpaid award ball information corresponding to the award ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set winning balls payout command to the winning balls payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next process (the pair payout control board reception control process of step 3200). Do. Also in the case of No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between main control board / dispense control board >>
Here, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment is made up of specific information indicating that it is a prize ball payout command and information of the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of winning balls, for example, 0 (0000 B) means 0 winning balls, and 15 (1111 A) means 15 winning balls. .

  Next, the payout related information transmitted from the winning ball payout control board KH to the main control board M will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, over payout error information, ball route error information, payout motor error information , Prize ball device error information, receiving tray full error and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the corresponding error has not occurred, and if it is "1", the corresponding error Means that is occurring. Bit 0 relates to the completion of the award ball payout, “0” means that the award ball payout is completed, and “1” means that the award ball payout is not completed yet.

  Next, FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of a pair delivery control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M has error information (ball out error, upper limit error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on an error flag related to the corresponding error in step 3215 so that error information on the prize ball delivery control board KH side is on the main control board M side. Even manage (centralized management). On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off an error flag related to an error on the prize ball delivery control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set award ball payout command (a award ball payout command related to the completion of the current payout) in step 3230, and executes the next process (step 3500). Transition to processing). Also in the case of No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits to the sub main control unit SM an auxiliary game start opening ball entry command that is a command related to entering the auxiliary game start opening H 10. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (sent to the side of the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, if No in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1104 whether or not the right general winning opening P20 is entered. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits to the sub main control unit SM a right general winning a prize entry command which is a command related to entering the right general winning opening P20. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (sent to the side of the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Also in the case of No at step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112 the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding ball in the form of setting it in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information indicating the number of the hold and the next process ( (Processing of step 1200). In addition, also in the case of No in step 1104 and step 1110, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1200). Here, in the present embodiment, when the player enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side can be obtained. Also, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (passed through the auxiliary game start port H10) will continue to flow down the game board and start the auxiliary game. While the game ball having entered the right general winning opening P20 can enter the ball entrance downstream of the mouth H10 (right general winning opening P20 etc.), it flows down to the back of the game board, and so on. It is configured not to enter the ball entrance. Although details will be described later, even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 (the game ball passes the auxiliary game start port H10), there is no payout of the winning ball, but the right general winning port P20 When a game ball enters a ball, a payout of a winning ball is generated.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the ball entering detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. 7. First, in step 2100, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game start opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game start opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2350, the entering determination means executes a first (second) large winning opening entrance detecting process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a general winning opening entrance ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes out-of-entry ball detection processing described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a winning ball determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start opening ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, at step 2102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2102, in Step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives an input from the auxiliary game start opening ball detection device H11s as the ball detection time (more than the relevant time, the auxiliary game start opening ball detection device H11s When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball in the auxiliary game start opening H10. If Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2108, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects an input from the auxiliary game start opening ball detection device H11s detection end time (over the relevant time, auxiliary game start opening ball detection device If the H 11 s has not detected an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for at least the time considered to have completed passing through the auxiliary game start slot detection device H 11 s. If Yes in step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in step 2112 and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2200). Also in the case of No in step 2104 or step 2110, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives an input from the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s as the ball detection time (more than that time, the first main game start opening) When the ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time during which it is considered that the first main game start opening A10 has been hit. If Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port detection continuation flag.

  Next, at step 2212-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability change flag is off and the main gaming time short flag is off). It is determined whether or not. In the non-time shortening gaming state, the main game time short flag may be off, or the auxiliary game time short flag may be off (when the opening extension function of the electric combination is not in operation). In the case of the time reduction gaming state, the main game time short flag may be on, or the auxiliary game time short flag may be on (when the release extension function of the electric combination is activated). If Yes in step 2212-1, in step 2212-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device activation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 (increment) to the counter value of the starting opening ball number counter MJ 12 c and shifts to step 2222.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2202, in step 2213, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the detection time from the ball number counter MJ 10c (more than that time, the first main game start slot ball detection device A11s inputs If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for at least the time when it is considered that the passage of the first main game start slot intrusion detection device A11s is completed. Next, in step 2214, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2222. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2 or step 2213, the processing shifts to step 2222.

  Next, in step 2222, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B receives input from the second main game start slot entrance ball detector B11s as the ball entry detection time (more than that time, When the second main game start slot entrance detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that the second main game start slot B10 has been hit. In the case of Yes in step 2224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 2225 whether the flag is on during the second main game start opening validity period. If Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2230, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag.

  Next, at step 2231-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability change flag is off and the main gaming time short flag is off). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device activation flag is off). If Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the starting hole entry ball number counter MJ 12c, and proceeds to step 2240. As described above, in this embodiment, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability change flag is off and the main gaming time short flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10 or the second main game start opening B10 when the operation flag is off, 1 is added to the counter value of the start opening entrance ball number counter MJ 12 c It is configured.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2225 (when the ball entry of the game ball is detected during the period when entry to the second main game starting slot B10 is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M 2 Determine that there is an incorrect entry into the main game start opening B10, and set a second main game start entry incorrect entry command (command to the side of the sub control board S), and proceed to step 2240. Even when the result of step 2231-1, step 2231-2 or step 2224 is No, the process proceeds to step 2240.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2222, in step 2233, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects an input from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s for a detection time (more than the relevant time, the second main game start opening) When the ball detection device B11s does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the passage of the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is completed. If Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. Also in the case of No at step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the first main game start slot ball detection device A11s (the second main game start slot ball detection device B11s) as a fraud detection time (normal ball entry) It is determined whether or not it is a time which exceeds the time to be set and which is ON for at least a time of determining that the fraud is being performed. If Yes in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start port long time detection flag in step 2242, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2350). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2350).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the first (second) large winning entrance entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the first (second) large winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives an input detection time (the relevant time) from the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) As described above, when the ball entry detection device detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entry at the ball entrance. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the first (second) large winning opening valid period. If Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) large winning opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2360, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) large winning opening detection continued flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the game ball is detected during the period when entering the large winning opening is not valid), in step 2361 the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal for the large winning opening It is determined that the player has entered the ball, the first (second) large winning opening incorrect entry command (command to the side of the sub control board S) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. Also in the case of No at step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input time from the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening winning detection device C21s) in step 2362 {the relevant time As described above, when the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input, the gaming ball is the first large winning opening winning detecting device C11s (second large winning opening winning) It is determined whether or not it is OFF for a time period when it is considered that the passage of the detection device C21s is completed. If Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) large winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2368, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

  Next, in step 2370, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives an input from the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s) as a fraud detection time {more than the relevant time, the first large Time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the first large winning opening C10 (second large winning opening C20) is detected when the winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input It is determined whether or not it is ON or more. If Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2370, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a general winning a prize entering ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning a prize opening P10 (the left general winning a prize opening P10 and the right general winning a prize opening P20 may be named generically and the general winning a prize opening P10 may be called) pays out a winning a prize ball when a game ball enters. In general, there is no impact on the progress of the game (does not carry out a lottery that affects the progress of the game), and a general winning opening entrance detection device P11s (in this embodiment) which is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball. Is a sensor that detects the entry of the gaming ball to the left common winning opening P10, a general winning entry detecting device P11s, which is a sensor for detecting entry of the gaming ball to the right general winning entry P20, And the general ball entry detection device P11 s with the ball insertion detection device P11 s).

  First, in step 2402, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the general winning hole entrance ball detecting device is the ball entering detection time (the general winning hole entrance ball detecting device detects an input over the relevant time) Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the general winning opening. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a general winning a prize entry flag. Next, in step 2410, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning a prize opening detection continuation flag. Next, at step 241-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability change flag is off and the main gaming time short flag is off). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device activation flag is off). If Yes in step 2411-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the general ball entry number counter MJ 13c in step 2411-3, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, if No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the ball entry detection time from the general prize entrance ball detection device (the general prize mouth entrance detection device receives the input time or more) Is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the passing of the general winning opening entrance ball detection device is completed. In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning a prize opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. If NO in step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2, or step 2412, the process shifts to step 2420. As described above, in this embodiment, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability change flag is off and the main gaming time short flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device In the case where the operation flag is off, when the game ball enters the general winning opening P10, it is configured to add 1 to the counter value of the general ball entry number counter MJ 13c.

  Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning inlet detection device is incorrect detection time {when the general winning opening detection device detects an input over the relevant time, a general winning It is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that an incorrect ball entry to the mouth has been detected. If Yes in step 2420, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long time detection flag in step 2422, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500). Also in the case of No at step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the total discharge confirmation time when the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the ball entry detection time (the relevant time is the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input) It is determined whether or not the sensor C 90 s is ON for at least the time when it is considered that the ball has entered the ball. If Yes in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on an ejection confirmation detection continuation flag in step 2506. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (increment), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the detection end time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input over the relevant time) In the case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the passage of the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is completed. If Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long time detection flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2600). Also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2510, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of out-of-entry ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the out-port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the out-hole ball detecting device C80s is the ball-in time detection period Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entry at the out port C80. In the case of Yes in step 2604, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the out-port detection continuation flag in step 2606, and shifts to the processing of step 2620.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the out-port ball detector C80s is the detection end time (the out-port ball detector C80s has an input for more than that time). If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for at least the time when it is considered that the passage through the out-entry ball detection device C80s is completed. If Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the out port long time detection flag, and shifts to step 2620. On the other hand, if the result of the step 2604 or the step 2610 is NO, the process goes to the step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the out-port ball detection device C80s is incorrect detection time (when the out-port ball detection device C80s detects the input for the time or more). , It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entrance to the out slot C 80 is being performed. If Yes in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out-port long time detection flag in step 2622, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of balls to be paid out (3 in this example) to the first main game start port A10 to the counter value of the number-of-balls counter MHc. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to the effect that the prize balls pertaining to the first main game starting slot A10 are paid out. Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2702, the process moves to step 2712.

  Next, in step 2712, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the second main game start flag is on. If Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of balls to be paid out (3 in this example) to the second main game start port B10 to the counter value of the number-of-balls counter MHc to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) indicating that the prize balls pertaining to the second main game starting slot B10 are to be temporarily stored. Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2712, the process shifts to step 2722.

  Next, in step 2722, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) large winning entry ball flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) large winning opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the award ball number counter MHc to the number of prize ball payouts (in this example, 13) relating to the first major prize port C10 (second major prize port C20). Add). Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the winning balls pertaining to the first big winning opening C10 (second big winning opening C20) are to be paid out (for example, information regarding the number of winning balls). Are temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2722, the processing shifts to step 2732.

  Next, in step 2732, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning a prize entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the general winning a prize entrance flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) according to the general winning opening to the counter value of the number-of- prize balls counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out) to the effect that the prize balls for general winning opening are to be paid out. Move to On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2732, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the motor-operated combination open flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1204 whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game pattern. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag) and the lottery table MN41ta-H for auxiliary gaming symbol determination. Determine the stop symbol based on the acquired auxiliary gaming side gaming state and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, this is compared to the case where it is off) Then, the winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

  Here, the right in the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the same table, in this example, the stop symbols "D0, D1, D2" are present, and the stop symbols to be hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the respective stops. The release mode of the motorized jackpot that is to be released is, during the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the release mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed) and stopped When the symbol is "D2", the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 2.0 seconds open, closed) (longest open). In addition, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed) and stopped When the design is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed). In the non-time reduction game, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0", and in the time reduction game, the stop symbol is configured to be easy to hit and be a symbol "D1".

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation time to the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short flag). The predetermined time relating to (for example, 1 second if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 10 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts one from the holding ball relating to the auxiliary game pattern, and then updates the hold information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M and After starting the game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, variation display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the supplementary gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in step 1226, and the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol is determined and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Do. Then, at step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol is "hit" (in this example, D1 or D2). If Yes in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the opening mode (for example, in the case of hitting symbol “D1”, opens for 1 second → closing for 1 second in step 1232 based on the hitting symbol on the auxiliary gaming side) → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → open mode that becomes closed, in the case of "D2", open for 0.2 second, closed for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds, etc.) Is determined, and a predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric combination is set in the second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the motor-operated accessory open flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game start port electric role object B11d of the second main game start port B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Also in the case of No at step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. In this embodiment, when the main game time short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time during which the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is kept open is the longest. It is done.

  Next, at step 1242, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached a predetermined time relating to the opening time of the motorized symbol with reference to the second main game start opening motorized symbol opening timer MP22t-B. Determine If Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric role B11d and turns off the electric role open flag, and the next process It transfers to (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop pattern of the auxiliary game symbol, auxiliary game symbol An auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number or the like may be provided to determine the variation time of the game.

  In addition, although not shown, the second main game start opening B10 is a game in a single opening operation of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d (opening operation based on a stop of one auxiliary game winning symbol). Even when the ball enters a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls), the opening operation of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is configured to end, that is, the time shortening game state (auxiliary game time short flag on When opening (longest opening) of the second main game start opening motorized role B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol “D2” is executed in the case of), “Open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → The open time of 4 seconds open → closed ends, or the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls during the open period of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is the second main game start opening B10 By the earlier achievement of entering the ball, Opening of the second main game start hole electric won game B11d (opening period) is configured to terminate. In addition, in the case of the non-time reduction gaming state (auxiliary game time short flag off), when the opening (longest opening) of the second main game start opening electric role B11d based on the auxiliary gaming stop symbol "D2" is executed, " The open time of 0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 2.0 seconds open → closed ends, or the predetermined number (for example, during the open period of the second main game start opening electric role B11d) By the achievement of the game ball of 10 balls) entering the second main game start opening B10, whichever is earlier, it is configured to end the opening (opening period) of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d ing. In addition, the total time the ordinary electric character is open at the longest open time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is "D2") in the time reduction game state (the auxiliary game time short flag on) is 4.2 seconds, and it is not The total open time of the ordinary motorized character at the longest opening time (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is “D2”) in the time reduction gaming state (auxiliary game time short flag off) is 2.2 seconds, whichever game Even in the state, one maximum opening time is configured so as not to exceed 6 seconds, and the maximum number of winning prizes in operation does not generally exceed 10 per game state (time-saving gaming state is Whether or not it is a non-time shortening gaming state) is predetermined.

  In addition, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) serving as the operation trigger of the normal motorized character (second main game start opening electric character B11d) is displayed in a hit manner and displayed (for example, The game machine is configured to operate within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol fluctuation time in the gaming machine, so that it can be clearly associated with which trigger based on which the ordinary motor-operated part operates. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation (in the process of opening → closing) of the ordinary electric role (the second main game start opening electric role B11d), the ordinary electric role The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (the second main game start opening motorized electric object B11d) returns to the inactive state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary to get out It is designed not to differ significantly from the design.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game start opening information from the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a first main game start opening ball entry command, which is a command related to entering the first main game start opening A10, to the sub main control unit SM. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the holding balls for the main game (particularly, the first main game side) are within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a random lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (pending generation command) to the effect that the first main game random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. It is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999).

  The success or failure lottery random number may be configured by one random number, or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. As random numbers generated by two or more random numbers, CPU built-in random numbers updated based on CPU clock and external clock and soft random numbers per special symbol (main game pattern) updated by timer interrupt processing, both The result of arithmetic operation (for example, addition) may be used.

  Next, at step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start opening ball insertion information from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the holding balls relating to the main game (particularly, the second main game side) are within the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains a second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation aspect lottery random number are acquired similarly to the first main game side. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game) Is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (hold generation command) indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. It sets (is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1400). If NO in step 1302 and step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312. If NO in step 1312 and step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M to check whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2) Move to}. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and the next process {step 1400 (1), (2) Transition to the processing of

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) The second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but it is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol fluctuation, and there is a condition that there is a hold of the main game symbol. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when the fluctuation fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation during the fluctuation fixed time May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406, and the first main game content determination random number related to symbol variation this time ( While reading out the second main game content determination random number), the second main game content determination random number is deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining temporarily stored information temporarily stored is shifted (pending reserve process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main gaming table 1 corresponding to each gaming state, and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, Based on the winning lottery random number), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game use lottery table (second main game use lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main gaming symbol determination lottery table (second main gaming symbol determination lottery table), and the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, symbol lottery random number), the stop symbols regarding the main game symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B") are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B, and 10R for 7A, 7B. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May}.

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each gaming state, and the main game symbol Determine the variation pattern of the main game symbol based on the result of the lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) (especially, the variation pattern lottery random number) Temporarily store, and proceed to step 1414.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 26 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the main gaming symbol with respect to a random number can be determined based on the main gaming symbol short result status and the main gaming time short flag status of the main gaming symbol. It is done. For example, with regard to a random number value, when the main lottery is a success or failure lottery result of the main gaming symbol, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, when the main game time short flag is on (time reduction In the case of the gaming state), it is configured that the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is just an example and is not limited at all to the type of the variation mode (variation time) or the selectivity. In addition, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time shortening gaming state (when the main game short flag is on) {symbol variation on the second main game When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by lowering the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (as it is advantageous for the player) In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated.

  Next, in step 1414, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, fluctuation mode information, etc.) related to the main gaming symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command (symbol variation display start instruction command) related to the current gaming state to the sub main control unit SM side (the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) Sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol to the first and second main gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) In B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation flag and shifts to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1419 whether the in-fluctuating flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and in the case of No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M in step 1422 is for transmitting a command for transmitting information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that design variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stop the variation display of the main game symbol on the display, and control the display of the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuation flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. If Yes in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device activation flag in step 1440, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1550). Also in the case of No at step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability change flag is off. If Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the value of the counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time short flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1550). Also in the case of No in step 1506, step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub control board S is configured to transmit the remaining number of short times (the number of remaining symbol variations that the time-saving gaming state ends due to the symbol variation end count after the special game is over). It is done.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag in step 1604 and step 1606. Next, in step 1607, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, at step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game to the sub main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1610 whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No at step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game is not received, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the set open pattern (for example, an open pattern that continues open, a pattern of opening and closing a plurality of times) is set. Next, at step 1616, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large combination opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make the first large. The winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set to the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1612, that is, when the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (eg, for example) of first big winning openings C10 (or second large winning openings C20) in the round. It is determined whether there is a winning ball of 10). In the case of Yes at step 1624, the process goes to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer) in step 1626 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No at step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first large winning opening motorized combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d of the second large winning opening C20). And stop the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). Next, at step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum round number). If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1650, a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). Also in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  In this example, the maximum number of winning game balls set as the program in one unit game (one round of execution) is set as 10, and the maximum number of winnings is reached. Controls the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) immediately to prevent closing of the game balls exceeding the maximum number of winning, while the ball is large (large Even if the game balls temporarily stop between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning opening), even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to an unexpected situation or the like, the predetermined condition (within the predetermined period after closing) As long as it is limited to the above, the winnings exceeding the maximum winnings are treated as valid winnings.

  More specifically, when the first big winning opening C10 is opened in the first round at the jackpot, the first large winning opening C10 has a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning in the first round. Although one round is to be completed, in a situation where the game ball of nine balls enters the first large winning opening C10 in the first round, the tenth ball and the insertion of the tenth ball to the first large winning opening C10 are performed. Even when the game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) that the first round is to be ended by the occurrence of the ball entering the ball substantially simultaneously occur, even when the ball enters the first big winning hole C10, It is configured to pay out the winning balls with the winning being effective. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid or drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door etc.) of the special winning opening execute the closing process and the large winning opening in real time so as to suppress the excessive winning (winning exceeding the maximum winning number). Is closed, and structural design and electrical design are made so that a plurality of gaming balls do not stay in the opening / closing member or in the vicinity thereof immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured such that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous while preventing the game performance from being deviated from the set ball design value.

  In addition, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less throughout one unit game, and it is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls to the winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, it is controlled to immediately close the big winning opening, and after the maximum opening time has elapsed, the balls are prevented from winning the game ball. Even if you win after the maximum opening time has elapsed due to unforeseen circumstances such as (the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the big winning opening), the predetermined condition (after closing Only during a predetermined period), the winning is treated as a valid winning.

  More specifically, as the opening mode of the big winning opening when performing one round in the big hit, according to the type of big hit and the number of unit games (the number of execution rounds) "15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → One of several operation patterns, such as 14.5 seconds open → closed, 29.5 seconds open → closed, etc., is set. The total opening time is configured to be 30 seconds or less, and the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the big winning opening in one round passes, and the game ball is closed during the closing process of the big winning opening Even if the player enters the ball, it is configured to pay out the winning balls with the winning being valid if it is within the valid period (about 1000 ms after completion of the closing process of the big winning opening). On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid or drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door etc.) of the special winning opening close the special winning opening in real time with the execution of closing processing so as to prevent winning after the maximum opening time has elapsed. In addition, the structural design and the electric design are made such that the plurality of gaming balls do not stay in the opening / closing member or the vicinity thereof immediately before the closing operation. As a result, it is configured such that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous while preventing the game performance from being deviated from the set ball design value.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the main game symbol stop symbol is a big hit symbol that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special variation big hit symbol (special game end, in this example, It is determined whether or not 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B "). If Yes in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1654 and shifts to step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probable variation big hit symbol which is a big hit symbol that will shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game is a stop symbol), and in this example・ In the case of 4B ′ ′, the processing shifts to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 in this example). Next, in step 1658, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on a main game time short flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Moreover, in the present example, the power support game state (time for opening of the winning opening for the ordinary electric role, time until opening, number of times for the opening, etc. and the ordinary electric role are operated only based on the end of the big hit) The probability that the combination of symbols to be played is displayed is varied to facilitate winning, which may be referred to as a time saving gaming state or an auxiliary gaming time shortening gaming state). The state is the main game symbol of the predetermined time until the change of the main game symbol of a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 100 times) is performed except during the probability change of the special symbol (in the case of the probability change game state) Until the end of the fluctuation) is limited. Furthermore, the number of gaming balls obtained in combination with the winnings on other winning openings is approximately the same as the number of gaming balls fired (the payout rate does not exceed 1) or less. Outdated ball design in the state (arrangement of each winning opening and operation content of the ordinary electric role thing, design of hitting probability etc of the auxiliary game pattern etc) is designed, the out ball performance of electric support game state is the outdated ball of big hit game It is designed to be no higher than performance. By configuring in this way, the game relating to the main game symbol and the game relating to the auxiliary game symbol become a master-slave relationship on the game, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time short flag, auxiliary game time short flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1560, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1552, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor to determine whether or not the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is continuously ON for a predetermined number of times (for example, the processing is timer interrupt processing) It is a process to be executed in the process, and it is intended to remove the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously turned on in a predetermined number of interrupts, and in the process of FIG. In the case of saying "predetermined number of times consecutively", it is the same meaning. If Yes in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1904 that an unauthorized radio wave has been detected, turns on an unauthorized radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor in step 1906 and determines whether the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1908 that the detection of the unauthorized radio wave has ended, turns off the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, and shifts to step 1912. Also in the case of No at step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

  Next, in step 1912, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1914 that the invalid magnetism has been detected, turns on the invalid magnetism detection flag, and shifts to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1918 that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and shifts to step 1922. Also in the case of No at step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door open sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If YES in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1924 that the door unit D18 is opened, turns on the door open flag, and shifts to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor in step 1926 to determine whether the input from the door open sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1928 that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door open flag, and shifts to step 1932. Also in the case of No at step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor, and determines whether the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If YES in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1934 that the gaming machine frame D is released, turns on the frame open flag, and shifts to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously OFF a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1938 that the gaming machine frame D is released, turns off the frame open flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1950). . Also in the case of No at step 1936, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1950).

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of an error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether an error occurrence condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the side of the sub control board S) relating to the occurrence of an error and error type information in step 1954 (control command of step 1990) Transmitted to the sub main control unit SM by transmission processing). Next, in step 1956, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the error release condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the side of the sub control board S) related to the information indicating that the error has been canceled (control command transmission processing of step 1990). Is transmitted to the side of the sub main control unit SM), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000). Also in the case of No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of emission control signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates the communication state (BIT0) and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1), the payout control board (sometimes referred to as award ball payout control board KH), Get error flag. The BIT0 indicating the communication state indicates "normal" if "00000000B", and indicates abnormality if "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating open circuit short circuit power supply abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, at step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets emission permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a release permission signal, and "00000000B" indicates an error (abnormality), and "00100000B" indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs the data to the output port, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1550-8). Here, for the output port, for example, BIT0 is 1-digit digit data, BIT1 is 2-digit digit data, BIT2 is 3-digit digit data, BIT3 is 4-digit digit data, BIT4 is 5-digit digit data, and BIT5 is a firing permission signal bit data , BIT 6 is configured as effect strobe bit data, and BIT 7 is configured as a security bit.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, at step 3502, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the gaming state temporary storage means MB to check the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1, and based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG. A plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected to the external relay terminal board G {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stopping, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Terminals for outputting gaming state information for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.), error information for outputting various error information detected by an opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Terminals for output, etc.} are provided. Then, as described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be able to output information to the hole computer HC from the plurality of output terminals by being connected to the hole computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal of the payout related information which is information output from the winning ball payout control substrate KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for the signal output from the main control board M. For example, a big hit output terminal (a plurality of big hit types are used to output a signal during a big hit when a big hit) ), The door opening output terminal which outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start opening winning terminal for outputting a signal when winning in the starting opening, balls for the prize ball tank KT The game related information that is important information for the game arcade operator, such as a ball out output terminal that outputs a signal while being out and a special symbol determined number output terminal that outputs a signal when a special symbol is stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, exhaustion of the output terminal of the important game related information can be avoided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the winning balls payout control board KH are configured to transmit the game related information and the payout related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH (the same is true for information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, an outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board A cable harness connects between G and the hall computer HC. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal plate G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the winning ball delivery control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It is not That is, an electrical signal (a signal of binary logic whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G is the relay After being replaced by a physical signal (a signal of binary logic whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal plate G to the hole computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact parts G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hole computer HC are conducted. When the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact point G2 returns to the open state, and the output terminal and the hole computer HC do not conduct. Therefore, on the hole computer HC side, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G by detecting the conductive period. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side, the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote control goto) which illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, one-way communication to the hall computer HC is possible by the mechanism using the relay coil while preventing the goto action, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, a pair of light emitting units One-way communication is also possible by the photosensor having the light receiving unit (for example, light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control substrate M and the prize ball payout control substrate KH is connected to the hole computer HC) It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading the

  However, since it is configured to be once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is on / off), one of the external relay terminal plates G with respect to the hall computer HC from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH. It is difficult to transmit complex information using input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of times of special symbol determination, It is customary to be configured to be able to transmit only the information to the effect that "1 variation of the special symbol has ended".

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The specific contents of the signal shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures in case of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and it is supplemented that they can be changed unless they greatly deviate from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is another signal; a preliminary signal to output that it is always off; from any timing after power-on {eg, (a) main control board side main process start of execution of FIG. 6}; It is a signal that always outputs an off signal. In addition, the said signal is a signal by which the presence or absence of use changes with every development model (complexity of game nature).

  Next, it is the signal of the IN / OUT staff; the number of game balls entered into all ball entrances (including the out-ports) disposed on the game area D30 (≒ the number of game balls hit into the game area D30 The signal to output) is the number of gaming balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, but may be the value of the ball number counter MJ10c) Is a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.2 seconds, and then outputs an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds, each time a predetermined number (10) of multiples is reached. When the output period overlaps, the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires.

  Next, a signal relating to IN / OUT; a signal to output the number of gaming balls paid out by the gaming machine; every time the number of gaming balls detected by the payout count sensor KE 10 s reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10) A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.2 seconds. When the output period overlaps, the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires. When the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and when the next output is on standby. Alternatively, the output may be started immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the above-mentioned predetermined period has not elapsed).

  Next, a signal of a unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that a glass door of a gaming machine (a frame on which a transparent plate is mounted, for example, a glass door D18) is open; door unit opening detection When the sensor D18s changes from off to on (for example, when the door open flag is turned on in step 1924) {* However, after changing from off to on, a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) is on The output timing may be continuous}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door open flag is on), a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, it is on → After turning off, the on signal may continue to be output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) has elapsed}.

  Next, a signal of a unit monitoring system; a signal indicating that a front frame of a gaming machine (a frame on which a game board is mounted, for example, a front frame unit D14) is open; a front frame unit When the release detection sensor D14s changes from off to on (for example, when the frame open flag is turned on in step 1934) {* However, after changing from off to on, a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) is on The output timing may be taken as the output timing}; during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame open flag is on), a signal that always outputs an on signal {* However, After changing from on to off, the on signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 second) has elapsed}.

  Next, a signal of a unit monitoring system; a signal that outputs that the tray frame of the gaming machine (a frame on which the ball tray is mounted and the bowl unit D17) is open; When D20 s changes from off to on {* However, after the change from off to on, the on state may be continued for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) as the output timing}; the detection sensor is on During the period, a signal which always outputs an on signal {* However, after changing from on to off, the on signal may be continuously output until a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) elapses}.

  Here, the signals of the three types of unit monitoring systems may be the same output signal according to the configuration between the units. In that case, the ON signal may be continuously output while any open detection sensor is ON. Further, the open detection sensor of each unit may be connected to the main control board M or may be connected to the prize ball payout control board KH (the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH Because bi-directional communication is possible).

  Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; targeting all symbol variations that trigger the opening of the special winning opening (attacker), the signal that outputs the number of symbol variations is the first main game symbol or the second main symbol When the fluctuation display of the game symbol is finished (for example, when the fluctuation flag is turned on → off in step 1424) {* Furthermore, after the fluctuation display is finished, the period when the symbol is fixedly displayed is finished ( Or when it is started, it may be output timing during the period)}; a signal that outputs an ON signal for 0.5 seconds. The output period is preferably configured to be shorter than the shortest period in which the variable display period of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol can be taken. In addition, the signal may be output during a period during which the main gaming symbol is fixed to change.

  Next, it is a signal of the symbol variation system; targeting a part of symbol variation (for example, symbol variation on the second main game side) that triggers the opening of the special winning opening (attacker), the number of symbol variations is output When the variation display of the second main gaming symbol is finished (for example, in the case of changing the on / off flag in step 1424 in the second main gaming symbol display processing) {* Note that the variation display The output timing may be used as the output timing when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed is ended (or when it is started, during the period) after the end of the symbol}; a signal for outputting an ON signal over 0.5 seconds It is. In addition, it is preferable that the output period is configured to be shorter than the shortest period in which the variable display period of the second main game symbol can be taken.

  Next, a signal of a big hit system; a signal outputting that it is during a period when the big winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during a game continuous operation device being operated); when a special game is started (for example, In step 1606, the item continuous action device operation flag is switched from OFF to ON, but the condition device operation flag may be switched from OFF to ON in step 1432) {*, before the start of the start demonstration period, During the period, the output timing may be after the end}; during the period when the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the feature continuous operation device operation flag or the condition device operation flag is on), the always on signal It is a signal to be output.

  Next, it is a signal of the big hit system; during the period when it is possible to open the big winning opening (attacker) (during continuous operation device operation), and the symbol variation which becomes the trigger to open the big winning opening (attacker) A signal that indicates that the time reduction game is in progress (duration change time reduction function is in operation) is; when a special game is started (for example, in the case of step 1606, when the bonus continuous operation device operation flag is turned on Or, if the condition device operation flag is switched from OFF to ON at step 1432, and the time reduction game is started (for example, if the main game time short flag is switched from OFF to ON at step 1708, and / or In step 1710, when the auxiliary game time short flag is turned from OFF to ON; during the period when the special game is being executed (for example, the bonus continuous operation device operation flag and / or the condition device operation During the period when the lag is on and during the period when the time shortening game is being executed (for example, during the period when the main game short flag and / or the auxiliary game short flag are on), always output the on signal It is a signal.

  Next, the other signals; outputting information for uniquely identifying the gaming machine {※ identification code of the gaming machine manufacturer (2 bytes), gaming machine type name identification code (64 bytes), main board CPU Unique signal (chip code register value = 4 bytes) in sequence} signal; power on {eg, (a) main control board side main processing start of Figure 6 arbitrary timing (eg, power supply) About 10 seconds after insertion); Serial transmission method (start-stop synchronization) that divides the specific information into 1 frame (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit) for each frame It is a signal to be output for a period until all the signals are output at 200 bps. In addition, it is preferable to make a signal format (rated voltage, rated current) different from other signal types.

  Next, it is a signal of IN / OUT system; a signal for outputting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out from the gaming machine; When the number of winning balls to be paid out is detected, the total number of winning balls (for example, the value of the winning ball counter MHc) reaches a multiple of a predetermined number (10); in 0.1 seconds After outputting the on signal throughout, the off signal is output for 0.1 second. When the output period overlaps, the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires. When the output timing is satisfied for the first time, the output may be started after a predetermined period (one interrupt = 0.004 seconds), and when the next output is on standby. Alternatively, the output may be started immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the above-mentioned predetermined period has not elapsed).

  Next, it is a security system signal; a signal indicating that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine is; with the RAM initialization operation, the power is turned on (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1002) This is a signal that outputs an ON signal over 0.2 seconds from a later arbitrary timing {after a predetermined period (one interruption = 0.004 seconds) after power-on). The output period may be the same as the output period in the IN / OUT system or the prize detection system.

  Next, a security system signal; a period other than a period during which the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (from the actuation of the special electric symbol to the elapse of a predetermined period after the actuation) {e.g. ) During the period during which the flag is off during the special winning opening effective period}, it outputs that it is detected entering the large winning opening (the attacker, for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) The signal to be displayed is large in the execution period of each round during the special game (including the waiting period for discharge and the period between rounds) {for example, the period during which the flag is off during the first (second) large winning a prize opening period} When entering the game ball is detected by the entry sensor of the winning opening (for example, when it is determined No in step 2305); after an on signal is output over 0.2 seconds, over 0.2 seconds Output an off signal It is a signal. When the output period overlaps, the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires.

  Next, it is a signal of security system; a signal that outputs that there is a magnet sensor error (a sensor that detects an approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism) is; when a signal from a magnet sensor is turned on ( For example, when the incorrect magnetic detection flag is set to be OFF → ON at step 1914 {* However, the output timing is satisfied when the flag turns ON again within a predetermined period (1 second) after the ON. Not}; a signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output period is configured so as not to overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period.

  Next, a signal representing a security system; a signal indicating that a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave) is a signal that is output; when a signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on (for example, If the unauthorized radio wave detection flag is set to be OFF → ON at step 1904 {* However, the output timing is not satisfied when it is turned ON again within a predetermined period (1 second) after the ON. A signal that outputs an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output period is configured so as not to overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period.

  Next, a security system signal; a signal that outputs that a radio wave sensor error (a sensor that senses a radio wave detects an abnormal radio wave) on the payout control board side (for example, winning ball payout control board KH) If the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the payout control substrate side is turned on (for example, when the information related to the radio wave detection error from the prize ball payout control substrate KH is confirmed in step 3215) {* However If the signal is turned on again within a predetermined period (1 second) after the signal is turned on, the output timing is not satisfied.}; This is a signal for outputting an on signal for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output period can not overlap due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period. Further, a command to the effect that the signal from the radio wave sensor is turned on is transmitted from the payout control substrate (for example, winning ball payout control substrate KH) side to the main control substrate (for example, main control substrate M) side, The main control board that has received the command may be configured to output a signal.

  Next, it is a security system signal; illegal entry into each winning opening targeted for winning a prize (for example, entering a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time, the ball detecting sensor continues ON for a predetermined time or more The number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the special game is equal to or more than a predetermined number determined for each execution mode of the special game, the number of balls entering the number exceeding the design value in a certain ball entry valid period, etc.) The signals that output that; After detecting one entering ball with a switch for detecting entering ball into each winning opening, the event in which one entering ball is detected again within a period determined for each winning opening is total and predetermined When it occurs more than the number of times, and 3. A switch for detecting entry into each winning opening, when the entry is continuously detected over a predetermined period, and If the number of balls detected by the ball entry sensor to the big winning opening exceeds a specified number (for example, 160) during the period during the execution of a special game (for example, 16 round big hits), When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied; a signal which outputs an on signal over 0.2 seconds and then outputs an off signal over 0.2 seconds. When the output period overlaps, the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires. In the case of 3, it is preferable to make the prescribed number different according to the content of the special game (example 1: when the maximum round number is 10 rounds, the prescribed number = 100). Example 2: When the big winning opening only performs short opening, the above 3 is not applied).

  Next, it is a security system signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine, and an illegal act detectable by the gaming machine {e.g. During the period when it can be opened (during the operation of the special motorized symbol), a predetermined number (five) or more of balls entering the big winning opening (attacker) are detected or the ordinary motorized symbol can not be opened During the period, a predetermined number (five) or more of balls entering the ordinary motorized role were detected. Radio wave sensor error ... A sensor that senses radio waves detects abnormal radio waves, or the sensor is not connected. Board switch error ... The proximity sensor provided on the game board detects the approach of an object. Magnet sensor error: a sensor that detects an approach of a magnet detects an abnormal magnetism, or a signal that outputs that the sensor is not connected, etc. Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and At the time of detection of the above-mentioned fraudulent act (illegal prize 1, radio wave sensor error), and 3. When any of 1 to 3 is satisfied at the time of detection of the fraudulent action (board surface switch error, magnet sensor error); in the case of 1, an ON signal is output over a first period (30 seconds) In the case of 2, the ON signal is output over the second period (30 seconds), and in the case of 3, the ON signal is output over the third period (during detection of each fraud). It is a signal. In addition, when an output period overlaps, all the output periods are overlapped and it is comprised so that the output of an ON signal may be maintained until all the output periods expire. Further, the output period may be different between the case of 1 and the case of 2

  Next, it is a security system signal; that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine, and an illegal operation detectable by the gaming machine {e.g. abnormal winning error ... large winning opening (attacker) During the period when it is possible to open the door (when the special motorized symbol is activated), during the period when the ordinary motorized symbol can not be opened (a predetermined period immediately after the closing) During the period except for) normally detected the ball entering the motorized role, etc. Magnet sensor error: A sensor that senses the proximity of the magnet detects abnormal magnetism, etc. Ejection error ... Number of balls detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering each ball entry target to be awarded balls, and the ball for confirming ball entering downstream of the switch (especially Although not shown, it is a switch through which the game ball entered into each ball entry passes and is detected by one or more switches different from the switch for detecting the ball entry into each ball entry) The signal that outputs that the difference with the entered ball number exceeds a predetermined number (100), etc. is performed; Arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 1002), and At the time of detection of the fraudulent action (abnormal winning error, magnet sensor error), and 3. At the time of detection of the cheating (discharge error); in the case of 1 and 2, after an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, an OFF signal is output for 0.2 seconds; In this case, it is a signal that outputs an on signal until the next time 1 is satisfied. When the output period is overlapped (other than the above 3), the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires. Also, even in the output period according to 1, 2, the output of the ON signal is maintained at the time when the output timing according to 3 comes, and during the output period according to 3, the output according to 1, 2 Even when the timing is reached, the output of the on signal is maintained.

  In addition, the signal of the security system which is not illustrated; in the gaming machine provided with settings such as the gaming machine in which the sixth embodiment to be described later, the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment are combined, the setting is being changed or An outer end signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output to the outside of the gaming machine. More specifically, signals relating to the start of the setting change mode, signals relating to the end of the setting change mode, signals relating to the start of the setting display mode, signals relating to the end of the setting display mode, etc. can be output to the outside of the gaming machine You may configure it.

  Next, it is a signal of a prize detection system; a signal for outputting the number of times of entering the ball to each starting opening is targeted at all of the starting openings pertaining to the symbol variation that triggers opening of the special winning opening (attacker); (1) When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering the main game starting port, and the second main game starting port (one on which the electric role is mounted, one for the electric role When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering one) one is not loaded (for example, when the first main game start flag is turned from OFF to ON at step 2206, Or, in step 2226, the second main game start flag is turned off → on); a signal which outputs an on signal for 0.1 seconds and then outputs an off signal for 0.1 seconds. When the output period overlaps, the next output is waited until the output period of the currently output one signal expires. In addition, when the illegal entry of the ball into the second main game start opening (in which the electric combination is mounted) is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the entry of the ball.

  Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes error control processing at the time of abnormality detection described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process described later with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a winning balls payout control process (at the time of winning balls payout start / motor drive start) described later. Next, at step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a winning ball payout control process (at the time of motor driving end / at the time of winning ball payout end) described later. Next, at step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a winning ball payout control process (during motor drive execution) described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control unit) KH executes a motor error process, which will be described later, and shifts to step 4100.

  Here, with reference to the block diagram on the right in the figure, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the winning ball payout control board KH controls transmission / reception of commands / information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, etc. Transmission / reception control means 3100 for controlling the error, error control means 3200 for executing error control related to the payout etc. on the prize ball payout control board KH side, a predetermined number of game balls upon receiving the prize ball payout command or the rental ball command And a payout control unit 3300 for executing the payout processing of Each means will be described in detail below.

  First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits the information to the main control board M and the card unit R, and the reception control means 3110 which controls the reception control of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R. And transmission control means 3120 for managing the control.

  Here, the reception control unit 3110 further includes a main side reception control unit 3111 which controls the reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. And the main side reception control means 3111 further has a main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. The transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 in which error information relating to the payout operation for sending to the main control board M side is temporarily stored.

  Next, the error control means 3200 detects an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control substrate KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Error control means 3230 in charge of error control at the time of error control, error control means 3240 in charge of error detection at the time of error detection when the discharge abnormality is detected, and error when ball path abnormality is detected Error control means 3250 at the time of ball path abnormality detection which controls the control, a discharge motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 which controls the error control at the time of the discharge motor abnormality is detected, a fatal abnormality related to the winning ball discharge operation is detected When a stoppage error is detected and an error control means 3270 responsible for error control and a ball biting error of the winning ball dispensing unit KE10 occur. A ball bit error generation timer 3200t managing a period of the error notification, and a non-passage error generation timer 3200t2 managing a period of the error notification when the non-passage error of the payout count sensor KE 10s occurs There is. Here, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 further includes a fraud payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times that the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the error control means 3240 at the time of payout abnormality detection further includes an excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of the payout balls which are excessive. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control unit 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control unit 3251 that executes a time extension process of the payout interval relating to the award ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control unit 3260 further includes a retry operation control unit 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE 10 m.

  Next, the payout control unit 3300 has a payout processing related information temporary storage unit 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout processing. Here, the payout processing related information temporary storage unit 3310 is a payout status flag temporary storage unit 3311 for temporarily storing the status related to the payout (for example, whether or not the payout is in progress and whether or not the payout abnormality has occurred). And, at the time of payout processing, the payout counter 3312 in which the number of gaming balls to be paid out is set, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven of the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m Excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator during the operation, and a predetermined time (ball passage waiting) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation) It is paid out by the ball passing wait timer 3315 for clocking time and motor stop time) and the unit payout operation. A unit payout counter 3317 which game balls speed is set can further have. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but the invention is not limited thereto. It is also possible to configure using a timer. Each subroutine will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of an error detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, at step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes error control processing at the time of detection of malfunction of the dispensing motor operation described later. Next, at step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection described later. Next, at step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality which will be described later. Next, at step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes error control processing at the time of payout motor abnormality detection described later. Next, at step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection described later, and shifts to the next process (the award ball payout related information transmitting / receiving process of step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a payout motor operation abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality to be described later is detected, and to indicate the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality becomes a threshold or more. To turn it on. First, at step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on or not. Here, as described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the gaming ball with the payout count sensor KE10s under a situation where the prize ball payout processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side is not executed. It is a flag that is turned on in the case where the payout motor operation is abnormal. In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, at step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 increments (increments) the counter value of the fraud payout accumulation counter 3231 by one. Next, at step 4114, the error control means 3230 at the time of detection of malfunction of the dispensing motor refers to the counter value of the fraud payout accumulation counter 3231 and determines whether the count value is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 25). Do. In the case of Yes in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4115, and proceeds to step 4116. Also in the case of No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

  Next, at step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether the payout motor operation error flag is on or not. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation error detection error control unit 3230 sets a payout motor operation error in the payout related error information temporary storage unit 3121 as the payout related error information, and the next process ( The processing proceeds to the error control processing at the time of dispensing abnormality detection in step 4120). Also in the case of No in step 4116, the processing proceeds to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection in step 4120).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a payout abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of the present process is to count an excessive number of game balls paid out due to the abnormality when a payout abnormality to be described later is detected, and when the count number is equal to or more than a threshold, It is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error. First, at step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the payout abnormality detection flag is on or not. Here, as described later, the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and an excessive payout of the game balls is detected (payout) It is a flag that turns on (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the dispensing abnormality detection error control means 3240 accesses the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the dispensing abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the error control at dispensing error detection means 3240 acquires the number of over-payments temporarily stored in the payment processing related information temporary storage means 3310, and adds the number of over-payments to the over-payment cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, at step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excessive payout accumulation counter 3241 and determines whether the count value is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 25). If the result of step 4124 is YES, then in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excess payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4126. Even when the result of the step 4121 or the step 4124 is No, the process proceeds to the step 4126. In addition, although the said excessive payout error (state which the excessive payout error flag is on) is comprised so that it may eliminate only by the reactivation of a power supply, this example is an example to the last, It is not limited to this. For example, the error may be eliminated by pressing an error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

  Next, at step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the over payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the error control at the time of payout abnormality detection means 3240 sets an excess payout error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as the payout related error information, and the next processing (step 4140). Move to error control processing at the time of ball route abnormality detection). Also in the case of No at step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detecting a spherical path abnormality at step 4140).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is (1) when the ball path abnormality described later is detected, (1) game ball is not present in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE 10 (ball out) abnormality occurred In addition to investigating whether a game ball having a small amount of game balls present in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball shortage) has occurred or not, and detecting an abnormality corresponding to the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality. , To turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error. (2) When an abnormality corresponding to a ball breakage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball breakage abnormality or the ball deficiency abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. To create First, at step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of the predetermined number of dispensing operations (unit dispensing operations) scheduled on the prize ball dispensing control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. It is a flag that is turned on when a situation where the payout is less than a predetermined number is scheduled to be detected under the situation where it is determined that the payment is being made. If Yes in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4142 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, at step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the generation condition of the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited. For example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10. In the example where it is not possible to detect the presence of the game ball, there is an example where the ball breakage abnormality occurs, the ball flow path right above the sprocket KE10p in the winning ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths In each of the existences, a detection sensor of the game ball is provided, and when any of the detection sensors can not detect the presence of the game ball, an example in which the ball shortage abnormality occurs is exemplified. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, at step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets a ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 and proceeds to step 4151. Also in the case of No in step 4141 or step 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

  Next, at step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. If Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the cancellation condition of the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the condition for eliminating the ball breakage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is solved when the above-mentioned occurrence condition of the ball breakage abnormality or the ball deficiency abnormality becomes unfulfilled Can be mentioned. If Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, at step 4155, the dispensing interval extension control means 3251 excites the excitation timing during normal operation (for example, 3 ms × 8 steps = excitation so as to perform a predetermined number of dispensing operations at one speed in 24 ms) or a ball A passing waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of discharge motor abnormality detection in step 4170). On the other hand, if No in step 4152, in step 4156 the dispensing interval extension control means 3251 causes the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time to relatively slow the dispensing speed of one ball compared to that in the normal operation. It changes, and it transfers to the following process (error control processing at the time of the delivery motor abnormality detection of step 4170). Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 4151, the processing shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of discharge motor abnormality detection in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited. For example, after performing the dispensing operation for one ball at one speed in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) An example may be provided in which a time is provided and the excitation timing is changed so that the dispensing operation is performed again at 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Moreover, it does not specifically limit also to the said ball passage waiting time to change (for example, it changes from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a payout motor abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality to be described later is detected, and to retry operation of the payout motor (stepper motor KE 10 m in the prize ball payout unit KE 10). It is to execute switching control processing. First, at step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on or not. Here, as described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive does not operate normally due to an external factor such as a ball. In the case of Yes in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4172. Next, at step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, at step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets a payout motor error in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 as the payout-related error information. Then, at step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Also in the case of No at step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation to a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error described later, and providing a motor error elimination waiting time within the predetermined time.

  Next, at step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. If YES in step 4177, the retry operation control unit 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4178, and determines whether the retry operation execution permission flag is ON. If YES in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4179. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps at the time of retry operation as a step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps in the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example in which the number is equal to the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE 10 ms in the retry operation described later can be given. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 is configured to switch the excitation method (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) for retry operation related to the stepping motor operation and the switching speed for one step for retry operation (for example, Set 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation executing flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the dispensing state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of dispensing stop abnormality detection of step 4190). Do. Incidentally, also in the case of No at step 4177 or step 4178, the processing shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of withdrawal required stop abnormality detection of step 4190).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of the required payment stop abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error and detect the fatality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout processing when a fatal abnormality relating to the continuation of the prize ball payout processing is detected. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormality relating to the continuation of the winning balls payout processing means the communication abnormality between the main control board M and the winning balls payout control board KH, the communication abnormality between the card unit R and the winning balls payout control board KH, the payout A sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like may be mentioned. First, in step 4191-1, the error control unit 3270 at the time of the required-dispensing stop abnormality detection refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and determines whether the dispensing motor error flag is switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection sets an error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and starts it. Control goes to step 4192-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection needs reference to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4 the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

  Next, at step 4192-1, the error control unit 3270 for error detection at the time of withdrawal required abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and determines whether the switch non-passing error detection flag is switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal stoppage abnormality detection sets an error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and starts it. It transfers to step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection needs reference to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop detection of an error flag turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, step 4193-1. Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

  Next, at step 4193-1, the error control unit 3270 at the time of the required-dispensing stop abnormality detection determines whether the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection flag relating to an error including the pressing of the error release switch KH3a in the error release condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, the payout motor error flag, the switch non-pass error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

  Next, at step 4194-1, the error control unit 3270 at the time of the required-dispensing stop abnormality detection determines whether or not the communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control unit 3270 at the time of payment required stop abnormality detection turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and shifts to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop error detection means turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and goes to step 4195-1. Transition.

  Next, at step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection detects the sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE 10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or more). It is determined whether or not there is a detection. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stoppage error detection means turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop abnormality detection means turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221; Move to 1.

  Next, at step 4196-1, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop abnormality detection means determines whether or not the tray (upper plate) full abnormality is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control unit 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop abnormality detection means turns on the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the error control unit 3270 at the time of detection of a required dispensing failure is sent to the sub control board S side and the pan full command is sent, and the process proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4196-1, at step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop abnormality detection means turns off the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, at step 4196-5, the error control unit 3270 at the time of detection of a required dispensing failure is transmitted to the sub control board S side, and the processing is shifted to step 4197-1.

  Next, at step 4197-1, the error control unit 3270 at the time of detection of a required payment suspension abnormality determines whether or not the connection abnormality of the card unit R is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal required stop abnormality detection means turns on the CR unit non-connection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and step 4198-1. Transition to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of payment required stop abnormality detection turns off the CR unit non-connection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and step 4198. Move to -1.

  Next, at step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and a part of the errors relating to the withdrawal operation stop (for example, over payout error, prize ball device It is determined whether all flags related to error, payout motor operation error, payout operation incomplete game ball detection, payout motor error, switch non-passing error) are off.

  In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of withdrawal stop abnormality detection refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, the tray full size It is determined whether all error flags of the error flag and the CR unit non-connection error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the required dispensing suspension error detection error control means 3270 executes the normal dispensing operation in the dispensing control means 3300 (that is, the dispensing operation in step 4198-4 described later) Is suspended, the relevant payout operation is resumed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 4200). On the other hand, if No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the required dispensing stop error detection error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the dispensing operation in the dispensing control means 3300 and Processing (processing of step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a winning ball payout related information receiving process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is the process of receiving information from the main control board M (and the process of setting the number of balls to be paid out with it), and the second half of the flow is the process of transmitting information to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain from the information reception process from the main control board M in the first half (and the process of setting the number of award balls to accompany), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 is a payout state flag temporary storage means Referring to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "in-progress ball payout flag" refers to the case where the payout ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in drive operation, or the ball passing waiting time, motor rest time) Is a flag that is turned on). If Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. If Yes in step 4210, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4215, and turns on the award ball payout start permission flag. Next, at step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and the prize balls are paid out. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). Above, the set processing of the number of winning balls paid out when the normal winning balls payout processing is executed is ended. Also in the case of No in step 4205 and step 4210, the processing shifts to the next processing (step 4225).

  Next, the information transmission process to the main control board M will be described. First, at step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout related error transmission flag is on. Determine Here, the “delivery related error transmission flag” refers to the case where the above-mentioned delivery related error {dispense motor operation error, overdelivery error, out-of-ball error, out-of-ball error, dispensing motor error, withdrawal stop error} occurs. , And the flag is turned off after the error notification is made on the main control board M side. If Yes in step 4225, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4230. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 sends out the payout related error information set in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and shifts to the next processing (step 4240). Also in the case of No in step 4225, the processing shifts to the next processing (step 4240).

  Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the award ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout has been completed. If Yes in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4245, and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the information to the effect that the award ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {the award ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start)・ At the time of motor drive start)). Incidentally, also in the case of No at step 4240, the processing proceeds to the next processing {the award ball payout control processing (at the time of award ball payout start / motor drive start) of step 4300}. Above, the winning ball payout completion information transmission process is ended.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a winning ball payout control process (a winning ball payout start / motor drive start) according to a subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. Here, the process is a process prior to the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of motor drive steps etc. is received in response to the reception of the award ball payout command from the main control board M side. It is a process to set. First, in step 4305, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the award ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 43) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in steps 4310 and 4315 to turn on the prize ball payout flag and turn off the prize ball payout start permission flag. Do.

  Next, at step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, three). In the case of Yes in step 4320, the payout control unit 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 so as to be dispensed by a predetermined number in step 4325, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, if No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. Transition to 4332.

  Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation (that is, the number of payouts scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position identification counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position at the time of dispensing standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches the excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) for the normal operation and the one-step switching speed (for example, 3 ms) for the normal operation. Set). Next, in step 4338, the payout control unit 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time according to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and turns off the retry operation in progress flag. Here, the retry operation in progress flag is a flag that is turned on while the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation is being performed as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the following processing {the winning ball payout control processing of step 4400 (at the motor drive end / prize) At the end of ball dispensing)).

  On the other hand, if No in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4345, and determines whether the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the processing proceeds to the next processing {presence ball payout control processing at the time of step 4400 (at the time of motor drive termination · at the termination of prize ball payout)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4345, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 at step 4350, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the award ball payout continuation flag is after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation, and when the ball passage waiting time and the motor pause time have elapsed, the prize ball payout operation should be continued ( A detailed condition is a flag that is turned on). In the case of Yes in step 4350, the processing proceeds to the next processing {the winning balls payout control processing (at the time of motor driving end · winning balls payout end) of step 4400}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 at step 4352 and turns off the award ball payout continuation flag. Then, at step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317 and determines whether or not the counter value is more than 0 (that is, all the expected number of payouts due to the current unit payout operation have not been paid out). Or not). If YES in step 4354, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4356, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4354, the process moves to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the award ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of motor drive steps etc. is executed again without receiving the award ball payout command from the main control board M as a trigger. When it is determined that all of the planned dispensing number due to the unit dispensing operation this time have not been dispensed, an occurrence of an abnormality that causes a ball out error or a ball out error is detected.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a winning ball payout control process (at the time of motor driving end, at the time of winning ball payout end) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. Here, the process is an end process when drive termination of all motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) is executed or all scheduled prize balls are dispensed. . Here, the motor drive end process is executed in steps 4402 to 4419, the game ball detection process is executed in steps 4420 to 4425, and the award ball payout end process is performed in steps 4440 to 4462.

  First, motor drive end processing will be described. First, at step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether the prize ball payout flag is on or not. Do. If YES in step 4402, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4405, and determines whether the motor driving flag is on. If Yes in step 4405, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 in step 4410, and determines whether the counter value is 0, ie, the step of FIG. It is determined whether all the number of steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. If Yes in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4415, and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, at step 4416, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether the retry operation execution flag is on or not. If Yes in step 4416, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4417, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and shifts to step 4418. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the stepping motor in the inactive state (in this example, after the excitation output is lowered, the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j) is continuously excited). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Also in the case of No in step 4405 or step 4410, the processing shifts to step 4420. This is the end of the motor drive termination process.

  Next, the game ball detection process will be described. First, at step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE 10s. In the case of Yes in step 4420, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts one from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317 in step 4422. Next, in step 4425, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts one from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. Also in the case of No in step 4420, the processing shifts to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time a ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of game balls are detected. If yes, it may be configured to be able to subtract the value for the number of ball entry. This is the end of the game ball detection process.

  Next, the prize ball payout end processing will be described. First, at step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether the count value is 0 or less. If YES in step 4430, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4431 to determine whether the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 4431 (that is, in the case where the number of gaming balls for the number of gaming balls related to the payout is detected by the sensor although the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), The payout control means 3300 turns on the payout incomplete game ball detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4431, the processing shifts to step 4435.

  Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the in-progress ball payout flag and turn on the win ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether the count value is less than zero. If Yes in step 4441, the payout control unit 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4442. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and, based on the count value, the number of overpayments (for example, if the counter value is “−3”, the number of overpayments is “3”) Is temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage unit 3310, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {the winning ball payout control processing (at the time of motor driving execution) of step 4500}. Incidentally, also in the case of No at Step 4441 (ie, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined payout number is normally dispensed), the following process {the prize ball payout control process of the step 4500 is carried out. (During motor drive execution)}. In this example, detection of excess payout is performed when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes equal to or less than 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after driving of the motor related to payout is completed Detection of excessive payout (the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0 when a predetermined time (for example, a sufficient detection standby time until the gaming ball paid out by the drive is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed It may be configured to be able to execute determination of whether or not it is (ie, excessive payout means an unexpected situation in which the number of gaming balls exceeding the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out has been paid out The fact that this unexpected situation occurred, which is extremely difficult to occur in design, means that something has happened in any of the dispensing mechanisms, or there is a fraudulent act while the dispensing operation is in progress. Done Likely it means the high thing).

  On the other hand, if No in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 in step 4445, and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passing error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4446 (In this example, after the end of the payout operation, the predetermined one is determined. Even if the ball passage wait time has passed, if no game balls for the number of game balls relating to the payout operation are detected, it is immediately determined that a switch non-pass error has occurred. The present invention is not limited, and it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passing error has occurred when the event occurs a plurality of times).

  Next, in step 4447, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. If YES in step 4447, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4450, turns on the winning ball payout continuation flag, and performs the following processing {the winning ball payout control processing of step 4500 ((4) Move to)). On the other hand, if No in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 in step 4460 and step 4462 to turn off the retry operation execution standby flag and also sets the retry operation execution permission flag. The processing is turned on, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {prize ball payout control processing (at the time of motor drive execution) of step 4500}. Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 4445, the processing shifts to the next processing {the winning ball payout control processing (at the time of motor driving execution) of step 2400}.

  Here, in the case of No at Step 4402 (ie, when the prize ball payout processing is not being executed), at Step 4470, whether or not the payout control means 3300 receives the game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s. Determine If YES in step 4470, the payout control unit 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4472 to perform the following processing {the winning ball payout control processing of step 4500 ((4) Move to)). Also in the case of No at step 4470, the processing proceeds to the next processing {the winning ball payout control processing (at the time of motor driving execution) of step 4500}.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a winning ball payout control process (during motor drive execution) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the processing is processing for actually executing motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous processing (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag region of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag which is turned on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 44), and corresponds to the predetermined step counter number. It is a flag that is turned off when all the excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 in step 4510. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increment by 1) the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, at step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

  Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE 10 ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE 10 ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (a phenomenon of step out due to a ball or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence or absence of a detection signal from the rotor position check sensor KE 10 ms in step 4550. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550, whether the rotor is not rotating properly, that is, whether a motor error has occurred. If YES in step 4555, the error control unit 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4560, and shifts to the next processing (motor error processing in step 4600). Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next processing (motor error processing in step 4600), and in the case of No in step 4555, the error control means 3200 stores an error flag temporary memory in step 4565. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next processing (motor error processing in step 4600).

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the paused state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 46, after detecting whether or not the motor is present at a predetermined rotation position at a predetermined detection timing, if the motor is not present at the predetermined rotation position, a step out etc. It is determined that the motor position abnormality flag is turned on. If Yes in step 4605, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4610, and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, at step 4615, the payout control unit 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control unit 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313, and shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the motor error does not execute the set number of steps this time, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the pause state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 45). See 4415). Also in the case of No in step 4605, the processing shifts to the next processing (error detection processing at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100).

  Next, control processing executed on the side of sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 48 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 5D is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear) When information is received → RAM on the side of the sub control board S is initialized, and various information commands are received → presentation related information at the time of power interruption is reset to the RAM on the side of the sub control board S). Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (f), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM, is repeatedly executed. Here, when (f) is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S first executes an instruction image display control process described later in step 2100-1, as shown in the process (f) of FIG. Do. Next, in step 2400-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a suspension information management process described later. Next, in step 2700-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. Do.

  As described above, the CPU SC of the sub main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub main routine (S2100-1 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5E is a process at the time of an interrupt of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. In the example, it is the processing flow (e) when it is connected to the NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command input port from the main control board M (described above Check the input port of the data signal line). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of an instruction image display control process according to the subroutine of step 2100-1 in FIG. First, in step 2102-1, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2102-1, in step 2104-1, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2104-1, the process proceeds to step 2108-1. On the other hand, if No in step 2102-1 or step 2104-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S outputs a left hitting instruction counter HSc (in the case where the right hitting is executed, the ball entry port is easy to enter). When the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the left hitting is not performed in the situation where the game should proceed with the left hitting, and the left hitting indication image is determined. The counter value of the display) is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to step 2116-1.

  Next, in step 2108-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an auxiliary game start opening ball entry command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108-1, in step 2110-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the left hitting instruction counter HSc. Next, in step 2112-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left-handed instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2112-1, in step 2114-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display a left hitting instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2115-1, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S clears the counter value of the left hitting instruction counter HSc to zero, and shifts to the processing of step 2116-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2108-1 or step 2112-1, the processing shifts to the processing in step 2116-1. Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the top row is an image diagram of the left hitting instruction image. The left strike instruction image is an image prompting the player to execute the left strike displayed on the effect display device SG, which is a game situation where the left strike should be executed, the special game is not executed and the non-time is shortened When it is determined in the gaming state that a right hit is being executed (when three balls are hit in the auxiliary game start port H10), a left hit instruction image is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds). When the player enters the auxiliary game start port H10, 1 is added to the counter value of the left hitting instruction counter HSc, but when entering the right general winning opening P20, the counter value of the left hitting instruction counter HSc increases or decreases. It is configured not to.

  Next, in step 2116-1, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not a special game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2116-1, the process proceeds to the processing of step 2122-1. On the other hand, if No in step 2116-1, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines in step 2118-1 whether the current gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2118-1, in step 2120-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S measures entering of the ball into the ball entry port that is easy to enter when the right strike instruction MSc is executed. It is a counter, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the right hitting is not executed in the situation where the game should proceed with the right hitting, and the right hitting indication image is displayed) The counter value is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400-1). On the other hand, if the result of the step 2118-1 is NO, the process proceeds to the step 2122-1.

  Next, in step 2122-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first main game start opening ball entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2122-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the right strike instruction counter MSc in step 2124-1. Next, in step 2126-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the right-handed instruction counter value has reached a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2126-1, in step 2128-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display a right-handed instruction image for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Next, in step 2129-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the counter value of the right strike instruction counter MSc to zero, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2400-1). Also in the case of No in steps 2122-1 and 2126-1, the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2400-1). Here, the lower right of the figure is a display image diagram of the instruction image, and the second row is an image diagram of a right-handed instruction image. The right strike instruction image is an image prompting the player to execute the right strike displayed on the effect display device SG, which is the state of the game where the right strike should be executed. When it is determined that a left hit is being executed (three balls entered in the first main game start opening A10), a right hit instruction image is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds). In addition, the lowermost stage is an image diagram of a right-handed image during time saving, and in the time-saving gaming state, the game proceeds with right-handing, so in the time-saving gaming state the right-handed image continues to be displayed during time saving (It will continue to be displayed even while special games are running). In addition, the display area on the effect display device SG of the time-shortening right-handed image and the right-handed instruction image is configured not to overlap, and the size of the display area is more right-handed than the time-shortened right-handed image (The left hitting instruction and the right hitting instruction image are displayed in a relatively large display area because they are for the purpose of warning).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the game ball is passing the auxiliary game start port H10 when the game ball passes the auxiliary game start port H10, the sub control board S The CPUSC is configured to count the number of times of passage and to display a left-handed instruction image (for example, displayed as “left-handed”) when the number of times of passage reaches a predetermined value (three balls in this example). . In addition, for example, when the special game is not being executed and the player is hitting the non-time shortening gaming state right, when the gaming ball passes the right general winning opening P20, the CPUSC of the sub control board S counts the number of passes. In addition, it is configured not to display a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image “right-handed”). Also, for example, when the special game or time shortening game state is left hitting, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the CPUSC of the sub control board S counts the number of times of ball entry When the number of hits reaches a predetermined value (three balls in this example), a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image “right-handed”) is displayed. In the present embodiment, a left-handed instruction image (for example, an image “left-handed”) or a right-handed instruction image (for example, an image “right-handed”) may be referred to as a shooting instruction effect. By configuring in this way, when the player has accidentally executed a right strike in a game situation where a left strike should be executed (a special game is not being executed and a non-time shortening gaming state), an assistance is provided. The game ball having passed through the game start opening H10 enters the right general winning combination port P20, so that the count value of the right-handed instruction counter MSc is increased by 2 by the firing of one game ball, and even to the unintended right-handed Regardless of this, it is possible to prevent the display related to the alerting at an unintended frequency where the left-handed pointing image is frequently displayed. In the present example, the left hitting indication image can be displayed whenever the left hitting counter value reaches a multiple of a predetermined value (3 in this example) {a right hitting counter value is a predetermined value (3 in this example) Right-handed indication image can be displayed each time a multiple of) is reached, but not limited to this, when the left-handed counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example), left-handed Display the instruction image {Display the right-handed instruction image when the right-handed counter value reaches a predetermined value (3 in this example)}, twice or three times the predetermined value (3 in this example) When the counter value is reached, a left hit instruction image (right hit instruction image) may not be displayed anew. Further, although the left hitting instruction image (right hitting instruction image) is configured to be erased in a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) from the display start, the present invention is not limited thereto. When it is determined that a left hit (right hit) has been performed after the) is displayed (for example, if it is determined that a left hit has been executed, if the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, Etc. When it is determined that a right hit has been performed, a game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10, etc.) or a game state is shifted, a left hit instruction image (right hit instruction (Image) may be deleted.

  Here, in the situation where the "left-handed instruction image" is to be displayed, it is considered that the batting balls are dispersedly emitted to both the right side area and the left side area and the game ball accidentally passes through the auxiliary game start port H10. Be For this reason, when winning in the first main game starting opening A10 and the left general winning opening P10 disposed on the left side of the game area within a predetermined period, in other words, the game is executed by left hitting within the predetermined period If it can be determined, the predetermined value is changed (subtracted) or initialized to extend the period until the left hit instruction image is notified or to change the notification method (notification mode) (for example, Processing such as not performing voice notification or changing to a warning with a small display may be performed. The same process may be performed when displaying the "right-handed instruction image", but it is extremely difficult for the player to perform left-handling in the gaming state where the "right-handed instruction image" can be displayed. In the case of a specification that gives a profit, in the case of such a specification, when displaying a "right-handed instruction image", processing for extending the period until notification or changing the notification method (notification mode) It is desirable not to

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of pending information management processing according to the subroutine of step 2400-1 in FIG. First, at step 2402-1, has the CPUSC of the secondary control board S received from the main control board M side a command relating to a new hold occurrence (hold information pertaining to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol)? It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2402-1, in step 2404-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a drawing hold counter value (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum for the second main game) Add 1 to 4). Next, in step 2406-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the suspension information (random number value, etc.) transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub control board S; Move to 1.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2402-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2410-1. In the case of Yes in step 2410-1, in step 2412-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the coating reservation counter value. Next, in step 2414-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the suspension information (such as a random value) related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub control substrate S and shifts the remaining suspension information. . Next, in step 2416-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2418-1. Also in the case of No at step 2410-1, the process proceeds to step 2418.

  Next, in step 2418-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the pending display image to be lit and displayed on the effect display device SG in the same number as the drawing pending counter value, and the next process (step 27001). Transition to processing).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 27001 in FIG. First, in step 2702-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2702-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2704-1. Next, in step 2706-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table. , Stop symbol of decorative symbol {For example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, if it is a missing symbol such as "7 · 7 · 7", "1 · 3 · · · 5) and so on and the change mode are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S.

  Next, in step 2712-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2800). Also in the case of No in step 2702-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. First, in step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2802, at step 2804, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2809, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM 21t, and shifts to step 2810. Also in the case of No at step 2802, the process proceeds to step 2810.

  Next, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2810, in step 2811, the CPUSC of the sub control board S checks the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the drawing variation time management timer SM 21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the variation of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG in step 2814 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, sub sub control Transmitted to the part SS side, and the process proceeds to step 2832.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2812 is No, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is based on the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S in step 2816. It is determined whether stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG in step 2818 (display command transmission control of step 2999) In the process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process shifts to step 2832.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2816, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub control board S generates a notice image or a warning image based on the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM 21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the notice display and the image display related to the reach image on the effect display device SG in step 2826 (display command transmission control processing of step 2999). And transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2832. Also in the case of No at step 2824, the process proceeds to step 2832.

  Next, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main gaming symbol has been stopped (for example, the main control substrate M receives information indicating that the main gaming symbol is being stopped. To determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol in the effect display device SG in step 2834 (sub-sub in display command transmission control processing of step 2999) Transmitted to the control unit SS). Next, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2838, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol variation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900). Also in the case of No at step 2810 or step 2832, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900).

  Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2904, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S turns on the special game flag. Next, in step 2914, the CPU SC of the sub control board S displays a big hit start display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit), and proceeds to step 2920. Also in the case of No in step 2902, the processing shifts to step 2920.

  Next, in step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds, the number of wins and the number of prize balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side. (A command may be appropriately executed as needed based on the type of game or the type of jackpot, etc.) Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes special game effect display control processing described later. Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying a big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2929, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the ball entry number counter NKc (a counter for measuring the ball entry number to the right general winning opening P20 in the special game) to zero. Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No in step 2904 or step 2926, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of special game effect presentation control processing according to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the right general winning combination entrance ball command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the right general winning entry ball entering effect (if the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during execution of the special game) in step 3054, the effect display device It is an effect displayed on the SG, and for example, displays “+2 GET!” And sets a command to be displayed by adding a predetermined number (two balls in this example) to the number of winning balls. Here, in the present embodiment, since the right general winning opening P20 is disposed upstream of the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20, the first large winning opening C10 is executed during the execution of the special game. And the game ball shot towards the second large winning opening C20 (the game ball shot by right-handed) is in the right general winning opening P20 before entering the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20. It will be possible to hit the ball. By configuring in this way, in addition to the number of winning balls that can be acquired by entering the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 during execution of the special game, the right general winning opening P20 is entered As a result, game balls can be further obtained, and the number of game balls obtainable in the execution of the special game can be increased.

  Next, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the ball entry number counter NKc, and proceeds to the processing of step 3058. Also in the case of No at step 3052, the process proceeds to step 3058. Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the ball entry number counter NKc has reached a predetermined value (five balls in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the lighting mode based on the jackpot symbol during stop with reference to the right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table (see FIG. 55) in step 3060 Then, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is turned on in the determined lighting mode, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2926). Also in the case of No in step 3058, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2926). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 during the special game, the right general winning combination entrance ball presentation is displayed on the effect display device SG (for example, “+2 GET !)) Is configured so that when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20 a predetermined value (five balls in this example), the lighting mode based on the jackpot symbol during stop is for the right general winning opening The lamp LP10 is configured to be lit. In addition to displaying on the effect display device SG, the right general prize winning enter ball effect to be executed when the game ball enters the right general winning prize port P20 is "GET!" By the sound from the speaker D24. It may be configured to output “2 GET!” Or may be configured to output “GET!” As voice as well as displaying “+2 GET!” On the screen. In addition, the volume of the sound from the speaker D24 may be provided in a plurality of stages, and the size of the volume may indicate the degree of expectation for transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends (in the case of a large volume The transition expectation to the probability fluctuation gaming state is higher than when the volume is low, or "GET!", Which is the sound to be originally output, is not output (does not output itself / outputs silently) Expected transition to probability fluctuation gaming state is relatively high, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 55 is an example of a right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table. In the figure, the table of probability variation big hit symbol stop time table which is referred to when the big hit symbol being stopped is a probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B) which is shifted to the probability variation gaming state. And, the non-probable variation big hit symbol stop time table which is referred to when it is the non-probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 4A, 4B) which will shift to the non-probability variation gaming state when the big hit symbol is stopped Ru. There are five display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow" as the lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10, and the probability after the big hit ends The transition to the variation gaming state is "white → blue → green → red → iridescent" in ascending order of expectations. It should be noted that "rainbow color" is not selected as the lighting mode when shifting to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end, so when the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is lit in rainbow color, after the big hit end Transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state is substantially deterministic. The lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or the distribution of the number is changed. Also, when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the right general winning opening P20 during a big hit, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be configured to light up at the end timing of the big hit, or once The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be configured to be turned on several times during the jackpot of. Furthermore, even in the same lighting mode, the transition expectation to the probability fluctuation gaming state is made different depending on the transition timing of the lighting mode, specifically, the same "red" mode is changed to the "red" mode at a later timing. It may be set so that the transition expectation to the probability fluctuation gaming state is higher than when it is changing in the “red” mode at the earlier timing (for example, the distribution of the number is set as such), By configuring in this way, even if the aspect does not change at first and remains "white", if it changes to "red" later, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first change aspect is "red" Thus, it is possible to continuously give a sense of expectation. Of course, it is also possible to set the reliability to be higher if the change is made at an earlier timing, and in this case it is also possible to make the change at an early timing more likely.

  Next, FIG. 56 is an operation diagram according to the first (second) large winning opening and the right general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is disposed upstream of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). Here, in the case where the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is open, the gaming ball that has flowed out from the right-handed route outlet D50 is the first large winning opening C10 (or the first large winning opening C10). The case of entering the 2 large winning opening C20) is configured to be relatively larger than the case of entering the right general winning opening P20.

  First, as shown on the left side of the figure, the game ball run right during the execution of the special game, and the game ball drained from the right-handed route outlet D50 flows between the game nails provided on the game board D35. And enter the first big winning opening C10 which is in the open state. When the player enters the first large winning opening C10, the number of winning balls (13 in this example) is paid out.

  In addition, as shown in the right of the figure, for example, during the execution of the special game, the game ball drained from the right-handed route outlet D50 collides with the game nail provided on the game board D35 and changes the direction. The ball enters the right general winning opening P20 by rolling. When the player enters the right general winning opening P20, the number of winning balls (two balls in this example) is paid out. As described above, by arranging the right general winning opening P20 upstream of the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening during execution of the special game. A game ball that can be acquired by a special game by allowing the game ball fired by the right hitting to enter the right general winning opening P20 when the game is advanced by aiming at entering the C20 and advancing the game by right hitting It will be possible to increase the number. In addition, by providing a molding (molded with resin or the like) instead of the game nail provided in the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20, it is configured to adjust the ease of entering the right general winning opening P20. May be

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the game ball fired by right-handing is flowed out from the right-handed root outlet D50 during execution of the special game, While securing the ease of entering the large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20), depending on the rolling direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball is also entering the right general winning opening P20. That is, before the game ball enters the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20), the right general winning opening P20 can also be filled. For this reason, the number of acquired game balls of the player in the execution period of the special game is increased. Therefore, the player will be more interested in entering the right general winning opening P20, and as a result, the interest of the special game will be enhanced. Furthermore, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 lights up by entering a predetermined number (five balls in this example) into the right general winning opening P20 during the special game, and the lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10 It is configured to be able to indicate a transition expectation to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game. By configuring in this way, for example, when a plurality of ball gaming balls enter the right general winning opening P20 during execution of the special game, and then the right general winning opening lamp LP10 is lit with "rainbow color". The player will be delighted with two high profit events, the increase in the number of game balls earned by the special game and the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the special game is over, and the game is highly entertaining It will be possible to provide a gaming machine.

  In the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is disposed downstream of the auxiliary game starting opening H10 as illustrated in FIG. 1 as the arrangement relationship between the auxiliary game starting opening H10 and the right general winning opening P20. It was composition. Thereby, it becomes possible to constitute so that two auxiliary game random numbers may be acquired by one game ball. The right general winning opening P20 may be arranged upstream of the auxiliary game start opening H10. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure one auxiliary game random number to be acquired by one game ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, the right general winning opening lamp LP10 refers to the right general winning opening lamp lighting mode determination table, and the big hit symbol during stop The lighting mode is determined based on the color, but not only the color difference of the liquid crystal, LED, etc., but also the effect display based on whether the big hit symbol during stop is a definite variation big hit symbol or a non definite variation big hit symbol The display mode to be displayed on the device SG may be determined. For example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by the kind of character like "chance-> hot-!-> Gekiatsu !!" Transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end The kind of character and the size of the character (display (such as "small chance"-> hot! (Middle)-> gekiatsu !! (large)) The size of the region may indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, the sound effect such as sound output from the speaker D24 may be determined based on whether the big hit symbol being stopped is a definite variation big hit symbol or a non-positive variation big hit symbol. For example, from the one with a low expectation of transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game, the degree of expectation may be suggested according to the kind of voice like "chance → hot! In addition to that, the volume from the low expectation of transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game "Chance (small volume) → Hot! (Medium volume) → Gekiatsu !! (Large volume) like" The degree of expectation may be suggested by the type of voice and the volume. Furthermore, the lighting, display, display size, sound, and volume described above may be combined. For example, from the low expectation of transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game "blow speed (small volume (Mid-level volume) → permanent volume !! → (large volume) ”may be output. As a result, the player is more interested in entering the right general winning opening P20, and as a result, the interest of the special game is further enhanced. As described in the item of the lighting mode of the right general winning opening lamp LP10, even if the final mode is the same, it is possible to make the expectation different depending on the change timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the gaming ball is won in the left general winning prize port P10 is 3 balls, and the number of winning balls paid out when the gaming ball is prized in the right general winning prize hole P20 is 2 balls However, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is won in the left general prize winning opening P10 is 3 balls or more (here, three balls which is the number of lowest prize balls paid out in the left general winning prize mouth P10 The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is won in the right general winning opening P20 may be configured to be at least one ball or more smaller than the number of basic prize balls paid out. For example, if the number of winning balls paid out (the number of base winning balls paid out) in the left general winning opening P10 is three, the number of winning balls paid out in the right general winning opening P20 may be two or one. If the number of winning balls paid out at the left general winning opening P10 is five, the number of winning balls paid out at the right general winning opening P20 may be two or one. As described above, it is possible to reduce the number of winning balls paid out of the right general winning opening P20 as compared to the number of winning balls paid out of the left general winning opening P10. As described above, by making it possible to change the number of prize balls paid out of the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20, it becomes easy to adjust the number of winning balls paid out during the special game. In addition, it is easy to finely adjust the payout rate of the gaming machine by configuring to have a winning opening with a relatively small number of winning balls such as the right general winning opening P20, and the position of the right general winning opening P20. By adjusting etc., it becomes easy to design the game machine to the optimal payout rate.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the right general winning opening P20 is disposed on the upstream side of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) and the right is hit during the special game, the game When the ball passes the right-handed route MR10 and flows out from the right-handed route outlet D50, the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20 before the gaming ball reaches near the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) However, the arrangement relationship between the right general winning opening P20 and the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is not limited to this. Then, about such another aspect, the change from this embodiment is mainly demonstrated hereafter as the example 1 of a change from this embodiment.

  First, FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the present embodiment. Only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail. First, unlike the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 in the first modification from the present embodiment is different from the present embodiment in that the right general winning opening P20 is on the downstream side of the first large winning opening C10 Is installed in the Here, in the case where the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is open, the gaming ball that has flowed out from the right-handed route outlet D50 is the first large winning opening C10 (or the first large winning opening C10). The case of entering the 2 large winning opening C20) is configured to be relatively larger than the case of entering the right general winning opening P20.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an operation diagram according to the first (second) large winning opening and the right general winning opening in the first modification from the present embodiment.

  As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the right general winning opening P20 is disposed downstream of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20).

  First, as shown in the figure on the left, for example, during the execution of the special game, the game ball flowed out from the right-handed route outlet D50 flows down between game nails provided on the game board D35 and opens Enter the first large winning opening C10, which is a state. When the player enters the first large winning opening C10, the number of winning balls (13 in this example) is paid out.

  Next, as shown on the right of the figure, for example, the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning) in which the gaming ball released from the right-handed route outlet D50 is in the closed state during execution of the special game. By passing through the opening C20), it may flow downstream and enter the right general winning opening P20. When the player enters the right general winning opening P20, the number of winning balls (two balls in this example) is paid out. Further, by providing a molding instead of the game nail provided on the game board D35, it becomes possible to adjust the ease of entering the right general winning opening P20. Thus, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 is in the closed state by providing the right general winning opening P20 downstream of the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20. Even when the game ball does not enter the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 in the case etc., it is configured to be able to enter the right general winning opening P20 thereafter.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the game ball fired by right-handing is flowed out from the right-handed root outlet D50 during execution of the special game, When 1 large winning a prize opening C10 (or 2nd large winning a prize opening C20) is open state, the game ball enters into 1st large winning a prize opening C10 (or 2nd large winning a prize opening C20), 1st large winning a prize When the mouth C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is in the closed state, the gaming ball passes as it is and can enter the right general winning opening P20. Therefore, it becomes difficult to enter the right general winning opening P20 compared to when the right general winning opening P20 is installed upstream of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) {right When the general winning opening P20 is installed on the upstream side of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20), all the game balls flowed out from the right-handed route outlet D50 are right general winning combinations If the right general winning opening P20 is installed downstream of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) while flowing down the vicinity of the opening P20, it flows out from the right-handed route outlet D50 In order for only the game ball which did not enter the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) among the played balls to flow down the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20}. Therefore, for the player, while increasing interest in entering the right general winning opening P20 (without giving a disadvantage), the first large winning opening C10 (or second large winning opening C20) as a game Is in the open state, and the right general winning opening P20 is entered in the special game being executed than when the right general winning opening P20 is installed on the upstream side of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). Since it becomes difficult to play a ball, it is possible to suppress the influence on the number of winning balls obtainable when a special game is performed.

  In addition, like the gaming machine in this example, the auxiliary game start port H10 and the right general winning port P20 are provided as a ball entry port capable of acquiring a random number on the auxiliary game side that can enter the ball when a right hit is executed. In this case, it is possible to design an appropriate gaming machine by adjusting the installation positions of the auxiliary game start opening H10 and the right general winning opening P20 and the ease of entering the ball (for example, adjusting by molding). . As an example, by relatively increasing the ball entering ratio to the auxiliary game start opening H10, the base in the time reduction gaming state (the number of winning balls with respect to the total number of game balls fired in the situation where the big hit is not executed) Rate can be increased. Further, by relatively increasing the ball entering ratio to the right general winning prize opening P20, it becomes easy to design the period of staying in the time shortening gaming state for a long period of time.

  In the present example, the configuration having two large winning openings is exemplified, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the above-described configuration can be applied to a gaming machine having one large winning opening. In addition, as a configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the large winning opening (one large winning opening among the two large winning openings may be, or only one large winning opening may be provided. ) A specific area where gaming balls can pass, and by passing a specific area, execution of a big hit (a big hit is executed after a small hit by entering a specific area during a small hit) Even if the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit (or small hit) ends, or the transition to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit (or small hit) ends, etc. are determined Good.

<< About the ball design condition of this embodiment >>
As mentioned above, although this embodiment and these modifications were described, various designs were made so that the pachinko game machine which concerns on the embodiment mentioned above might not become excessive balls-out performance, and it supplements with respect to this point below explain. The following configuration can be applied not only to the above-described embodiment, but also to the following embodiments.

<Short-term withdrawal ball performance>
The total number of game balls that can be obtained when the game balls are continuously released for one hour by the firing speed and the firing strength expected to obtain the largest number of game balls is the total number of the game balls launched 3 The ball is designed to exceed one-half (about 33%) and less than 2.2 times (220%). In this example, since 100 game balls can be shot in one minute (6000 game balls can be shot in one hour), the total number of game balls obtained in one hour is 6000 × 1/3 in design The ball is designed to exceed 2000 balls and not meet 6000 × 2.2 = 13200 balls. Specifically, the number of winnings on the main game start port per hour (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), the main game symbol display device (for example, the first main game symbol display The number of activations of the device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) (the number of changes of the main game symbol), the probability of hitting the main game symbol (big hit probability), contents of special games (sometimes called big hit games, big hit) , Probability fluctuation gaming state and power support gaming state (time such as opening of the winning opening pertaining to the ordinary electric role, time to opening etc, the number of times such as opening and the combination of symbols that the ordinary electric role will be activated The transition probability to the state in which the probability to be displayed is varied so as to facilitate winning is set, the ending condition, and the like are set.

  More specifically, in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the winning rate to the main gaming start port is 5.8 per minute, and the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol is one minute 5.7 times, the jackpot probability is 1/319, the average number of acquired special games (big hit games) is 1,500, the probability fluctuation rate is 60% (for example, probability fluctuation game after the end of the special game in 60% of the special games The power support game is set during the probability change game state and when the game state after the end of the special game is the non-probability change game state, until 100 changes of the main game pattern are performed. , In the probability variation gaming state (executed simultaneously with the power support game), the winning rate to the main game start port is 40 pieces per minute (one prize ball), the number of times of variation of the main gaming pattern is 40 per minute .0 times, the big hit probability is set to 1 / 159.8, In support game (for non-stochastic fluctuations gaming state), 40 the winning rate of the main game starting opening is 1 minute, and the number of fluctuation of the main game symbols is set to 40 times per minute. In this example, the average number of game balls acquired for the special game (big hit game) and the probability change ratio are set to be constant regardless of the game state.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one big hit is 10 rounds, and in such a configuration, the short-term ball withdrawal performance is enhanced. It is possible to suppress too much. In addition, although the details will be described later, it may be configured to be able to execute 11 rounds or more of rounds in one big hit, and in such a case, one round or one round may be performed. By adjusting the number of game balls that can be obtained (paid-out) at a big hit, it is preferable to suppress that the short-term dispensing performance becomes too high. In addition, as an example of the configuration of a gaming machine where the total number of gaming balls acquired in one hour exceeds 6000 × 1/3 = 2000 balls,
The number of game balls paid out by entering one game ball into the general winning opening is 15 balls, which is the maximum in design, and even if you keep firing the game ball for one hour, you will not win a big hit or a small hit Even in such a case, it is desirable for the total number of gaming balls to be acquired in one hour to exceed 2000 balls, and in such a case,
It is preferable to configure the game board surface such that at least 134 balls enter the general winning opening when the game ball continues to be fired for 1 hour (as appropriate, the arrangement of the game nails and the installation position of the general winning opening The game ball is configured to enter at least 134 balls or more per hour by adjustment). By so configuring,
15 balls × 134 = 2010> 2000
Thus, it is possible to design a gaming machine in which the total number of gaming balls acquired in one hour exceeds 2,000 balls.

<Configuration of a gaming machine in which the total number of gaming balls acquired in one hour does not reach 12000 balls>
A game ball that can be fired even if it never wins a big hit if the game ball is fired continuously for one hour according to the launch speed and the launch intensity expected to obtain the largest number of game balls. The total number of game balls is designed to exceed one-third (about 33%) of the total number of game balls to be launched, and the launch of game balls is one hour by the launch speed and launch intensity expected to obtain the largest number of game balls. An example of the case where the total number of game balls to be acquired does not reach 200% of the total number of game balls to be fired when the game balls are continuously fired will be described in detail below.

(1) First, it is designed to be able to obtain 1/3 of the total number of game balls to be fired = 6000 × (1/3) = 2000 balls even if you have not won a big hit even once during 1 hour ing.
(2) Also, the number of game balls that can be obtained by continuing to fire the game ball for one hour must be less than 6000 × 2 (200%) = 12000 balls.
(3) From the above (1) and (2), the maximum number of game balls obtainable by the big hit must be less than 12000-2000 = 10000 balls in the one hour period.
(4) When the maximum number of game balls that can be paid out in one big hit is 1500 balls (1500 big balls that can be paid out may be called the maximum paid big hit), it is 10000 = 1500 = 6 excess 1000 The maximum payout jackpot can be executed six times in one hour, but the payout of 1000 balls or more, which is the excess, occurs except for the jackpot payout, and the number of gaming balls that can be obtained by continuing firing the gaming ball for one hour Is over 12000 balls. If a large number of game balls enter the second main game start port B10 by frequently opening the second main game start port electric role thing B11d while in the time saving gaming state, continue to fire the game ball for one hour There is a risk that the number of game balls that can be obtained will reach 12000 or more.
(5) For the reason described in (4) above, by designing the gaming machine to secure the number of gaming balls to be paid out once for the maximum payout jackpot, and to execute the maximum payout jackpot 6-1 = 5 times in one hour. It is possible to design a gaming machine in which the number of obtainable game balls does not become 12000 balls or more by continuing to fire the game balls for one hour.
(6) When designing as in (5) above, when five jackpots are executed in one hour (60 minutes), the average from the end of the execution of a certain jackpot to the end of the execution of the next jackpot The time is 60 minutes × 5 times = 12 minutes, and when the execution time of the big hit is 3 minutes, the time from the end of the execution of the certain big hit to the start of the next big hit execution is 12 minutes−3 minutes = 9 It will be minutes.
(7) When the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is 1/40, the symbol fluctuation from the end of the execution of the certain jackpot to the start of the next jackpot execution is the symbol fluctuation in the probability fluctuation gaming state The average number of fluctuations performed until the big hit is 40 times, and the average fluctuation time per pattern fluctuation when executing 40 times of the symbol fluctuation and becoming the big hit is 540 seconds (9 minutes ) = 40 = 12.5 seconds.

  As described above, in a gaming machine designed such that the total number of gaming balls to be acquired in one hour does not reach 12000, the jackpot is won for the execution time of the jackpot (maximum payout jackpot) being 3 minutes The average time to play is 9 minutes, and the time when the jackpot is not won occupies 3/4 of the game, and the player's willingness to play is easily cut off.

<Configuration of a gaming machine in which the total number of gaming balls won in one hour does not reach 13200 balls>
A game ball that can be fired even if it never wins a big hit if the game ball is fired continuously for one hour according to the launch speed and the launch intensity expected to obtain the largest number of game balls. The total number of game balls is designed to exceed one-third (about 33%) of the total number of game balls to be launched, and the launch of game balls is one hour by the launch speed and launch intensity expected to obtain the largest number of game balls. An example of the case where the total number of game balls to be acquired does not reach 220% of the total number of game balls to be fired when the game balls are continuously fired will be described in detail below.

(1) First, it is designed to be able to obtain 1/3 of the total number of game balls to be fired = 6000 × (1/3) = 2000 balls even if you have not won a big hit even once during 1 hour ing.
(2) Also, the number of game balls that can be obtained by continuing to fire the game ball for one hour must be less than 6000 × 2.2 (220%) = 13200 balls.
(3) From the above (1) and (2), the maximum number of game balls obtainable by the big hit must be less than 13200-2000 = 11200 balls in a one hour period.
(4) When the maximum number of game balls that can be paid out in one big hit is 1500 balls (A big hit that can be paid out 1500 balls may be called the maximum paid big hit), because 11200 ÷ 1500 = 7 and 700. The maximum payout jackpot can be executed seven times in one hour, but the payout of 700 balls or more, which is the excess, occurs except for the jackpot payout, and the number of gaming balls that can be obtained by continuing firing the gaming ball for one hour Is over 13200 balls. If a large number of game balls enter the second main game start port B10 by frequently opening the second main game start port electric role thing B11d while in the time saving gaming state, continue to fire the game ball for one hour There is a risk that the number of game balls that can be obtained will reach 13200 or more.
(5) From the reason of (4) above, by designing the gaming machine to secure the number of game balls to be paid out once for the maximum payout jackpot, and to execute the maximum payout jackpot 7-1 = 6 times in one hour. The game machine can be designed such that the number of available game balls can not be more than 13200 balls by continuing to fire the game balls for one hour.
(6) When designing as in (5) above, when six big hits are executed in one hour (60 minutes), the average from the end of the execution of a certain big hit to the end of the execution of the next big hit The time is 60 minutes-6 times = 10 minutes, and when the execution time of the big hit is 3 minutes, the time from the end of the execution of the certain big hit to the start of the next big hit execution is 10 minutes-3 minutes = 7 It will be minutes.
(7) When the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is 1/40, the symbol fluctuation from the end of the execution of the certain jackpot to the start of the next jackpot execution is the symbol fluctuation in the probability fluctuation gaming state The average number of fluctuations performed until the big hit is 40 times, and the average fluctuation time per pattern fluctuation when executing 40 times of the symbol fluctuation and becoming the big hit is 420 seconds (7 minutes ) = 40 = 10.5 seconds.

  As described above, in a gaming machine designed so that the total number of gaming balls acquired in one hour does not reach 13200, the jackpot is won for the execution time of the jackpot (maximum payout jackpot) being 3 minutes The average time to win is 7 minutes, and the total number of gaming balls acquired in one hour as described above is less than 12000 balls, the average time to win a big hit and the execution time of a big hit compared to the configuration The balance with the above can be improved, and a highly entertaining gaming machine can be provided to increase the player's willingness to play. In addition, the average fluctuation time per pattern fluctuation can be made in a short time as compared with the configuration of the gaming machine in which the total number of gaming balls acquired in one hour mentioned above does not reach 12000 balls. It will be possible to create a gaming machine that can realize good gaming progress.

<Mid-time out ball performance 1>
The number of game balls that can be obtained when the game ball is released for 4 hours and the number of game balls expected to be acquired is the maximum number of game balls that can be obtained by 2 hours. The balls are designed to exceed (40%) and not reach two-thirds (150%). In this example, since it is possible to shoot 100 game balls in 1 minute (it is possible to shoot 24000 game balls in 4 hours), the total number of game balls obtained in 4 hours is 24000 × 0.4 in design. The ball is designed to exceed 9600 balls and not reach 24000 × 1.5 = 36000 balls. Specifically, the number of winnings on the main game start port (the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) per hour, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the first 2 main gaming symbol display device B20) the number of operations (the number of fluctuations of the main gaming symbol), the probability of hitting the main gaming symbol (big hit probability), the contents of special games (big hit games), probability fluctuation gaming state and power support gaming state ( Time such as opening of the winning a prize opening pertaining to the ordinary electric role, time until opening, etc., number of times such as opening, and a symbol that the ordinary electric role (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) will operate The transition probability to the state in which the probability that the combination of the combination is displayed is varied so as to facilitate winning is set, the ending condition, and the like are set.

<Mid-time out ball performance 2>
The number of game balls that can be obtained when the game ball is released for 10 hours and the number of game balls expected to be acquired is the maximum number of game balls that can be obtained by a maximum of one half of the total number of game balls released. The ball is designed so that it does not exceed 4/3 (about 133%). In this example, since it is possible to shoot 100 game balls in one minute (it is possible to shoot 60000 balls in 10 hours), the total number of game balls obtained in 10 hours is 60000/2 3 = 30000 in design. The ball is designed to go beyond the ball and not fill the 60000 × 1.34 = 80400 ball. Specifically, the number of winnings on the main game start port (the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) per hour, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the first 2 main gaming symbol display device B20) the number of operations (the number of fluctuations of the main gaming symbol), the probability of hitting the main gaming symbol (big hit probability), the contents of special games (big hit games), probability fluctuation gaming state and power support gaming state ( Time such as opening of the winning a prize opening pertaining to the ordinary electric role, time until opening, etc., number of times such as opening, and a symbol that the ordinary electric role (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) will operate The transition probability to the state in which the probability that the combination of the combination is displayed is varied so as to facilitate winning is set, the ending condition, and the like are set.

  The winning rate to the main game start opening, the number of changes in the main game symbol, the big hit probability, the average number of game balls earned for special games (big hit games), the probability change rate and the transition / end rate of the power support game are as described above. Set the number of winning balls for the main game starting port and the general winning opening of the gaming machine to two or three, respectively, so that the total number of gaming balls to be won will not be less than half of the total number of gaming balls fired. It is done. Here, when deciding whether or not to shift to the special game which forms the core of the ball performance, since the electronic lottery is executed, the frequency of transition to the special game than the design value in a specific 10 hours Is also assumed. Therefore, even in such a case, the number of winning balls and the winning ratio of the general winning opening are designed so that a certain number of winning balls can be obtained (for example, 18,000 per 10 hours). It becomes possible to be in a certain range, and a user-friendly game machine can be made.

<Dumpball performance pertaining to goods>
In addition, in this example, the winning combination to the special winning opening at the time of opening the large winning opening (first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20, etc.) which functions as a special electric combination, In the example, it functions as the second main game start opening electric combination B11d), to the winning opening (in this example, the second main game start opening B10) to which the normal electric combination is attached at the time of opening the normal electric combination. The prize winning corresponds to the prize winning to the prize winning opening where the prize winning was facilitated by the operation of the prize. In this example, the game ball number that can be acquired by these features is 70% of all the game ball numbers that can be acquired, and the game ball that can be acquired by a big hit, in order to keep the euphoricity of the gaming machine to a certain extent. The balls are designed to be 60% of all the game balls that can be won.

  The ratio of the number of game balls to be acquired to the number of game balls acquired may be referred to as the character ratio, and the character ratio is the number of prize balls paid out by the large winning opening with respect to all the number of balls awarded. And the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the winning opening (in this example, the second main game starting opening B10) where the ordinary electric role is provided, in this example, the first main game starting opening A10 and the first The second main game start opening B10 and the first large winning opening C10 for the total number of prize balls paid out of the 2 main game starting opening B10, the first large winning opening C10 (the second large winning opening C20) and the general winning opening The total number of winning balls paid out with the second large winning opening C20) is a percentage.

  In addition, the ratio of the thing due to the action of the said thing when the thing operates continuously is sometimes referred to as the continuous thing ratio, and the continuous thing ratio is the big winning opening for all the winning balls paid out number In the present example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) and the general winning hole. The number of winning balls paid out of the first large winning opening C10 (the second large winning opening C20) is a percentage of the total number of winning balls paid out of the and. Also, more strictly, the continuous character ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls paid out by the special winning opening when the condition device operation flag is on to the number of winning balls paid out, so that When calculating the continuous character ratio, two ring buffers are provided to store the number of winning balls paid out at the big winning opening, and one of the ring buffers has the condition device operation flag turned on. The number of winning balls paid out by the big winning opening (when the condition device operation flag is off is stored in the other ring buffer) (the number of winning balls paid out by the small hitting is stored in the other ring buffer) It may be configured to calculate (store) the continuous winning character ratio by storing the number of prize balls to be paid out.

As described above, in order to suppress the ratio of the number of game balls to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus, in the present example in which the special motorized bonus is installed, only one ordinary powered bonus is installed. It is fixed to By the way, in this example, the activation trigger of the ordinary electric character (in this example, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) is considered as entering the auxiliary game start opening H10 which is in the shape of a gate, It can also be configured to operate by winning of another item (other than the big winning opening) such as a mechanical type tulip. As a matter of course, the relationship with the winning opening opened and the like by the operation of the ordinary electric combination is set to be one to one without changing depending on the game state.

Second Embodiment
Next, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  In addition, with the limited frequency, the type and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation mode of the main gaming symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. The type and / or selectivity is the state different from the state (limited frequency state).

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment measures the driving (opening) time of the electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 with the second main game starting opening electric combination opening timer MP22t-B. Have. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a probability variation counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number, and a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the second embodiment, during the time shortening game, the fluctuation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened as compared to during the non-time shortening gaming (time Short function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start slot B10 is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the second embodiment is ended when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has, for example, a function to perform a transfer lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability change game or a time reduction game) to a normal game at a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. It is also good (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine having a fall lottery function).

  Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM include the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition And the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Here, the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the stay stage management counter SM 23 c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific gaming state from the end of the special game to switch the effect stage. In addition, the number-of-times counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times a jackpot has been won continuously during the ongoing specific game.

  Next, the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c is configured to manage the progress status of the pre-holding presentation effect in the case of executing the pre-holding presentation effect over a plurality of changes of the main gaming symbol.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 7. First, at step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the motor-operated combination open flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1204 whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game pattern. In the case of Yes in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag) in step 1216, and also acquires the acquired gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side Determine the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with high probability compared to the case where it is off) and the main control board Temporarily store in M RAM area.

  Here, the right in the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the same table, in this example, the stop symbols "D0, D1, D2" are present, and the stop symbols to be hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the respective stops. The release mode of the motorized jackpot that is to be released is, during the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the release mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed) and stopped When the symbol is "D2", the open mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 5.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). In addition, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed) and stopped When the design is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed). In the non-time reduction game, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0", and in the time reduction game, the stop symbol is configured to be easy to hit and be a symbol "D1".

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C to change the auxiliary gaming symbol based on the gaming state of the auxiliary gaming side (the flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag). The predetermined time relating to (for example, 1 second if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 10 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is off) is set. Then, at step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in step 1226, and the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol is determined and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Do. Then, at step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol is "hit" (in this example, D1 or D2). If Yes in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the opening mode (for example, in the case of hitting symbol “D1”, opens for 1 second → closing for 1 second in step 1232 based on the hitting symbol on the auxiliary gaming side) → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → open mode that becomes closed, in the case of hit symbol "D2", 0.2 second open, 0.8 second closed, open mode that opens for 5 seconds)) It determines and sets the predetermined time which concerns on the open time (opening / closing time) of a motor-operated role thing. Next, in step 1234, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the motor-operated accessory open flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game motor operated role object B11d of the second main game start port B10. Next, at step 1238, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1239 whether the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (in this example, D2). In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is started, the longest combination of electric combination to the sub side The release start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In the second embodiment, when the main game time short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time during which the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is kept open is the longest. It is configured.

  Next, in step 1242, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the opening time of the motorized prize has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric game B11d of the second main game start port B10 in the step 1244 and the step 1246, and the electric wheel opening flag is set. Turn off. Next, in step 1248, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command to release the longest opening of the electric combination to the sub side, which is information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d has ended. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO at step 1202, the process goes to step 1242, and if NO at step 1204, the process goes to step 1224. If NO at step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, step 1238, step 1239 and step 1242. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable).

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol fluctuation, and there is a condition that there is a hold of the main game symbol. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when the fluctuation fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation during the fluctuation fixed time May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406, and the first main game content determination random number related to symbol variation this time ( The second main game content determination random number) is read, and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is Shift (pending digest). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main gaming symbol equality lottery based on the first main gaming content determination random number (second main gaming content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number). Do.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, symbol lottery random number) The stop symbols relating to the main game symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Next, in step 1411, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the case of the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the main gaming symbol Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the change mode lottery random number), determine the variation mode of the main gaming symbols, temporarily store these in the RAM area of the main control board M, Control is passed to step 1414.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the probability variation gaming state, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes limited frequency variation mode determination processing described later. Next, in step 1413, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the value of the limit frequency counter MN 52c, and proceeds to step 1414. Further, the processing of step 1413 may be configured to be executed immediately after the determination of Yes in step 1420 (at the timing when the variation time ends).

  Next, in step 1414, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, fluctuation mode information, etc.) related to the main gaming symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command (symbol variation display start instruction command) related to the current gaming state to the sub main control unit SM side (the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) Sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol to the first and second main gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) In B21g), according to the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the fluctuation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation flag and shifts to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1419 whether the in-fluctuating flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and in the case of No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M in step 1422 is for transmitting a command for transmitting information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that design variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stop the fluctuation display of the main game symbol on, and control the display of the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuation flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a limited frequency counter a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). In this example, after the special game according to all the big hit symbols is finished, it is configured to shift to the specific gaming state (processing of the probability fluctuation gaming state with number of times limited and processing of time shortening gaming state). Next, in step 1440, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and shifts to step 1500. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1550). Also in the case of No at step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the limited frequency change mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN 52 c to determine whether the counter value G is a value within the first step range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery in step 1454, and executes the next process (step Processing of 1413).

  Here, FIG. 62 (limit frequency table 1) is an example of a lottery table MN52ta for determination of limit frequency variation mode. As shown in this example, in the second embodiment, when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50), the limited frequency table 1 is referred to. The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Moreover, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. In addition, as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 1, the same table is referred to regardless of the number of holding balls.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN 52 c in step 1456, and the counter value G is within the second step range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes at step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1458 changes the mode (fluctuation time related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery result, the second main game side reserved balls ) And move on to the next processing (processing of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 62 (limit frequency table 2) is an example of the limit frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the second embodiment, the limit frequency table 2 is referred to when the limit frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Moreover, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. In addition, as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time is shorter in the case where two or three balls are present compared to the case where there are 0 or 1 balls.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1456, in other words if the limited frequency counter value G is within the third step range (1010G), in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a main game random number The variation mode (variation time) according to the main gaming symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery result, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 62 (limit frequency table 3) is an example of the limit frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the second embodiment, the limit frequency table 3 is referred to when the limit frequency counter value G is in a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, only one type of fluctuation time can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 and, as a result of the success or failure lottery, it is constant regardless of the number of holding balls.

  The contents of the limited frequency table are not limited to this, and the contents of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side are only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). It may be configured to be identical. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reservations (both on the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side). When not configured as such, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of reservations, and the second main game side holds the number of reservations if the number of reservations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is desirable to configure so as to have a relatively shorter fluctuation time than when the number is less than a predetermined number.

  In the second embodiment, the limitation frequency table has three types and is configured to be switched in three stages in the order of limitation frequency table 1 → limitation frequency table 2 → limitation frequency table 3 (so-called three-step ST) There is no problem in changing the order of the tables to be referred to, regardless of the type of the limited frequency table, without limitation. Furthermore, there are two tables of limitation frequency table 1 and limitation frequency table 2, and the table to be referred is switched in the order of limitation frequency table 1 → limitation frequency table 2 → limitation frequency table 1 as a three-step ST mode It is also good.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the count value of the probability variation number counter MP51c is larger than zero. If the result of the step 1502 is YES, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation counter MP 51 c in step 1504. If Yes in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c in step 1506 to determine whether the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag in step 1508, and proceeds to step 1510. Also in the case of No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c is larger than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the value of the counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time short flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1550). Also in the case of No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 7. First, in step 1552, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time short flag, auxiliary game time short flag). Next, at step 1556, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation number counter MP51 c. Next, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1560, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1552, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  As described above, the bonus product continuous operation device (special game transition permission flag, sometimes referred to as a big hit flag) is configured to be only one, and even if an unexpected situation such as noise occurs, The special game shift permission flag is increased so that the operation (big hit) of the duplicate continuous item actuating device does not occur. In addition, although the flag is an operation condition of the big hit process (operation condition of the big winning opening), it is not used as a condition for facilitating the operation of the variable winning device other than the big winning opening. In addition, when the activation trigger of the bonus continuous actuation device occurs (for example, when the condition device actuation flag is turned on), immediately activate the bonus continuous actuation device (the special game transition permission flag is immediately turned on) ) Is configured. It should be noted that the operation of the continuous product operating device is from the time when the operation trigger of the continuous product operating device occurs (for example, from the time when the big hit symbol stops from when the big hit starts), the relevant continuous product operating device Through the state that the big winning opening pertaining to the special motorized part pertaining to is continuously open etc. (for example, during the execution of the big hit), until the time when the state concerned ends (for example, when the big hit ends) Say).

  Furthermore, as described above, in this example, the bonus product continuous operation device operates only when the condition device operation flag is turned on (for example, when the processing of step 1550 of FIG. 30 in this embodiment is executed) (special The game transition permission flag is turned on), but the game ball wins a specific winning opening other than the large winning opening, or a specific gate (except for the gate provided in the large winning opening). Alternatively, it is possible to set a flag (turn on the special game transition permission flag) when passing through a specific area in a specific winning opening other than the special winning opening (for example, the auxiliary game start opening H10) It has a "specific gate" (also referred to as a character continuous operation gate) to be shared with the game, and the stop of the jackpot symbol makes the entry of gaming balls to the character continuous operation gate effective. By ball entrance of game ball into the character object continuous operation gate, jackpot starts). By the way, “specification” described as the above condition is determined as the characteristic of one gaming machine, and it is desirable that it is set so as not to fluctuate depending on each game, and is determined in advance. Moreover, it is also possible to define a plurality of specific areas in advance.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the probability variation counter MP51 c a predetermined number of times (80 in this example). Next, in step 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, at step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the time reduction number counter MP 52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1658, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on a main game time short flag. Next, in step 1658, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73, control processing executed on the side of sub main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 66 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 5D is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear) When information is received → The sub-side RAM is initialized. When various information commands are received → presentation related information at the time of power interruption is reset to the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (f), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM, is repeatedly executed. Here, if (f) is executed, the CPUSC of the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM will be described later in step 2050-2, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute stay stage determination processing. Next, in step 2100-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a suspension information management process described later. Next, in step 2200-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. Do.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub main routine (S2050-2 to S2999) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5E is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command input port from the main control board M (described above Check the input port of the data signal line). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2050-2 in FIG. First, in step 2052-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, transition to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 2052-2, in step 2054-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S turns on the specific game in progress flag, and proceeds to step 2066-2.

  Here, the specific game in progress flag is a flag indicating that the specific game (for example, the probability change gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, so-called ST) state is in, and is turned on with the start of the specific game. It is configured to be turned off when the value of the big hit or stay stage management counter SM23c exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 80 which is the upper limit number of times of ST).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2052-2 is NO, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game is over in step 2058-2 {for example, with reference to the main information temporary storage means SM11b Judgment or Judgment Whether the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c has exceeded the upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of times of ST). In the case of Yes in step 2058-2, in step 2060-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the specific game in progress flag. Next, in step 2064-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a counter for counting the number of times the jackpot number counter SM23c2 (the number of jackpots in a specific game has been consecutive, the value in the processing of step 2410-2 described later Is reset (zero clear) and the process moves to step 2066-2. Also in the case of No at step 2058-2, the process proceeds to step 2066-2.

  Next, in step 2066-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game in progress flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2066-2, in step 2068-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has newly stopped. If Yes in step 2068-2, in step 2070-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and shifts to step 2072-2. On the other hand, if the result of step 2068-2 is No, the process proceeds to step 2072-2 without executing the process of step 2070-2.

  Next, at step 2072-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. In the case of Yes in step 2072-2, in step 2074-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "short rendering stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S), and the next processing Shift to (processing of step 2100-2).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2072-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c at step 2076-2, and the value of the counter is within the second range (31 to 70). It is determined whether the If Yes in step 2076-2, in step 2078-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets "long effect stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area), and the next process (step 2100-2) Move to

  On the other hand, if No in step 2076-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM 23c in step 2080-2, and the value of the counter is within the third range (71 to 80). It is determined whether the If Yes in step 2080-2, in step 2082-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "fixed presentation stage" as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area), and the next process (step 2100-2) Move to Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 2066-2 and step 2080-2, (for example, when not being in the specific game), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2100-2).

  In the second embodiment, the third stage (fixed effect stage) is only one type (5 seconds in this example) and one effect content (premature in this example) regardless of the lottery result. Although the display content is different at the time of non-prefetching, it is a system only for fixed time effect), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of effect content in the third stage be smaller than that in the second stage (long effect stage). As the tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the presentation content be “second stage> first stage> third stage”.

  By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to switch the stay stage for determining the effect contents based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of times of symbol variation in the specific game.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100-2 in FIG. First, in step 2102-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new motorized product longest opening start command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2102-2, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is started, in step 2104-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the longest combination of electric combination The opening flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2110-2. On the other hand, if No in step 2102-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2106-2 whether or not a new motorized product longest open end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2106-2, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is finished, in step 2108-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the longest opening of the electric combination. The medium flag is turned off, and the process shifts to step 2110-2. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2106-2, the process proceeds to step 2110-2.

  Here, the flag during the electric character long opening is during the open (longest opening) period in the opening mode in which the second main game start opening electric character B11d continues to open at one time for the longest time. The flag that turns on is used to determine that the hold that occurs when the electric character longest opening flag is on is the hold based on the ball entry of the game ball that is open for the longest opening. Is a flag that In the second embodiment, the flag is turned on only during the non-time shortening game during the long opening of the electric combination.

  Next, in step 2110-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a new hold generation command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2110-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2112-2 displays a maximum number of four for the first main game and four for the second main game in the present embodiment. ) Is added to (increment) “1”. Next, in step 2114-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a hold information (in particular, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side). The lottery random number · pattern lottery random number · variation manner lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S.

  Next, at step 2116-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the motor part opening longest flag is on. If Yes in step 2116-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2118-2 determines whether the new temporary storage temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S is the second main game side suspension or not. Determine if In the case of Yes at step 2118-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S at step 2120-2 uses the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S newly, the hold occurring at the longest opening of the motorized part. Is added, and the process proceeds to step 2122-2. On the other hand, if the result of the step 2116-2 or the step 2118-2 is No, the process proceeds to the step 2122-2 without executing the process of the step 2120-2.

  Next, in step 2122-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in advance the success or failure result of each suspension based on the suspension information (particularly, the lottery random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control substrate S . Next, in step 2124-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold to be won (big hit) among the hold to be digested before the new hold based on the above-mentioned predetermination result. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2124-2, in step 2150, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes pre-reading effect execution determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2142-2. On the other hand, if the result of step 2124-2 is No, the process proceeds to step 2142-2 without executing the process of step 2150. Next, in step 2142-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates on the effect display device SG (particularly, on the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) by using the effect display means SS. The suspension display lamps of the same number as the diagram suspension counter value are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200-2).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2110-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2130-2. If Yes in step 2130-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter in step 2132-2. Next, in step 2134-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts the pending information related to the symbol variation and the remaining pending information.

  Next, in step 2136-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the digested hold is a hold that has occurred at the maximum opening time of the motor-operated part. If Yes in step 2136-2, in step 2138-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the hold flag for on hold for the longest opening, and shifts to step 2140-2. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2136-2, the process proceeds to step 2140-2 without executing the processing of step 2138-2. In addition, with the effect for suspension at the longest opening, it occurs only at the time of the symbol fluctuation related to the entering of the ball when entering the second main game start opening electric combination B11d at the time of the longest opening of the electric combination It is an effect that is easy to perform, and includes, for example, a change in the hold display mode, and a change in the content of the effect to be selected (a change in the background or the content of the notice).

  Next, in step 2140-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2142-2. If the result of step 2130-2 is NO, the process proceeds to step 2142-2 without executing the process of step 2132-1 to step 2140-2, and after the pending display process is executed, the next process is performed. Shift to (processing of step 2200-2).

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2154 whether or not the newly generated hold is a hold on the second main game side. In the case of Yes at step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2156 whether the staying stage currently set (temporarily stored) is the “long effect stage”.

  In the case of Yes in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the new suspension based on the suspension information (in particular, the variation mode determination random number etc.) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S in step 2158 Determine the change time of Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is determined that the new hold change time will be equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Here, when the fluctuation time is determined in advance, for example, when the fluctuation mode random number value of the new suspension is 900 to 1023, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the number of reservations at the time of the new suspension process. (See FIG. 26).

  If Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that results in a big hit (for example, it is determined based on a lottery random number). If Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a prefetch effect lottery that will be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1⁄3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is elected in step 2166 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5 but it may be lower than the probability of winning in step 2164). The preread effect lottery is executed, and the process shifts to step 2176.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2156, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored in the RAM area) is a "fixed effect stage". If Yes in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2170 whether or not the new hold is a big hit pending (for example, based on a winning random number). In the case of Yes in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a prefetch effect lottery that will be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1⁄4) in step 2172, and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, if No in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is elected in step 2174 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6 but it may be lower than the probability of winning in step 2172). The preread effect lottery is executed, and the process shifts to step 2176.

  Next, in step 2176, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pre-reading effect lottery (one of the lottery of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, or step 2174) is won. If Yes in step 2176, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the number of holds temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S in step 2178, and the hold (trigger hold) winning the lottery is digested. The variation stop number Ha (0 to 4 times) of the main game symbol up to is derived. Next, in step 2180, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM 23c and derives the number Hb of variation stoppages of the main gaming symbol until the current stay stage ends, based on the counter value. .

  Here, the fluctuation stop count Hb also includes the fluctuation stop count of the symbol currently displayed on the fluctuation display. Further, as described later, since it is decided at the start of fluctuation as to be described later, if the symbol is in fluctuation, the prefetching effect can be executed from the next fluctuation that the symbol in the fluctuation is stopped is there.

  Next, in step 2182, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the number of pre-reading effects to be executed (Ha in this example) is the minimum number of pre-reading effects (the lowest number for executing effective pre-reading effects). , 2) determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the CPUSC of the sub control board S satisfies the relation of Ha ≦ Hb (the prefetch effect is completed during the current stay stage) It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets Ha in the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142-2). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142-2) also in the case of No at any of step 2152, step 2154, step 2160, step 2168, step 2176, step 2182 and step 2184.

  As described above, by configuring the pre-reading effect not to be executed when the pre-reading effect across multiple variations is not completed during the current stay stage (especially, step 2184), switching of the table and the pre-reading effect are simultaneously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player is confused. In the second embodiment, after performing the pre-reading effect lottery, according to the judgment as to whether or not to cross the stay stage, it is judged whether the pre-reading effect is executable or not, but it is not limited to this, it relates to pre-reading effect The order of processing may be changed as appropriate, and for example, it may be configured to execute the pre-reading effect lottery after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed (that is, when it is planned to cross the stay stage) , In the first place, meaning that it also includes the configuration that does not execute the pre-reading effect lottery itself)).

  Note that the prefetching effect in this example may be an effect that occurs even with a change related to trigger suspension, that is, the plurality of fluctuations in the prefetching effect across a plurality of fluctuations may include a fluctuation related to the trigger suspension. For example, the effect of the same mode or the effect of the same system may be an effect that occurs from a change before the change related to trigger suspension to a change related to trigger suspension.

  In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this. For example, even when the end of the pre-reading effect over a plurality of changes is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect can be performed, When the preread effect across multiple changes straddles the end (or change over) of the stay stage, the expectation that the jackpot in any change relating to the preread change is the preread that does not cross over the end of the stay (or change over) It may be configured to be relatively higher than when rendering is performed. In such a configuration, it is possible to attract the attention of the player in terms of whether or not the pre-reading effect is generated across the end (or switching) of the stay stage (and the effect). It will be possible to improve the sex.

  In addition, if the prefetching effect can be executed even when the prefetching effect across multiple changes is after the end (or change) of the current staying stage, the prefetching effect is until the final change at which the current staying stage ends. It may be configured to end (suspend) at. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is interrupted, the pre-reading effect different from the interrupted pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading effect or other effect according to the effect on the stay stage after switching) can be executed instead. May be Furthermore, it is also possible to configure so as not to end (or switch) the current stay stage at least in appearance, until the pre-reading effect across multiple variations is finished.

  Also, in a certain stay stage, a preread effect is generated to notify that the high expectation degree effect or the fluctuation mode having a long fluctuation time is selected in the subsequent fluctuation, and the high expectation degree effect or When the fluctuation mode having a long fluctuation time is not selected, the high expectation degree presentation or the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time may be selected in the next stay stage. Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is desirable to make the pre-reading effect | presentation in the next stay stage into an effect according to the said next stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200-2 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204-2. Next, in step 2206-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the decoration symbol stop symbol {eg, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, such as "7, 7, 7," etc. In the case of the Zoro eyes, the lost design, it is determined temporarily and the variation mode such as "1 3 5" etc. and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an effect content determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2208-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2300-2). Also in the case of No in step 2202-2, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300-2). The decorative symbol display control process of step 2300-2 is similar to the decorative symbol display control process of step 2800 described above in the present embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, at step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the specific game in progress flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2254 whether or not the longest open reservation effect permission flag is off. If Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect content determination table SM 25 ta {specifically, the normal time table (period for holding permission flag for suspension at the longest opening time off) based on the variation mode of the main gaming symbol. The effect content is determined with reference to}, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2254, at step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the effect flag at the longest opening reservation. Next, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the longest open reservation effect execution flag. Next, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the table for determining the details of the effect contents SM 25 ta {especially, the table for normal times (the effect flag for suspension of opening for the longest opening)} based on the variation mode of the main gaming symbol. The content of the effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, FIG. 72 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal effect content determination table is a table to be referred to when determining an effect in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, and as illustrated, based on the fluctuation mode of the main gaming symbol One of the effect contents is determined from the plurality of effect contents candidates. Further, when the longest open reservation effect permission flag is on, the same effect as the effect during the "long effect stage" stay is determined (the longest opening reservation effect permission flag is In the case of "off", the player can easily recognize that there is a change related to the hold occurring at the longest opening time, since the effect during the "long effect stage" stay does not occur during the non-time shortening game. it can). In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, such as an effect content, a fluctuation mode, the composition of a table, etc. For example, the effect is referred to with reference to the fluctuation mode (and the success or failure lottery result) of the main game symbol and random numbers. It may be configured to determine the content (may be configured to be able to perform different effects when the variation mode on the main game side is the same).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, if No in step 2252, that is, if the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the counter It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (a situation in which pre-reading effect is performed). If Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts 1 from the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c (decrement). Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the staying stage currently set is the "long rendering stage". In the case of Yes in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2270 pre-read effects dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “after xxx times at the start of fluctuation”! The command to display the effect of counting down the value is set, and the process shifts to step 2274.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2268, in other words, when performing pre-reading effect at the "fixed effect stage", at step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the "fixed effect stage" changes The content of the effect at is determined as the prefetching effect dedicated to the stage (for example, the effect that the background display color changes based on the big hit expectation degree), and the process moves to step 2274. Also in the case of No at step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

  Next, in step 2274, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM 25 ta (in particular, the table for the specific game time) based on the change mode of the main game symbol and the stay stage currently set. The content of the effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, the specific game time effect content determination table of FIG. 72 is a table to be referred to when determining an effect at the time of probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state (80 times ST in this example), As described, the content of the effect is switched according to the set stay stage (the number of times of fluctuation during ST). (The content of the effect is also switched in response to the switching of the fluctuation mode and fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol. And so on). The fixed-time effect which is the effect selected as the "fixed effect stage" will be explained first with an example of the contents of the effect, as shown in the image diagram in the lower part of the figure, first, the variation of the decorative symbol starts and the symbol When the image relating to the change is displayed for one second, the effect at the turning stage is displayed for one second. Here, the effect in the pass / fail stage is an image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB if it is in the pre-reading effect non-execution time, and after the effect is displayed, there is an operation of the sub input button SB or one second When it passes, it transfers to the production | presentation display of the informing step. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the effect in the pass / fail stage is the effect determined in the process of step 2268 that the display color of the background image changes (ie, the effect of prompting operation of the sub input button SB does not occur And when one second elapses after the effect display, the transition to the effect display of the success or failure notification stage. Next, at the informing stage, an effect of informing the player whether the change is a hit or a loss is executed. When the pre-reading effect continues, the execution state of the pre-reading effect (in this example, the display color of the background image) may be taken over until the end of the pre-reading effect. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed, an image notifying of the result of the change is displayed. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, such as an effect content, a fluctuation mode, the composition of a table, etc. For example, the effect is referred to with reference to the fluctuation mode (and the success or failure lottery result) of the main game symbol and random numbers. It may be configured to determine the content (may be configured to be able to perform different effects when the variation mode on the main game side is the same). Further, although not particularly illustrated in this example, a dedicated effect (for example, super battle reach / special battle reach or the like) at any stay stage during the specific game is executed also at the time of the reserve digestion of the first main game side. It may be configured to obtain. In addition, the effect that urges the operation of the sub input button SB can be configured not to be performed in a situation where it is difficult to secure the effect execution scale (for example, when staying at the “short effect stage” in this example). It is suitable.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400-2 in FIG. First, at step 2402-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2402-2, in step 2404-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404-2, in step 2406-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether the big hit is not the first hit (big hit during non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 2406-2, it proceeds to step 2410-2. On the other hand, if No in step 2406-2 (the first hit), in step 2408-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the longest open reserve effect execution flag is on or not. . In the case of Yes in step 2408-2, in other words, if N = first hit, in step 2409-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the effect flag for suspension of opening at the longest opening, step 2410-. Move to 2

  Next, in step 2410.2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the value of the number-of-times counter SM23c2, and shifts to step 2412-2. Also in the case of No at step 2408-2, the process proceeds to step 2412-2.

  Next, in steps 2412-2 and 2414-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag and displays a big hit start on the effect display device SG (appropriately based on the type of big hit) Make a display), and move on to step 2416-2. Also in the case of No at step 2402-2, the process moves to step 2416-2.

  Next, in step 2416-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (playability or Based on the type of jackpot, etc., it may be carried out as appropriate. Next, in step 2418-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the counter value is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 10). In the case of Yes in step 2418-2, in step 2420-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the largest jackpot under execution concerned being the largest round jackpot (for example, a 10R jackpot, a jackpot pertaining to a 7A · 7B pattern) It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2420-2, in step 2422-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games in a specific game, the total number of balls obtained in consecutive games, Set a command relating to the display of special game or special game effect that is displayed only when a plurality of types of specific effects are generated, and the condition (a combination of one or more) is satisfied, step 2426 Shift to -2. On the other hand, if any of step 2418-2 and step 2420-2 is No, in step 2424-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to a big hit in progress, and shifts to step 2426-2. Do.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make special the effect to be displayed during the big hit, based on the number of consecutive hits of the big hit (the first hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case of a big hit in the hold caused by entering the ball during the longest opening of the motorized role B11d, the second main game start opening electric role to count as the number of consecutive units even if the big hit is the first hit It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold occurring during the longest opening of the object B11d. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, for example, when a plurality of conditions exist as an occurrence condition of the ending effect, at least one condition (for example, a big hit in the specific effect) , Etc.) may be regarded as satisfying.

  Next, in step 2426-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2426-2, in step 2428-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2430-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (the processing of step 2999). Also in the case of No in step 2404-2 or step 2426-2, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

(Action)
Next, the operation of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetching effect in a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where the specific game is ended without being won in the big hit is illustrated.

  First, under the condition of being in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the holding ball on the first main game side is digested, and after the holding balls on the second main game side become four, at the timing 1 in the figure. , And the second main game symbol will start to change. Next, at timing 2 in the drawing, the short effect stage ends and the transition to the long effect stage is triggered by the fact that the main game symbol has changed 30 times after the special game.

  Next, at the timing 3 in the drawing, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect execution is possible since the trigger suspension which can be the trigger for the pre-reading effect is generated. In this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger reserve processing is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb before the end of the long rendering stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. It will be done. Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, since the first change of the second main game symbol starts after the execution of the pre-read effect is determined, the pre-read effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing 5 in the drawing, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The fluctuation related to the trigger suspension is a loss, and the fluctuation related to the trigger suspension in the long rendering stage is a fluctuation time of 10 seconds or more, so it is a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Next, at timing 6 in the drawing, the pre-reading effect is ended when the change of the main gaming symbol related to the trigger suspension is ended.

  Next, at the timing 7 in the drawing, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect execution is possible, since the trigger suspension that can be an execution trigger of the pre-reading effect has occurred. In this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger reserve processing is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long rendering stage is 1 (Ha> Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. It will not be done. Next, at timing 8 in the drawing, the long rendering stage ends and the transition to the fixed rendering stage is triggered by the fact that the main gaming symbol has changed 70 times after the special game.

  Next, at the timing 9 in the drawing, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading effect execution is possible, since the trigger suspension which can be an execution trigger of the pre-reading effect has occurred. In this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the fixed rendering stage is 10 is (Ha ≦ Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. It will be done. Next, at timing 10 in the drawing, since the first change of the second main game symbol starts after the execution of the advance effect is determined, the advance effect is executed from the change. Next, at timing 11 in the drawing, the pre-reading effect is ended, triggered by the end of the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol related to the trigger suspension. In addition, since the said pre-reading effect is pre-reading effect in a fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time concerning trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the drawing, the fixed effect stage ends, and the specific game also ends, triggered by the fact that the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game.

  Next, the operation of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation aspect of the main gaming symbol in the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case is shown where the long rendering stage is ended without winning a big hit.

  First, under the condition of being in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, at the timing 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main gaming symbol which is the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of losing, the limitation frequency table 1 of the first main game side and the limitation frequency table 1 of the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of reservations . In this case (table content surrounded by dotted lines in the limited frequency table 1) is X. The table content to be referred to in the case of fluctuation of this timing is X. In addition, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the first main game side changes from two to one.

  Next, at timing 2 in the drawing, the variation of the first main game symbol which is the second variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to in the case of fluctuation of this timing is X. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0. At the start of variation of the first main gaming symbol according to this timing, the number of reservations on the first main gaming side is one at the start of the variation of the first main gaming symbol according to timing 1 in the figure. Although there is only one table, the table content to be referenced is X regardless of the number of reservations.

  Next, at timing 3 in the drawing, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the third variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to in the case of fluctuation of this timing is X. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0. Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, the variation of the second main gaming symbol, which is the fifth variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to in the case of fluctuation of this timing is X. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from three to two. At the start of variation of the second main game symbol related to this timing, the number of reservations for the second main game is three at the start of variation of the second main game symbol related to the timing of 3 in the figure. Although there is only one table, the table content to be referenced is X regardless of the number of reservations.

  Thus, in this example, at the time of the short effect stage, regardless of whether it is the change of the first main game or the change of the second main game, and also the number of reservations, at the time of the change mode determination. The contents of the table to be referred to are the same.

  Next, at the timing 5 in the drawing, since the variation of the main game symbol which is the 30th change in the specific game is finished, the short effect stage is finished, and the game is switched to the long effect stage. Next, at the timing of 6 in the drawing, the change of the second main game symbol which is the 31st change in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to at the time of fluctuation of this timing is Z. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from two to one. Next, at timing 7 in the drawing, the second main game symbol variation that is the 32nd change in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to at the time of fluctuation of this timing is Y. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0. At the start of variation of the second main gaming symbol according to this timing, there is one hold of the second main gaming side, and at the beginning of the variation of the second main gaming symbol related to timing 6 in the figure, the suspension of the second main gaming side is Because the number is two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of reservations (Y and Z).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the drawing, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol, which is the 33rd fluctuation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to at the time of fluctuation of this timing is Z. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from two to one. Next, at timing 9 in the figure, the first main game symbol variation, which is the 34th variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to at the time of fluctuation of this timing is Y. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0. At the start of fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to this timing, the number of reservations on the first main game side is one at the start of fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to the timing of 8 in the figure. Because the number is two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of reservations (Y and Z).

  As described above, in this example, the contents of the table to be referred to at the time of determination of the variation mode are the same regardless of whether it is the variation of the first main game or the variation of the second main game during the long rendering stage. However, when the number of reservations is different, the contents of the table referred to at the time of determination of the variation mode may be different.

  The contents of the table at the time of determination of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol in the specific game are not limited thereto, and the operation of one example will be shown with reference to FIG. 76. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation aspect of the main gaming symbol in the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case is shown where the long rendering stage is ended without winning a big hit.

  First, at the timing 1 in the drawing, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the second variation in the specific game, is started. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on the presence or absence of the first main game on hold at the time of losing. The case where there is a hold on the first main game side is X '. The case where there is no hold on the first main gaming side is Y '. The table content to be referred to in the case of fluctuation of this timing is X 'because there is a hold on the first main game side. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from two to one. Next, at the timing 2 in the drawing, the variation of the first main game symbol which is the fourth variation in the specific game is started. Due to the change, the number of holding balls on the first main game side changes from one to zero. Next, at timing 3 in the drawing, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth variation in the specific game, is started. The table content to be referred to in the case of fluctuation of this timing is Y 'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Also, due to the change, the number of holding balls on the second main game side changes from two to one.

  As described above, in this example, the contents of the table to be referred to at the time of determination of the variation mode of the second main game side in the short effect stage are configured to be different depending on the presence / absence of the first main game side.

  Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, since the variation of the main gaming symbol which is the 30th variation in the specific game is finished, the short rendering stage is finished, and the game is switched to the long rendering stage. Next, at timing 5 in the drawing, the second main gaming symbol, which is the 32nd fluctuation in the specific game, starts to change, and at timing 6 in the drawing, the second main game that becomes 35th fluctuation in the specified game Variation of the symbol is started. At the start of variation of the second main gaming symbol at the timing of 5 in the figure, the first main gaming side is suspended by one, whereas the variation start of the second main gaming symbol at the timing of 6 in the figure At the moment, the number of reservations on the 1st main game side is 0, but the table contents to be referred to in the determination of the change mode of the 2nd main game symbol are the same, and both change time is 10 seconds. ing.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol is in the game during the probability fluctuation gaming state (and the time shortening gaming state) with the number of times limited. The candidates for the selected variation mode (variation time) are configured to be different (switched) in response to the predetermined number of times as a trigger. In addition, according to the change of the change mode, by switching the contents of the effect, if the aspect of the effect is different according to the progress of the game during the specific game {probability change gaming state (and time shortening gaming state with a limited number of times)} It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In addition, although not particularly illustrated in this example, when there is a jackpot reserve (in particular, the second main game player suspension) at the end of the special game, the jackpot is executed by executing a special effect. It is possible to produce in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is taken as a first modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1636 (variation 1) to step 1800 (variation 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration. That is, when the final round of the special game is finished, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on an end demonstration execution permission flag in step 1636 (variable 1) and shifts to step 1638 (change 1). Next, in step 1638 (variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end demo execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1638 (modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes end demonstration time control processing described later in step 1800 (modification 1), and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997) . Also in the case of No in step 1638 (variation 1), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of end demonstration time control processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 (modification 1) in FIG. 77 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, at step 1802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end demonstration in-progress flag is off. If Yes in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1804 whether or not the stop symbol is a long demonstration time jackpot symbol (in this example, 7A and 7B). If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demonstration time timer (main timer for measuring the end demonstration time of the special game) to a long time (for example, 10 seconds). Set and start, and shift to step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1804, in other words, when the stop symbol is the short demonstration time big hit symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demonstration time timer at step 1808. A short time (for example, 3 seconds) is set and started, and the process moves to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side and a command related to the determined end demonstration time information (step 1999 control command transmission processing the sub main control unit SM Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on an end demonstration in progress flag, and proceeds to step 1814. Also in the case of No at step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

  Next, in step 1814, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value is zero. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the completion demonstration flag. Next, at step 1818, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the end demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 1820, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game described above, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997). Also in the case of No at step 1814, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 66 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2480 (variation 1) to 2600 (variation 1), and the purpose is to execute an end demonstration effect and an end demonstration extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the ending demonstration time is a long time (10 seconds) in step 2480 (variation 1). If Yes in step 2480 (mod 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a demonstration time display timer for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) and starts in step 2482 (mod 1), step 2486 ( Shift to 変 1). On the other hand, if Step 2480 (No. 1) is No, in Step 2484 (No. 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a demonstration time display timer for a short time (for example, 3 seconds) and starts. It shifts to 2486 (variation 1).

  Next, in step 2486 (modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display an end demonstration image (for example, an image for notifying the number of acquired game balls, the number of consecutive units, etc.) (step 2900). In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 2488 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the end demonstration display flag, and shifts to step 2490 (variation 1). Even when the result of the step 2404 or the step 2426 is No, the process shifts to the step 2490 (variation 1).

  Next, in step 2490 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demonstration display flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2490 (variation 1), in step 2492 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a demonstration time display timer (a timer on the sub side for measuring the ending demonstration time of the special game) value It is determined whether it is 0 or not. If YES in step 2492 (mod 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an end demonstration extension effect execution process described later in step 2600 (mod 1), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900) Do. Also in the case of No in step 2490 (variation 1) or step 2492 (variation 1), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  By changing as described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, an end demonstration effect notifying of the special game result etc. can be executed at the end of the special game, and the end of the demonstration effect After (after the end of the special game), the predetermined period after the start of the change (specific game) of the main game symbol (if there is a big hit hold, if there is no big hit hold until just before the end of the big hit change), At the end of the special game by displaying the effect substantially the same as the demonstration effect (for example, continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game etc. even during the main game symbol change) until the end of the fluctuation) In the case where there is a big-hit pending within the pending status of the big hit, since the image substantially the same as the demonstration effect concerned is displayed until immediately before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit holding, In addition, after the end of the special game, without a change in the specific game suddenly becomes the next big hit, and it becomes a novel effect such as recognizing that the special game is started again, improving the fun of the game It is possible to In addition, by making the execution time of the end demonstration effect different depending on the main game symbol that has won the big hit, the end demonstration effect for the player and the effect during the change of the main game symbol that performs the same effect as the end demonstration effect Inconspicuous, making the game more interesting.

<Inclusion>
In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present example, a warning image (for example, "Pachinko is a play to be enjoyed moderately" is displayed on the effect display device) as an end demonstration effect, for promoting prevention of concentration on the game It may be configured to obtain. It should be noted that the display timing (the display period) of the alerting image is not limited during the special game end demonstration time, and the big hit ends as a timing at which the alerting image can be displayed to promote the prevention of the game's stagnation. Not only after a big hit end demo but also every time the game time has passed a predetermined time, and every time the number of game balls paid out (given game value) exceeds a predetermined number of balls (predetermined number of game value grants), it is fired An alerting image can be displayed each time the number of played game balls exceeds a predetermined number of balls (predetermined number of bet game values). By making the player visually recognize the message frequently, it is possible to properly prevent the intruding.

  The alert image may be erased when the predetermined time has elapsed or when the player performs an operation to erase the alert image. By causing the player to operate, it is possible to recognize the depression.

Third Embodiment
In the second embodiment, after the special game is over, the game is shifted to the probability fluctuation gaming state with a limited number of times by all means, and by switching the effect of the period in the probability fluctuation gaming state in stages, the amusement of the game Was configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, the player's sense of expectation can not be obtained in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state by the jackpot symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a specific area C22 in which gaming balls can enter, inside the second big winning opening C20. Further, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment is configured to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming machine state after the special game is over by the game ball entering the specific area C22 during special game execution (so-called, ball certainty Aircraft).

  First, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 7 in the third embodiment. At first, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1408 (second), step 1412-1 (second) and step 1412-2 (second), and the purpose is the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time The variation mode in the case of the reduced gaming state is to be different from that shown in the second embodiment. That is, after the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol is determined in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main gaming time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process moves to step 1411, and the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1411, that is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery result. Determine the pattern variation pattern. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as that of the second embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

  Here, FIG. 81 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table used in the first (second) main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that the combination of the main game symbols to be a big hit is different, and a table to be referred to in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbols for which a special game in which the game ball is easy to enter in a specific area is to be executed is "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", and is specified The main game symbol for which a special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter in the area is to be executed is "2A".

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 77 in the third embodiment. At first, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), and the purpose thereof is the unit for opening the second large winning opening C20 having the sorting area (specific area) Game) to be able to execute. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side at step 1608, or when the special game execution flag is on, at step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is It is determined whether or not the round to be executed is a distribution game execution round (in this example, the second R and 4 R). If Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a sorting game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612 to execute the same process as that of the second embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 82 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution game in progress flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M at Step 1854 has the main game symbol stopped showing a long opening symbol (the second large winning opening C20 is relatively long in the sorting game execution round It is a jackpot symbol opening time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 to a long open pattern (for example, an open for 15 seconds and specified An open pattern (designed to make the ball entering the area C22 deterministic) is set, and the process shifts to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, in the case of the stop symbol 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a short opening pattern as an opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. (For example, an open pattern of 0.1 seconds which is designed to be non-entering ball into the specific area C22) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the third embodiment, the first main game side long open symbol is "5A · 7A", the ratio to be selected when the big hit is "524/1024", the second main game The long opening design on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio to be selected at the big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side is more than the first hit on the first main game side The ratio of the second large winning opening C20 being long open in the distribution game execution round is high, that is, the game ball is configured to easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of the large hit.

  Next, at step 1860, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 with the set open pattern, and shifts to step 1866.

  Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 1866, control is passed to step 1870. On the other hand, if No in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1868 whether the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second large winning opening C20 is ended. If Yes in step 1868, then the process moves to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 1878. Also in the case of No at step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the sorting game), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1634). Also in the case of No at step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 82 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is the step 1680 (second), the step 1682 (second), the step 1684 (second) and the step 1686 (second), the purpose of which is the third embodiment. In the sorting game executed in the mode, the upper limit value of the number of times of change in the probability change gaming state and the number of times of change in the time shortening gaming state is made different depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is entered. That is, at the time of execution of this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transfer reservation flag. Next, in steps 1652 and 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability variation counter MP51c a predetermined number of times (80 in this example) and turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a limited frequency counter MN 52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times A (80 in this example) in the time reduction counter MP 52c, and proceeds to step 1658. Thereafter, in step 1658 and step 1660 The same processing as that of the second embodiment is performed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (the second), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times in this example) in step 1686 (the second). Is not limited, and a value equal to or less than a predetermined number of times is preferable.

  Here, in the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the player has entered the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the special game. In addition, if there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of times of variation to be in the time shortening gaming state after the special game is the same as the number of times of variation to become the probability variation gaming state A (This example is 80 times in this example.) If the game ball does not enter the specific area during the special game, the number of times of change to the time reduction gaming state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (small And the predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example). Thereby, even if it does not pass the specific area C22 during the special game where entering the specific area C22 is easy, a certain degree of advantageous period can be provided, and the specific area C22 is not passed It can be expected to curb the decline in interest. In addition, the variation mode of the main gaming symbol in the time reduction gaming state is a 3-step limited frequency table (limit frequency table 1, limit frequency table 2 and limit frequency table 3) in the time reduction gaming state of the predetermined number A of times. In the time-saving gaming state of a predetermined number of times B, the main gaming table 3-2 is referred to, and the effect contents are also referred to different tables. In addition, the said configuration is applied also when the big hit symbol which became the execution trigger of the special game is the same or different (for example, even if it is a special game triggered by the same big hit symbol, special game execution is carried out Depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22, the number of time saving may differ, etc.). In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, for example, you may comprise so that the fluctuation upper limit number of time shortening games may be determined based on the symbol at the time of big hit (for example, during special games) If the player does not enter the specific area C22, the jackpot symbol determines the upper limit number of time-changed game changes, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 85 is an example of an effect content determination table in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table to be referred to in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, which is illustrated on the lower right side of FIG. In the third embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game does not become the probability fluctuation gaming state, non probability fluctuation · time shortening gaming state (50 fluctuation ). When that happens, the effect contents will be determined with reference to the table. Note that this example is just an example, and the number of changes, the contents of effects, the change mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited thereto.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed is determined by the presence or absence of the game ball in the specific area during the special game (specific area Non-probable fluctuation gaming state in a gaming machine (so-called, ball certainty type gaming machine), which is shifted to the probability fluctuation gaming state without entering the ball and does not shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state without entering the ball. By making the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state different from the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the probability fluctuation gaming state, an appropriate effect depending on the player's profit aspect is executed. You can do it. In addition, although it does not show in particular in this example, when performing a distribution game, the special effect (The effect which asks about whether the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 becomes long opening, the entry to the specific field C22 It may be configured such that an effect for asking whether or not a ball is played, an effect for notifying that the ball has been entered into the specific area C22, etc.) may be executed {not specifically limited to the execution mode, for example When it is the effect of notifying that the ball is entered into the specific area C22, it is preferable that the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG be at the timing when the ball is entered (preferably immediately after). It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a rendering device (for example, a so-called movable object, a light guide plate, etc.) provided on the front surface (for example, on the rendering display device SG) Display or play an image drawn as "V" The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}. In addition, when performing an effect to notify that the ball has been entered into the specific area C22, when a special game is won in a specific gaming state (for example, probability fluctuation gaming state) or a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) In a special game where an opening pattern designed to make entering the specific area C22 nearly definite, such as when the) is won, the image drawn as "V" is displayed sparingly (for example, In a situation where there is a possibility that a special game will not be executed where the opening pattern designed to make the ball entering the specific area C22 nearly definite, such as displaying small, etc. (entering the specific area C22 in the special game In a situation where the ease of sphere is unknown), then, if an opening pattern designed to make entering sphere into the specific area C22 nearly definite is executed, then entry into the specific area C22 is The also preferable to perform the effect different effect for notifying, thereby making it possible to perform an effect in priority as needed.

  In the third embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game which can be opened for a first time (preferably, less than or less than one firing interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after opening for the first time The second unit game can be opened (or closed) again for a second time that is longer than the first time after closing the time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with a low degree of expectation to the probability change transition is finished, the probability It is possible to have the possibility that a second time opening operation with a high degree of expectation for transition is performed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or greater than or equal to one firing interval of game balls, in order to secure entry to a specific area, (half of the upper limit winning number of the round concerned) × (games) It is more preferable that it is more than or more than one firing interval of the ball, and it is particularly preferable that it is more than or more than (upper limit winning number of the round concerned) × (one firing interval of the game ball).

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed is determined by the presence or absence of the game ball in the specific area during the special game (specific area Non-probable fluctuation gaming state in a gaming machine (so-called, ball certainty type gaming machine), which is shifted to the probability fluctuation gaming state without entering the ball and does not shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state without entering the ball. By making the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state different from the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the probability fluctuation gaming state, an appropriate effect depending on the player's profit aspect is executed. You can do it. In addition, although it does not show in particular in this example, when performing a distribution game, the special effect (The effect which asks about whether the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 becomes long opening, the entry to the specific field C22 It may be configured such that an effect for asking whether or not a ball is played, an effect for notifying that the ball has been entered into the specific area C22, etc.) may be executed {not specifically limited to the execution mode, for example When it is the effect of notifying that the ball is entered into the specific area C22, it is preferable that the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG be at the timing when the ball is entered (preferably immediately after). It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a rendering device (for example, a so-called movable object, a light guide plate, etc.) provided on the front surface (for example, on the rendering display device SG) Display or play an image drawn as "V" The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the third embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big winning opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit that can be opened for a first time (preferably, an open time in which one or more game balls can enter but a relatively short opening time). A game and a second unit game that can be opened (or opened and closed) again for a second time that is longer than the first time after closing for a predetermined time after opening for the first time. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time, in which the transition expectation to the probability fluctuation gaming state is low, is finished. It is possible to have the possibility that the second time opening operation having a high transition expectation to the probability fluctuation gaming state is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. In addition, in the second time, in order to secure entry to the specific area C22, it is preferable that a plurality of game balls be configured to easily enter the second large winning opening C20. It is more preferable that the upper limit winning number of the round is half or more (one firing interval of the game ball) or more, or (the upper limit winning number of the round concerned) x (one firing interval of the game ball) or more It is particularly preferred that

  In addition, in the gaming machine (so-called, ball machine) which can shift to probability fluctuation game state after the special game end by entering the special territory C22 during execution of the special game like 3rd execution form ( 1) A single big winning opening is provided, and a normal round (a round in which entering a specific area C22 is invalidated) and a sorting game running round (entering a specific area C22) at the one big winning opening (2) A special winning opening A and a special winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the special winning opening A. Run a sorting game execution round in (3) in the placement (big winning opening B is on top) to overlap vertically with the big winning opening B with the special winning opening A and the specific area C22 Set up and execute a normal round at the big winning opening A, at the big winning opening B The minute game execution round is executed, and entering the ball to the specific area C22 can be effective only while the sorting game execution round is being executed. (4) A large winning opening A having a special area C22 (The big winning opening B is on the top) and run a normal round at the big winning opening A, execute a sorting game running round at the big winning opening B, and sort A game ball can enter the specific area C22 only while the game execution round is being executed (a shielding member is provided, and when the shielding member is in the open state, entering the specific area C22 becomes easy, and the shielding member May be difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game is illustrated by entering the specific area C22 during special game execution, but such a configuration The configuration is not limited to the three embodiments. Therefore, a configuration having a specific area C22 different from that of the third embodiment is taken as a first modification of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, FIG. 86 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the first modification of the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is illustrated, that is, the number of winning balls of the first main game starting opening A10 is three, and the second main gaming starting opening The number of winning balls in B10 is one, the number of winning balls in first large winning opening C10 is 15 and the number of winning balls in second large opening C20 is 13 and the number of winning balls in general winning openings Is 10 balls. Thus, in the first modification of the third embodiment, the number of winning balls of the second large winning opening C20 is smaller than the number of winning balls of the first large winning opening C10.

  Next, FIG. 87 shows the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 24 in the first modification from the third embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, changes from the third embodiment are step 1450 (second change 1), step 1431 -1 (second change 1) and step 1431-2 (second change 1), ie, step 1411. If the limited frequency counter value is not 0, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes limited frequency variation mode determination processing described later in step 1450 (second modification), and shifts to step 1413.

  In step 1440, after the condition device operation flag is turned on, in step 1431-1 (the second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has the stop symbol limit frequency big hit symbol (time reduction after the big hit end It is a jackpot symbol that is a limited frequency state after the gaming state ends, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7B). If Yes in step 1431-1 (the second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in step 1431-2 (the second change 1). Set and go to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second modification 1) of FIG. 87 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, at step 1451-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first step range (100 ≧ G> 21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main gaming table 3 in step 1451-2, based on the main gaming side random number, the result of the lottery result, the variation aspect related to the main gaming symbol ( The fluctuation time is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, if No in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1451-3 whether the limit frequency counter value G is within the second step range (G = 21). Do. When the limit frequency counter value is 21, it is the final change in the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1 in step 1451-5, and the variation aspect relating to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery. The (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). If NO in step 1451-4, the process shifts to step 1451-2 to determine the variation mode (variation time) related to the main gaming symbol with reference to the main gaming table 3. Thus, in the first variation from the third embodiment, in the final variation of the time reduction gaming state, when determining the variation mode in the case of probability fluctuation gaming state and the case of non-probability fluctuation gaming state The table referred to is different. In other words, the final symbol change of the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends when the game ball is not entered in the specific area C22 during execution of the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" The table referred to when determining the variation mode is configured to be different. In the case of No at step 1451-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game side random number and the result of the lottery at step 1451-6 with reference to the limited frequency table 2, and relates to the main game symbol. The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In the first modification from the third embodiment, when the big hit related to "7B" which is the limit frequency big hit symbol described above is finished, the limit frequency counter is set 100 times, and the time reduction counter MP52c Is set 80 times. Since it is configured in this way, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first step range, that is, the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time shortening gaming state and the limited frequency counter value are 0. It will be a bigger situation. In the case of such a state, by configuring the variation mode of the main gaming symbol with reference to the limited frequency table, when the big hit concerning “7B” which is the limit frequency big hit symbol is finished, “symbol It will transition like a time shortening gaming state for 80 fluctuations for a time → a limited frequency state (non-time shortening gaming state) for 20 times of a symbol fluctuation. In addition, it is not limited to such composition, in time shortening game state limit frequency state A (limit frequency table to refer “limit frequency table A1 → limit frequency table A2 → limit in the period of symbol fluctuation of 80 times The transition to the frequency table A3 becomes), and the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is “limited frequency in the period of 20 symbol variations after the time saving gaming state ends and the non-time shortening gaming state is shifted to Only the table B1 ′ ′) is obtained, that is, the limited frequency state may be configured not to straddle different gaming states. In addition, when "7B" which is limit frequency big hit symbol is won, 80 times are set in the time counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the specific area C22 is entered during the special game execution concerning the "7B" concerned. The limit frequency counter is set to 100 times, that is, it is configured to shift to the limit frequency state after the end of the time reduction gaming state. In addition, when the limited frequency counter value is not 0, it may be regarded as a big hit in the consecutive villas when the big hit, and may be configured to add the above-mentioned continuous residence frequency counter value (time reduction gaming state is Even if it is finished, if you win a big hit in a limited frequency condition, it may be regarded as a big hit of consecutive villas). In addition, it is not limited to this, when "7B" which is the limit frequency big hit symbol is elected, when entering the specific area C22 during the special game execution concerning the "7B" concerned, the time reduction counter MP52c While 80 times are set and the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, when the specific area C22 is not entered, the time reduction counter MP52c is set to 50 times and the limited frequency counter is set to 70 times. May be configured to In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, the time saving game state after the end of the special game when the player does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game execution related to the “7B” In the final change, the change mode of the main gaming symbol may be determined with reference to the limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table 3) referred to only by the final change. The contents of the limited frequency table 3 may be configured such that a uniform change time of 7 seconds is determined regardless of the number of reservations, and whether it is a hit or a loss. In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, the time saving game state after the end of the special game when the player does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game execution related to the “7B” Limit frequency to refer to the final variation in the time shortening gaming state after the special game end when the limited frequency table to refer to in the final variation is entered in the specific area C22 during the special game execution concerning the "7B" The tables may be configured to be the same, and when configured as such, the content of presentation and the tendency of presentation in the final change in the time-saving gaming state may be the same.

  Here, FIG. 89 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table used in the first (second) main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the first modification from the third embodiment. The point of change from the third embodiment is that the combination of the main game symbols to be a big hit is different and that a limited frequency table is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbols for which a special game in which the game ball is easy to enter in a specific area is to be executed is "5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, 7B", and is specified The main game symbol for which the special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter in the area is to be executed is "4A". In addition, when the big hit concerning “7B” which is the limit frequency big hit symbol which is mentioned above ends, it moves to the time shortening game state of the symbol fluctuation of 80 times (the fluctuation time is decided referring to the main game table 3) When the symbol variation is completed 80 times, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state of 20 symbol variations thereafter (a variation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). In the limited frequency state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referred to, the variation time of the main gaming symbol is configured not to be selected for a long time exceeding 10 seconds regardless of the result of the lottery result. In addition, in the final change (the 80th change from the end of the big hit) of the time shortening gaming state to shift when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, it is specified during the execution of the "7B" When entering the area C22, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1 when there is no entering the specific area C22 during execution of the "7B", the main The variation mode is determined with reference to the gaming table 3 (the shortest variation time in the loss of the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the shortest variation time in the loss of the main gaming table 3) . In addition, in the final change in the time reduction gaming state is configured to be able to refer to the limited frequency table 1 or the main gaming table 3, but when the final change in the time reduction gaming state is a probability change gaming state and non-probability fluctuation game Even if it is configured to make the effect contents in the final change differ depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the effect contents in the final change are different depending on the state. Good. For example, when referring to the limited frequency table 1 for relatively long-time symbol variation, it is asked whether the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state end or become a big hit in the symbol variation. A presentation may be performed.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 7 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, changes from the third embodiment are step 1611 (second variation 1), steps 1635-1 (second variation 1) and 1635-2 (second variation 1), ie, step 1608 After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or when the special game execution flag is on at step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executed at step 1611 (second change 1) It is determined whether or not the distribution round is the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

  Further, if it is the final round in the special game in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M has an end demonstration execution permission flag (when it is turned on, the special game end demonstration in step 1635-1 (second change 1) Turn on the flag (the time will be started), and shift to step 1635-2 (second change 1). Also in the case of No at step 1634, the processing shifts to step 1635-2 (second modification 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second modification 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the end demo execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1800 (variation 1), and in the case of No, the sequence proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of end demonstration time control processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 (modification 1) in FIG. 90 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, the change point from the third embodiment is step 1803 (second change 1), that is, when the end demonstration flag in step 1802 is off in step 1803 (second change 1), The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game has entered the specific area C22. In the case of Yes in step 1803 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1806, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1808. Thus, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the special game end demonstration time, which is a period after the end of the final round of the special game, enters the game ball to the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value is configured to be different depending on whether or not there is a ball. The condition that the special game end demonstration time is different is not limited to this, and may be different depending on, for example, the gaming state at the time of the big hit. Specifically, it differs depending on whether (1) probability fluctuation gaming state or non-probability fluctuation gaming state, (2) time shortening gaming state or non-time shortening gaming state, ( 3) Probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, (4) probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and It may be configured to differ in some combinations of the non-time saving gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

  In addition, in this example, for a special game pertaining to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) special game winning in the non-time shortening gaming state, and special game C96 special event during special game special The demonstration end time of the game is the first period (10 seconds), (2) Special game end demonstration time when the special game is won in the non-time shortening gaming state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) time reduction game is won special game in the game state, special game end demonstration time is the second period (when there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game (1 second), (4) Special game is won in the time reduction game state, the special game end demonstration time when there is no entering the specific area C22 during the special game is the third period (3 seconds), As described above, “second period <third period <first period” may be configured. Such a configuration is preferably applied to a special game which is won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state or the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In addition, as a specific example of the effect to be executed in the special game end demonstration time, during the first period, the effect of notifying transition to the probability variation gaming state, the removal of the IC card used for lending of the game ball Perform the effects related to the alert, the display effect of the motto to prevent the stagnation, and the effect of displaying the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer, and in the third period, the effect of shifting to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state In the second period, an effect of notifying the effect that the probability fluctuation gaming state (series state) continues is performed in the second period. Thus, the effects to be executed may be configured to differ depending on the length of the special game end demonstration time. In addition, comparing the length of the special game end demonstration time according to the situation, the special game end demonstration time (first hit) before the special game start is non probability change game state and after the special game end becomes probability change game state (first hit) Is 10 seconds, the special game end demonstration time when the special game end becomes non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state for 3 seconds, before the special game start is probability fluctuation gaming state, and after the special game termination probability fluctuation The special game end demonstration time may be configured to have a relationship of time values such as one second when the gaming state is reached (continuously continued).

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 66 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2480 (second variation 1) to step 2484 (second variation 1). That is, after turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a special game end command as a long open command (end demo set in step 1810) It is a command related to time information, and it is determined whether or not it is a command related to the effect that the end demonstration time is 10 seconds which is a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2480 (the second change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S informs in step 2482 (the second change 1) that the continuous control continuous image (transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is over) For example, a command to display "Congratulations! Still continue!" Is displayed for a long time (10 seconds in this example), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (the second change 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short open command, in step 2484 (the second change 1) This is an effect notifying that the game does not shift to the fluctuation game state, for example, sets a command to display "Mother!" For a short time (3 seconds in this example), and sets the next process (step 2900). Transition to processing). In addition, although the special game end demonstration time is configured to be different between the case where the special game end demonstration time is a long time (10 seconds) and the short time (3 seconds), the effect mode executed in the special game end demonstration time is different A demonstration mode (demonstration tendency) in the time reduction gaming state after the end of the special game when the game end demonstration time is a long time (10 seconds), and a special case when the special game end demonstration time is a short time (3 seconds) Time reduction after the game is completed It is configured to be the same as the effect mode (rendering tendency) in the gaming state.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, a special game end demonstration time is provided after the final round in the special game is over, and the special game being executed is specified By configuring the period of the special game end demonstration time to be different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the area C22, it is a high profit for the player when entering the specific area C22. While performing effects such as blessing the player in time while not entering the specific area C22, it is not a high profit for the player, so a short-time effect is performed and then the normal game is returned to, It is possible to make the game machine more intostitious.

  In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, a special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demonstration time, it is not determined whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game, so the special game start demonstration time depending on the presence or absence in the specific area C22 The period of time will not be different. However, the special game start demonstration time may be made different according to the game state when winning the special game, for example, 10 seconds when the special game is won in the non-time shortening game state (right to the player 3 seconds if a special game is won in the non-time reduction gaming state (a relatively long time to execute an effect for prompting the execution of a hit) (a relative is not executed because an effect for prompting the player to execute a right hit is not executed) In a very short time). In addition, when a special game is performed in which an opening pattern designed to make entering a specific area C22 approximately definite is executed, a substance such as "SUPER Lucky!" A tonality may be heightened by executing an effect that suggests that the probability change gaming state is to be reached after the end of the special game.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment and the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends by entering the specific area C22 during the special game execution. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to only the configuration of the third embodiment and the first modification of the third embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific area C22 different from the third embodiment and the first modification from the third embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail. Describe.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 7 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the difference from the third embodiment is step 1609-1 (second change 2) and step 3100 (second change 2), that is, the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608 After setting, in step 1609-1 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution permission flag, and shifts to step 3100 (second modification 2). On the other hand, also in the case of Yes in step 1610, the processing shifts to step 3100 (second modification 2). Next, in step 3100 (second modification 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes start demonstration time control processing described later, and shifts to step 1610.

  Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 93 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the difference from the third embodiment is step 1851-1 (second variant 2), step 1899-1 (second variant 2) to step 1899-7 (second variant 2), ie, step In 1851-1 (the second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the flag is off during the distribution demonstration time. In the case of Yes in step 1851-1 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to step 1852. In the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1854. Also, after setting the long release pattern at step 1856 or after setting the short release pattern at step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol at step 1899-1 (second modification 2). It is determined whether or not it is the first main game symbol (the first main game jackpot symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the distribution start demonstration timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second modification) in step 1899-2 (second modification 2). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in variable 2), and in this example, 10 seconds is set and started, and the process shifts to step 1899-4 (second variable 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1899-1 (the second change 2), in other words, when the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (the second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (the second change 2) The CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value which is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demonstration timer {in step 1899-2 (the second variation 2), and in this example, 3 Sets and starts at 1 sec, and shifts to step 1899-4 (the second modification 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (the second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command related to the determined distribution start demonstration time information (a command to the sub side, and the special game being executed is being transferred. Set the command related to the time value of the minute demo time. Next, in step 1899-5 (the second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the flag during the distribution demo time (the flag for which the distribution demo time is started by being turned on), and the step Shift to 1899-6 (2nd variant). Even in the case of No at step 1851-1 (the second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (the second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the value of the distribution start demonstration timer is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1899-6 (second variant 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time in step 1899-7 (second variant 2), and shifts to step 1860. . In the case of No at step 1899-6 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1634). As described above, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the distribution start demonstration time, which is the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, is larger when the first main game side is a big hit. It is longer than when it is the main game's jackpot.

  Next, FIG. 95 is a block diagram of an example of the opening pattern of the big winning opening. The big hit symbol in the third embodiment, the first main game big hit symbol is three types of "4A, 5A, 7A", and the second main game big hit symbol is three types of "4B, 5B, 7B", a total of six types of big hit It has a design, and the opening pattern in one round is only two types of “short opening = 500 ms opening → closing” and “long opening = 30000 ms opening → closing”. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) is not limited to this, and the types may be increased, and the opening pattern may be opened several times in one round. An open pattern (for example, “10000 ms open → 10000 ms closed → 10000 ms open → closed”) may be used. Here, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is long open only in all rounds (10R) of only the second main game length opening big hit "5B · 7B" . In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second large winning opening C20 is to be opened is the fourth round, and the first large winning opening is to be opened in the other rounds. Moreover, in all the big hit, the number of rounds performed is four rounds or more, and it is comprised so that a distribution game execution round is always performed. As described above, there is a short open round in "5A.7A" which is the first main game length open jackpot (2R), while "5B.7B" which is the second main game length open jackpot There is no short open round, that is, the number of short open rounds is configured such that the number of the first main gaming length opening jackpot is greater than the number of the second main gaming length opening jackpot.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of start demonstration time control processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second modification 2) of FIG. 93 in the second modification of the third embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the start demonstration in-progress flag is off. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the start demonstration time timer to the start demonstration time (3 seconds in this example) and starts. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the second main game big hit symbol (in this example, 3B, 5B and 7B). If Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a second long open command (a special game relating to a second main game jackpot symbol is started as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side) The command related to the effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 3110 whether or not the big hit symbol being stopped is the first main game length open big hit symbol (in this example, 5A and 7A). Do. If Yes in step 3110, in step 3112 the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first long open command (second main winning opening in the first main game big hit symbol) as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side A command relating to the start of the special game in which C20 is long open is set, and the process shifts to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in other words, when the stop big hit symbol is not the first main game open symbol big hit symbol, that is, the first main game short open symbol (in this example, 2A). , In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the first short open command (the second big winning opening C20 of the first main game big hit symbol will be short open A command relating to the start of the special game is set, and the process shifts to step 3116.

  Next, in step 3116, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demonstration time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration executing flag, and shifts to step 3120. Also in the case of No in step 3102, the processing shifts to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is zero. If Yes in step 3120, in step 3122 the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration executing flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1610). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3120, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1610).

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 66 in the second modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 2403-1 (second variation 2) to 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2), that is, the special game in step 2402 After turning off the middle flag, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the flag during start demonstration (when it is turned on, the special game start demonstration time is started by step 2403-1 (the second modification 2) It is determined whether the flag) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2403-1 (second modification 2), the process moves to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the start demonstration display timer in step 2403-2 (second modification) to set the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the start demonstration flag. Next, in step 2350 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start demonstration effect execution process described later, and shifts to step 2403-4 (second modification 2). Also in the case of No at step 2403-1 (the second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (the second variation 2).

  Next, in step 2403-4 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is zero. If Yes in step 2403-4 (second variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the start demonstration flag in step 2403-5 (second variant 2), and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, if the result of the step 2403-4 (the second modification 2) is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 2900).

  Also, after setting the command related to the big hit start display in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command related to distribution start demonstration time information from the main side in step 2403-6 (second modification 2) It is determined whether it has been done. If Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a long distribution start demonstration time (10 seconds in this example). It is determined whether or not In the second modification of the third embodiment, there are two types of time values of the distribution start demonstration time, that is, the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, long time and short time. If Yes in step 2403-7 (the second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S does not easily enter the ball in the long-time distribution start demonstration time in the step 2403-8 (the second change 2). Execute a notification effect (effect not to notify the player of whether or not the second big winning opening C20 will be long open in the distribution game execution round), and step 2403-10 (second change 2) Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-7 (the second change 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S enters the ball at the distribution start demonstration time which becomes a short time in the step 2403-9 (the second change 2). Execute easy notification effect (effect to notify the player that the second big winning opening C20 will be long open in the distribution game execution round definitely), and shift to step 2403-10 (second change 2) Do. Also in the case of No in step 2403-6 (second change 2), the processing shifts to step 2403-10 (second change 2). As described above, in the second modification from the third embodiment, in the distribution game execution round according to the first main game symbol, the entry easy unnotified effect is executed, and the distribution game according to the second main game symbol In the execution round, it is configured to execute an entry easy notification effect. In addition, it is not limited to this, and it may be made to differ which presentation of the easy-to-inform notification effect and the easy-to-inform notification effect according to the game state. For example, in the distribution game execution round pertaining to the first main game side long open big hit (5A · 7A) won in the non-time shortening gaming state and the non probability changing gaming state, enter the easy to enter unannounced staging effect, In the distribution game execution round pertaining to the second main game side long opening big hit (3B · 5B · 7B) won in the time saving gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state It is also good. In addition, the ending effect as described above in the second embodiment may be configured to be performed, and when configured as such, during execution of the special game for executing the ending effect, it is difficult to enter the ball. It is preferable that the notification effect and the entry easy notification effect be configured to be displayed inconspicuously for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw more attention to the ending effect with a high degree of achievement difficulty. Similarly, it is possible to execute an on-hold in-line twin-room effect of notifying the player that there is a big-hit on-hold in the special game that is being executed, and the on-hold in-line solo effect is Even when it is executed, it may be configured to display the easy-to-enter-not-informing effect and the easy-to-enter-inform notification effect so as not to be noticeable to the player.

  Next, in step 2403-10 (the second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game play opening jackpot symbol ( The 2nd main game long game opening big hit design, has become 3B, 5B and 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2403-10 (second modification 2), the process moves to step 2416. On the other hand, if the result of step 2403-10 (second change 2) is No, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number in step 2403-11 (second change 2). In the big hit where there are rounds that do not indicate the number of rounds), the process moves to step 2426. As described above, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the second main game long opening big hit symbol which is a big hit symbol in which the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is long open in all rounds. In the big hit pertaining to the present, it announces the round being executed at the time of execution of each round (notifies what number of rounds it is currently executing), while in any round the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning In the big hit where the mouth C20 is short open (or in the big hit where the first big winning opening C10 is short open), it is configured not to notify the running round at the time of execution of each round. In addition, when not informing the round being executed, instead of displaying a notice of a round, an object image (for example, a treasure box etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (for example, a treasure box etc.) The large winning opening C20 may be configured to be additionally displayed each time a round in which the long opening is performed is executed. In addition, a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and an effect is provided to ensure that the number of rounds for the number of object images is long. You may In addition, it is not necessary to execute the effect during the special game execution in which all rounds are long open, but it may be performed, but if it is not performed, the number of rounds currently being executed is displayed Is desirable. In addition, in the big hit where the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 or the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 becomes short open in any round (or in the big hit where the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 becomes short open), The first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20 may be configured to notify only the number of rounds for which the long opening is performed (for example, “1st R = long opening, second R = short opening, third r = long In the case of "open", it is informed that it is the second round in the third R, etc.). In addition, the effect performed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, for example, a big hit in the reserve in a predetermined round (or distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round in the special game execution In the case where there is a hold that is, it may be configured to be able to execute a hold-in-place effect to notify that a big hit is definite. In addition, when it is configured in this way, when the on-premises consecutive in-house effect is executed in the round before the sorting game execution round, the gaming state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22 The presence or absence of the ball has not been determined), so there is a possibility that the symbol variation related to the hold targeted for the notification will be lost despite the notification that a big hit will be made. It is preferable that the execution timing of the chorus effect be after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round, or after the distribution game execution round is completed. In addition, the distribution game execution round may be any round, for example, the first round may be configured to be the distribution game execution round (applicable even when there is one large winning opening) However, even if there is no game ball to hit (for example, if all the game balls have been cut off during the changing symbol pattern), the second round will allow sufficient time for additional game ball lending. It is desirable to use it later.

  Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of start demonstration effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second modification 2) of FIG. 97 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not to receive the second long open command from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process moves to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2354 whether or not the first length open command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub control board S announces that the second big winning opening C20 is opened long in the special game under execution in step 2356, the final effect execution lottery won in 1/5 Perform a lottery). Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the fixed effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, then the process moves to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a long open decision notification effect (a effect of notifying that the second big winning opening C20 is long open in the special game under execution) as a start demonstration effect Then, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2403-4 (second modification 2)}. In the case of No in step 2354 (when the first short open command is received from the main side) or in the case of No in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2362 has long open / non-open as a start demonstration effect. Informing effect (effect that does not notify whether the second big winning opening C20 opens long or short opens in the special game under execution) is executed, and the next processing {processing of step 2403-4 (second modification 2)} Migrate to In the special game start demonstration time in which the start demonstration effect is to be executed, as in the distribution start demonstration time, 10 seconds in the big hit (of a high percentage) of the first main game side, the second main game It may be configured to be 3 seconds in the side big hit (high proportion).

  By configuring as described above, in the second modification from the third embodiment, in the special game pertaining to the second main game side, the second large winning opening in the sorting game execution round in all the special games C20 is long-opened, and in the special game pertaining to the first main game side, it is configured to provide a special game in which the second large winning opening C20 is long-opened and a special game in short-opening in the distribution game execution round, In the special game on the second main game side, while notifying that the second big winning opening C20 is open long in the start time of the special game, in the special game on the first main game side, the second big prize Even in the special game where the mouth C20 is long open, it is configured to have the case where the second large winning opening C20 is notified that the long opening is long open and the case where it is not notified in the start time of the special game. It is certain to enter the specific area C22 In the special second main game side special game, while informing the player that the second large winning opening C20 is long open, it is not definite that entering the specific area C22 during the special game is the first main In the special game on the game side, a specific area C22 is configured by basically executing an effect of asking the player whether or not the second big winning opening C20 is long-opened, but in some cases it may notify in a definite manner. It is possible to provide a highly entertaining game machine capable of executing effects corresponding to the ease of entering the ball.

  In addition, in the example 2 of change from the third embodiment, the ball entry easy notification effect and the ball entry easy not notification effect are configured to be executed at the distribution start demonstration time, but before the distribution game execution round It may be executed during the execution of the round to be executed (it may be executed over multiple rounds) or may be executed during the execution of the sorting game execution round.

Fourth Embodiment
In the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, but the area inside the special winning opening The playability that is highly profitable for the player by entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration to become such a game feature is the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, FIG. 99 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the fourth embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, and the presence of the first main game start opening A10 makes the second main game start The upper part of the game start port B10 is closed. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area D30) are the second main game starting opening B10. Game balls flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 are easily guided to the first main game start port A10, and flow down the right side (based on the center of the game area D30) It is comprised so that a ball | ball can not be easily induced | guided | derived to 1st main game starting opening A10. In addition, the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area D30) are the first main game start opening A10. It may be configured to be guided to

  Also, while the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30 is Even though the game balls flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) are not easily induced to the first main game start opening A10, the respective start openings are arranged so that they are easily induced to the second main game start opening B10. Good. In addition, "it is easy to be induced" and "it is hard to be induced" are determined by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are respectively emitted to the right and left sides of the game ball, for example.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball that flows down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the auxiliary game start port H10 is easily induced and the game ball which flows down the left side of the game area D30. Is configured so that it is difficult to be induced {However, the invention is not limited thereto. A game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 (For example, the auxiliary game start port H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed at the upper right of the out port D36, and the gaming ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the gaming area) of the gaming area D30 is Before reaching the out port D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed.

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of the mouth D36 and at the upper right of the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning The mouth solenoid C26), the upper shielding member C24 which can start driving at the time of the small hit game start, and can block the flow down to the lower shielding member C25 of the gaming ball, starts driving when the game machine is powered on, Lower shielding member C25 which can inhibit the flow to V winning opening C22, V winning opening C22 which is a winning opening serving as a trigger to shift to a special game by entering a ball during small hit game, and V winning opening C22 V winning opening entrance detection device C27s for detecting game ball entry, second large winning opening outlet C23 for discharging the game ball entered in the second large winning opening C20, and the second large In order to detect the entry of the game ball to the winning a prize opening outlet C23 Comprising a second bonus prize hole discharge detection device C23S, a. Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Make it variable. In the second embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in the normal state and the gaming ball is easily released in the open state. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The internal structure of the second big winning opening C20 will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 100 is an operation diagram according to the second big winning opening C20 in the fourth embodiment, and more specifically, an upper shielding member C24 and a lower shielding provided in the second big winning opening C20. It is an operation view concerning whether or not the game ball can be entered into the V winning opening C22 based on the opening aspect and the closing aspect of the member C25. In the fourth embodiment, the second large winning opening C20 if the game ball continues to be directed to the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game execution (if it continues to hit the right). For example, the opening mode of the second large winning opening C20 (the second large winning opening motorized role C21d) is configured such that the game ball has a plurality of balls into the ball "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed, so that the game ball in the V winning opening C22 can enter the game ball in the second large winning opening C20 with the upper shielding member C24. It is determined depending on whether or not the opening timing with the lower shielding member C25 matches well. Hereinafter, the operation of the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the second large winning opening C20 enters the second large winning opening C20 (as a flow path for gaming balls inside the second large winning opening C20). The second big winning opening winning detection device C21s which detects the ball, the V winning opening C22, the V winning opening winning detection device C22s which detects entering the V winning opening C22, and the V winning opening C22 are not entered. The second large winning opening outlet C23, which is a discharge channel of the game ball, and the second large winning opening outlet detection device C23s for detecting entry into the second large winning opening outlet C23, and further A lower shielding member C25 provided above the V winning opening C22 and an upper shielding member C24 provided above the lower shielding member C25 are provided, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are provided from the game board ( State (advanced state) projected from the player to the front side In the closed state where it becomes possible to inhibit or facilitate the fall of the game ball by falling into the game board (back to the player), the game ball is prevented from falling. It is configured to be capable of taking an open state where it is impossible or difficult to be inhibited (the game ball can fall) (a so-called "Velo-type attacker"). More specifically, in the second embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not reach or hardly reach the lower shielding member C25, and the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the lower shielding member C25 is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not reach or hardly reach the V winning hole C22, and the lower shielding member C25 When the member C25 is in the open state, the gaming ball is configured to be reachable or easily reachable to the V winning opening C22. Next, the specific flow path of the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit game execution will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the game ball entering the second large winning opening C20 during small hit game execution passes the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s and is then closed in the closed state. It is guided to the member C24, and is retained (placed on the upper shielding member C24) in a region (referred to as a holding region) formed by the upper shielding member C24 and the inner wall surface of the second large winning opening C20. In the second embodiment, only one game ball can be placed on the reserved area, so a certain game ball is placed on the reserved area as shown in FIG. 100 (a). If the game ball is being guided, the game ball guided to the inside of the second large winning opening C20 after the mounting timing of the certain game ball collides with the certain game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24. And the second large winning opening discharge detection device C23s and the second large winning opening discharge opening C23 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (when entering the V winning opening C22 is impossible or difficult) (Wherein the stationary area is not to be extracted from the stationary area by an impact when the other gaming ball collides). It is configured). Here, the right part of FIG. 100 (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing an XX cross section in FIG. 100 (a). As shown in the sectional view, in FIG. 100 (a), the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are both in a closed state {the game board is projected (toward the player) (the sectional view It is understood that in this case, the gaming ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24.

  In the fourth embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be opened after a predetermined time from the small hit game start (in this example, 5 seconds after the small hit game start), the lower shield member C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a constant cycle (in this example, 4 seconds cycle) from the time the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 becomes periodic) Lower, whether or not to enter the V winning opening C22 is mainly determined by the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is in the open state (in other words, the timing of the small hitting game start) (lower shielding member C25 The game ball may enter the V winning opening C22 when a small hit game is started where the timing of the opening state and the timing of the opening of the upper shielding member C 24 substantially coincide with each other.

  The fourth embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 can not or not easily inhibit the falling of the gaming ball, and can or can not easily inhibit the falling of the gaming ball. , And may be of any structure as long as it can be transitive, and there is no limitation on the other configurations.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, two shielding members, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25, are provided to block the ball entry of the gaming ball into the V winning hole C22, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The shielding member may be configured to inhibit entry of the game ball into the V winning hole C22. Furthermore, in the gaming machine shown in the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the specific area C22 is also shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is over, the specific area You may comprise so that the shielding member which blocks the ball | bowl of the game ball to C22 may be provided. In such a configuration, the opening mode of the shielding member may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot symbol that triggered the jackpot, and in such a configuration, (1) shielding in the sorting game execution round As an opening mode of the member, regardless of the jackpot symbol 50 ms after the distribution game execution round start timing or in the distribution game execution round start timing the shielding member becomes open from the closed state, (2) distribution game execution round The shielding member may be configured to be closed from the open state to the closed state at a timing 200 ms after the end timing of the timing (may be after 200 ms or 3000 ms depending on the big hit design), and so configure Therefore, there is a timing when the shielding member opens regardless of the jackpot design, the shielding part after the sorting game execution round is started There can be first than the period until the start of the opening, towards the period from the distribution game execution round is completed until the shielding member is last in closing is configured to be a long period of time.

  Next, FIG. 101 shows timer interrupt processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1700 (third), step 1750 (third), step 3450 (third) and step 1950 (third). That is, after executing the special game control process at step 1600, at step 1700 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1750 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an upper shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 3450 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes lower shielding member drive control processing described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a later-described V winning area entrance ball determination process, and proceeds to step 1601.

  Next, FIG. 102 shows the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The differences from the second embodiment are steps 1403 (third), 1410-3 (third), steps 1434 (third) and 1436 (third), that is, step 1403 (third). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change start condition is satisfied (in the fourth embodiment, the fact that the small hit game is not being executed is added as the change start condition). In the case of Yes in step 1403 (third), the process proceeds to step 1405, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1419. In addition, after determining the stop symbol related to the main gaming symbol in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1410-3 (third) is based on the main gaming side random number, the result of the lottery result, the gaming state, The variation mode (or variation time) relating to the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process moves to step 1414.

  When the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the stop symbol is a small hit symbol in step 1434 (third). If Yes in step 1434 (third), in step 1436 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, also when No in step 1434 (third), the process moves to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 103 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) is an example of the first main game pass / fail lottery table MN11ta-A (the second main game pass / fail lottery table MN11ta-B) in the fourth embodiment. It is. In the fourth embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the table contents to be referred to are different only depending on whether it is the symbol variation related to the first main game side or the symbol variation related to the second main game side There is. In addition, it is configured to be able to win a small hit together with the first main game side and the second main game side, and the result of the lottery on the second main game side becomes a small hit (with a probability of 1020/1024). The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Also, when a small hit is won, the first main game side is configured to be determined as one small game pattern from one of the two types of main game pattern candidates and one for the second main game side. ing. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. If a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol may be different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 28 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by entering the ball into the V winning opening C22 (in the fourth embodiment, the small hit) The special game is configured to be executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the game). If Yes in step 1681-1, in step 1681-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a big hit symbol in which the stop symbol is the time saving jackpot symbol (shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the special game execution, this example Then, it is determined whether or not 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1681-2, then the process transitions to step 1681-5. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M at Step 1681-4 will shift to the time saving gaming state after the execution of the special game (the special game will be transferred to the special game It is a small hit symbol that becomes a transition opportunity to, and in this example, it is determined whether or not after the end of the special game triggered by 7AK · 7BK). In the case of Yes in step 1681-4, the process moves to step 1681-5.

  Next, at step 1681-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Next, in steps 1681-6 and 1681-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process {the process of step 1700 (third process)}. Do. In the case of No in step 1681-2, in other words, in the case of 4A where the stop symbol is a short-time big hit symbol, or in the case of No in step 1681-4, in other words, 2BK which is a short-time hit symbol Even after the special game is over, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1700 (third process)}. In addition, the process (step 1411, the subroutine of step 1450, step 1413, step 1431) concerning the limitation frequency is deleted.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge standby flag {a flag which is turned on at step 1722 which will be described later, that is, the planned small hit game (especially, the second large game scheduled Whether or not the flag that is on during the discharge waiting period (discharge standby time) of the game ball remaining in the second large winning opening C20 is off after the completion of the opening pattern of the winning opening C20). Determine In the case of Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, 0.2 seconds opening to 0 .. 8 seconds closing → 1 second opening → 1 second closing → 1 second opening → closing and if the game ball continues to be directed to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening C20 is the gaming ball Set up multiple balls). In addition, the opening mode of the large winning opening (second large winning opening C20) at the time of small hit execution can be set arbitrarily, for example, the total opening time of the second large winning opening C20 at the time of one small hitting execution May be set to a predetermined time or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or less) (for example, “0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → closed” (total open time = 1) .2 seconds)). Next, at step 1706, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a small hit execution start command (a command indicating that a small hit game has been started, and the player shoots the game ball directed to the second big winning opening C20. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 and starts the small hit gaming timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts a discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In the fourth embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, and then discharges after a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the small hit. The standby time is configured to end {Of course, the measurement method of the discharge standby time is not limited thereto, and, for example, the planned small hit game (in particular, the planned second large winning opening C20 Measurement may be started after the end of execution of the open pattern).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1710 whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712.

  Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball winning (entering) in the second large winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are present in the second large winning opening C20. In the case of Yes at step 1714, the process goes to step 1718. On the other hand, if No in step 1712 or step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small hit gaming timer MP41t in step 1716 and a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) related to opening of the big winning opening has elapsed. It is determined whether it has been done. In the case of Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1718.

  Next, in step 1718, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops driving the second large winning opening electric combination C21d and closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the discharge standby flag (the discharge standby time will be started from the main processing execution timing), and proceeds to step 1724. Also in the case of No in step 1701, the process shifts to step 1724.

  Next, in step 1724, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (10 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 1724, in step 1725, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the discharge standby flag. Next, at step 1728, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit gaming timer MP41t. Next, in step 1730, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 1750 (third processing)}. Also in the case of No at step 1710, step 1716 or step 1724, the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 1750 (third)}.

  Here, in this example, the maximum winning number set as a program is 10 in one small hit, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one small hitting is 1.8 seconds or less 1 .2 seconds (more specifically, as a mode of opening the big winning opening when executing a small hit once, a series of opening and closing "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → closed" Operation) and is controlled to close the winning opening when any closing condition is achieved. Here, it is desirable to control to close immediately after achieving the closing condition, in order to prevent over-winning and minimize deviation from the design value of the ball. On the other hand, even if it is treated as such, it enters the big winning opening immediately after the closing condition is achieved, or the prized ball stays in front of the count sensor (the count sensor detects the prized ball after achieving the closing condition) Can be considered. Therefore, in any case after exceeding the maximum winning number after the maximum opening time has elapsed, the winning is processed as a valid winning only under a predetermined condition (within a predetermined period after closing). It is desirable to do.

  Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the predetermined drive pattern (in this example, a pattern repeating “5 seconds closing → 1 second opening → 24 seconds closing”) as the upper shielding member The drive of C24 is started, and it transfers to the following processing (processing of step 1800). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the drive pattern of the upper shielding member C24 is changed, but in this example, the game ball wins V winning only when the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 matches the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Since it is configured to be able to enter the mouth C22, the opening time is set to a long time such as 3 seconds or not opened for 10 seconds or more from the start of driving, so it is impossible to enter the V winning opening C22 It is desirable not to configure. On the other hand, if No in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the upper shielding member C24 in the closed state (initial position) in step 1756 and terminates the drive, and the next processing {step 3450 (third) Transition to the processing of As described above, in the second embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving at the start of the small hit game (the opening of the second large winning opening C20 related to the small hit) as a trigger, and the small hit game ends. It is configured to end the drive as a trigger, and the small hit game is finished before driving once with the opening pattern of the upper shielding member C24, and the driving of the upper shielding member C24 is ended. There is. In addition, since the discharge standby time is provided for the small hit game, the small hit game does not end until the discharge standby time ends even after the opening of the second large winning opening C20 related to the small hit game is ended. It will be.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 3452, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the lower shielding member C25 with a constant drive pattern (in the present example, a pattern repeating “3 seconds closing → 1 second opening”) after power on. , Next processing {processing of step 1950 (third processing)}. As described above, the lower shielding member C25 is configured to start driving in response to power on of the gaming machine, while the upper shielding member C24 starts driving in response to the start of the small hit game.

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the V prize-winning-enter-ball determining process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) in FIG. 101 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag which is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during discharge standby time It is determined whether or not the flag (which is turned on) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1954 whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening C22. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a V winning opening effective period (period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hit game). Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V prize detection command (a command for executing a V prize detection effect described later) to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation reservation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a V winning opening valid period (period from the start timing of the small hit game to the discharge standby time end timing related to the small hit game) Is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device activation flag in step 1964, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Also in the case of No in step 1954, step 1956 or step 1962, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Also, in the case of No at step 1956, in other words, when the risk of unauthorized ball entry such as game ball entering the V winning opening C22 increases despite the fact that the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable to be configured to execute error processing as appropriate. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game concerning entering the ball into the V winning opening C22 is "9 R", and a series of "small hitting game → special game concerning entering the ball into V winning opening C22" is totaled Then, it becomes "10R" with "1R" of the round number which concerns on a small hit game, and "9R" of the round number which concerns on a special game. In this example, the round for entering the V winning hole C22 (specific area) is set as 1R (that is, the round from which balls can be obtained is for nine rounds of 2 to 10 rounds), After entering the V winning opening C22, it may be designed as 1R (that is, 10 rounds worth of rounds of 1 to 10 rounds can be obtained).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 109 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 6A is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2001 (third) and 2003 (third). That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2001 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the power on timer SM24t. The power on timer SM24t is provided to grasp the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, when the RAM clear information is received → sub side When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received → Reproduction related information at power-off is reset to the sub side RAM). Next, in step 2003 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side). In addition, the effect under execution, the information concerning the special symbol, etc. are not restored, and the "under preparation" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the CPUSC of the sub control board S, is repeatedly executed. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2500 (third) and 2550 (third). That is, in step 2300-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described above. Next, in step 2500 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a V winning detection effect display control process described later, and shifts to step 2400-2. In addition, after executing the special game related display control process in step 2400-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the small hit game related display control process described later in step 2550 (third), and proceeds to step 2999. Transition.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (third) in FIG. 109 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether a small hit execution start command (a command relating to the small hit game being started) has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S urges the launch of the game ball directed to the second large winning opening C20 (execution of the right strike) during the small hit game The command relating to the effect is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2900), and the process moves to step 2506. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the processing shifts to step 2506. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S causes the CPUSC of the sub control board S to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V prize detection command (V prize opening C22 from the main side) It is determined whether or not a command to execute V prize detection effect, which is an effect of (1), is received. If Yes in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command relating to the V winning detection effect in step 2508 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , The next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2506, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400). In addition, since the V prize detection effect is an effect for notifying the player that the game ball enters the V prize opening C22 and then the special game is executed, an effect for blessing the player as an effect content The contents and presentation contents and the like for notifying that the player has a high profit are desirable. For example, it is a presentation for displaying "V" on the full display area SG10 on the presentation display device SG.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of small hit game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (third) in FIG. 109 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the small hitting middle flag is off. If Yes in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2554 whether a small hit start command has been received from the main side. If YES in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit start display in step 2558 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). .

  Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the small hit middle flag, and proceeds to step 2564. Also in the case of No in step 2552, the processing shifts to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the small hitting end command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit end display in step 2566 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). . Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the small hitting middle flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2900). Also in the case of No in step 2554 or step 2564, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the operation relating to the winning of the V winning opening C22 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, in the same figure, when the small hit retention occurs, the upper shielding member C24 is released after the small hit retention occurs, which is calculated based on the number of reservations at the time of determining the fluctuation time. It is an action figure which illustrated the relation between time to start (it may only be written as "upper shielding member opening arrival time" hereafter) and the ease of entering the ball into the V winning opening C22. . In addition, in this example, the case where the suspension which concerns on a small hit generate | occur | produces is illustrated in a certain symbol change in which two suspension which concerns on a loss exist. Note that, in this example, the order of detention for holding is “first holding → second holding → third holding” (the third holding is holding for small hits). In addition, in the following, the time from the occurrence of the third suspension (= retention for small hit) to the end of the symbol variation in the variation is the same (2 seconds), and the first variation of the symbol variation start The random number value of the variation mode determination random number of the timing and the first to third suspension is the same (for example, the random number value of the variation mode determination random number of the first suspension and the second suspension is 799, and the variation mode determination random number of the third suspension The random number value of is 1023).

  First, when the suspension concerning small hit occurs during the symbol fluctuation that there are two suspension according to the loss, the third shielding (= retention according to the small hit) occurs in the upper shielding member open arrival time The time until the end of the symbol fluctuation during the fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the first hold, the fluctuation time of the second hold, and the fluctuation time of the third hold (= hold for small hit); It is calculated as a total time of the time from the opening of the upper shielding member C24 to the opening of the upper shielding member C24.

  Next, referring to the table at the top of the figure, the third suspension (= reserved for small hit) during the symbol change in which there are two suspension for the loss (the first suspension and the second suspension) In the situation where it occurred, as pattern A, when firing of the game ball is stopped after the third hold (= hold related to small hits) occurrence {especially, after the third hold (= hold related to small hits) occurred Is a case where a new hold does not occur}, and as the pattern B, when the game ball continues to be fired after the third hold (= hold pertaining to small hit) occurrence {especially, the third In the case where a new hold occurs after a hold (= hold for small hit) occurs, the upper shielding member opening arrival time of the case is exemplified.

  In pattern A, no new hold occurs after the third hold (= hold for small hit) occurs, and when the first hold change time is determined, the number of hold is 2 {second hold and second 3 pending (= pending for small hit)}, and when the second pending variable time is determined, the number of pendings is 1 {third pending (= pending for small hit)}, third pending (= At the time of determination of the fluctuation time according to the suspension related to the small hit, the number of reservations is 0. In this case, with reference to the lottery table for determining the first main game variation mode of FIG. 26, the time from the occurrence of the third suspension (= retention for small hit) to the end of the symbol variation during variation is 2 seconds Fluctuation time of the first hold is 5 seconds; fluctuation time of the second hold is 10 seconds; fluctuation time of the third hold (= hold for small hit) is 60 seconds; small hit game The time from the start to the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 82 seconds.

  Next, in the pattern B, after the third hold (= hold related to small hit) occurs, two new holds occur after the start of the symbol change of the first hold and before the start of the symbol change of the second hold In this case, the number of reservations is 2 at the time of determination of the first suspension, and the number of reservations at the time of determination of the second suspension. There are 3 pieces {third hold (= hold for small hit) and 2 newly generated hold}, and the number of holds is 2 when the fluctuation time for the third hold (= hold for small hit) is determined. (2 pieces of the newly generated hold). In this case, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table in FIG. 26 is referred to, and in pattern B, from the occurrence of the third suspension (= subscription pertaining to small hits) to the termination of symbol variation during variation Time of 2 seconds; fluctuation time of the first hold is 5 seconds; fluctuation time of the second hold is 5 seconds; fluctuation time of the third hold (= hold for small hit) is 60 seconds Yes; the time from the small hit game start to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 77 seconds.

  Here, as described above, the ease of entering the ball into the V winning hole C22 (whether or not the gaming ball can enter the V winning hole C22) depends on the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Is determined by whether or not they match well. That is, by referring to the upper shielding member opening arrival time and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25, it is easy to enter the V winning opening C22 during the small hitting game according to the pattern A and the pattern B It becomes possible to determine in advance.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the open aspect (closing aspect) of the upper shielding member C24 in each of the pattern A and the pattern B and the opening aspect (closing aspect) of the lower shielding member C25 (the lower shielding member C25 is a power source It is a timing chart which shows opening and closing periodically and repeatedly. In this timing chart, the elapsed time from the third hold (= hold for small hit) occurrence timing is illustrated on the basis of the third hold (= hold for small hit) occurrence timing. In addition, as the opening mode (closing mode) of the lower shielding member C25, the elapsed time from the third hold (= hold pertaining to small hit) occurrence timing is “4n + 1 (seconds)” to “4n + 2 (seconds)” (n Is an open state during the period in which

  As shown in this timing chart, in the pattern A, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 82 seconds have elapsed from the timing of occurrence of the third suspension (= retention pertaining to small hits); The time for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24 (0.2 seconds in this example) is 82.2 seconds, and the 82.2 seconds is “4n + 1 (seconds)”. “4” to “4 n + 2 (seconds)” (n is an integer). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 does not coincide with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25, and when the upper shielding member C24 is opened, the gaming ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 drops. When the lower shielding member C25 is reached, since the lower shielding member C25 is not opened, it is difficult to enter the V pay opening C22 located downstream of the lower shielding member C25 (by the lower shielding member C25 Entry to the winning opening C22 is easily inhibited). On the other hand, in the pattern B, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 77 seconds have elapsed from the third holding (= retention pertaining to small hit) occurrence timing, and the game ball is the upper shielding member C24 The time taken to reach the lower shielding member C25 (in this example, 0.2 seconds) is 77.2 seconds, and the 77.2 seconds is “4n + 1 (seconds)” to “4n + 2 (seconds) (N is an integer) (n = 19). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 coincides with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25, and by the opening of the upper shielding member C24, the gaming ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls and lowers. When reaching the shielding member C25, since the lower shielding member C25 is opened, it becomes easy to enter the V winning opening C22 located downstream of the lower shielding member C25 (if the lower shielding member C25, the game ball Entry into the V winning opening C22 is unlikely to be inhibited). In the case of the pattern A and the pattern B, the above-described emission continuation instruction effect is performed.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the pattern A, no new suspension occurs (the number of suspension is two) from the occurrence of suspension related to the small hit to the start of the symbol variation related to the small collision If pattern change is difficult to start in the above state = the time from the occurrence of the small hit retention to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 tends to be long) and the pattern B as small hit A new hold will occur between the occurrence of the hold related to a small hit and the start of the symbol change related to the small hit (the pattern change tends to be started while the number of held numbers is always 2 or more being maintained = small The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 can change in the case where the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started becomes short after the occurrence of the suspension related to the hit). Furthermore, because the change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 makes it possible to change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match well. When the player wins a small hit, it can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that pays attention to whether to enter the V winning opening C22.

  In the fourth embodiment, all the fluctuation times that can be executed corresponding to the number of holdings at the time of holding are confirmed based on the change mode determination random number of holdings that exists when holding relating to the small hit occurs. Based on the result, the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started after the suspension of the small hitting is generated in advance is calculated, and the calculated result and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 The small hit game is easy to enter the ball in the V winning opening C22 by further referring to (In addition, taking into consideration the time until the game ball reaches the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24) Change in the desired number of reservations (to match the timing of opening the upper shielding member C24 and the timing of opening the lower shielding member C25) Or) it is possible to predict. In this way, when it is possible to enter the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game execution pertaining to the hold when the hold that will be a small hit, is configured in this way, a combination of fluctuation time that will be possible to enter the ball It may be configured to be able to notify the player of the mode of firing of the game ball (or change in the desired number of holdings) that is likely to become an effect to the player as an effect, and by configuring in this way It will be possible to create a novel playability that whether or not the ball enters the ball can be determined by the technical intervention of the player.

  In the fourth embodiment, according to the number of reservations when determining the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol, the fluctuation time to be determined may be different so that a small hit is caused. Although the time until the lower shielding member C25 is opened can be changed to allow the technical intervention of the player, the time from the occurrence of a small hit holding to the opening of the lower shielding member C25 is made possible. The configuration to be different depending on the technical intervention of the player is not limited to this. For example, the variation of the main gaming symbol is forcibly stopped by pressing the player (1), and the stop symbol is displayed. (2) The main game symbol of both the 1st main game symbol and the 2nd main game symbol is made parallel to the same time by providing the fluctuation shortening button that will It is possible to draw If the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol becomes a small hit symbol, it is possible to execute the small hit game related to the small hit symbol. The period may be configured to pause the fluctuation time of the first main gaming symbol (elapse of fluctuation time), and the time may be made different.

  In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (for example, a specific small hit symbol is stopped, etc.) is satisfied, the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the small hit game execution. Effects to inform the player of the launch timing of the game ball to obtain (for example, on the effect display device SG, "If you enter the ball entry in the specified entry right now, it is a great chance to enter the V winning opening !!", etc. May be configured to be executed.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the specific gaming state, there is a probability fluctuation gaming state in which the success or failure lottery result is advantageous to the player as compared with the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, and the second big prize in the special game It is configured to have an allotment game execution round which is a round in which the mouth C20 is opened, and by entering the V prize hole C22 during the allotment game execution round, it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the special game is over. It may be configured as described above (a so-called ball game as exemplified in the third embodiment). In addition, when configured as such, in the round before the distribution game execution round, the game balls are fired at such a timing that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C22 in the distribution game execution round It is desirable to configure to be able to execute effects to be notified to the person (for example, on the effect display device SG, "If you enter the second large winning opening now, it will be displayed as a large chance of a definite change!" Etc.) .

<Structure of the big winning opening>
In the fourth embodiment, the number of gaming balls passing through a specific area in the special winning opening (for example, the V winning opening C22 provided in the second large winning opening C20) related to the operation of the condition device It is configured not to exceed approximately one-tenth of the number of game balls that will be winning in the special winning opening. In the fourth embodiment, one specific area (for example, the V winning opening C22) is provided, and a movable object (for example, the lower shielding member C25) for changing the ease of passing the specific area is mounted thereon. Although the specific area itself is determined in advance without changing depending on the game, a plurality of specific areas may be provided. In addition, as for the movable object, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening affects the result of the game from the time when the special motorized product at the time of non-operation of the product continuous operation device starts to operate. Until the time, a constant operation is always continued (a series of operations is repeated), and the ratio of the number of gaming balls passing a specific area is configured to match the design value.

  More specifically, as the configuration of the fourth embodiment, two movable objects of the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are provided as movable objects in the second large winning opening C20, and the upper shielding member The C24 starts driving at the start of the small hit game and ends driving at the end of the small hit game, and the lower shielding member C25 always drives with a constant drive pattern after power on. It is configured to Further, although not shown, when the game ball continues to be launched toward the second large winning opening C20 while the small hit is being executed, the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24. And the lower shielding member C25 make it difficult to enter the V winning opening C22 and difficult to enter the second large winning opening outlet C23, and the game ball has entered the second large winning opening C20. Less than a tenth of game balls enter V winning opening C22, and game balls that enter the other second large winning opening C20 are configured to enter the second large winning opening outlet C23 There is.

  Here, the constant constant operation includes the case where the movable object continues to operate after the power is turned on, and the movable object is stopped at a constant cycle, or during the operation of the bonus continuous actuation device (the operation of the special motorized symbol The case is also included where the movable object performs a certain operation triggered by one out of the number of game balls that have won a prize.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, a game ball with a special area, a game ball which is won by one trigger at the time when the character continuous actuation device is not activated is in the direction of a fall of a game ball which is won by another trigger A rolling surface of the game ball is formed to shorten the residence time of the game ball in the big winning opening so as not to give a change (in order to have a steep inclination from the front-back inclination of the center decoration stage) Inclined towards the outlet). In addition, before it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the large winning opening by one trigger at the time when the bonus product continuous actuation device is not activated passes through the specific area, the winning to the starting opening of another game ball Thus, the discharge ball detection sensor is provided so as not to open again and the like, and the variation start condition of the design is satisfied upon detection of the discharge ball detection sensor or the elapse of a predetermined time after closing.

<<< Configuration of gaming machine according to this example >>>
Here, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present example or the configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below.
<< Performance of ordinary electric role products >>
Hereinafter, the performance of the ordinary motorized part (in this example, the second main game start opening electric part B11d) in this example will be described in detail.

<Basic performance>
In this example, the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) is changed in response to the passage of the auxiliary game start port H10, and the stop mode of the ordinary symbol (auxiliary game symbol) changes the variable member (for example, the second main game start aperture It has only one ordinary motorized part that opens the object B11d). As described above, in the present example, upon receiving a prize on the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20), the ordinary electric role (for example, the second main game starting opening) It is configured such that the electric part B11 d) is not opened, and the relation between the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20) and the normal electric symbol operated by the operation of the normal symbol display device is predetermined. It is configured not to change in the gaming state etc. (whether or not it is the probability variation gaming state, whether it is the time shortening gaming state, whether or not the special game is being executed, etc.) Thus, the complexity of the game is kept within a certain range while changing the operation ratio etc. of the ordinary electric role. In addition, needless to say, the normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20) is configured to operate only when passing a specific gate (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10), Under the conditions, the normal symbol display does not operate.

  In addition, in this example, the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20) does not operate while the ordinary electric role product (for example, the second main game start opening electric role object B11d) is operating. Is configured. Here, the game ball passes the auxiliary game start port H10, and the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) is variably displayed with "while the normal electric character is operating", and then the normal symbol display device After the combination of the symbols that the ordinary electric combination will operate above is displayed (does not include it when displayed), the winning opening for the ordinary combination of electric common opening starts from opening etc. It means until the time when the said condition ends through the state where the winning opening concerning the electric motor winning combination is open. Also, in order to be able to clearly grasp the operation of the ordinary motorized part, it is possible to confirm that the operation has been completed while the ordinary motorized part is operating, and after the end of the latter operation, The fact that the operation has been finished can be notified by providing a predetermined blank time before the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, or by outputting an electric decoration device (for example, game effect lamp D26) or a speaker (for example, speaker D24). desirable.

<Pending storage performance>
In this example, the operation of the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) is ended from the time the game ball passes the auxiliary game start port H10 (when the normal symbol display device is to be operated). Operation of the ordinary electric symbol since time until the symbol combination for which the ordinary electric symbol (for example, the second main game start opening electric symbol B11d) is activated is displayed in the ordinary symbol display device If more than four game balls pass the auxiliary game start port H10 before the game is over, the first four games are played after the normal symbol display device or the normal motor game is finished operating. It is configured not to store passing information for more than the four such that the normal symbol display device can not be operated continuously by passing a gate other than a ball (the upper limit number of the auxiliary game holding balls is It is configured to pieces). Here, "when the operation of the normal symbol display device is finished" refers to the time when the variation ends after passing through the state where the variation of the combination of the symbols on the normal symbol display device continues. The term “after the actuation of the ordinary electric combination is finished” means the time after the state is completed after the winning opening for the ordinary combination is opened or the like. In addition, with "the operation of the normal symbol display device", the game ball passes through the gate where the normal symbol display device is operated, and the action on the normal symbol display device by the effect of the first four game balls After the combination of the symbols on the normal symbol display device starts to change, it means from the time when the change is continuing to the time when the change is ended.

  Specifically, in this example, as exemplified in step 1110 of FIG. 7, the number of auxiliary game holding upper limit is 4 in all the embodiments, and the number of auxiliary game holding balls is the upper limit Even if the game ball passes the auxiliary game start port H10 in the situation, a new auxiliary game holding ball based on the passage is not generated. In addition, the auxiliary game holding upper limit number is not limited to only four, and there is no problem even if it changes.

<Performance of normal pattern>
In this example, when the game ball passes the gate (for example, it may be the auxiliary game start opening H10 and may be a winning opening) (only when the normal symbol display device is to be operated) the normal symbol The time until the combination of symbols is displayed on the display device (for example, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20) is predetermined. Here, "when the combination of symbols is displayed on the normal symbol display device" is "when the operation of the normal symbol display device is finished", and "predetermined" is a characteristic of one gaming machine It means that it has been decided. Specifically, the time from the time the normal symbol display device starts to operate until the time the operation is ended is determined in advance by the gaming ball.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins a winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary game or passes through the gate (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10), the normal symbol display device (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20) The time until the combination of symbols is displayed (the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol) is 1 second in the case of the time shortening gaming state (the auxiliary gaming time short flag is on) in the case of this embodiment. In the case of the gaming state (auxiliary game time short flag off), it is 10 seconds, and is a predetermined time value. In addition, it is connected to the main control board M side which it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol or shorten the fluctuation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol by operating the shortening button (not shown, though operated) It is desirable not to have a function to change the time until the combination of the symbols in the operation is displayed after the normal symbol display device is activated, such as a variation shortening function based on the operation of the button). Can be expected to be easier.

<Probability fluctuation function>
In this example, the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state, as a value of the probability that the combination of the symbols that the normal electric role (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) will be operated is displayed Two probabilities are defined: probability of auxiliary game short flag off) and probability of power support game state (sometimes referred to as time saving gaming state, auxiliary game short flag on). The transition to the power support gaming state is set to be made only when the operation of the bonus continuous operating device is finished (when the winning is finished). Specifically, it is a probability that a combination of symbols that the normal electric role (the second main game start opening electric role B11d) is to be operated is displayed in the non-time shortening gaming state (auxiliary game time short flag off) "14/1024" and the probability that the combination of symbols that the normal electric role (the second main game start opening electric role B11d) is activated in the time reduction gaming state (the auxiliary game time short flag on) is displayed There are two types of "1023/1024". Note that one of the probabilities may be configured to be “0 / n” or “1/1” (be sure to be always or be always hit).

<Modification example in which a plurality of ordinary electric role pieces are provided>
In this example, from the relationship equipped with the special motorized role, the one equipped with only one ordinary motorized role (only one of the second main game start opening motorized role B11d) was illustrated, but the special Instead of mounting the motorized part, it is also possible to mount a plurality of ordinary motorized parts. In this case, it is desirable that the variable winning device be prevented from being simultaneously opened by the operation of a plurality of ordinary motorized items. Specifically, from the time when the combination of symbols that would activate one ordinary motorized symbol is displayed on one ordinary symbol display device, another period from when the actuation of the ordinary motorized symbol is completed. A control process is performed on the normal symbol display device so as to stop with the symbol that does not normally operate the electric combination and to continue the display in the state as it is, or a predetermined variation time (auxiliary game By interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time according to the symbol and performing control processing so as not to stop the symbol, it is possible to simultaneously control the variable winning device not to open. In addition, when setting value is provided, it is also possible to provide the operation probability (normal symbol hitting probability) of the ordinary motorized combination for each setting value. In addition, in the case where a plurality of ordinary motorized prizes are provided, all the actuation probabilities may be changed for each set value, or only a part of the actuation probabilities (for example, a plurality of ordinary motorized prizes are continuously In the case of a so-called general electric appliance (if necessary, refer to Patent No. 5213219) formed so as to operate, the operation probability of the ordinary motorized part serving as the starting point may be changed.

<< Performance of Special Motorized Rolled Goods>
Hereinafter, the performance of the special electric combination (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) in this example will be described in detail.

<< Performance of Special Motorized Rolled Goods>
<Number of special motorized parts / conditional devices>
As an example of the number of special electric role (large winning opening) in this example, in this embodiment, the number of special electric roles (large winning opening) is the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20. The number of special symbol display devices (main game symbol display devices) is two: the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20, and the number of condition devices is Only one condition device flag is provided, and the big hit is configured to start only when the condition device flag is turned on.

<Operating Performance of Special Electric Parts>
In the present example (for example, the fourth embodiment), two special electrically-powered prizes are mounted (two large winning openings are provided), but in any specially-powered prizes, the prize continuous operation is performed. When the device is not operating, it is configured to operate only when a predetermined combination of small hit symbols (except those related to the operation of the condition device) is displayed. Here, when the prize continuous actuation device is in operation, after the actuation trigger occurs (does not include when it occurs), the special winning opening pertaining to the special electric role according to the prize continuous actuation device The state (during execution of the big hit) where the big winning a prize mouth which relates to the special electric role which relates to the particular item continuous movement device from the time when opening etc is started (from the time when the big hit starts) It means until the time when the condition concerned ends (the big hit ends). In addition, with “operation of the condition device”, a combination of symbols that the condition device is to be operated is displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, when the process of step 1423 of FIG. Or when the game ball passes a specific area in the winning opening such as opening when the accessory continuous operating device is not operating (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1956 of FIG. 108) From this, the state ends (for example, the big hit is gone) through the state (for example, during the big hit running) of the big prize winning opening which relates to the special electric role thing which relates to the particular item continuous actuation device being open continuously etc. Say) until the end).

  In addition, with the operation of the special electric combination, when the combination continuous operation device is operating, after the operation trigger by the combination continuous movement device occurs, the special winning opening for the special electric combination The state is ended after the state (for example, during the big hit being executed) of the big winning opening which relates to the particular special electric combination from the time when the open etc is started (for example, the big hit started) (For example, it means up to the time when the big hit ends), except when the continuous product operation device is operating, after the operation trigger of the special electric role occurs, From the time when the winning opening starts opening etc. (for example, a small hit starts), the big winning opening pertaining to the special electric role is opened etc. (for example, during a small hit) It refers to the time when the condition ends (eg, small hits end). In the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment, the small hit starts with the stop display of the small hit symbol, and the second big winning opening C20 (special electric combination) opens based on the small hit. Is configured as.

  Moreover, in this example, when the operation trigger occurs, the special motorized product is operated so that the relationship between the operation and the operation trigger can be grasped, and the operation trigger by the product continuous operation device occurs. The blank time between rounds (sometimes referred to as the time between rounds) is set so that it operates without interruption to such an extent that it can be recognized as being continuous for the second and subsequent operations of the special motorized part by the occasion. There is. Specifically, while running a big hit, we recognize that multiple rounds in the big hit are consecutive for the time value of the time between rounds (the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round of one round) It is preferable to design the time value to the extent that it is possible (when the time between rounds is too long, it becomes difficult to recognize that a plurality of rounds are continuous), and in this example, the ball out performance (feature The time between rounds is appropriately set between about 60 ms and about 3000 ms, taking into consideration the ratio etc.).

  Furthermore, in this example, a symbol (for example, a small hit symbol) for operating the special motorized part only once and a symbol (for example, a big hit symbol) for operating the condition device are clearly distinguished, and these are operated simultaneously ( There is no specific symbol combination such that a small hit and a big hit occur simultaneously when the symbols are displayed. On the other hand, at the time of operation of the item continuous operating device, the two special motorized items are arbitrarily operated within a range not exceeding 10 times in total. Specifically, in the case where a large winning opening is configured to have two, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20, when executing a 10 round big hit, “1 round to 5 rounds: The first large winning opening C10 is configured so that the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 do not operate at the same time, such as the first large winning opening C10 is open, and the sixth large to 10 rounds are open. And, the number of times of operation of the two special motorized items is set within a range not exceeding 10 times in total. In addition, it is set so that the operation of the special electric role is always accompanied by two or more times for one operation of the bonus product continuous operation device (big hit), and the small hit game and the big hit game are clearly discriminated (In the small hit game, the special electric bonus works only once).

In the present example, the main game symbol is configured not to change in response to entering the special winning opening, and the special electric winning combination of 1 is used to set a predetermined winning opening other than the 1 special winning opening. It is constituted so that opening etc. do not arise about a winning a prize mouth. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special game from being generated in a loop and the complication of the one special game game mode.
In addition, the special winning opening that is opened by the operation of the special motorized combination is determined in advance so that it does not fluctuate depending on each game, and is also opened by the operation of the specially set motorized combination and the special motorized combination. The relationship with the winning opening is set to be one to one.

<Dumped ball performance / operating probability etc. of special electric role (big hit)>
In this example, in order to keep the expulsivity within a certain range, the special motorized symbol is continuously operated by one operation of the object continuous operating device (big hit) with regard to the big hit ball performance and the operating probability (big hit probability) A total of the number of times of operation (for example, the expected value of the number of execution rounds at the big hit) N times, the maximum value of the maximum number of winnings for the special electric role (for example, one big round at the big hit will end Maximum number of game balls to be acquired when one game ball wins a large winning opening (for example, winning ball paid out when one ball is entered into a large winning opening) It is set so that the operation probability M (for example, the expected value of the big hit winning probability) does not exceed “M × N × R × S ≦ 7.5” when the number) is S. It should be noted that it is also preferable to set the operation probability M high, for example, in the case where game characteristics are given in the process of winning the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10). It may be configured not to exceed about M × N × R × S ≦ 12 ”.

Further, when designing a gaming machine, it may be designed to satisfy the condition different from “M × N × R × S ≦ 7.5”, and may be configured as follows.
Satisfy “N × R × S ≦ 1500”, in other words, design without considering M. The “N × R × S” is preferably configured to be equal to or less than an appropriately determined predetermined number, and the predetermined number is not limited to 1,500. In addition, if the number of gaming balls paid out in one big hit is designed to be 1,500 or less, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit exceeds 10 times (for example, 16 times) It may be configured to be

More specifically, using the present embodiment, MH is the higher jackpot probability (the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state), ML is the lower jackpot probability (the jackpot probability in the non probability variation gaming state), the jackpot probability When P is the expected value of the number of times the start of the big hit in the case where is the higher one (probability fluctuation gaming state) is P,
MH = 410/65536 ≒ 0.0063, ML = 205/65536 ≒ 0.003,
P 1.3 1.357,
S = 15, R = 10, N = 10
M = (P + 1) ÷ {(P ÷ MH) + (1 ÷ ML)} = 0.0044 (1 / 227.663)
Therefore,
M × N × R × S = 0.0044 × 10 × 10 × 15 ≒ 6.5886 ≦ 7.5
“M × N × R × S ≦ 7.5” is satisfied.
Although detailed calculation is omitted, in the other embodiments, each value is set to satisfy “M × N × R × S ≦ 7.5”.

となることが望ましい。また、本実施形態のように、高い値のまま一定回数抽せんを行う場合は、その一定回数は、あらかじめ定められた一の値（以下この項でγとする。）とすることが望ましい。なお、このときのＰ・α・γの関係は、

となることが望ましい。 In this example, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the value of the operation probability M is changed from a low value to a high value at each end (end of the big hit) of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (non-probability If you win a big hit in the variable gaming state, and you transition to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is finished that we will win the lottery), or lottery that does not change the high value (may be called high probability variation lottery ) (If you win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, and you move to the probability variation gaming state again after the big hit ends, it is assumed that you have won the lottery), but in any case, the winning probability is And a predetermined value (hereinafter, α (0 <α ≦ 1) in this section).
In addition, although not adopted in the present embodiment, when the value of the operation probability M is a high value, a lottery in which the value of the operation probability M is varied from a high value to a low value for each lottery for one operation of the condition device. In the case of performing (a fall lottery may be referred to), it is desirable that the winning probability be a predetermined one value (hereinafter referred to as β (0 ≦ β <1) in this section).
Note that the relationship between the values of P · α · β when changing the probability is

It is desirable that Further, as in the present embodiment, when the extraction is performed a fixed number of times with a high value, it is desirable that the fixed number of times be a predetermined one value (hereinafter referred to as γ in this section). The relationship between P · α · γ at this time is

It is desirable that

  Although it is possible to have two or more of the above α, β and γ, in the present example, α, β and γ are each configured to be one or less in consideration of probability setting of the gaming machine There is. Further, it is desirable that α in the case of performing the high probability fluctuation lottery by the structure as in the present embodiment satisfies the above relationship as the physically possible maximum value “1”. Further, it is desirable that β in the case of performing a falling lottery by a structure satisfies the above relationship as “0” which is the physically possible minimum value. It is desirable that P when the number of times of operation of the condition device at the time of high probability is set has the above relationship satisfied as the smaller one of the limit value and the calculated value.

  More specifically, in this example, there are two types of jackpot probability, and in the present embodiment, for example, the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state corresponding to the lower one of the values of the operation probability is It is "205/65536", and the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state corresponding to the higher one of the values of the operation probability is "410/65536". As described above, it is desirable to set so as not to exceed 10 times (for example, 2 times) that of the one with high operation probability but low, thereby suppressing the extremely high withdrawal rate in a short period of time . If a fraction below the decimal point occurs, the number of random numbers may be determined by rounding off the fraction part, or by rounding off the fraction part, the number of fraction parts may be rounded up or down as appropriate. It is preferable to set so that the high value of the operation probability does not exceed 10 times the low value, even in the case of determining. Here, to illustrate the case where the number of random numbers is determined by rounding off the fractional part, the jackpot probability (low probability) in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state corresponding to the lower one of the values of the operation probability is "1/100". If there is a high value of the operation probability is 2.6 times, the jackpot probability (high probability) in the probability variation gaming state corresponding to the high value of the operation probability is "2.6 / 100" Since it is not possible to have a value after the decimal point as a prefix, it is possible to round "2.6" to "3" and to "3/100". In addition, in the case of setting the high probability time to 2.6 times in the gaming machine having the setting described later, for example, in the case of setting 1, the low probability time: 1/100, the high probability: 2.6 / 100 is rounded off. In the case of setting 2, low probability: 2/100, high probability: 5.2 / 100 rounded off to 5/100, and in the case of setting 3, low probability: 3/100, high Probability time: rounding off 7.8 / 100 may be 8/100.

  Moreover, although the example which designs the value with high operation probability based on the value with low operation probability was shown, it is not limited to this, When designing the value with low operation probability based on the value with high operation probability For example, in the case of setting 1, the high probability is 26/1000, and when the operation probability is multiplied by 2.6, the low probability is 10/1000. In case of setting 2, the high probability is 60/1000, and when the operation probability is multiplied by 2.6, the low probability is 23.07 / 1000 and the decimal probability is low when it is rounded off to 23/1000. . In case of setting 3, the high probability is 105/1000, and when the operation probability is multiplied by 2.6, the low probability is 40.3 / 1000, and when the decimal part is rounded off, the low probability is 40/1000. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, when the operation probability in the high setting is based on high and low values, in the case of setting 3, if the low probability is 15/1000 and the high probability is 39/1000, the operation probability is 2. It is six times. In the case of setting 2, when the low probability: 13/1000 and the high probability: 34/1000, the operation probability is 2.61 times. In the case of setting 1, when the low probability: 11/1000 and the high probability: 29/1000, the operation probability is 2.63 times. As described above, it is also possible to configure the magnification of the operation probability in each setting to be approximately 2.6 times.

  Next, as another method, an example will be described in which the operation probability multiplication factor is rounded off when the operation probability is changed from a low value to a high value. For example, if the lowest probability is the low probability in setting 1, first, the low probability in setting 1 is 205/65536 = 1 / 319.68..., And then the low probability in setting 2 is 206/65536 = 1 / Next, the low probability in setting 3 can be designed by arranging numbers so that 207/65536 = 1 / 316.59. The high probability in setting 1 is 1875/65536 = 1 / 34.95..., The high probability in setting 2 is 1885/65536 = 1 / 34.76..., The high probability in setting 3 is 1894/65536 In the case where = 1 / 34.60 ..., the operation probability is 9.19 times in setting 1, 9.15 times in setting 2, and 9.15 times in setting 3, and the decimal point or less It is also possible to configure it so that it becomes all "9" times when rounding off.

Also, when designing the setting number and the big hit probability of the random number for each setting, it is preferable to design from the lowest probability, and by configuring in this way, it is set so as not to exceed (fall below) the lowest probability to be set. It is possible to

  Furthermore, it is also possible to configure as follows, and the low probability in setting 1 is 205/65536 = 319.68 ..., and the low probability in setting 2 is 206/65536 = 1 / 318.13 ..., Design at the low probability in setting 3, 207/65536 = 1 / 316.59 ..., and calculate the big hit probability of the high probability using the value that becomes "8" when rounding off after the decimal point, and set The probability of 1 being multiplied by 8 is 205 × 8/65536 = 1640/65536 = 1 / 39.96, and it becomes 1/40 when the decimal part is rounded off. In setting 2, the probability of being multiplied by 7.961 is set to 206 × 7.961... /65536=1640/65536=1/39.96, and it is 1/40 when the decimal part is rounded off. In setting 3, 7.922 ... probability of doubling is 207 × 7.922 ... / 65536 = 1640/65536 = 1 / 39.96, and it should be configured to be 1/40 when rounding off after the decimal point It is possible to avoid setting differences in the high probability jackpot probability. With this configuration, for example, in the ST machine, since there is no setting difference in the high probability big hit probability, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the setting difference does not occur in the continuation rate. In addition, it is configured to win a prize in the second main game start opening B10 by opening the normal electric role (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) during the time saving game state, and the second main game start opening Even in the game machine equipped with a small hit in B10, since the big hit probability is configured so as not to cause the setting difference as described above, set the rate at which the time saving game state ends based on the occurrence of the big hit It can be constant regardless of the value.

  In addition, a method is exemplified in which the ratio of the value with the high operation probability to the value with the low operation probability is made uniform at all setting values. For example, in the case of setting 1, when the low probability is 10/1000 and the high probability is 26/1000, the operation probability is 2.6 times, and rounding off after the decimal point results in “3” times. In the case of setting 2, when the low probability is 21/1000 and the high probability is 60/1000, the operation probability is 2.85..times. And becomes “3” times when rounding off the decimal point . In the case of setting 3, when the low probability is 31/1000 and the high probability is 105/1000, the operation probability is 3.38 ··· and doubled, and rounding off after the decimal point results in '3' . As described above, in any setting, the ratio in the case where the value from the low value to the high value among the values of the operation probability is within the range of 2.5 to 3.4 which is 3 when the decimal point is rounded off. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the rate of change of the jackpot probability substantially while configuring the operation probability to be high at a constant rate regardless of the set value, and thus utilizing the difference Can be diversified.

  In addition, when setting the low probability and the high probability for each setting value in game machine development, define the low probability prefix first and multiply the defined value by multiples (multiple using the above example) The value obtained by multiplying “9”) is defined as a high probability prefix, and the high probability prefix is defined earlier, and the multiple of the defined value (multiple “9” using the above example) In the case where the value obtained by dividing) is used as a low probability suffix, a change occurs in the probability difference for each setting difference that occurs when the calculated value is rounded off. That is, in the low probability that the setting number is smaller than the maximum value of the random numbers, when the value of the setting number calculated for each setting value is finally rounded off, the probability difference for each setting value becomes large, and the maximum value of the random numbers On the other hand, in the high probability that the setting number becomes large, when the value of the setting number calculated for each setting value is finally rounded off, the probability difference between the setting values becomes small. When using this to design low probability and high probability based on a design concept that reduces the setting difference of high probability, for example, the low probability unit number is first defined and given as the value. It is desirable to use the product of multiplication of multiples as the high probability prefix, and when designing the low probability and the high probability based on the design concept that the high probability setting difference is large, the high probability prefix It is desirable to first define and divide the value by a predetermined multiple to obtain a low probability prefix.

  Here, for example, when there is no numerical value or the like in the program, such as on condition that the game ball has passed the continuation area in the big winning opening during unit game (during round execution at big hit), N mentioned above is It is desirable to set as the maximum value which can continue (for example, 16 which is the maximum number of rounds).

  In addition, it is possible to provide a unit game in which the time such as opening one big winning opening is less than 1.8 seconds when the bonus product continuous operation device is operating (when a big hit is in progress). Although it is not desirable from the functional viewpoint as "," it is desirable to set the operation probability without including the parameter (big hit probability, number of rounds, etc.) relating to the jackpot when adopted to enhance the game interest. In addition, N in the gaming machine having a plurality of special symbol display devices (for example, the first main gaming symbol display device A20, the second main gaming symbol display device B20) is the value of the special symbol display device which is the maximum value It is desirable to set the maximum value of each of N, R and S when there are a plurality of values.

  Furthermore, in this example, the sum of the number of times the special motorized component operates continuously (number of execution rounds of the big hit) by one operation of the product continuous operating device corresponds to all jackpots (operation of the character continuous operating device) ) Is set not to exceed 10 times, and it is configured such that only one of the two big winning openings is opened for each unit game in one big hit (activation of the character continuous operating device) (each It is determined in advance for each jackpot which large winning opening is opened in the unit game). Here, the "total number of times of operation" refers to the total number of times of operation of each special electric vehicle, and is specified when the character continuous operation device is not operating (for example, during a small hit) The special electric role associated with the special winning opening having the area (for example, the V winning opening C22) in the special winning opening is activated, and the condition device is activated by passing a specific area in the special winning opening. In the case where the related product continuous operation device is operated (for example, the configuration of the fourth embodiment is applicable and such a configuration may be referred to as a small hit V), the operation of the special motorized component is also performed. It is set by including in the number of operations.

  In addition, in the situation where one special electric combination according to the combination continuous movement device is operating, another special electric combination operates by winning etc. to a predetermined starting opening, or the other special special combination The operating condition is determined so that the function related to other special electric powered products does not operate when the continuous product operating device is activated so that it does not operate when the special winning opening pertaining to the present invention is opened etc. It is done.

  Also, in this example, the number of consecutive actuations (number of execution rounds) of the special electric combination is determined according to the type of symbol (big hit symbol) that triggered the occurrence of big hit, but another lottery device can be provided . In that case, it is desirable to provide a predetermined one probability as the lottery probability so that the probability does not change each time a game is played. In addition, when determining the number of times of continuous operation of the special motorized symbol, it is performed immediately upon operation of the item continuous operation device, and the result of the determination is specified, and after the result is specified, the specified number is indicated. It is desirable not to change the information.

  Furthermore, unlike in this example, for example, when passing to a specific area in the big winning opening is a continuation condition (continuing condition of big hit, execution condition of next round), the continuation condition of unit game is set. In the case, the special motorized part will display the maximum number of times it is physically possible to operate continuously (eg 4 times without fulfilling the continuation condition before performing the maximum number of rounds Even when the big hit ends in the execution of the unit game, it is desirable to display the display related to 10 times which is the maximum number of unit games at the start of the big hit).

  In addition, it is desirable that the passing area is set so that it does not change or become invalid or effective (limited to the effective period of winning itself in the big winning opening) depending on the state of the game, and the passing rate to the passing area In the case of providing a structure to make the variable, it is desirable that the constant operation be continued at all times during operation of the accessory continuous operation device so that it can not be adjusted from the outside. Incidentally, N of “M × N × R × S ≦ 7.5” described above may be calculated as the maximum number of times that the special motorized combination can physically operate continuously. Here, the constant constant operation means that the movable object continues to operate after the power is turned on, that the movable object is stopped at a constant cycle, and the operating apparatus for continuously operating the item (during the operation of the special electric symbol) The movable object carries out a certain operation triggered by the number of game balls that have won a prize.

  It is acceptable that the gaming machine has a structure in which a plurality of specific areas are provided, and the number of times the special motorized product is continuously operated per area. Also, N in this case is the maximum number of times that the special motorized part can physically operate continuously.

<Special motorized part (big hit) end processing etc>
In this example, as the operation termination process of the item continuous actuation device (big hit), when the operation of the item continuous actuation device (big hit) is finished, the operation of the special motorized item and the condition device is finished. There is a process in which the special motor vehicle and the condition device do not reactivate due to any operation caused by the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device after the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is finished. As an example, the flag continuous operating device performs clearing processing (turns off all flags) of all the flags turned on by the operation of the character continuous operating device (at the big hit start, the big hit running, etc.) It is preferable to execute the clearing process of the RAM area used in the operation (at the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.).

<Operation processing of special symbol display device>
In this example, the special symbol display device (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, only when the game ball wins the start opening (for example, the first main game start aperture A10, the second main game start aperture B10) The symbol of the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured to change, and is configured not to change the symbol triggered by another condition. In addition, the special symbol display device prohibits the fluctuation of the symbol (set the non-operation of the special motorized symbol as the fluctuation start condition) so as not to operate while the special motorized symbol is activated. Here, "while the special motorized item is in operation" means that after the operation trigger occurs at the time of operation and non-operation of the item continuous operation device, the winning opening for the special electric symbol is opened. In this example, it means from the time when the etc. is started (does not include the time of opening etc.) through the state that the special winning opening pertaining to the special electric combination is open etc. Win big hit, open from the opening of the big winning opening pertaining to the big hit until the end of the big hit, or win the small hitting, opening the big winning opening pertaining to the small hit ends the small hit It's up to you.

  Further, in the present example, in order to clarify that "the operation of the special electric symbol is finished", an effect display indicating the end of the operation is executed. Specifically, a command indicating that the special motorized product has finished operating is transmitted to the side of the sub control board S, and based on the command, an end effect (for example, special game end demonstration time effect) is given for a predetermined time (for example, 1 s to 10 s) is configured to execute.

  In this example, two special symbol display devices are provided (two of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20), and one condition device or one special symbol display device For another special symbol display device from the time when the combination of symbols that would activate the special motorized symbol is displayed until the operation of the condition device or special motorized symbol is finished Is configured to not execute, but one special symbol display device and another special symbol display device are displayed in parallel (eg, the first main game symbol and the second main Configuration (sometimes referred to as 1 type + 1 type parallel type), in order not to perform processing such as a big hit that would be complicated when overlapping, or a big hit more than necessary One pattern so as not to enhance the performance of Is stopped by a symbol that will activate the condition device and the special motorized symbol, another symbol is forcibly stopped with the symbol that does not mean to activate the condition device and the special electric symbol, and it is displayed as it is The control is performed so as not to stop the symbol after the measurement is made to continue or the measurement of the predetermined fluctuation time is interrupted. That is, when it is possible to execute a parallel lottery in which the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the other symbol (another symbol) is a big hit while one symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When stop display is performed with a symbol or a small hit symbol, it is preferable to perform control to forcibly stop one symbol with a lost symbol or to control to temporarily stop fluctuation of one symbol.

<Number of special symbol display devices pending>
In this example, a combination of symbols for which the special electric symbol will be activated is displayed on the special symbol display device from when the game ball wins the start opening to when the operation of the special symbol display device ends. Operation of the item continuous operation device operated by the operation of the condition device from the time when the operation of the special electric vehicle ends until the time when the combination of symbols that the condition device operates is displayed In the case where more than four game balls win the start-up opening before the end of the game, the special symbol display device, the special electric symbol or the symbol continuous operation device is not operated, The special symbol display device can not continue to be operated by the winning of game balls other than the first four game balls among the number of game balls of more than four.

  Specifically, the upper limit number for holding on the first main game side is four, the upper limit number for holding on the second main game side is four, and the number for holding on the first main game side is the upper limit number If the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10 in the situation where the first main game start slot A10, the first main game side holding ball is not newly generated (for example, No in the process of step 1304 of FIG. 23) If the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in a situation where the number of reservations on the second main game side is four, which is the upper limit, the second main The game-side holding ball is configured not to newly occur (for example, in the case of determining No in the process of step 1314 in FIG. 23).

<Special symbol variation time setting process>
In this example, the ball is entered into the starting opening of the gaming ball in order to make the time from when the gaming ball wins the starting opening to the time when the combination of symbols is displayed on the special symbol display device. The time from the time the special symbol display starts to operate until the time it ends is set. Here, the time when the combination of symbols is displayed on the special symbol display device means the time when the operation of the special symbol display device is finished, and the predetermined one is determined as the characteristic of one gaming machine Say. Specifically, before the start of fluctuation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, the fluctuation time is determined using a fluctuation time determination table previously determined according to the gaming state and the number of holdings, and the fluctuation time is determined. After the determination, it is configured not to change the determined variation time. In this example, at the time of symbol stop, the movable character or another display image (for example, displayed on the effect display device SG) so that the player can clearly confirm that the combination of symbols is displayed. Control) so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the design. In addition, from the viewpoint of ball design, the function to fluctuate the time until the combination of the symbols in the operation is displayed after the special symbol display device is activated by the operation of the fluctuation time shortening button etc. is not installed. , You may be equipped with a function to change the fluctuation time, in that case, to limit the shortening function in a certain range so as to reduce the impact on the ball design (determine the range of time, operable game It is desirable to determine the state (for example, during power support, etc., it is effective only in the game period in which the original fluctuation time is set short).

<Material of game machine>
Hereinafter, materials relating to the configuration of the gaming machine that can be applied to the gaming machine of the present example will be illustrated.

  The material of the game balls usable for the game machine in this example is made of steel and is a uniform material.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the material of the winning opening is a hard plastic or other material, and is configured such that it is damaged by a drop or other impact of the game ball, or its shape is less likely to be deformed.

  Moreover, in this example, the material of the shaft of the game nail and the wind turbine is a metal having brass having a Vickers hardness of 150 Hv or more and 230 Hv or less, or a metal having a hardness equivalent thereto, which is easily rusted and not broken. It has become. In addition, the material of the game nail or the like (except for the game nail and the shaft of the windmill) is a hard plastic or other material which is broken by the fall or other impact of the game ball, or the shape is hardly deformed.

  Further, in this example, the material of the game board is a plywood material or other material capable of fixing the winning opening and the game nail, etc., and having hardness and strength to such an extent that it is not easily bent. The surface of the disc is smooth and of uniform material. The material of the frame of the game board is configured to have hardness and strength equal to or more than those of the game board.

  Further, in this example, the material of the glass plate etc. (for example, the transparent plate D16) is glass (other colorless and transparent is referred to as transparent) with glass and other materials, and the game ball is dropped etc. It is configured not to be damaged or to deform its shape due to an impact.

  Further, it is preferable that the material of all parts of the gaming machine be configured so as not to deteriorate or deform its shape due to a normal change in temperature or humidity.

<Other supplementary items>
The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is designed so as not to change the performance of the gaming machine other than the change conditions of the functions of the gaming machine already described. Specifically, the normal motorized combination is triggered by the result of the game such as time or power on or the number of times the symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, the main gaming symbol display device) (for example, the number of times the main gaming symbol fluctuates) The function of changing the state of the game, such as the operation probability of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d or the internal structure in the big winning opening, and the performance of the gaming machine that will affect the result of the game It does not have a function that allows it to be adjusted or fluctuated. Of course, although it is possible to mount them, it is preferable to mount them in consideration of the possibility that the ball design becomes complicated and the gambling ability is enhanced more than necessary.

  In addition, even when the ordinary electric role (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) is released etc., to a certain extent among the fired game balls, the winning opening (for example, the second main game It is desirable that the game machine is configured not to win in the starting opening B10), and that a game ball launched with an arbitrary launch speed and launch intensity does not touch a game nail or the like, but wins an open prize opening. It is desirable that the game parts be arranged so that

  Furthermore, when a character (a special electric character, an ordinary electric character, etc.) is activated, it is not easy to win a game ball to a prize opening other than the prize opening where opening etc. occurred due to the operation of the special. Preferably, the winning opening with opening etc. forms a flow of falling game balls different from the case without opening etc. As a result, it is easy to achieve winning in any winning opening It is desirable that the structure of the opening / closing device of another winning opening or electric chow (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) be designed so as not to occur. Furthermore, as in this example, the function of opening the entrance of the big winning opening etc. without the operation of the special motorized part, or the special device (character or part for facilitating the operation of the part) It is desirable not to mount the product (except for the one that is a continuous operation device).

  In addition, it is possible that the winning opening and the gate can be invalidated or activated or adjusted depending on the state of the game, and that the operation of the winning opening relating to the bonus changes or adjusts depending on the state of the gaming. It is desirable not to mount the performance etc. which become possible.

  Moreover, in this example, winning of the game ball to the starting opening can not become an operation opportunity of special items other than special electric role (for example, big hit or the winning of the first main game starting opening A10 Although a small hit may be performed, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may not be opened), but may be used as an operation trigger of another accessory. In this case, it is necessary to design with sufficient consideration of the prosperity and the percentage of the payout rate related to the character and the like.

  In this example, it is configured not to be won a large number of times in a big hit by one main lottery on the main game side, and a fair lottery is provided. Also, except for a device for changing the operation probability and the probability that the combination of symbols that the ordinary motorized combination is to be displayed is displayed, the probability of displaying the combination of symbols related to the operation of the item {e.g. , Small hit probability, auxiliary game winning probability (probability that the auxiliary game symbol that the second main game start opening electric combination B11d will be open stop display etc) is not to be changed .

«Other configuration»
There is no problem in applying the following configuration to the gaming machine according to this embodiment. The following configuration is applicable to all the embodiments described above. Also, only one of the following configurations may be applied, or a plurality of configurations may be combined and applied.

<Mounting of mechanical tulips>
In this example, there was no mechanical tulip (also referred to as a non-motorized combination) for expanding the entrance of its own winning opening when winning a predetermined winning opening, but the mechanical type is appropriately positioned in the game area. About one or two tulips may be loaded. In this case, it is desirable that the mechanical tulip be configured to be closed by one or two predetermined winnings to the winning opening after the entrance of the winning opening is enlarged. In addition, when the game ball achieves the condition to win and expand when the mechanical tulip is closed (immediately before closing), the entrance is expanded immediately, and the condition that the predetermined number of game balls win and close It is desirable that the opening and closing mechanism be provided integrally with the mechanical tulip so as to immediately close when achieved.

  It should be noted that it is preferable that only a mechanical opening / closing mechanism is used instead of a part of the opening / closing mechanism, since electric load such as a solenoid is not used because a load of processing such as double winning is increased. In addition, when the game ball and the game ball of the maximum winning number and another game ball from the game ball are winning substantially simultaneously, the feature may be configured to end the operation once, and to be activated again, such as In this case, although it is a rare case, it is possible to secure the player's profit by the continuous winning. By the way, in this example, since the main game start opening electric role (the second main game start opening electric role B11d) is provided as an electric role, from the viewpoint of suppressing the amount of withdrawal of the entire role, A total of the maximum number of winnings pertaining to the mechanism (Type 1 non-motorized combination) provided in the game board D35 is 4 or less (in the case of a mechanical tulip of one opening, 4 mechanical crowns of a double opening) If it is two, it is desirable to set it as two. Further, a mechanical tulip (also referred to as a non-electric hand-held product) may be provided which enlarges the entrance of the winning opening different from the predetermined winning opening when winning is made at the predetermined winning opening. Also in such a case, when winning a predetermined winning opening as described above, it may be configured in the same manner as the mechanical tulip that enlarges the entrance of its own winning opening.

  In this example, although not mounted, about two holding devices may be provided for stopping the game ball in the game area D30 (after stopping the game ball, drop the game ball toward the winning opening). Here, "fall toward the winning opening" means that the device drops the game ball so that there is a possibility of winning the winning opening. Moreover, when providing a holding | maintenance apparatus, it is desirable to arrange | position in the position where there is no possibility that the game ball which fell from the said apparatus wins in a big prize winning opening. In addition, a holding device having a structure in which the game ball is adsorbed by a magnet or the like and the game ball is dropped toward the winning opening may be adopted. In this case, it is desirable that the number of magnets and the like be about two.

  Incidentally, it is possible for the player to adjust the trigger for the game ball to drop from the holding device, and it is also possible to provide, for example, a hold releasing operation unit. Further, in terms of the number of holding storage devices, it is desirable that the holding device can not hold more than five gaming balls. From the viewpoint of the fairness of the game, etc., it is desirable not to install a device that facilitates the suspension of the suspension device.

  It should be noted that from when the game ball wins the prize opening or passes through the gate or the combination of symbols is displayed (only when the prize is to be activated) to the time when the actuation of the prize is completed It is also possible to provide a device that memorizes that the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening, passed through the gate, or that a combination of symbols has been displayed (only when the item is to be activated). However, due to the relationship with the holding device and the holding storage device, they may be configured not to be mounted in order to suppress complication.

  Here, when the operation of the prize is ended, it means the time when the said state is ended after the winning opening related to the prize is opened or the like. In the present embodiment, when an activation trigger of the item is generated, it is configured to operate immediately. In addition, it is possible to store the activation trigger of the product or the product continuous operating device by electromagnetic recording etc, and to operate the product or the product continuous operating device continuously by the storage information etc at any trigger. Although the mounting of the structure is possible, it is not desirable from the viewpoint of fair collateral of the game. Specifically, despite executing the jackpot symbol stopped (does win the jackpot) and not executing the jackpot, thereafter, it fulfills the predetermined conditions such as when the variation of the main game symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, etc. In such a case, it is preferable not to configure to perform a big hit according to the big hit symbol.

Fifth Embodiment
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when realizing the ECO pachinko gaming machine, it is roughly divided into the pachinko gaming machine and the ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko gaming machine (each game machine is separately attached and detached. In the pachinko game machine, the game board side is roughly divided into a game board side and a game slot side (the game slot side is configured to be removable from the game arcade equipment, and the game board side is the game slot side. (Removable)). Hereinafter, first, the configuration according to the pachinko gaming machine will be described in order.

  First, the gaming frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 12, a front frame 14, a transparent plate 16, a door 18, an operation unit device 50, a winning information display device 60, and a firing handle 44. First, the outer frame 12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 14 is a frame that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame 12 and is attached to the outer frame 12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate 16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 18. The door 18 is attached to the front frame 14 in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). In addition, a speaker 24 is provided on the front of the game slot, and a sound effect corresponding to the game state or the like is output.

  Here, the operation unit device 50 includes the touch panel interface 52, the ball number display unit 54, the sub input button SB, and the like, and the touch panel interface 52 is a player's touch operation (contact type / non-contact Can display and use the gaming state information of the gaming machine and the gaming medium information recorded on the IC card (gaming medium recording medium) inserted in the ECO unit EU described later by any type of touch operation) It is configured. The touch panel interface 52 also has an effect display function, and is configured to be able to execute effects relating to a game by a command from the sub main control unit 2000. In addition, the ball holding number display unit 54 displays the ball holding number {the number of game balls that can be used for the game (fired in the game area 30)}. Further, the sub input button SB is a device for operating the effect by the side of the sub main control board 2000 by the operation of the player.

  Next, the winning information display device 60 (the winning ball number display portion 60a and the winning opening type lamp 60b) is concerned when the gaming ball enters the winning opening (or the starting opening etc.) provided on the game board surface. It is a device for displaying the position of the winning opening (or starting opening) where the gaming ball has entered and the number of winning balls to be given to the player. Further, on the front of the game board, a prize ball number display unit 28 for displaying the number of prize balls awarded to the player is provided. The details of the control mode for outputting information to the winning information display device 60 and the winning ball number display unit 28 will be described later.

  Next, in the game board, a game area 30 divided by an outer rail 32 and an inner rail 34 is formed. Then, in the game area 30, there are a plurality of game nails, a mechanism such as a windmill, etc. and various general winning openings not shown, a first main game start port 110, a second main game start port 210, an auxiliary game start port 410, First large winning opening 310, second large winning opening 320, first main game symbol display device 120, second main game symbol display device 220, effect display device 2550, auxiliary game symbol display device 420, center decoration 38 and out outlet 36 are installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port 110 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port 110 is provided with a first main game start port entrance detection device 111. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device 111 is a sensor that detects the entrance of the gaming ball to the first main game start slot 110, and the first main game start showing the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port 210 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port 210 is provided with a second main game start port entrance ball detection device 211 and a second main game start port electric role object 212. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device 211 is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot 210, and the second main game start showing the entrance ball when entering the ball Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric winnings 212 is changed into a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the second main game start port 210 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state. In the fifth embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening 210 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening 110 side. You may Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game start opening 110 and the second main game start opening 210 are arranged vertically adjacent to each other, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first main game start opening 110 and the second main game start port 210 may be provided separately.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port 410 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device 411. Here, the auxiliary game start opening entrance ball detection device 411 is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start opening 410, and generates the auxiliary game start entrance entrance ball information indicating the entrance when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start opening 410 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start opening electric combination 212 of the second main game start opening 210. The position of the auxiliary game start port 410 is merely an example.

  Next, the first large winning opening 310 and the second large winning opening 320 are provided above the out port 36, and the gaming ball flows down the right or left side (based on the middle of the gaming area) of the gaming area 30 Is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening 310 and the second large winning opening 320 are disposed before reaching the out opening 36.

  Next, the first large winning opening 310 is in the form of a horizontal rectangle that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol stop. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located above 36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening 310 is a first large winning opening winning detection device 311 for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination 312 (and the first large winning And a mouth solenoid 312a). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device 311 is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 310, the first winning opening entrance ball information indicating the entering when entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination 312 changes the first big winning opening 310 to a normal state in which the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win in the first large winning opening 310 and an open state in which the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The large winning opening solenoid 312a is excited to vary). In the fifth embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in the normal state and the gaming ball is easily released in the open state. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advancing state in which the bar-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retreating state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second big winning opening 320 forms a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol. The winning opening is located above the opening 36 and corresponds to the main game. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening 320, the second large winning opening winning detection device 321 for detecting the entry of the game ball, the second large winning opening electric combination 322 (and the second large winning A mouth solenoid 322a). Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device 322 is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening 320, the second large winning opening entrance ball information indicating the entering when entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second big winning opening 320 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device 321. Next, the second large winning opening electric winning role 322 is the second large winning opening 320 the second large winning opening 320 in the normal state where the game ball can not win or difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win It is made variable (the distribution winning prize port solenoid 322a is excited and made variable). In the fifth embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in the normal state and the gaming ball is easily released in the open state. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advancing state in which the bar-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retreating state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device 120 (the second main game symbol display device 220) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device 120 (the second main game symbol display device 220) comprises a first main game symbol display unit 121 (the second main game symbol display unit 221) and a first main game And a symbol hold display unit 122 (a second main game symbol hold display unit 222). Here, the first main game symbol holding display unit 122 (the second main game symbol holding display unit 222) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, the 1st main game symbol display part 121 (2nd main game symbol display part 221) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and the 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the fifth embodiment, the first main game symbol display device 120 (the second main game symbol display device 220 (the second main game symbol display device 220) does not necessarily have to have a dramatic role. The size of) is set to an inconspicuous degree. However, the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role and does not display the decoration symbol on the first main game side and / or the decoration symbol on the second main game side. In the case of adoption, the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device 2550.

  Next, the effect display device 2550 is a device that executes display or the like of an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In the fifth embodiment, the effect display device 2550 is formed of a liquid crystal display, but may be formed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device 420 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device 420 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit 421 and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit 422. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit 422 is configured of four lamps, and the number of lit lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration 38 is installed around the effect display device 2550, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device 2550, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp 26 is provided in the game area 30 or an area other than the game area 30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the fifth embodiment is roughly divided into the pachinko game machine and the ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko game machine (each game machine can be separately attached and removed. In the pachinko game machine, it is divided roughly into the game board side and the game frame side (The game frame side is configured to be removable with respect to the game arcade equipment, and the game board side is detachable from the game frame side. Made possible). The outline of each of the roughly divided configurations and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below.

<Pachinko game machine / game board side>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment (gaming board side) changes and stops the decorative symbol based on the main control board A for controlling the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board A. Subcontrol board B which controls execution of various effects on the effect display device 2550, etc., sound from the speaker 24, lighting of the game effect lamp 26, error notification etc. (in this example, the sub main control unit 2000 and the sub sub control The unit 2500 is disposed on one substrate, and the gaming peripherals (first main gaming peripheral 100, second main gaming peripheral 200, first and second main gaming common peripheral 300, auxiliary gaming The peripheral device 400), the award ball number display device 28, and the like are mainly configured. The speaker 24 and the game effect lamp 26 may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine (on the side of the gaming machine frame). Here, the sub control board B controls various effects on the effect display device 2550 such as fluctuation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker 24, lighting of the game effect lamp 26, and control of error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit 2500 that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 2550, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board A, the sub main control unit 2000, and the sub sub control unit 2500, a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, data that the CPU handles ( A RAM for temporarily storing various data to be generated and a computer program etc. read out from the ROM is mounted.

  First, the main control board A is a game peripheral device (first main game peripheral device 100, second main game peripheral device 200, first and second main game shared peripheral device 300, auxiliary game peripheral device 400), number of prize balls The display device 28, information display LED (not shown), etc. are electrically connected to input / output devices that are essential to the progress of the game, and control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input / output device It is comprised so that the information which concerns on advancing of a game may be output to each input-output device as needed. Further, the main control board A is electrically connected also to the winning ball payout control board 3000 and the sub control board B (sub main control unit 2000 / sub sub control unit 2500), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board 3000, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board B.

  Next, the sub control board B is connected to the effect display device 2550 for displaying a decorative symbol etc. as described above, the speaker 24, the game effect lamp 26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects. . In the fifth embodiment, a sub main control unit 2000 and a sub sub control unit 2500 are included in the sub control board B, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker 24 by the sub main control unit 2000, game effect (electric decoration) The lighting control of the lamp 26 and the determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device 2550 are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit 2500. It is done. When the touch panel interface 52 is also connected, it is possible to display various effects controlled by the sub control board B on the touch panel interface 52. In the fifth embodiment, the sub main control unit 2000 and the sub sub control unit 2500 are configured to be integrated by the sub control board B, but the present invention is not limited to this (as a separate board Although it may be configured, the integrated configuration brings about a merit such as space merit and reduction of noise mixing in wiring etc.). Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit 2500 (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted).

<Pachinko game machine / slot side>
A pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment (the game frame side) is a payout control for controlling the firing control of the game balls and the awarding of balls for the player (addition or subtraction of holding ball data in the fifth embodiment) control. A substrate 3000, a power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire gaming machine, the operation unit device 50 described above, and a launch control substrate 40 (and a launch device 42 and a launch detection sensor 43) which are launch mechanisms for gaming balls. And the winning ball permission sensors KS (which will be described later in detail, but a sensor capable of detecting entry to the entrance to which the winning ball is to be paid out), the above-mentioned winning information display device 60, etc. It is configured as a subject. Note that the payout control board 3000 and the operation unit device 50 include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, data that the CPU handles (various data and ROM generated during the game And a RAM for temporarily storing the computer program etc. read out from. In this embodiment, the power supply unit E supplies power to the dispensing control board 3000 and the sub control board B, and the power controlling unit 3000 supplies power to the main control board A via the dispensing control board 3000. It is done.

  Here, the winning ball payout control substrate 3000 includes a firing control substrate 40 which is a control circuit of the shooting device 42, and winning ball permission sensors KS (to be described later in detail, but to the entrance which is a target of winning ball payout). Sensor connected to the game information display device 60 and the operation unit device 50, and in addition, main control in the pachinko game machine (game board side) according to the fifth embodiment It is also connected to the substrate A and an ECO unit EU described later. Then, as will be described later, information from the main control board A and the ECO unit EU (information mainly to be added to the player's ball), the firing detection sensor 43 (to be mainly subtracted from the player's ball) Control the operation (addition, subtraction, etc.) of the ball pertaining to the game on the basis of the information) etc., and also display the ball information and the launcher 42 (launch handle · launch motor · via the launch control board 40) It is configured to be able to control the operation of the ball feeding device etc.).

  Here, in the present example, the sub main control unit 2000 (sub game control means 2000) is a sub sub control unit 2500 (effect display means 2500) that executes image effects, the operation unit device 50, various game effect lamps 26 (for example, It is also electrically connected to the side lamp), the speaker 24 and the like. Furthermore, the award ball payout control board 3000 controls the launch of the game ball (and the launch control board 40 (and the launch device 42 for launching the game ball), the award ball permission sensors KS for permitting the award ball, the game ball loan request, etc. Are electrically connected to the ECO unit EU that transmits the information to the award ball payout control substrate 3000 and the operation unit device 50 that executes the display of the number of held balls, the operation of the IC card information, and the like.

  In addition, the prize ball payout control board 3000 has a transmission / reception control means 3100 for transmitting and receiving information relating to the prize balls, a payout control means 3300 for controlling the process relating to the prize ball payout, and a shot It has control means 3400 and initial processing control means 3500 at the time of power failure / power failure recovery which controls processing at the time of power failure on the prize ball delivery control substrate 3000 side.

  Here, the transmission / reception control unit 3100 includes a reception control unit 3110 that controls reception of information, and a transmission control unit 3120 that controls transmission of information. Further, the reception control means 3110 is a main side reception information temporary storage means 3111 for temporarily storing the information received from the main control board A, and an ECO unit side reception information for temporarily storing the information received from the ECO unit EU. And a temporary storage unit 3112.

  Next, the payout control unit 3300 includes a payout processing related information temporary storage unit 3310 for temporarily storing information related to the winning balls, and the payout processing related information temporary storage unit 3310 is connected from the main control board A. Each winning counter for counting the number of winnings to each winning opening received (the first main game starting opening winning counter 3311 a, the second main gaming starting opening winning counter 3311 b, the first large winning opening winning counter 3311 c, the second large A winning opening winning counter 3311 d, a general winning opening winning counter 3311 e), a ball number counter 3312 for counting the current number of balls held by the player (the number of game media that can be used for the game), The game machine further includes an enclosed game ball number counter 3313 for counting the number of game balls (enclosed game balls) existing inside.

  Next, the launch control means 3400 has launch control related information temporary storage means 3410 for temporarily storing information related to launch control of the game ball.

  Next, the power-off and power-off recovery initial processing control means 3500 has a power-off-time information temporary storage means 3510 for temporarily storing (back-up) information at power-off. Here, although not shown, in the fifth embodiment, a winning power supply control substrate 3000 is provided with a backup power supply for supplying power to the power-off time information temporary storage unit 3510. This backup power supply is connected to the power supply unit E to be supplied with power, and even if power supply from the power supply unit E is interrupted when a power failure occurs, information temporary storage at power failure from the backup power supply The power can be supplied to the means 3510, and the number of unpaid balls and the number of balls (for example, the value of the ball number counter, the enclosed game ball number counter, etc.) stored in the prize ball payout control board when the power is off Various flags can be stored even while the power is turned off, and various payout information, which is information important for a game, can be held. The value of the enclosed game ball number counter may be configured to be cleared when the power is restored.

<ECO unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is connected to the prize ball payout control board 3000 and the operation unit device 50, and an IC card (member information on the personal gaming state information of the player (in particular, the number information of the game media possessed) is recorded) By inserting a card or a general card, the gaming state information recorded in the IC card can be displayed on the operation unit device 50, and the game state information is used by an operation on the operation unit device 50. In addition, it is configured to be able to perform lending control and management control for lending such as electronic money. Further, the ECO unit EU is connected to the hall computer H via a network, and is configured to be able to output game related information, and authentication processing of the game frame and the game board is also performed via the ECO unit EU. The ECO unit EU is supplied with power from a power supply (power supply device E2) different from the game machine, and is also connected to the operation unit device 50. For the operation unit device 50, the ECO unit EU Power is configured to be supplied.

  In the fifth embodiment, as indicated by arrows in FIG. 115, the main control board A and the prize ball payout control board 3000 are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board A and the sub The main control unit 2000 is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board A to the sub main control unit 2000 (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Further, the award ball payout control substrate 3000 and the operation unit device 50 and the ECO unit EU are configured to enable two-way communication, while the one-way communication from the award ball payout control substrate 3000 to the operation unit device 50 is possible. Is configured to be able to be {only to the extent of the method of communication between control boards (between control devices)}.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a processing image between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment (especially, the addition, subtraction, and transfer processing of the number of holding balls) will be described. . In the same figure, the prize ball payout control board 3000 always has the ball number information {information relating to the number of game balls that can be used for the game (launched into the game area 30)}. It is assumed that the ball number display unit 54 repeatedly updates the ball number display. Moreover, in each process, the case where an error etc. do not occur is illustrated.

<Ball holding number addition process>
First, ball lending processing in the upper part of the figure will be described as an example of ball holding number addition processing. First, when the ball lending operation on the touch panel interface 52 is performed in (1), the “ball lending operation information” in (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 52 to the ECO unit EU. . Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "ball lending operation information" executes the balance consumption of the IC card in the ball lending control processing of (3), and performs the "number-of-ball-count addition request" of (4). Transmit to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 having received the “number-of-hands-addition request” holds the number of game media for the balance consumed to the current number of balls in the number-of-hands-of-hands addition processing of (5). to add. When the process of (5) is completed, the winning ball payout control board 3000 transmits the “addition completion information” of (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “addition completion information” transmits the “ball lending completion display instruction” of (7) to the touch panel interface 52. Next, the touch panel interface 52 that has received the “ball lending completion display instruction” executes the sphere lending completion display of (8), and the ball lending process is ended.

<Number holding ball subtraction process>
Next, a ball consumption process (especially, a process related to a wagon service) in the middle part of the figure will be described as an example of the ball number subtraction process. First, when the wagon service utilization operation on the touch panel interface 52 is performed in (1), the “ball consumption operation information” of (2) is transmitted from the touch panel interface 52 to the ECO unit EU. Ru. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “ball consumption operation information” transmits the “number-of-hands-number-subtraction request” of (3) to the prize ball payout control substrate 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 that has received the “number-of-hands-subtraction-request” is the game for which the wagon service consumes the current number of balls in the number-of-hands-subtraction processing of (4). Subtract the number of media. When the processing of (4) ends, the winning ball payout control board 3000 transmits the “subtraction completion information” of (5) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “subtraction completion information” transmits the “ball consumption completion display instruction” of (6) to the touch panel interface 52. Next, the touch panel interface 52 that has received the “ball consumption completion display instruction” executes the wagon service utilization completion display of (7), and the ball consumption processing ends.

<Number of balls transfer processing>
Next, an IC card return process in the lower part of the figure will be described as an example of the ball number transfer process. First, in (1), when the return operation (IC card return operation) on the touch panel interface 52 is performed, the “return operation information” of (2) is sent to the ECO unit EU from the touch panel interface 52. Will be sent. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “return operation information” transmits the “ball number return request” of (3) to the prize ball payout control substrate 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 having received the “number of balls return request” stops the game (for example, stops the launch of the game balls) in the ball transfer process of (4). Make sure that there are no game balls (floating balls) flowing down on the game board in the ball transfer process in 5) (for example, until the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 becomes the initial value) Wait), (6) “number-of-ball-hand information” is sent to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "number-of-balls information" temporarily stores the number of balls based on the received information in the return control processing of (7), and the "ball-holding information" of (8) A request for clearing the number is sent to the prize ball payout control board 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 that has received the “number-of-hands-clearing request” clears (zero clears) the current number of balls in the number-of-hands transfer processing of (9), and (10) Send "number of balls clear completion information" to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “number-of-hands-number-clear completion information” receives the number of balls temporarily stored in the processing of (7) in the return control processing of (11), It adds to the number of balls stored in the IC card inserted in. Next, in the return control process of (12), the ECO unit EU discharges (returns) the IC card from the IC card return port, and instructs the touch panel interface 52 of the "return completion display instruction" of (13). To send. Next, the touch panel interface 52 that has received the “return completion display instruction” executes the return completion display of (14), and the IC card return process between the touch panel interface 52 and the ECO unit EU ends. . Further, when the process of (12) is completed, the ECO unit EU transmits the “return completion information” of (15) to the prize ball payout control substrate 3000. Next, the prize ball payout control board 3000 having received the “return completion information” cancels the game stop performed in the process of (4) and returns to the playable state of (16), and the ECO unit The IC card return process between the EU-prize ball delivery control board 3000 ends.

<Authentication process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the process of authenticating the gaming machine in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Here, the authentication process of the gaming machine is a process of determining whether or not the gaming machine is a legitimate gaming machine when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the figure, the case where the game machine is authenticated as a legitimate game machine is illustrated.

  First, when the gaming machine is powered on, the main control board A encrypts the unique main control board ID stored in the CPU of the main control board A in the authentication control process of (1), and It transmits to the winning ball payout control board 3000 as the main control board ID. When the power is turned on, the winning ball payout control board 3000 encrypts and receives the unique payout control board ID stored in the CPU of the winning ball payout control board 3000 in the authentication control processing of (3) (2 And (iv) are transmitted to the ECO unit EU as "main control board ID · delivery control board ID". Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “main control board ID and delivery control board ID” calculates the “main control board ID and delivery control board ID” of (5) based on the received information, Send to Next, the key management center decrypts the received encrypted ID (main control board ID and payout control board ID) in the process of (6), and (7) “delivery information request”. Is sent to the gaming machine management center. Next, the gaming machine management center having received the "delivery information request" receives the delivery information of the legitimate main control board and the payout control board registered in the gaming machine management center in the process of (8). Confirm, encrypt, and send it to the key management center as "delivery information" in (9). Next, the key management center that has received the “delivery information” decrypts the received delivery information in the process of (10). Next, in the processing of (11), the key management center collates (certifies) the main control board ID and the payout control board ID received from the gaming machine with the delivery information received from the gaming machine management center. Next, the key management center encrypts the authentication result in the process of (12), and transmits it to the ECO unit EU as the “authentication result” of (13). Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the “authentication result” decrypts the received encrypted authentication result in the process of (14). Next, if the decrypted authentication result is an authentication success, the ECO unit EU transmits (15) “game start permission” to the winning ball payout control board 3000. Next, the winning ball payout control board 3000 that has received the “game start permission” transmits the “game start permission” of (16) to the main control substrate A. Here, the main control board A and the prize ball payout control board 3000 that have received the "game start permission" are authenticated as legitimate game machines, and the game can be started. Further, when the authentication result is an authentication failure, the “play start permission” is not transmitted from the ECO unit EU, and the main control board A and the winning ball payout control board 3000 will not be able to start playing a game. The present embodiment is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the main control board ID and the payout control board ID of (4) and (5) may be separately transmitted, or the key management center The gaming machine management center may always transmit and receive delivery information. In addition, when setting values are provided to the gaming machine (for details, refer to the sixth embodiment), the setting value information is transmitted along with the transmission of "main control board ID · payout control board ID" of (4). You may do so. The set value may be recognized based on the information from the main control board, or the award ball payout control board 3000 may be recognized and transmitted based on the information of the device having the function of setting the set value. Good.

<About the circulation mechanism of the game ball>
Next, the circulation of the gaming balls will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to play a game by circulating a fixed number (for example, 100 balls) of gaming balls in the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, the circulating gaming balls are enclosed The game can be progressed without performing the supply of gaming balls from the outside of the gaming machine and discharging (payout) of the gaming balls from the outside of the gaming machine.

  First, the enclosed gaming ball is stored in the enclosed gaming ball tank in the enclosed gaming ball number management means, and the enclosed gaming ball in the enclosed gaming ball tank is sent out to the launcher 42 by the ball feeding solenoid mechanism. The game ball is fired toward the gaming area 30 on the gaming board side by the launch control device. Next, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is any ball entry port (for example, the first main game start port 110, the second main game start port 210, the first big winning port 310) which is a game peripheral device. , The second big winning opening 320, general winning opening, out port 36, etc.) (The first main game start opening entrance ball detection device 111, the second main game start opening entrance ball detection device 211, the first large The winning opening winning detection device 311, the second big winning opening winning detection device 321, is detected by the general winning opening detection device), flows into the play space side from the game board side. The enclosed game balls that have flowed in are the prize ball permission sensors KS corresponding to the ball entry provided in the game area 30 (for example, the first main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS, the second main game start mouth prize ball Detected by permission sensor 210KS, first big winning prize winning ball permission sensor 310KS, second big winning winning prize ball permission sensor 320KS, general winning prize winning ball permission sensor, etc.) and out sphere detection sensor, it is in the enclosed game ball tank It is stored again. And, under the situation where the enclosed gaming ball circulates in the pachinko gaming machine in this manner, the gaming ball is fired toward the gaming area 30 on the gaming board side, or the ball entry opening for which the award balls are to be paid out For example, in the case of entering the first main game start opening 110, the second main game start opening 210, the first large winning opening 310, the second large winning opening 320, the general winning opening, etc.), the prize ball payout control With the substrate 3000, award balls to the player (addition or subtraction of holding ball data in the fifth embodiment) are performed.

  In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the game balls are configured to circulate, so that the player can not touch the game balls. Specifically, the upper tray in another embodiment is used. And the lower plate is not equipped. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to prevent fraud such as mixing illegal gaming balls such as gaming balls with a smaller diameter, balls with thread, carrying balls of other stores, etc., and gaming balls circulating in the gaming machine It will be difficult to take out and not make it perform properly, and it will be effective as a measure against fraud.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123, control processing executed on the prize ball payout control board 3000 side will be described. First, FIG. 118 is a main flowchart of the winning ball payout control substrate 3000 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Here, the prize ball payout control board side main process of FIG. 6G is a process with the prize ball payout control board 3000 which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, at the time of power-on to the gaming machine, at step 3100, the winning ball payout control board 3000 executes a power failure recovery time initialization process described later. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (h), which is a repetitive processing routine of the winning balls payout control board 3000, is repeatedly executed. Here, when (h) is executed, as shown in the process of (h) in the figure, first, at step 3200, the award ball payout control board 3000 executes an enclosed game ball number management process described later. . Next, in step 3300, the winning ball payout control board 3000 executes the number-of-ball-numbers management process described later. Next, in step 3400, the award ball payout control board 3000 executes game ball emission control processing described later. Next, in step 3500, the prize ball payout control board 3000 transmits / receives information relating to the prize ball to / from the prize ball related information transmission / reception control process (main control board A, launch control board 40, ECO unit EU, etc. To execute this repetitive processing routine.

  As described above, the prize ball payout control board 3000 adopts a mode in which the prize ball payout control board side routine (S3200 to S3500) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 14I is an NMI interrupt process of the winning ball payout control board 3000, and is a process flow forcibly executed when the power from the power supply unit E is lowered to a predetermined level. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the winning ball payout control board 3000, in step 3600, the winning ball payout control board 3000 executes a power interruption process to be described later, and shifts to a power interruption waiting loop.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of power failure return initialization processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, at step 3102, the power on / power off initial process control means 3500 refers to the flag area of the power off time information temporary storage means 3510 and determines whether the payout control side power off flag is on or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104 the power on / off state initial processing control means 3500 turns off the payout control side power off flag in the flag area of the power off time information temporary storage means 3510. Do. Next, in step 3106, the power on / power off initial process control means 3500 controls each winning counter (for example, the first main game start opening winning counter 3311 a, the second main based on the information backed up at power off) The counter values of the game start opening winning counter 3311b, the first large winning opening winning counter 3311c, the second large winning opening winning counter 3311d, and the general winning opening winning counter 3311e are restored. Next, at step 3108, the power-off and power-off recovery initial processing control means 3500 restores the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 based on the information backed up at power-off. Next, at step 3110, the power off / power off initial process control means 3500 counts the number of gaming balls in the enclosed gaming ball tank to the initial value (for example, 100) in the enclosed gaming ball number counter 3313. If it is configured to be possible, the counting result may be set as an initial value). Next, in step 3112, the power on / power off initial process control means 3500, based on the information backed up on power off, information necessary for other games (for example, various flag information, reception command, unsent) Restore command, etc). Next, at step 3114, the power off / power on return initial processing control means 3500 is in the flag area of the firing control related information temporary storage means 3410, a game stop flag The ball information flag is turned off, and the process goes to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3116 without executing the processing of step 3104 to step 3114. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when resetting the initial value to the enclosed game ball number counter 3313, the standby time until the floating ball (game ball existing in the game area 30) returns to the play space side You may provide.

  Next, at step 3116, whether the power failure / power return initial processing control means 3500 has referred to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111 and received the basic prize ball number information command from the main control board A side? It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3116, in step 3118, the power-on / power-off return initial processing control means 3500 pays out the basic prize ball number information of each winning opening based on the received basic prize ball number information command. It temporarily stores in the related information temporary storage unit 3310, and returns to the caller of this subroutine. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, in other words, when reception of the basic winning number information command fails, in step 3120, the power on / power off recovery initial processing control means 3500 switches to the main control board A. In response to the setting command transmission request (when the basic control board A transmits a basic prize ball number information command due to the setting command transmission request, reception and storage are performed by the prize ball related information transmission / reception control process of step 3500). And return to the caller of this subroutine, and shift to the prize ball delivery control board side routine of (h).

  Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of enclosed game number control processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 in FIG. First, at step 3202, the payout control means 3300 refers to the firing control related information temporary storage means 3400 (or based on the firing signal from the firing detection sensor 43) to determine whether or not the game ball has been fired. Do. If Yes in step 3202, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 in step 3204, and proceeds to step 3206. On the other hand, if the result of step 3202 is NO, the process proceeds to step 3206 without executing the process of step 3204.

  Next, in step 3206, the payout control means 3300 refers to the information from the winning ball permission sensors KS and the out ball detection sensor, and determines whether or not the discharging ball is detected. If Yes in step 3206, the payout control means 3300 adds 1 to the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 in step 3208, and proceeds to step 3210. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3206, the process proceeds to step 3210 without executing the process of step 3208.

  Next, in step 3210, the payout control means 3300 determines whether the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 is a value within the appropriate range (for example, 51 to 100). Here, the enclosed gaming ball number counter 3313 is a counter for counting the number of enclosed gaming balls existing on the gaming machine frame side, and 100 (the number of gaming balls enclosed in the present gaming machine) is an initial value. It is set. In this gaming machine, since the supply of gaming balls from the outside of the gaming machine and the discharging of the gaming balls from the outside of the gaming machine are not performed, counting the number of gaming balls existing in the gaming machine can result in fraud or ball jamming. Errors can be detected.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 3210, the processing returns to the caller of this subroutine. On the other hand, if No in step 3210, the payout control means 3300 determines that the number of gaming balls in the gaming machine is abnormal in step 3212 and step 3214, and is in the flag area of the temporary storage control information storage means 3410. , Turn on the enclosed game ball number abnormal flag (the game will be stopped), execute an error notification, and return to the caller of this subroutine.

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the number-of-hands management process according to the subroutine of step 3300 in FIG. First, at step 3302, the payout control means 3300 refers to the ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means 3112 and holds ball operation information from the ECO unit EU (ball lending operation on the touch panel interface 52, ball replay operation). It is determined whether the ball sharing operation, the wagon service utilization operation, the IC card returning operation, and the like (request information such as ball addition / subtraction / clear) are received. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the payout control means 3300 adds (or subtracts, clears) the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 based on the received ball operation information, and shifts to step 3306 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3302, the process proceeds to step 3306 without executing the process of step 3304.

  Next, in step 3306, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the launch control related information temporary storage unit 3400 (or based on the launch signal from the launch detection sensor 43) and determines whether or not the game ball has been launched. judge. If Yes in step 3306, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 in step 3308, and proceeds to step 3310. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3306, the process proceeds to step 3310 without executing the processing of step 3308.

  Next, in step 3310, the payout control means 3300 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111 and determines whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control board A side. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the payout control unit 3300 acquires information on the winning opening type and the number of winning balls based on the received winning information command. Next, in step 3314, the payout control means 3300 determines whether the acquired winning opening type and the number of winning balls match the basic winning number information temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310 or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3314, the payout control means 3300 adds 1 to (increment) the counter value of the winning counter of the winning opening that matches the determination result in step 3316, and proceeds to step 3330. On the other hand, if No in step 3314, the payout control means 3300 determines in step 3318 and step 3320 that the winning information command is incorrect, and it is in the flag area of the temporary storage control information storage means 3410. , Turn on the unfair prize information flag (the game will be stopped), execute an error notification, and shift to step 3330. In the case of No at step 3310, the process proceeds to step 3330 without executing the processing of steps 3312 to 3320.

  Next, in step 3330, the payout control means 3300 confirms the information from the winning ball permission sensors KS, and determines whether or not the ball is detected by any of the winning ball permission sensors. In the case of Yes in step 3330, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout processing related information temporary storage unit 3310 in step 3332, and the winning counter value corresponding to the winning ball permission sensor that detects the entry is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3332, in step 3334, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the corresponding winning counter. Next, at step 3336, the payout control means 3300 holds the number of winning balls corresponding to the sensor that has detected the entering ball, based on the basic winning number of balls information temporarily stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means 3310. It is added to the count value of the ball number counter 3312. Next, in step 3338, the payout control means 3300 sets a prize ball payout completion command to the main control board A side (sent to the main control board A side by the prize ball related information transmission / reception control processing of step 3500) Do. Next, in step 3340, the payout control means 3300 causes the winning information display device 60 to display the winning opening type and the number of winning balls relating to the winning balls, and proceeds to step 3342. Also in the case of No in step 3330 or step 3332, the process shifts to step 3342.

  Next, in step 3342, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 and displays the current ball number on the ball number display unit 54, and the caller of this subroutine is displayed. To return.

  Here, the same figure (image figure of the prize counter) is a figure showing a processing image from the reception of the prize information command from the main control board A to the awarding of the prize ball (in particular, the first main game It illustrates about the case where there is a ball entering the starting opening 110). First, when a winning information command related to entering the first main game start opening 110 is received from the main control board A side, 1 is added to the counter value of the first main game start opening winning counter 3311a. In the stage, the award ball payout (addition process) does not occur. Next, by detecting the ball entry with the first main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS on the prize ball payout control substrate 3000 side, 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the first main game start slot winning counter 3111a, and the first The winning ball number “3” of the 1 main game start port 110 is added to the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 as a winning ball.

  The same figure (example of winning information display) is a view showing an example of a display mode on the winning information display device 60 in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. In the initial state (in a state where a winning is not detected), display on the winning number display portion 60a and the winning type classification lamp 60b is not performed, and when the awarding of the winning balls is completed, the number of winning balls according to the winning information. And the winning opening type will be displayed. For example, when a prize ball pertaining to entering the first main game start opening 110 is awarded, a winning opening type lamp 60b corresponding to a winning on the first main game start opening 110 (in the present embodiment, to the left) The positioned lamp is turned on, and the number-of-balls display section 60a displays "+3" as the number-of-balls display. When a plurality of winnings are detected within a short time, the winning opening type and the number of winning balls can be confirmed in the order in which the winnings have been detected, for example, a time during which the player can confirm the display content (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is desirable to keep displaying. In addition, this example is just an example, and the display means, display method, number of winning balls, etc. are not limited thereto. For example, the combination of the lighting mode of the lamp or the winning hole type or the number of winning balls by the sound You may comprise so that it can alert | report to. Further, by configuring to be able to display a plurality of winning combination information at the same time, it is possible to perform more accurate display even when there are multiple winnings in a short time.

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of game ball launch control processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, at step 3502, the shot control means 3400 refers to the flag area of the shot control related information temporary storage means 3410 and determines that the game stop flag {enclosed game ball number abnormal flag Flag turns on when the flag is turned on, fraudulent ball information flag (flag turned on when it is determined that an abnormal prize ball is generated), turns on when communication abnormality with the ECO unit EU or an unconnected state It is determined whether or not the flag} is off. If Yes in step 3502, the launch control means 3400 refers to the ball number counter 3312 in step 3504, and determines whether the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 3504, the emission control means 3400 refers to the information from the emission control board 40 in step 3506 to determine whether or not there is an input of the handle 44 (rotation operation by the player). If Yes in step 3506, the emission control means 3400 determines the emission intensity of the game ball based on the handle input in step 3508 (for example, the larger the displacement of the handle 44 by the operation of the player, the stronger the emission intensity). And). Next, in step 3510, the shot control means 3400 drives the game ball shooting solenoid to shoot the game ball into the game area 30, and returns to the caller of this subroutine. Also in the case of No in steps 3502 to 3506, the processing returns to the caller of this subroutine.

  In addition, it is preferable that the dispensing control means stop the firing by the firing control means 3400 and stop it when the value of the ball number counter 3312 exceeds a large numerical value such as a predetermined value (for example, 150000). . As described above, the payout control means 3300 permits the release based on the ball number information of the eco unit (game ball number display device). Here, also in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the total number of game balls obtained when the game balls are shot for 10 hours and the shooting speed and the firing strength expected to obtain the largest number of game balls is continued. The ball is designed so as to exceed one-half of the total number of the game balls launched and less than four-thirds (about 133%). For this reason, in view of the fact that the operating time is about 15 hours at maximum, the above-mentioned predetermined value is set to a value that exceeds the designed maximum popping ball (112 500 pieces) in the 15 hours by a certain degree (about 30%) . Thereby, an appropriate hardware configuration is realized without providing a storage area larger than necessary.

  Furthermore, the payout control means cancels the shot by the shot control means 3400 when the value of the ball number counter 3312 becomes a difference (for example, 5,000) more than a specific value in comparison with the game start time. It is preferable to stop. As described above, the payout control means 3300 permits the release based on the ball number information of the eco unit (game ball number display device). Also in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the number of acquired game balls obtained by one big hit is 1,500. For this reason, while the game is continuously performed when the big hit is generated about 3 times in a row, when a large number of big hits are generated continuously in an unexpected manner, the firing is stopped for a short time. It limits that the ball is acquired more than necessary. By this, it is possible to maintain moderate euphoria.

  In addition, when performing the stop processing mentioned above, it is also suitable to change a stop timing in consideration of a game state. For example, when the predetermined value or the specific value is exceeded during the jackpot, the stop processing may be performed after the jackpot is completed.

  As a method of stopping as mentioned above, what can be set by the game arcade (gaming facility) side and one which can be set by the player side can be considered. The pachinko game machine is provided with a dip switch or the like with a switch for stopping the operation as a method set by the game arcade (game facility) side, and it is configured to be able to make settings relating to the stop by the operation of the switch for stop by the store clerk. It is suitable. For example, it is possible to provide two types of dip switches as a strike stop switch and a strike stop presence switch and a strike out ball number switch on a pachinko game machine (for example, ball payout control board 3000) and enable the strike stop function by the strike stop presence switch It is determined whether or not it is not, and the number of balls to be stopped is determined by the number-of-balls-out switch. In the fifth embodiment, a 2-bit dip switch is used as the strike-out ball number switch, "00" corresponds to the strike-out differential ball number 3000, "01" corresponds to the strike-out differential ball number 4000 “10” corresponds to the strikeout difference ball number 5000, and “11” corresponds to the strikeout difference ball number 10000. That is, when the strikeout ball number switch is set to "11", when the ball number difference becomes 10000, the strikeout is made.

  In addition, only one type of dip switch can be used as a stop switch. In this case, "00" can be made to correspond to invalidation of the strike-off function, and anything other than "00" can be made to correspond to the strike-off difference ball number.

  The setting of the stopping switch is read by the CPUMC of the main control board M at the time of initial setting when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on (immediately before the normal game is started). In addition, after the pachinko gaming machine has already been activated, the setting of the dip switch is not read, and the changed setting is invalidated even if the stopping switch is changed.

  On the other hand, it is preferable to use the above-mentioned ECO unit EU as a method by which the player can set stopping. As described above, the operation unit device 50 is connected to the ECO unit EU, and information on the operation of the operation unit device 50 by the player can be transmitted to and stored in the ECO unit EU. By operating the operation unit device 50, the player can input the number of difference balls desired to be hit and store the number in the ECO unit EU. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the operation of the launch device 42 (the launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.) can be controlled through the launch control board 40 based on the information from the ECO unit EU. It is configured. In other words, when the number of balls played so far reaches the number of balls desired to be stopped by the player, the ECO unit EU sends a shot stop signal (a signal not allowing the shot) to the ball payout control board 3000. By outputting the output and stopping the launcher 42, it is possible to put it into the stop state.

  By setting the number of balls to be stopped by the player to the end ball, it is possible to prevent the end ball from being wasted at the time of exchange with a gift such as a cigarette. For example, if a gift such as a cigarette is often associated with the number of 1000 game balls, etc., and the number of game balls corresponding to the gift is a multiple of 10, 100, 1000, etc. All balls except for can be exchanged for prizes. As described above, by setting the number of difference balls to be hit off to the end ball, the end ball can be used for gaming, and it is possible to prevent the end ball from being forcibly exchanged for a prize and wasting it.

  The main control board M outputs a release permission signal to the ball payout control substrate 3000 when the condition for permitting the release of the game ball is established. Further, the ECO unit EU also outputs a release permission signal to the ball payout control substrate 3000 when the condition for permitting release of the game ball is established. When the ball payout control board 3000 has established the conditions for permitting the game ball to be launched, and receives the launch permission signal from the main control board M and receives the launch permission signal from the ECO unit EU, The operation of the launcher 42 is controlled via the launch control board 40 to launch the game ball. That is, when all the main control substrate M, the ECO unit EU, and the ball payout control substrate 3000 satisfy the condition for permitting the game ball to be launched, the game ball is launched.

  If an error is detected in the main control board M or the ECO unit EU, the launch permission signal is not output, and even if the condition for permitting the launch of the gaming ball with only the ball payout control substrate 3000 is satisfied, The ball is never fired.

  Further, as described later, the emission control board 40 has a timing circuit (not shown). The timing circuit is a circuit configured to fire game balls at regular intervals (for example, 599.9 ms / one). The timing circuit operates the ball feed device to guide the gaming ball to the firing position, and then operates the firing motor to strike and fire the gaming ball guided to the firing position and then reset. In this way, one cycle of firing the game ball is configured. This one cycle is started when a condition for permitting the game ball to be released is established for all of the main control board M, the ECO unit EU, and the ball payout control board 3000. Even if the main control board M, the ECO unit EU, or the ball payout control board 3000 does not satisfy the condition for permitting the game ball to be fired after one cycle is started, the ball payout control is performed. The substrate 3000 continues the game ball firing process until one cycle is completed. In this way, even when the condition for permitting the game ball to be released is not satisfied in the middle of one cycle, the game ball is prevented from clogging by stopping the game ball being released, and the release of the game ball is permitted again. When the game ball is released, the firing of the game ball can be resumed smoothly.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, when the ball payout control substrate 3000 prohibits the firing of the gaming balls, the ball payout control substrate 3000 indicates a signal indicating that the firing of the gaming balls is prohibited. Send to main control board M. By configuring in this manner, the main control board M can determine that the gaming ball has not been fired, and can also notify the state outside the gaming machine based on this.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine has an external terminal board, and the main control board M outputs a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board, but the ball payout control From the substrate 3000, it is also possible to output information on the launch of the game ball to the hall computer HC. In addition, the game information output to the ECO unit EU via the ball payout control substrate 3000 may be converted into an appropriate form by the ECO unit EU and may be output to the outside via the external output terminal, via the ECO unit EU. An external signal output as well as an external signal output from the gaming machine (main control board M or ball payout control board 3000) may be used in combination.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the ball payout control board 3000 may be configured to execute the processing for permitting or prohibiting the firing of the game ball performed by the main control board M. With this configuration, processing on the main control substrate M can be reduced.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the power failure process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. First, in step 3602, the power on / power off initial process control means 3500 is a winning counter (for example, the first main game starting opening winning counter 3311a, the second main game starting opening winning counter 3311b, the first large The counter values of the winning opening winning counter 3311c, the second large winning opening winning counter 3311d, and the general winning opening winning counter 3311e) are temporarily stored (backed up) in the power-off time information temporary storage unit 3510. Next, at step 3604, the power-off and power-off return initial processing control means 3500 temporarily stores (backs up) the counter value of the ball number counter 3312 in the power-off time information temporary storage means 3510. Next, at step 3606, the power-off and power-on-reset initial processing control means 3500 turns on the payout control side power-off flag in the flag area of the power-off information temporary storage means 3510. Next, in step 3608, the power on / power off initial process control means 3500 switches on other information necessary for the game (for example, various flag information, received command, unsent command, etc.) The temporary storage means 3510 temporarily stores (backups). Next, at step 3610, the power on / off recovery initial processing control means 3500 supplies power to the backup area, returns to the caller of this subroutine, and shifts to a power off waiting loop.

  A backup power supply for supplying power to the backup area is provided on the prize ball payout control board 3000. The backup power supply is connected to the power supply unit E and supplied with power, and the power supply from the backup power supply is supplied to the backup area even if the power supply from the power supply unit E is interrupted when a power failure occurs. It is possible to store the number-of-balls counter, history, and various flags, and to hold various payout information that are important information for the game.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the ball payout control substrate 3000 is provided with a backup power supply for supplying power to the backup area for holding the ball holding counter and the like. By this configuration, it can function as a dedicated backup power source for holding the ball holding number counter etc., so that the harness etc. connected to the ball payout control substrate 3000 may be disconnected or disconnected. Even in such a case, the power can be stably supplied without being affected, and the reliability of the backup can be enhanced. Furthermore, by supplying power only to the backup area for holding the ball counter, etc., it is possible to extend the backupable time even if the backup power supply is miniaturized, and the ball payout control substrate 3000 can be miniaturized. And space saving can be achieved. The power supply unit E may be provided with a dedicated backup power supply for holding the ball holding number counter or the like. By providing the power supply unit E, the ball delivery control substrate 3000 can be further reduced in size and weight.

  Further, the backup power supply for holding the ball holding number counter or the like may be shared with the backup power supply for the main control board M provided in the power supply unit E. By sharing the backup power supply provided in the power supply unit E, the configuration relating to the backup power supply can be simplified.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, a volatile memory is used as a RAM for storing a ball holding counter and the like. Although the use of volatile memory can reduce the cost, it is necessary to provide a backup power supply to back up volatile memory in the event of a power failure. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory may be used as a RAM for storing a ball number counter and the like. For example, a flash memory can be used as a non-volatile memory. With this configuration, the backup power supply can be omitted, and the overall size and weight can be reduced.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the ball entry detecting device (for example, the first ball entry detecting device 111, the second ball entry detecting device 211) provided on the game board side , The first prize detection device 311, the second prize detection device 321, etc.) and the prize ball permission sensors KS (for example, the first main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS, the second main) provided on the game frame side Detection of ball entry is detected by both the game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 210KS, the first big winning prize ball permission sensor 310KS, the second big winning mouth prize ball permission sensor 320KS, the general winning prize ball permission sensor, etc.) And the winning information transmitted from the main control board A (for example, information related to the winning opening type and the number of winning balls) matches the basic winning balls number information stored on the winning balls payout control board 3000 side. Only when the player is awarded a prize ball Because they are cormorants configuration, it is possible to prevent the acquisition of winning balls by fraud. In addition, by providing the prize ball permission sensors KS on the gaming frame side, it is possible to reduce the cost of the gaming board (type replacement of pachinko gaming machines is mainly performed by replacing only the gaming board, and the gaming slot is Because it is often used repeatedly). In addition, for a winning that has given a winning ball to the player, it is configured to be able to display the winning opening type and the number of winning balls on a predetermined display unit (for example, the winning information display device 60). Thus, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is easy for the player to know which winning opening and how many winning balls have been obtained.

  In addition, as described above, the ball number counter 3312 is a counter for storing the current ball number of the player (the number of game media that can be used for the game). As a result of the player advancing the game, when the value of the ball number counter 3312 becomes zero, in other words, the current ball number of the player may become zero. In such a case, it is necessary to stop the firing of the game balls. That is, when the value of the ball holding number counter 3312 becomes zero, it is necessary to control so that the game ball is not fired even if the player operates the firing handle 44. As described above, the launcher 42 has a launch motor, a ball feed device, etc. (not shown) and controls the operation of the launch motor and the ball feed by the launch control board 40 which is a control circuit of the launcher 42. By stopping (prohibiting) the supply of the drive signal to the firing motor, the firing of the gaming ball can be stopped. The launch control board 40 can also stop the launch of the gaming balls by interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of control signals to the ball feeding device.

  Furthermore, the launch control board 40 has a timing circuit (not shown). As mentioned above, even when firing game balls continuously, they are fired at regular intervals (for example, 599.9 ms / one) so that the game balls can not be fired more than 100 per minute. Is configured as. The timing circuit is a circuit configured to fire the gaming ball at this regular interval. When enabled by the control signal from the firing control board 40, the timing circuit matches the operation timing of the ball feeding device with the operation timing of the firing motor to control the ball feeding device and the firing motor. Specifically, first, the timing circuit operates the ball feeding device to guide the gaming ball to the firing position, and then operates the firing motor to strike the gaming ball guided to the firing position. Fire and then reset. Thus, the timing circuit constitutes one cycle for firing one gaming ball. On the other hand, when the timing circuit is disabled by the control signal from the emission control board 40, the control of the ball feeding device and the emission motor is discontinued. That is, the firing of the gaming ball can also be stopped by disabling the timing circuit.

  In addition, this example is an example to the last, and is not limited to this. For example, although the prize information display device 60 in the fifth embodiment is provided in the game slot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other such as the first main game symbol display device 120 (or the second main game symbol display device) It may be provided on the same substrate as the display device (if configured as such, there are effects such as cost reduction and improvement in visibility). In the fifth embodiment, the main controller A transmits the winning information (and the basic winning number information) to the winning ball payout control board 3000, and determines whether the winning information is normal or not. The configuration is such that determination is made on the side of the payout control board 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine abnormality of the winning information with a configuration reverse to that of the fifth embodiment. The main control board A may be configured to transmit winning information (and basic prize ball number information) from the control board 3000 to the main control device A, and to determine whether the winning information is normal or not. }. Further, for example, the display of the number of winning balls may be performed in full color 7 segments, and the type of winning opening type or the position of the winning opening may be notified by the color displaying the number of winning balls. In addition, according to the entry ease of the winning opening, the display of the winning information is made different (for example, in the case of winning to the winning opening where entering is easy, display in white, general winning opening where entering is difficult) In the case of winning, the display may be performed in red together with the sound effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of the gaming machine for the profit of the player by the display frequency different from the normal.

<< Other Configurations Applicable to Fifth Embodiment >>
Here, other configurations applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below. The following configuration is not limited to the fifth embodiment, and can be applied to the configurations of all the embodiments according to this example.

<Total score display device D190>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the gaming balls to be processed are artificial game media that can be arithmetically processed, and the gaming balls to be fired are substantial. It may be a fun game ball. When configured as such, a total score display device D190 capable of displaying the total number of the shootable game balls and the like may be provided. The total score display device D190 has nine display portions formed of seven-segment LEDs, and is provided at a position (eg, near the sub input button SB in FIG. 1) which is easy for the player to visually recognize. . In addition, nine (nine digits) display units are five (five digits) display units for displaying total score information, and two (two digits) display units for displaying acquired score information. And 2 (two-digit) display units for displaying error information. The total number of projectable game balls displayed on the total score display device D190 can be increased when a game ball is lent or when a winning ball is obtained by entering a predetermined winning hole. It is configured. Further, the total number of shootable gaming balls displayed on the total score display device D190 is stored in a storage device such as a RAM. The storage device can be, for example, a RAM or the like built in the CPU of the main control board M. In addition to this, the total score display device D190 is configured to separately have a storage device such as a RAM, and information related to the total number of game balls that can be fired by both the main control board M and the total score display device D190. May be configured to be stored. Also, by doing this, the total score display device D190 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can not only display but also store the total number of gaming balls.

Further, the following information can be displayed on the total score display device D190.
(1) Total Score Information The total score information is information indicating the total number of points that can be fired. In addition, a shootable gaming ball may be referred to as a score (one ball = 1 point), and a total of the number of shootable gaming balls may be referred to as a total score.
(2) Acquired Score Information Acquired score information is information indicating a score (may be referred to as a winning ball in another embodiment) obtained by entering a game ball into a predetermined winning opening. .
(3) Error information This is information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board and / or the payout control board. Here, as described above, the total score display device D190 has five (five digits) display portions for displaying the total score information, and two (two digits) for displaying the acquired score information. And two (two-digit) display parts for displaying error information, and a total of nine display parts. The display unit for displaying acquired score information and the display unit for displaying error information may be combined. At this time, if an error occurs while the acquired score information is displayed, the displayed acquired score information is switched to the error information. As an example, when an error occurs, it is displayed in different display modes depending on the type of error such as “E1”, “E2”, “E3”,... In the case where "E1" is displayed as, for example, when "* 8" is displayed ("*" indicates the light is turned off) when payout of eight balls is performed, the power is cut off, and the power is cut off. The error may be configured such that “E1” is displayed when failure recovery can not be normally performed, and “* 8” is displayed when power failure recovery is successfully performed. The number of display units can be changed as appropriate. For example, four display units for displaying total score information can be used to display information of up to four digits, and a display for displaying total score information The number of parts may be six, and information of up to six digits may be displayed.

  In the case of a gaming machine capable of firing 100 balls per minute, if the payout rate is 2 when continuing to fire the gaming ball for one hour, “In: 100 × 60 = 6000, It will be out: 12000 ". When the operating hours of the game arcade is 14 hours, it becomes "In: 84000, Out: 168000", and in such a case, the total score displayed on the total score display device D190 at the end of the game arcade is Since it is approximately "168000-84000 = 84000", when configured as such, the display unit for displaying the total score information in the total score display device D 190 is five, and the information up to 5 digits is displayed. It is preferable to make it possible.

  Of the multiple types of errors, if recovery impossible errors (errors that can not be recovered in the situation immediately before the error occurs) that can not be recovered without executing the RAM clear process at the time of setting change To clear the RAM of the main control board and / or the payout control board, but not to clear the information on the total score as described above, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. (For example, when the total score is “2000”, an unrecoverable error occurs, and it can be prevented from becoming “0” when returning from a non-recoverable error). In addition, even if the area (address) of the RAM including the information on the total score is also targeted for clearing, the information on the total score is also stored in the CR unit, and when returning from the unrecoverable error, By configuring the connection terminal board to transmit information on the total score to the main control board and / or the payout control board, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Further, when the total score display device D190 is provided with a RAM, storing the information on the total score in the RAM causes a non-returnable error, and even when the non-returnable error is returned, It is possible not to penalize the player. In other words, there is a means (storage area for backing up the total score information) for backing up the total score information even when a power failure occurs or when the RAM of the main control board and / or the delivery control board is cleared. If so, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even if a non-returnable error occurs (total score information is stored in the RAM of the main control board and / or the payout control board). May be configured to be stored in the internal storage area and the storage area for backup, or the storage area not erased even if the RAM of the main control board and / or the payout control board is cleared (storage area for backup) May be configured to be stored only).

<Information on the number of difference balls>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls (scores) in a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period after the player starts playing a game) It may be configured to be able to confirm the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of all game balls fired from. For example, a display unit for displaying the number of slips may be provided at a position which can be constantly confirmed (visually recognized) by the player, or may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device. When the effect display device is configured to be able to display the display on the number of slips, the display on a part of the effect display device may be configured to constantly display the display on the number of slips, or the button On the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the effective period (or by operating the sub input button SB again on the menu screen), a display regarding the number of slips is displayed on the effect display device (If the player desires to confirm the number of slips, the number of slips may be confirmed at any time by operating the sub input button SB). In addition, the increase or decrease value of the total score from a predetermined timing such as when the game is started may be set as the number of slips, for example, the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (ball) and the current total score is 2500 In the case of points (balls), the number of slipper balls is +500 (balls), the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls), and the current total score is 1500 points (balls) The number of slipper balls may be configured to be −500 points (balls). In addition, when the number of slips is displayed on a predetermined display unit (for example, effect display device), the number of slips is a positive value and in the case of 0, black is displayed, and the number of slips is a negative value. In this case, the display color (display mode) may be made different depending on the value of the number of slipper, such as displaying in red.

  The main control board M measures and calculates the information on the current number of balls and the information on the number of balls obtained by subtracting the current number of balls from the predetermined number as the information on the number of balls. It may be configured to be able to store on the M side. In addition, information on the current number of balls or information on the number of gaming balls obtained by subtracting the current number of balls from a predetermined number is used as the information on the number of balls, for example, for winning balls The control substrate KH) may be configured to be able to measure and calculate and store it on the main control substrate M side. Further, the information stored by the main control board M may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. Further, information on the number of slips may be received from another device so that the main control board M can be grasped.

Further, as a configuration regarding the number of slips, it may be configured as follows.
(1) When the number of slips reaches a predetermined number, the progress of the game is stopped. As an example, the game ball is not fired even if the player operates the launch handle D44 (the control of the launcher D42 is not executed), the entry to the winning opening is invalidated (for example, the first main game start aperture) The sensor for detecting the game ball to the winning opening such as the ball detection device A11s does not detect the game ball, does not execute the ball detection process illustrated in FIG. 14), various lottery on the main control board M side It may be configured not to execute (for example, the success lottery, the symbol determination lottery, the variation mode determination lottery, and the like described in detail in FIG. 25 are not executed).
(2) Information on the number of slips may be electromagnetically recorded on a predetermined recording medium, and when the player starts playing a game, the information stored in the recording medium may be read, It may be configured to be able to proceed with the game by inheriting information on the number of difference balls. In such a configuration, even when a player executes a game with a plurality of gaming machines per day, the number of slipper pieces can be taken over and measured, and the difference between the player's day You can know the number of balls. In addition, when the number of slips per day of the player reaches a predetermined number, the game is stopped as described above, and the number of slips has reached the predetermined number for stopping the game on the recording medium. Information may be recorded, and it may be configured such that a game can not be made (a game ball can not be lent out) for a predetermined period (for example, until the next business day). In the case where a player executes a game with a plurality of gaming machines per day, it is preferable to be able to grasp which player has executed the game, for example, the recording medium Identification information that can identify which player is playing a game, and when reading a game, it is configured to be able to read out information on the number of slips per day by referring to the identification information Is preferred.

Further, when the progress of the game is stopped, the information to the effect that the progress of the game is stopped may be transmitted to another control board such as the sub control board S, for example, the information to the sub control board S In the case of transmitting, based on the transmitted information, it is possible to perform control of performing predetermined display or control of changing the display mode of the display such as the effect being executed as described below.
(1) When the progress of the game is stopped, the effect display device displays the effect of stopping the progress of the game, and (1-1) the game is stopped on the front layer rather than the currently displayed effect Display the effect display taking the area of half or more of the display area of the effect display device, (1-2) The alerting image described above on the front layer than the effect currently displayed (for example, “pachinko is modest (1-3) erase the display of the currently displayed effect and display an indication that the progress of the game has been stopped in the entire display area of the effect display device, It may be configured as follows. In addition, when displaying a display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped, a voice dedicated to the display may be output (for example, "The game is over. Please be careful of stagnation"), The game effect lamp may be turned on in the lighting mode exclusively for the display.
(2) When the number of difference balls reaches the predetermined number, if there is a big hit, a special game start demonstration time, or a symbol change related to a big hit symbol, the progress of the (2-1) game is stopped Do not execute the process, then stop the progress of the game when the number of difference balls is reduced by more than the number of game balls increased in the big hit, (2-2) stop the progress of the game, and then the player is not good The progress of the game can be resumed only by a possible operation (for example, an operation that can be performed only by the game arcade manager), or the game can not be resumed unless the RAM is cleared at the time of setting change (sixth embodiment described later When applied to the configuration of (1), it may be configured as follows.

  In addition, when the predetermined number at which the progress of the game is stopped has not been reached, the main control board M may be configured to be able to transmit information on the number of slips to the sub control board S side, When configured as described above, the situation is reached when the number of fixed difference balls decreases by a predetermined number which is the number of slips that will stop the progress of the game as a display executed on the sub control board S side When it becomes (for example, when reaching a predetermined number by firing 100 balls further), it is configured to output an indication that the stop of the progress of the game is imminent on the effect display device or by voice. It is also good. Also, for example, when the predetermined number is −2500 points (spheres), the number of balls is smaller than when the number of balls is relatively close to the predetermined number (for example, −2000 balls). Is a value relatively distant to the predetermined number (for example, +1000 balls), as the effect to be executed on the side of the sub control board S, during the symbol change notice effect (for example, conversation effect etc.) May be configured to be performed more frequently.

<Action when total score reaches upper limit>
In addition, the total score may increase when the game balls are paid out, but if the total score reaches the predetermined value by setting an upper limit value on the total score, the total score does not increase It may be configured. As one example, when the size of the storage area related to the total score is 2 bytes, the total score that can be stored is from 0 to 65535, and the upper limit value of the total score is 65535. When configured as such, under the situation where the total score is 65510, if the game ball enters the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10) and 15 balls are paid out, 15 points The score of (ball) is added to the total score, and the total score is 65,525. On the other hand, under the situation where the total score is 65,530, when the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) and the payout of 15 balls occurs, the score of 15 points (ball) Since the upper limit of the total score exceeds 65535 when the total score is added to the total score, five points (balls) are added to the total score, and the total score becomes the upper limit 65535. If the total score is the upper limit value, even if the information to increase the total score is received from the CR unit CRU (sometimes referred to as ECO unit), the total score does not increase even if it is configured Good (for example, the insertion of a bill into the CR unit CRU is invalidated, the operation of the button provided for lending the score on the CR unit CRU is invalidated). When the total score reaches (overruns) the upper limit value due to the winning, an error may occur and the progress of the game may be stopped. In addition, when the total score reaches (exceeds) the upper limit due to winning, the upper digit is displayed in hexadecimal, scroll display / switch display, etc., and the entire score is changed by changing the display mode. You may display it.

<Composition about game value information>
Information that the value of one game ball or one score is the first value (for example, 4 yen), and the value of one game ball or one score is more than the first value The main control board M (following main control board M as a payout control board H from the connection terminal board which is a terminal board provided in the gaming machine) and information indicating that the second value is low (for example, 1 yen) It may be configured to be transmittable. The first value information and the second value information may be referred to as game value information. Also, in such a configuration, the main control board M may be configured to be able to store which information of the first value information and the second value information has been received. In addition, it may be configured to be able to confirm whether the gaming value information stored in the main control board M matches the gaming value information received from the connection terminal board. As the execution timing of the confirmation, 1) Check whether they always match (2) every time a predetermined number of game balls are fired (for example, measure the number of balls fired by measuring the discharged balls), (3) every predetermined period (for example, (1), (4) after power recovery after occurrence of power failure, (5) after execution of the RAM clear process for changing the setting. Further, if it is determined that the game value information stored in the main control board M and the game value information received from the connection terminal board do not match, as a result of the determination, for example, the main control board If the game value information stored in M is the first value and the game value information received from the connection terminal board is the second value, the progress of the game is stopped until the game value information matches. The game ball may not be launched, the entry to the winning opening may be disabled, or the score (total score) may not be settled.

  Further, as described above, when the main control board M side is configured to transmit information to the sub control board S side to the effect of stopping the progress of the game when the progress of the game is stopped, (1) Under the situation where the main control board M stores the game value information which is the first value, when the number of slips reaches a predetermined value, the effect that the progress of the game is stopped and the progress of the game is stopped While the main control board M stores the game value information which is the second value, while the main control board M stores the game value information at a predetermined value, the game does not stop and the game does not progress. (2) Under the situation where the main control board M stores the game value information which is the first value, the progress of the game is stopped when the number of slips reaches a predetermined value and While executing the effect of stopping the progress of the game, the main control board M has a second value When certain game value information is stored, the progress of the game is not stopped regardless of the number of bonus balls and the effect of stopping the progress of the game is not executed. (3) The main control board M is the first value In the situation where the game value information is stored, if the number of balls reached a predetermined value (for example, -2500 balls), the effect of stopping the progress of the game and stopping the progress of the game is executed. When the main control board M stores the game value information as the second value, the number of slips reaches a specific value (for example, -10,000 balls) which is a value smaller than the predetermined value. The game may be configured to stop the progress of the game and execute an effect to the effect of stopping the progress of the game. In addition, although it was comprised so that presentation of the effect of stopping progress of a game could be performed based on the number of balls, it is not limited to this, The score which can be calculated based on the number of balls and game value information ( It is also possible to configure to perform the effect on stopping the progress of the game based on the information on the loan amount of the game value, the game ball, and the points). In addition, in the situation where the main control board M stores the game value information which is the first value, the effect mode in the case of executing the effect on the number of extras and the game in which the main control board M is the second value You may make it different from the production | presentation aspect in the case of performing the production | presentation regarding the number of difference balls in the condition which has memorize | stored value information. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make an effect execution mode based on the amount of money used by the player, and it is possible to appropriately prevent the game from being absorbed.

<Configuration of game end operation>
In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the settlement button D60 is provided, and the player can transmit information on the score from the main control board M to the connection terminal board by operating the settlement button D60. You may comprise (it can end a game by the said operation). In the case where a power failure occurs during transmission of the information on the score, (1) the information on the score is transmitted again from the main control board M to the connection terminal board after the power is restored (2) Send a request signal requesting transmission of information on the excess score from the connection terminal board to the main control board M again, and then transmit information on the score again from the main control board M to the connection terminal board It may be configured.

  In addition, when the settlement button D60 is operated while the door unit is opened, (1) processing relating to the settlement of the score may be performed, and (2) processing relating to the settlement of the score may not be performed. In addition, when the door unit is opened immediately after operating the settlement button D60, the processing relating to the settlement of the score may be continuously performed without being interrupted.

  When the settlement button D60 is operated in the setting confirmation state, (1) the processing relating to the settlement of the score is executed in a situation where the setting value can be confirmed, (2) the processing relating to the settlement of the score (3) Do not execute the process relating to the settlement of the score in a situation where the setting value can be confirmed. (4) The setting value can not be confirmed, and the process relating to the settlement of the score may not be performed.

  When the settlement button D60 is operated in the setting change mode, (1) processing regarding settlement of the score is performed with the setting modification mode, (2) the setting modification mode ends, and processing regarding settlement of the score is performed, (3) In the setting change mode, the process relating to the score adjustment may not be performed. (4) The setting change mode may end, and the process relating to the score adjustment may not be performed.

  When the settlement button D60 is operated while the main gaming symbol is changing, (1) the processing related to the settlement of the score is performed while the main gaming symbol is changing, The processing may not be performed.

  When the settlement button D60 is operated during the big hit (or small hit), (1) the processing related to the score adjustment is executed while the big hit (or small hit) is being executed, (2) the big hit It may be configured not to execute the process regarding the settlement of the score while (or the small hit) is performed.

  As described above, even when an unintended event (power-off, error) occurs while transmitting or receiving information on the score between the main control board M and the connection terminal board, It becomes possible to transmit or receive information on the score accurately. In addition to the above configuration, or in addition to the above configuration, the transmitting side includes (1) data indicating that transmission has ended in the information related to the score (for example, in the case of serial communication, the end bit information And (2) transmitting information related to the score, and then transmitting information indicating the end. Further, the receiving side may be configured to transmit reception completion information indicating that the information has been received to the transmitting side after receiving the transmitted information on the score.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, only one set value corresponding to the probability of winning or not of the main gaming symbol of the gaming machine is provided, but a plurality of such set values may be provided. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of such settings are provided is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the following embodiments may be the same as the step numbers, symbols, means names, etc. in the other embodiments, but these are respectively step numbers in the single embodiment, It indicates that it is a code, means name, etc. (For example, step 2102 in this embodiment and step 2102 in the second embodiment are steps 2102 in another embodiment, so they are processes that function independently. ).

  First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment has a key switch for setting change and a setting change button as setting changing means in order to provide a plurality of setting values for making the winning probability of the main game pattern different. It is provided. Hereinafter, although it demonstrates using the key switch for setting change, and a setting change button as an apparatus for the setting change in this example, you may employ | adopt not only this but general input devices, such as a dip switch. In addition, it is preferable to use the key for setting change from the viewpoint of allowing only a specific administrator to change the setting, but in addition to this, authentication with high security performance such as password input, biometric authentication, etc. The system may be configured to enable setting change.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the key switch for setting change can be switched between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and rotating it in a predetermined direction. ing. In this example, when the key switch for setting change is in the ON state when the power is turned on (under the predetermined condition), the setting change mode is set, and the operation (for example, depression) by the setting change button is effective. On the other hand, when the key switch for setting change is in the OFF state, the setting change mode is not set, and the operation (for example, depression) by the setting change button is invalidated. Moreover, the open signal of the door D18 input into the main control board M can be mentioned as a predetermined condition for making a setting change button effective. By configuring in this way, in addition to "the key switch for setting change is in the ON state", two conditions of "the door D18 is in the open state" are required as a situation where the setting change can be performed Since the condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress a normally unthinkable state (that is, incorrect setting change) in which the key switch for setting change is turned on in the closed state of the door D18.

  In the following, the process relating to the setting change when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 124a.

  First, FIG. 124 a is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the sixth embodiment. After powering on the gaming machine, in step 1001 (sixth), the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch is off. In the case of YES at step 1001 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1002. In the case of NO at step 1001 (sixth) (when the setting key switch is operated), the main control board M executes the processing at step 1003 (sixth) (setting change processing described later), and step It shifts to processing of 1004. Then, the RAM is cleared in step 1004, so that the operation probability (big hit probability) is configured to be a low probability, and after the setting is changed, it always becomes a low probability. In addition, since the RAM is cleared after the setting is changed, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is also low.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine has a plurality of setting values, but the correspondence between the operation mode of the setting change button and the change of the setting values of the gaming machine can be designed freely as appropriate. For example, if the number of set values in this example is 6 (the set value is one of “1” to “6”) and the set value at power on is “6”, the setting change button is 1 As the setting value becomes "5" when the button is operated, and the setting value becomes "3" when the setting change button is operated three times, the setting value is "6" according to the number of times the setting change button is operated. → It may be configured to roll back to “1” (Similarly, it may be configured to roll up the set value sequentially from “1” to “6” according to the number of times the setting change button is operated) . Also, in this case, when the setting change button is operated once when the setting value is “1”, the setting change is “6”, and the setting change is the lower limit. When the button is operated, the set value may be shifted to the upper limit value. Similarly, according to the number of times the setting change button is operated, the set value is advanced, and the setting change button is operated in the state where the set value is the upper limit ("6" in this example). The set value may be configured to shift to the lower limit value (in this example, “1”). In addition, the setting values may be sequentially changed by long-pressing the operation button.

  In addition, the number of setting values can be freely designed as appropriate, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. As the number of setting values decreases (for example, when the number of setting values is 2 or 3), the configuration of the gaming machine is simplified while improving the amusement of the game based on having a plurality of setting values. As the number of setting values increases (for example, when the number of setting values is 5 or 6), it becomes possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Here, FIG. 124 b shows a state in which the main control board M is accommodated in the case, and a cross section around the setting operation unit. As shown in FIG. 124b, on the main control board M, a CPUMC is provided on the upper right of the main control board M, and a mounting area for the test terminals TS attached only when performing a ball out test etc. In the lower right portion of the main control board M, the above-described ball entry state display device J10 is provided. In the upper left portion of the main control board M, an operation unit for setting change and a setting value display device are provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU, the test terminal, the ball entry state display device J10, the operation unit for setting change, and the setting value display device do not overlap in plan view (rear view of the gaming machine) , And a gap of at least a predetermined size (for example, 30 mm or more) is provided so that false recognition of the ball entry state display device J10 and the setting value display device can be suppressed. In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 124b is a free end when releasing the game machine frame, and setting is performed by arranging an operation unit for setting change and a setting value display device near the free end side. While making it easy to change the value, etc., the ball entry state display device J10 is displayed when the gaming machine frame is opened by arranging it on the rotary shaft side when opening the gaming machine frame. Care is taken to prevent information from being unintentionally viewed by the player. If priority is given to preventing fraud when changing setting values, etc., the setting change operation unit and the setting value display device may be formed on the right side (the rotary shaft side of the play slot) of the main control board in front view . Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the points described above, the open / close lid SKC is provided in a portion corresponding to the operation unit for setting change so that the operation unit for setting change is not easily accessed. The operation unit for setting change is configured so as not to be exposed except in the case of work or confirmation work of setting information. Hereinafter, the setting change operation unit and the setting value display device will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG. 124 b (a partial cross-sectional view of related parts).

  First, the setting change button SK2 can be operated so that the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key slot of the setting key switch SK1 on the upper surface of the substrate case corresponding to the setting change operation unit An opening of a predetermined size is formed to be However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall or the like from the opening toward the upper surface of the substrate, other electronic components (for example, CPU) of the main control substrate M can not be accessed through the opening. Further, a setting key SK1 in which a setting key insertion port is formed corresponding to this opening, and a push type setting change button SK2 are vertically disposed, and further, an open / close lid SKC corresponding to the size of the opening Is attached to the substrate case so as to be openable and closable in a state in which the opening is always closed in a direction to close the opening.

  Next, an outline of the operation method such as setting change and the operation of the setting change / setting display will be briefly described. When checking the set value, first, open the lid SKC against the biasing force by a predetermined angle, insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot of the setting key switch SK1, and right the key Rotate in the direction. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding value if the range of the setting value is 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device formed of the 7-segment LED, indicating that the setting display mode is set. The segment DP (dot) is displayed in order to In the present embodiment, in the situation where the gaming machine is activated (the power is turned on), although the display of the set value (transition to the setting confirmation state) is possible, the process of changing the set value is performed. It can not do (it can not shift to setting change mode newly).

  On the other hand, when changing the setting value, first, operate the power switch Ea (see FIG. 2) to turn off the power, and then open the lid SKC at a predetermined angle against the biasing force, and then press the setting key Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the switch SK1 and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding value if the range of the setting value is 1 to 6) blinks on the setting value display device formed of the 7-segment LED, and the setting change mode is displayed. The segment DP (dot) is turned off to indicate. In this state, when the setting change button SK2 is pressed, a new set value which is incremented by +1 to the current set value is temporarily stored, and the stored set value is displayed on the set value display device. The administrator operates the setting change button SK2 so that an arbitrary setting value is obtained. In the present embodiment, if the setting value at power on is “1”, “1” “2”... “5” “6” “1” each time the setting change button SK2 is pressed once. The candidate of the setting value after the setting change is changed like "". Then, when the key inserted in the setting key switch SK1 is rotated in the left direction in a state where it is changed to any setting value (displaying any setting value on the setting value display device) by operating the setting change button, setting is performed. After the change process is completed and the current setting value is lit and displayed and the segment DP (dot) is lit and displayed on the setting value display device for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), both displays are turned off. In this example, after setting value candidates after setting change are selected, setting change processing is completed (setting values are determined) by rotating the key inserted in the setting key switch SK1 in the left direction. Although configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, (1) detecting that the gaming ball has entered the predetermined entrance, (2) newly providing a switch for setting determination, and operating the switch, (3) The setting change process may be completed (setting value is determined) by long-pressing the setting change button (maintaining on for at least one second) or the like.

  In addition, when setting values are displayed on the front side of the gaming machine when setting values are changed, setting changes (changes in setting values) can be smoothly performed, but during the business hours of the game arcade (the player's When the setting is changed to “in game”, the setting value can be confirmed, and the fairness of the game is hindered. However, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the setting key is used when changing the setting value, only the specific administrator who holds the setting key can change the setting value. It is configured that the setting change is not performed during the time (during the game of the player). In this case, the existing light emitting means (for example, the special symbol display device of FIG. 1 (the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) shown in FIG. The setting value can be easily confirmed by displaying the setting value only during medium or setting confirmation.

Further, as shown in the middle part on the left side of the figure, the setting switch may be replaced with the setting key switch SK1 to enable change and confirmation of the set value. The setting switch does not have a key hole for inserting the setting key like the setting key switch SK1, and is configured to be able to change and check the setting value by twisting the twistable operation unit to the left and right. The setting switch has three operation states, that is, a state in which it is twisted to the left, an initial position, and a state in which it is twisted to the right, and the operation state can be determined by a sensor. The setting switch is configured to return to the initial position, and is urged toward the initial position when the hand is released from the state twisted to the left or the state twisted to the right. Hereinafter, a method of changing and confirming the setting value using the setting switch will be exemplified.
<Setting change method 1 (action of “1” in the same figure)>
(1) Turn on the power switch while turning the setting switch to the right to enter the setting change mode (2) Setting value displayed on the setting value display device each time the setting change button is pressed Data) switches as “1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ···” (3) If the setting switch is at the initial position for 5 seconds, it is set to the setting value displayed on the setting value display device. (The set value is fixed)
<Setting change method 2 (action of "2" in the figure)>
In the configuration of "2" in the figure, the setting switch is configured to be able to twist two steps to the right, and is referred to as a state twisted one step to the right and a state twisted two steps to the right.
(1) Turn on the power switch while turning the setting switch one step to the right to turn on the setting change mode (2) The setting switch "twices to the right one step → Two steps to the right The setting value (setting value data) displayed on the setting value display device changes as “1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ...” each time (3) The setting switch is at the initial position for 5 seconds If there is, it is set to the set value displayed on the set value display device (the set value is fixed)
<Setting change method 3 (action of "3" in the figure)>
(1) Turn on the power switch with the setting switch twisted to the left to turn on the setting change mode (2) The setting switch "twists one step to the right → two steps to the right" The setting value (setting value data) displayed on the setting value display device at each time changes as “1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ···” (3) The setting switch is at the initial position for 5 seconds In this case, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is set (the setting value is determined)
As a condition for ending the setting change mode, it may be determined that the setting switch has been turned to the left for 3 seconds.
<Setting confirmation method 1>
(1) By turning the setting switch leftward for 5 seconds when the power is turned on, the setting display mode is set, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device.
(2) The setting display mode is ended by maintaining the state in which the setting switch is twisted to the left again for 5 seconds after the setting switch is at the initial position.
<Setting confirmation method 2>
(1) When the power switch is turned on with the setting switch turned to the left, the setting display mode is set, and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device.
(2) The setting display mode is ended by maintaining the initial position for 5 seconds after the setting switch becomes the initial position.
In the setting value display device, the setting value may be constantly displayed in the setting display mode, or may be displayed only when the setting switch is twisted to the left.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a flow of setting change processing according to the sixth embodiment. When the setting change process is started, in step 1003-1, a command indicating that the setting change process has started is set and transmitted to the sub control board S. Thereby, the sub control board S can display "in setting change mode" and the like on the effect display device (FIG. 140). At the same time, output to the external terminal board is performed as an outer end signal (security signal). In step 1003-2, it is checked whether the set value (set value data) is in the normal range ("1" to "6"). If YES, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. If NO in step 1003-2, that is, if it is determined that the setting value (setting value data) is an abnormal value other than “1” to “6”, setting of the minimum payout rate in step 1003-3 A value (set value data) "1" is set, and the process proceeds to step 1003-4. In step 1003-4, a special symbol display device (a first main game symbol display device A20 or a second main game symbol display device B20 may be referred to in a display mode (for example, all lights on) indicating that the setting is being changed. At the same time, the set value display device displays the current set value. Next, in step 1003-5, it is confirmed whether or not there is an input of the setting change button. In the case of NO, the process proceeds to step 1003-11. If YES in step 1003-5, the setting value data switched by the setting change button in step 1003-6 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step 1003-7. In step 1003-7, it is confirmed whether or not the current setting value (setting value data) is not the maximum value, and in the case of YES, the process proceeds to step 1003-9 and 1 is set to the setting value (setting value data). to add. If NO in step 1003-7, that is, if it is determined that the set value (set value data) is the maximum "6", the minimum payout rate "1" is set in step 1003-8. At the same time, the process proceeds to step 1003-9, where 1 is added to the set value (set value data). Subsequently, in step 1003-10, the setting value data is updated, and in step 1003-11, it is confirmed whether or not the falling of the setting key signal is present. In step 1003-11, when there is no falling of the setting key signal, the processing proceeds to step 1003-5, and the processing of step 1003-5 to the processing of step 1003-11 until the falling of the setting key signal is confirmed repeat. If YES in step 1003-11, that is, if it is determined that the setting key switch has returned to the state before the setting change, the setting is being changed by turning off all the LEDs of the special symbol display device in step 1003-12. After clearing the display mode indicating that is, in step 1003-13, a command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is set and transmitted to the sub control board S. Thus, the sub control board S hides "during setting change mode" being displayed on the effect display device, and stops the output to the external terminal board. After the process of step 1003-13 is completed, the process moves to the process of step 1004 of the present process, and the RAM is cleared. In the processing flow of the sixth embodiment, the setting value switched by the setting change button is determined by the falling of the setting key signal (step 1003-11), but the present invention is not limited thereto. The set value may be determined by performing any of the main operations (not shown, a ball lending button, a sensor of a steering wheel, etc.). Furthermore, the set value may be determined by the input information (various gates, starting ports, attackers, etc.) of various switches provided on the game board surface, in which case the player touches the various switches. In addition to being able to prevent unauthorized changes in settings, it is also possible to prevent unauthorized changes in settings by adopting such a complicated procedure in changing settings. In addition, although “1” to “6” are described as setting value data managed by the RAM throughout the entire processing, processing may be performed by replacing the setting value data “0” to “5”, respectively. . By doing this, when the RAM clear occurs due to the RAM abnormality, the abnormality determination (NO in step 1003-2) due to the value "0" being set to the value of the RAM managing the set value data is avoided. Can. When the set value data is managed by “0” to “5”, “0” is treated as the set value data, and therefore, it is not determined to be abnormal. Furthermore, there is also an advantage that it is easy to perform offset processing in table selection when performing some sort of lottery using set value data (for example, when different data is selected for each set value in a prefetch table or the like). Specifically, when managing set value data as “1” to “6”, when using it as offset data for table selection as it is, it is necessary to perform processing such as decrementing the start address, etc. When managing value data with “0” to “5”, the value as it is can be used as offset data. Actually, when displaying the setting value data on the setting value display device, the setting value data is displayed as “1” to “6” by adding 1 to the setting value data.

In this example, it is determined in step 1003-2 whether or not the set value (set value data) is in the normal range. In other words, the confirmation process of the set value (set value data) is executed. However, as the execution timing of the confirmation process,
(1) Timing immediately after the power is turned on (2) Timing of entering the ball into a predetermined entrance (3) Timing of entering the main game start (4) Timing of entering the auxiliary game start (5) Winning Entry timing to the mouth (6) Main gaming symbol fluctuation start timing (7) Timing immediately after the gaming state was switched (8) Timing immediately after the big hit start (9) Timing immediately after the big hit end Executed at the above timing It is also good. In addition, the confirmation process of the set value (set value data) may be executed only at any one of the above nine timings, or the set value (set value data) of a plurality of timings of the above nine timings. A confirmation process may be performed. For example, since it is configured to execute checksum processing at the time of power on, it is not necessary to provide a process for checking only the set value (set value data), the set value (time) immediately after the power on. The confirmation processing of the setting value data) may not be executed.

  Next, processing in the case where the key switch for setting change (sometimes referred to as a setting key switch) is turned on in a situation other than when the power is turned on (predetermined condition) will be described.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M according to the sixth embodiment. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the setting key operation described later in step 1000-S (sixth). The process is executed, and the process moves to the process of step 1000-1.

  In setting key operation determination processing, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is operated (whether or not the setting key is input to the setting key insertion port, and the key switch for setting change is turned on) And the like). When it is determined that the setting key switch is operated in the setting key operation determination process in the timer interrupt processing (that is, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port, and the setting key is rotated in a predetermined direction) Thus, when the key switch for setting change is in the ON state), the current setting value of the gaming machine is displayed on a predetermined display device (in this example, the setting value display device).

Here, as described above, in the setting change process performed when the power is turned on (under a predetermined condition), when the setting key switch is operated, the next operation is performed until the operation of the setting key switch is completed. While the process does not shift to the process, in the setting key operation determination process, even when the setting key switch is operated, the process can be shifted to the next process without waiting for the end of the operation of the setting key switch. . Therefore, the setting change process is being executed (specifically, the setting is being changed), and the setting key operation determination process is determined that the setting key switch is operated (specifically, the setting value). And (during display) can adopt a different configuration. Here, an example of processing that can be executed when setting is being changed and when setting values are being displayed is shown in the following table. In the table, "○" indicates that the corresponding process can be executed, "x" indicates that the corresponding process can not be executed, and "△" indicates that the corresponding process is suspended. Show that. In the table, “game related input” is, for example, a sensor input from the winning opening. Further, “abnormal notification A” is, for example, an abnormal notification such as an opening error of the frame of the glass frame set / game board D35, an error due to impact, or the like. Further, “abnormal notification B” is, for example, abnormality notification relating to magnetism, disconnection, short circuit, power supply, and radio wave. Further, the “effect control command” is, for example, command transmission to the sub control substrate S side. Further, the “dispense control command” is, for example, a command transmission to the prize ball payout control board KH. In addition, "random number update" means, for example, a random number per symbol (for example, auxiliary gaming symbol winning random number), an ordinary symbol symbol random number (for example, auxiliary gaming symbol stopping symbol random number), a special symbol symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number ), And special symbol per soft symbol etc is a process to update. Further, “external output” is, for example, an output of a security signal (a signal indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting value is being displayed) to be output to the external terminal board. The "maintenance mode" is various setting modes related to information output on the sub control substrate S side. In addition, “notification” is notification that setting change on the side of the sub control board S is being performed or setting value display is being performed. Further, “payout” is payout processing of the gaming machine on the side of the winning ball payout control board KH. In addition, "firing" means that the game balls can or can not be shot on the side of the firing control board D40.

  Next, the arrangement of each device will be described.

«Placement of setting change means»
First, the arrangement of the setting key slot will be described. The setting key insertion port is mounted on the main control board M, and is provided separately from the ball entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button, and the like.

«Setting value display device»
Next, the set value display device will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a set value display device for displaying a set value to be set when changing the setting, on the main control board M. The setting value display device is a seven-segment display, and can distinguish six stages of settings 1 to 6 by the display of “1” to “6”. In the sixth embodiment, an example has been described in which the set value display device is provided separately from the ball entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button and the like, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The setting value may be displayed. In this case, although both the set value and the base value are displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, the set value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation state, otherwise May be configured to display a base value. It is also possible to continue to display the base value during the setting change mode, in which case the display of the set value and the base value is switched by time or operation of any input device. Is considered. Furthermore, both the set value and the base value may be simultaneously displayed on the 4-digit 7-segment by changing the display mode of the ball entry state display device J10. For example, the present setting value may be displayed in the most significant digit of the four-digit seven segments, and the base value may be displayed in the remaining three digits.

<< object of change >>
In the sixth embodiment, it is possible to change the winning probability of the main lottery of the main gaming symbol in one gaming state. For example, six stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided, and the probability of winning the jackpot of each of the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state gradually increases in the order of setting 1 to setting 6 It is configured to be advantageous), and the winning probability of the probability fluctuation gaming state for each setting is twice the winning probability of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state. Specifically, the winning probability of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is set 1: 1/320 (205/65536), set 2: 1/318 (206/65536), set 3: 1/317 (207/65536) , Setting 4: 1/315 (208/65536), setting 5/1/314 (209/65536), setting 6: 1/312 (210/65536), etc., and the winning probability of the probability fluctuation gaming state is , Setting 1: 1/160 (410/65536), setting 2: 1/159 (412/65536), setting 3: 1/158 (414/65536), setting 4: 1/58 (416/65536), setting 5: 1/157 (418/65536), setting 6: 1/156 (420/65536). In addition, the winning probability of the main gaming symbol lottery also includes the winning probability of the small hit, the winning probability of the small hit, regardless of the setting value and the gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming state) For example, it is set to 1/99. In addition, the winning probability of the probability variation gaming state is 10 times or less of the non-probability variation gaming state, that is, setting 1: 1 / 30.7, setting 2: 1 / 30.3, setting 3: 1/1. It may be provided so as to be 29.9, setting 4: 1 / 29.5, setting 5: 1/2 8.0, setting 6: 1/2 7.0.

Next, storage areas for setting values will be described.
«Storage area of setting value»
The RAM area in the sixth embodiment has a storage area of a set value (a specific area) and other game data storage areas (for example, a main game side random number, the number of rounds, etc.). Is configured to be stored at the upper address of the RAM area. When the setting change by the setting key switch is executed and there is an abnormality in the RAM area, all RAM areas including the storage area of the setting value are cleared (initialized). In the RAM clear by operation, the storage area of the setting value is not cleared, and only the data of the other game data storage area is cleared (initialized). In addition, although the example of storing the setting value at the start address of the RAM area has been described for the purpose of easily specifying the clear range at the time of clearing the RAM, there is no problem in storing it at any address of the RAM area. In addition, a storage area that is not cleared may be provided even when the setting change is performed and the RAM area is abnormal. For example, the setting change may be performed and the RAM area is abnormal, The information related to the display on the ball entry state display device J10 may not be cleared.

«Confirmation timing of setting value data»
Next, the confirmation process of the set value at the time of the lottery will be described. The confirmation process of the set value at the time of the lottery is performed before the step 1410-1 in the main gaming symbol display process of the step 1400 in the timer interrupt process, and the set value currently set is confirmed and set. The main game table 1 corresponding to the set value (that is, the winning probability of the big hit corresponding to the setting described above) is set. After performing the confirmation process of the setting value at the time of the lottery, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each gaming state, and the first main game content determination random number ( Based on the second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery is executed. In addition, when the set value currently set is confirmed, the set value is out of the range (for example, in the case of using the six-step setting of setting 1 to setting 6, the setting value is 0 or less and 7 or more). If it is determined that it is out of range in the case, (1) It is not possible to return to the status immediately before the error occurs. The game may not be progressed as a false error, or (2) the setting value may be determined as setting 1 which is most disadvantageous to the player.

<< Processing while changing settings >>
Next, processing during setting change will be described.

<Process on main control side>
First, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured to be able to display on the special symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) that the setting is being changed. Specifically, during the setting change, the LEDs of the special symbol display device are all turned on. In addition, it is desirable that all lighting of the LED of the special symbol display device be in a mode that is not displayed during the game of the player. In addition, if it is possible to indicate that the setting is being changed, it is not necessary to use the special symbol display device. For example, various LEDs provided on the game board may be used. In addition, a special LED is provided, and processing is performed so as to display only during setting change, and various other LEDs display special game information {special symbol display device or ordinary symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20)} The processing load can be reduced rather than sharing the

<Sub-control process>
Next, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is configured to be able to suggest that the setting is being changed by the effect display device SG, the speaker D24, and the like. Specifically, the effect display device SG is configured to display an image of “setting in change”, and the speaker D24 is configured to output a sound of “setting in change”. Further, during the setting change, the game data not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPUMC of the main control board M) is configured to be changeable. For example, setting of volume change (possible or impossible), setting of RTC (real time clock), setting of energy saving mode {while waiting for a game (when it is determined that the game is not performed for a predetermined period It is configured to be in the game standby when the launch handle is not operated for 5 minutes, and in the game standby, the standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device) compared to that in the normal game) , Etc. can be changed, and these changes can be made by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key. Moreover, you may substitute not only this but input devices, such as a touch panel. In this case, in addition to the liquid crystal display used for the main game as the effect display device, it is desirable to use another liquid crystal display that performs only sub input and use it as a touch panel. The RTC (real time clock) is a mechanism provided on the substrate of the sub main control unit to perform timekeeping. The RTC (real-time clock) has a built-in power supply (battery) independent of the substrate, and continues the clocking while power is not supplied to the gaming machine, so the date set at factory shipment etc. It is possible to supply the current date and time based on the time of day.

<Input restriction>
Next, the input restriction during setting change will be described. Specifically, in the process of step 1003 (sixth) (setting change process to be described later), entering the ball into the starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) is not detected It is configured. For example, even if an input signal is input to the input port as the first main game start slot entrance ball detector (A11s) or the second main game start slot entrance ball detector (B11s) detects an input, Since the CPUMC of the main control board M does not permit the timer interrupt process, it does not check the input port. However, it is configured to enable error detection such as door open detection and magnet detection. In the present embodiment, these abnormalities are detected only in timer interrupt processing, but in the sixth embodiment, door open detection, magnet detection, etc. in main control board side main processing (setting change processing) By making it possible to detect an error in the above, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed in the setting change state.

<External output>
Next, information output from the CPU MC of the main control board M to the outside will be described. As information output from the CPUMC of the main control board M to the outside, Setting value; It is possible to output a signal indicating that the setting is being changed. In the present embodiment, External output of set values, 2. Both of the information indicating that the setting is being changed are configured to be output from the main control board M to the hole computer. The signal indicating that the setting is being changed is continuously output during the setting change, and is continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) elapses from the end of the setting change. Furthermore, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured to transmit a setting value command, a setting change start command, and a setting change end command to the CPUSC of the sub control board S and the CPU of the winning ball payout control board.

<Disbursement processing>
Next, a process when the power is cut off during the payout process and the setting is changed will be described. Specifically, when the power is cut off in a situation where the award balls are being paid out by the award ball dispensing unit KE10, the power is turned off with the number of remaining prize balls backed up in the RAM area. . Then, at the time of power recovery, in the normal power recovery (that is, not the RAM clear), since the remaining prize ball number is stored, the remaining prize ball number is paid out after the power recovery, but the setting key switch is operated. When the power is restored in the status (it is turned on), all the RAM area including the storage area of the setting value is cleared, so the number of remaining prize balls backed up is also cleared, and the prize ball Even if the power is turned off during the payout, the remaining prize balls are not paid out when the power returns. Although not shown, when transitioning to the setting change mode, the CPUMC of the main gaming substrate M indicates that the setting change mode has been shifted to the award ball payout control substrate KH (CPU of the award ball payout control substrate). A command (sometimes referred to as a setting change start command) is transmitted, and when the setting change mode ends, a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended (sometimes referred to as a setting change end command) is transmitted. . In addition, after the setting change is effectively performed, the remaining prize ball number may be cleared.

<Random number update process>
In the sixth embodiment, the random number update process is not performed during the setting change. That is, the update of the random number is performed at step 1018 of the main control board side main process or at step 1000-2 (various random number update process) of the timer interrupt process, step 1000-3 (initial value update type random number update process), It is only performed in step 1000-4 (initial value random number update processing), and in the setting change processing, processing for updating random numbers is not provided.

«Display during confirmation of settings»
Next, the display during setting confirmation (a setting confirmation state, sometimes referred to as setting display) will be described.

<Display on main control side>
First, on the main control side, as described above, it is possible to display that the setting is being changed by the LEDs of the special symbol display devices (the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) However, even during the setting confirmation, it is possible to display that the setting confirmation is in progress by the LED of the special symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) During the setting confirmation, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are configured to blink. Note that it is desirable that the mode in which all the LEDs of the special symbol display device flash and display is a mode that is not displayed during the game of the player (for example, the mode displayed during the game of the player is It is an aspect that a certain LED and another LED are alternately displayed in a blinking manner). In addition, when the setting is being checked during the change of the special symbol, the change display of the main game symbol in the special symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20), It is configured to be displayed prior to the display of the setting value.

<Display on secondary control side>
Next, during the setting confirmation, on the side of the sub control board S, an audio display of “setting being confirmed” is performed on the effect display device SG, and an audio output of “setting being confirmed” is performed on the speaker D24. In addition, during setting change (setting change mode, setting change mode may be called), it is not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPUMC of the main control board M, it does not affect the result of the game) Changeable (maintenance mode), even during the setting confirmation, even if it is gaming data not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPUMC of the main control board M, does not affect the outcome of the game) It is configured to be impossible, and is configured not to be in a settable state. In addition, it is desirable to set the output time according to the importance with other errors that extend the output time (for example, the importance of notification of setting change is higher than the notification at initialization, and it is at initialization) If the output extension time of is 5000 ms, it may be 6000 ms which is longer at the time of setting change, etc.).

<Restriction of input information>
Next, restrictions on input information will be described. As described above, the restriction of the input information is provided during the setting change, but the restriction of the input information is not provided during the setting confirmation. Specifically, the main control side (main) is detected such that entry into the starting opening (the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) whose input is restricted during setting change is performed, etc. Regardless of the control by the CPU MC of the control board M) and the secondary control side (control by the CPU SC of the secondary control board S), all information regarding the game is detected and processed.

<External output>
Next, external output during setting confirmation will be described. First, with respect to set values for external output during setting change, external output is not performed during setting confirmation. Next, during setting confirmation, a signal indicating that the setting is being confirmed is continuously output. In addition, after completion of setting confirmation, it is configured to continuously output until a specific time (for example, 500 ms), and is configured to be output for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) during setting change.

<Disbursement processing>
Next, prize ball payout control during setting confirmation will be described. First, when the payout balls are being paid out by the prize ball payout device KE, if the setting is being checked, the payout ball payout control is temporarily interrupted. When the setting is confirmed, a game clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame, and can be confirmed from the back side of the gaming machine by the setting key switch. That is, there is a possibility that the ball supply from the store-side ball supply device to the game machine may not be normally performed by opening the gaming machine frame. Therefore, it is preferable to stop the payout balls once. Although not shown, when temporarily stopping the payout of the winning balls, the CPUMC of the main gaming substrate M has shifted to the setting confirmation state to the winning ball payout control substrate KH (CPU of the winning ball payout control substrate). A command (to be referred to as a setting confirmation start command) is transmitted, and when the setting confirmation state is ended, a command to the effect that the setting confirmation state is ended (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation end command) is transmitted It is done.

<Internal processing such as random number update processing>
Next, internal processing such as random number update processing during setting confirmation will be described. During the setting change, the random number updating process is not performed. However, during the setting confirmation, the random number updating process and the like are performed as in the game.

«Processing at power recovery»
Next, processing at the time of power failure recovery will be described.

<Normal power off and recovery>
First, when the setting change and the RAM clear are not performed when the power is restored, the game is started by returning to the gaming state before the power is turned off, including the setting value.

<Process when changing settings>
Next, processing at the time of setting change will be described. At the time of setting change, data of all the RAM areas including setting values are cleared, and thereafter, the set values which have been set are stored.

<Process when clearing RAM>
Next, processing when the RAM is cleared will be described. In the RAM clear at the time of the RAM clear button operation, other game data is cleared except for the setting value. Further, in the RAM clear when there is an abnormality in the RAM area, the data of all the RAM areas including the setting value is cleared.

<< command transmission timing >>
Next, in the present embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted in the control command transmission process in step 1999 in the timer interrupt process, but the setting change mode is started in the sixth embodiment or the setting change mode When the game is finished, the CPUMC of the main game board M causes the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board) to immediately execute the setting change mode start command after the setting change mode starts. It is preferable that the setting change start command is transmitted, and immediately after the setting change ends, a command related to the setting change end (a setting change end command) be transmitted. In addition, at the start of the game (for example, the transmission timing of the change start command), at the end of the game (for example, the stop timing of the change stop command), at the hold occurrence (for example, the read The command related to the set value may be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S at timings such as command stop timing). At this time, the secondary control board S stores the received setting value, and compares it with the setting value received in the next game, and if different, performs notification to make a mistake during the game. It can also facilitate the discovery of configuration changes.

<< Summary of the sixth embodiment >>
As mentioned above, although the process which concerns on a setting change was demonstrated, it will be as follows if a summary is put together. First, in the setting change situation, the main control means (for example, the CPUMC of the main control board M) includes effect control means (for example, the CPUSC of the sub control board S) and payout control means (for example, prize ball payout) While sending a command (setting change start command) indicating that the processing under setting change is to be executed in the main control means to the CPU of the control board KH, update processing of random numbers related to acceptance or rejection, starting opening sensor etc. The game related input of, for example, the abnormal notification with low priority such as ball bowl fullness (error that the sensor which detects fullness by the game ball being stored in the upper bowl dish D20 excessively, game ball is detected) Do not take place. Further, the main control means outputs a signal indicating that the setting is being changed from the external terminal. In addition, notification is also performed during setting change about abnormality notification {for example, abnormality directly connected to fraud (magnetic detection, radio wave detection, etc.)} with high priority. On the other hand, in the effect control means, while notifying that the setting is being changed, transition to the maintenance mode, test output in the effect control means, various effect settings, setting of the effective range of the player operation, etc. Configured to be able to Further, in the payout control means, both of the payout process and the launch process are prohibited.

  The setting is made when the power is turned off (during detection) while the above low priority error or high priority error is occurring, and the setting key switch is turned on and the power is turned on with the power off. In the change mode, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode (when the set value is determined), the detection of the low priority error or the high priority error and the error notification are ended. It may be configured. Also in such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected again after the change of the set value, the detection of an error and the notification of an error may be performed. In addition, when a low priority abnormality is detected in the setting change mode, the error notification may not be executed without being determined as an error, and the low priority abnormality may be set during the setting confirmation state. When it is detected, it may be configured not to execute the error notification without determining it as an error.

  When the set value is being displayed on the set value display device, the main control means indicates to the effect control means and the payout control means that the process of displaying the set value is executed in the main control means. While transmitting a command (setting display command), processing similar to normal processing such as updating processing of random numbers related to the pass / fail, game related input such as a starting opening sensor, abnormality notification, etc. is performed. However, the external terminal outputs a signal indicating that the setting value is being displayed. Similarly, although the effect control means also notifies that the set value is being displayed, it does not shift to the maintenance mode. Then, in the payout control means, although the payout process is temporarily interrupted, the operation of the launch process is not prohibited.

  Since the system is configured as described above, in the sixth embodiment, also in the effect control means (for example, the CPUSC of the sub control board S), in consideration of the point based on the operation performed only by the administrator of the setting change The game function is stopped in the main control means (for example, the CPUMC of the main control board M) and the payout control means (for example, the CPU of the award ball payout control board KH). That is, also in the other control means, a dedicated process is executed when an operation executable only by the administrator is executed in accordance with the process of setting change, and the process executed in the normal game progress is not executed. For this reason, a plurality of control means can execute management processing respectively corresponding to one operation of setting change as a starting point. On the other hand, in the case of the confirmation operation of setting display (setting confirmation state), by configuring to maintain the normal game processing as much as possible, appropriate processing is realized without giving more control restriction than necessary. be able to.

<< Modification of Sixth Embodiment >>
Note that modifications of the sixth embodiment (setting change) will be listed below.
<< object of change >>
In the sixth embodiment, although the success or failure probability of the main gaming symbol is made to differ for each setting value, it is also possible to change other parameters that affect the payout rate. Specifically, there is an influence on the payout rate, the transition ratio to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end, the selection ratio of the big hit type (pattern selection ratio when hit), the probability of success or failure of the auxiliary gaming pattern, the power support transition It is possible to combine one or more of the parameters such as the ratio, the special symbol, the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol (the difference in the relative number of variations per hour), and the operating speed of the movable object that affects the winning rate. . Moreover, although the partial parameter for every setting value is different, it is also possible to comprise so that it may become the same payout rate. Of course, it is also possible to improve each parameter according to the improvement of the payout rate. Also, for example, a plurality of parameters may be set individually, such as the probability of success or failure of a special symbol and the probability of success or failure of an auxiliary gaming symbol. It may be configured to shift to a parameter change mode corresponding to the position of the key switch. In addition to the parameters that affect the payout rate, the frequency of effects that do not affect the performance may also be changed.

  Here, in the sixth embodiment, since the probability of hitting is different for each set value, when the same effect determination process is adopted, the reliability of the effect is different. For this reason, it is also a matter to consider making it difficult to predict the setting value from the effect by making the reliability of the effect common to each setting value, and it is a matter to be considered. In addition to providing a determination table and an effect selection table for each set value, it is conceivable to adopt an effect correction value for correcting the difference in the hit probability for each set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, the table itself for drawing whether or not to execute the special notice is shared as "0 to 49" for each setting value, and corresponds to the probability of big hit as an effect correction value. A correction value for each set value is provided for each hit / out (at the time setting 1: 10/1000, setting 2: 12/1000, setting 3: 14/1000, at setting 1: 990/2000, Setting 2: 988/2000, Setting 3: 986/2000). As described above, if the effect correction value is provided for each setting value in accordance with the difference in the probability of hitting and the difference in the probability of missing due to the difference in the probability of hitting, a common effect correction value is used for a plurality of effects. By doing this, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which it is difficult to predict the setting value from the appearance frequency and reliability of the effect using the correction value, and in which the storage area is efficiently used. In addition, it is possible to apply not only to the case of using the effect correction value for all the effects (pre-prem effect described above or the notice effect performed by the variation) but also to some effects. In particular, apply only to special notices with extremely high reliance on hits (for example, display on the screen as in “next notice” or effects such as the appearance of extremely rare characters such as “spacemen”). For example, the reliability of the effect is not made lower than expected when the setting value is low, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the corporate image when the effect is commonly installed in a large number of gaming machines.
«Confirmation timing of setting value data»
In 6th Embodiment, although the process which confirms a setting value for every lottery process of a special symbol was performed, it is also possible to perform only at a predetermined timing. Specifically, information may be checked only once at the time of setting change and power on, or may be confirmed at each change timing of the game state such as a big hit. Also, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with the ball entry state display device J10, confirmation may be made in accordance with the display timing and the calculation timing. As a result, the timing for confirming the set value can be reduced, and the burden on other processes can be reduced.
<< Arrangement of setting key switches etc. >>
In the sixth embodiment, the setting key switch, setting change button, and setting value display device are mounted on the main control board, but a payout control device (for example, winning ball payout control board KH etc.) and a power supply unit (for example, power supply) It can be provided in the unit E) or can be configured as one independent device. Further, it is also possible to provide various buttons and indicators in a dispersed manner in a plurality of devices, for example, by providing a setting key switch on the main control board and providing a setting change button on the payout control board. In addition, since the change of the setting value may be the target of the unauthorized operation, the input function (setting key switch and setting change button) is in the control device having the sealing structure such as the main control board and the payout control board. It is desirable to provide. In the sixth embodiment, an example in which setting change is performed using the setting key switch and the setting change button has been described. However, design change can be appropriately made by using a general input device such as a dip switch. Can.

  Next, FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device SG during setting change and setting confirmation.

  Next, the upper part of the same drawing is an image diagram showing a list of items that can be set in the maintenance mode executed by the sub control board S in the setting change process of FIG. 124a. In this example, by transmitting a command indicating that the main control board M side has shifted to the setting change mode, the main control board M side indicates that the setting is being changed, and the sub control board S side It is configured to be able to execute a maintenance mode (a mode for setting at a store or for confirmation of manufacture). Further, in the present example, during the maintenance mode, the effect display device SG displays a setting display image SGSGH (in the present example, an image showing "4" which is the current setting value) for guiding the current setting value. It is configured to do. Further, as shown in the figure, in the setting change mode, the setting display mode information display image SGHMH (an image for notifying that the setting is currently being changed is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the example, it is configured to be able to display an image for displaying “in setting change mode”.

  As shown in the figure, in the present example, in the maintenance mode, a plurality of items can be selected as various settings related to information output. More specifically, in the present embodiment, execution of a test mode at the time of shipment (for example, a mode for executing a test such as a lamp, voice, liquid crystal display device, input confirmation, etc.) is performed during maintenance mode. , A series of operations are completed, or, for example, return to this screen by long-pressing the sub input button may be performed), setting of advertisement contents {ie, advertisement at a specific timing including the demonstration screen The setting of whether to display or not, and the setting of a specific advertisement content (for example, store name etc.) in the case of displaying an advertisement}, enabling or disabling the power saving mode (that is, saving energy during game standby etc.) It is setting of whether or not to automatically shift to the mode), selection of valid or invalid of RTC effect (effect to be executed when reaching a predetermined time) (RTC effect is to be performed or not, all R C effect may be set uniformly, or a plurality of RTC effects may be set individually), selection of whether or not to display the setting value in the setting confirmation state {ie, current setting value of the gaming machine Setting display mode (display setting) which is a mode that enables display on the effect display device SG, and setting display mode (non-display setting) which is a mode in which the current setting value of the gaming machine is not displayed on the effect display device SG. Of the player's volume setting, selection of the player's volume setting, and selection of the player's light amount setting (in the normal state other than the maintenance mode, the player enters the sub input button or It is configured that it is possible to set whether or not it is possible to perform volume setting and light amount setting using the cross key or the like. Also, when termination of maintenance mode is selected, or at the time of termination of setting change (for example, based on reception of a command indicating return from setting change mode from the main control board M side (end of setting change mode)). ) The maintenance mode is ended, and a predetermined screen such as a demonstration screen, a normal screen, and a dedicated screen is displayed.

  In this example, the item is selected by the operation of the cross key, and the change content is determined by pressing the sub input button. Further, the effect display device SG is configured to be able to display a button operation information image SGHMB (an image for explaining the button operation in the maintenance mode). In the lower part of the setting change display area (for example, the effect display device SG), a subtitle SGHMJ (in this example, “maintenance mode is forcibly terminated at the end of the setting change. In the present example, it is forced to end. Is subtitled. The subtitle SGHMJ may be displayed when "end of maintenance mode" is selected with the cross key, or may be displayed at all times in the maintenance mode. In addition to the subtitles SGHMJ, the end condition of the maintenance mode may be suggested or guided by predetermined character information, audio information or the like, or such guidance or suggestion may not be performed. Alternatively, the maintenance mode may be automatically terminated based on the fact that the sub input button or the cross key is not operated for a predetermined time. In this case, the operation of the sub input button or the cross key is specified as subtitles SGHMJ. It may be configured to automatically notify the user of the remaining time until the end of the maintenance mode, as well as notifying that the time (a time less than a predetermined time) has not been reached.

  Next, a display screen example during setting confirmation will be described. In the middle of the figure, the sub control board S side is in a game standby state (no symbol change is being executed, and no suspension), and the setting display mode in the maintenance mode described above is the setting display mode (display setting And the main control board M side is an image view displayed during setting confirmation. In this example, by transmitting a command indicating that the main control board M has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the sub control board S indicates that in the state where the main control board M is in the setting confirmation. The display is configured to be executable.

  Further, in this example, the setting display image SGSHG is present in front of the image according to the demonstration screen displayed in the game standby state (that is, the setting display image SGSHG has priority over the display according to the image according to the demonstration screen Depending on the image of the demonstration screen, the visibility of the display of the setting display image SGSHG is not disturbed. Further, in the present example, a subtitle SGSMJ (in the present example, “the setting display mode” indicates or guides the ending condition of the setting display mode (display setting) in the lower part of the demonstration screen display area (for example, the effect display device SG). (Display settings). The subtitles will return to normal mode when the setting key is removed.

  Next, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram in which the sub control board S side is in a symbol variation state (a state in which symbol variation is being executed) and the main control board M side is displayed during setting confirmation. In the same figure, the first decorative symbol (the decorative symbol mainly displayed in the central part of the effect display device SG, and the display area is relatively larger than the second decorative symbol) as the decorative symbol and the second Two decorative symbols with a decorative symbol (a decorative symbol mainly displayed in the lower right part of the effect display device SG and having a relatively smaller display area than the first decorative symbol) are displayed on the effect display device SG Although the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol correspond to the symbol variation of the same main game symbol (for example, if the first main game symbol is in change, the first decorative symbol and the first 2) Even with the case where the first decorative symbol is not displayed during the execution of the super reach effect, etc., with any of the two decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbol). Is configured so that the decorative pattern can be confirmed by visually recognizing the second decorative pattern. It is. Further, in this example, the setting display mode is set to non-display in the above-described maintenance mode. More specifically, “7” temporarily stops on the left and right symbols to configure a reach state, and two holds are displayed on the first hold display unit SG12 and “red” as a pre-reading effect for the second hold Is displayed, the hold is not displayed in the second hold display unit SG13, and the main control is performed in a state in which the display mode of the pseudo hold display is "green" as the reliability suggestion advance notice corresponding to the change. It is an example of a display when the board | substrate M side transfers in setting confirmation.

  In this example, as described above, since the setting display mode is set to non-display setting, “☆” is indicated in the setting display image, and a specific setting value can not be determined from the setting display image SGSHG. Or it is difficult. When the setting display mode is set to non-display setting, it is not necessary to display an image related to setting display (for example, the setting display image SGSHG). Further, in the present example, the setting display image SGSGH is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol existing at the center of the screen is hidden by the setting display image SGSHG). The visibility of the decorative symbol is secured by the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol arranged at the lower right of the screen). Also, in this example, subtitle SGSMJ (in this example, "setting display mode (non-display setting) is in progress at the top of the effect display device SG to indicate and guide the end condition of the setting display mode (non-display setting) The subtitle will be displayed when the setting key is removed to return to the normal mode. In addition, in the main game symbol fluctuation, the subtitles SS GSMJ is configured not to overlap with the main game symbol, the hold display, etc., so as not to interfere with the read ahead presentation effect and the visibility of the hold information related to the symbol change. Yes).

A second modification of the sixth embodiment (setting change) will be listed below.
«A game machine that does not require setting change»
In the sixth embodiment, an example is described in which the probability of success or failure of the special symbol is different for each setting value, but in a gaming machine such as an ordinary machine, it is difficult to electrically set the ball withdrawal rate, the setting change is substantially changed. It may not make much sense to provide the function to be performed (setting change means). However, when developing a gaming machine, it is not preferable from the viewpoint of hardware and software to separately design a gaming machine provided with setting changing means and a gaming machine not provided with setting changing means. As much as possible, it is also necessary to reduce development costs by developing game machines of various specifications using the same software configuration and hardware configuration. Therefore, the following enumerates an example of the handling of setting change means in a gaming machine that does not require setting change. With this configuration, even in a gaming machine that does not require setting change means, it is possible to perform game machine development with the same software configuration and hardware configuration as the gaming machine that performs setting change means. In addition, the hardware configuration and the software configuration do not necessarily have to be the same between the gaming machine that does not require the setting changing means and the gaming machine that performs the setting changing means, so long as the same effect is exhibited. There is no problem even if there is a design change.
<1-step setting>
Setting values which can be changed by the setting changing means are set to one type. As a result, the process of switching the setting value remains the same (for example, by shifting to the setting change mode, but performing processing so that the setting value is not changed from “1” even if the setting change switch is operated) Similarly to the above, the same specifications as a gaming machine which does not require setting change can be realized. In this case, since there is only one kind of numerical value that can be taken as the setting value, it is possible to recognize that the process of displaying the setting is being performed by displaying “1” as the setting value data on the setting value display device. It may or may not be displayed. In addition, when processing to display information on setting values is installed on the sub control board, a default value (for example, "setting 1") may be transmitted, and the setting values actually exist. You may send the command of not doing. In addition, when transmitting the command to the effect that a setting value does not exist, it is desirable to be made to perform the process which displays that a setting value does not exist by reception of the said command on a sub control board.
<Common setting value>
All setting values that can be changed by the setting changing means are set as the same setting value. Specifically, when using 6-step setting (setting 1 to setting 6), for example, by treating all setting values as “1”, the same setting value can be functioned even if any setting value is selected. Can. Thereby, the same specification as one-step setting can be realized without changing the process of switching the setting value. In addition, when reading out setting value data, data of setting value “1” is stored in the address of the ROM corresponding to each of setting 1 to setting 6, and setting value “1” is started from the address corresponding to the selected setting value. The data of setting value “1” may be stored in an address common to setting 1 to setting 6. At this time, it is conceivable to display the set values “1” to “6” in response to the operation of the setting change button on the set value display device, but the set value “1” may be set even if any operation is performed. Is suitable for a machine that does not require a setting change, which can avoid misidentification when checking the set value.
<Software processing not referring to setting value>
The setting value stored in the RAM (the setting value selected by the setting change unit) is not referred to in processing. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine adopting a set value, when drawing the success or failure of the special symbol, when referring to the probability table, the set value stored in the RAM as the selected set value is referred to. A success / failure probability table corresponding to the set value is selected (described in the eighth embodiment described later). At this time, by omitting the process of referring to the setting value from the RAM and determining one predetermined probability table, it is possible to realize the same specification as the gaming machine which does not require the setting change.
<Software processing referring to setting value>
Although the software processing which does not refer to the setting value is described above as the gaming machine which does not require the setting change, when only one success probability table is provided according to the gaming state regardless of the number of selectable setting values, It is not this limitation. Even if the selected set value is any set value data, the same success probability table will be determined, and as a result, no set difference due to the set value will occur.
<Identification flag>
Processing in the gaming machine performing the setting change by providing a flag identifying the gaming machine performing the setting change and the gaming machine not requiring the setting change, and judging the flag at a predetermined timing such as the game start timing, Change the processing in the gaming machine which does not require the setting change. Specifically, in the processing at the time of power on in FIG. 124a, a value indicating that the gaming machine does not need to change the setting by referring to the flag stored in the ROM of the main control board M before performing the processing of S1001. At the time, it is conceivable to shift to the processing of S1002 without performing the processing of S1001. In this case, although a soft change may occur, at least a hard change may not occur.
<Setting number of settings>
Select the number of settings to use for changing settings. For example, three types of one-step setting, three-step setting, and six-step setting are designed to be appropriately selectable according to the game specification. Specifically, a method of setting according to a turning position of the setting key switch used when changing the setting, or a method of selecting using an input switch such as a dip switch can be considered. Further, as another means, a flag indicating the selectable number of settings (one-step setting, three-step setting, six-step setting) stored in the ROM of the main control board M as in the example using the above identification flag The set number may be selectable by referring to the process in step 1001 (sixth) of FIG. 124 a or the process in step 1003-1 of FIG. 125. By using such a method, division into three types of gaming machines corresponding to one-step setting, gaming machines corresponding to three-step setting, and gaming machines corresponding to six-step setting as specifications of the current gaming machine Since it becomes possible, processing according to the set number can be easily selected. Further, this makes it possible to function as a gaming machine that does not require setting change when selecting and using one-step setting, and by selecting the setting step when selecting and using three-step setting and six-step setting. It can be made to function as a gaming machine whose setting can be changed. Also, as in the example using the one-step setting described above, when the process for displaying the setting information is mounted on the sub control board, a value indicating the selected number of settings (for example, “three-step setting”) May be sent. As a result, the sub control board S reports on the effect display device SG or the speaker D24 that "the currently selected setting is the three-step setting" according to the value received from the main control board M. It can be carried out.
<Others>
In the case of a gaming machine in which the function (setting change button etc.) related to setting change is provided not on the main control board but on the sub-board (power supply board etc.) and does not require setting change You may choose not to Specifically, there is a method not to make a harness connection between the sub board provided with the function related to setting change and the main control board, and a command related to the setting change not sent from the sub board to the main control board Methods, etc. can be considered.

<< Configuration under confirmation of settings >>
Configurations during setting confirmation applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be listed below. The configurations listed below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and one or more may be appropriately combined to supplement that there is no problem (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<Operation during setting confirmation>
During setting confirmation (setting confirmation state), it may be configured as follows.
(1) Entry to the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the auxiliary game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, and the second large winning opening C20 is invalid. (A part of the ball entry may be invalidated, and ball entry into the other ball entry may be effective. (2) 1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, assistance Entry to the game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20 remains valid (3) the operation of the firing handle D44 becomes invalid (the gaming ball is Not fireable)
(4) Operation of the firing handle D44 remains valid (the game ball can not be fired)
(5) Error detection is executable but error notification is not displayed on the effect display device SG (6) Error detection is executable, and the front layer is more than the display related to the setting confirmation in the effect display device SG Show error notification at (7) Do not display demo screen (do not shift to game standby state)
(8) The main gaming symbol (the first main gaming symbol, the second main gaming symbol) does not start to fluctuate (9) the auxiliary gaming symbol does not start to change

<Period impossible to confirm settings>
In this example, it is configured to shift to the setting confirmation state by turning on the setting key switch during activation of the gaming machine, but the setting can not be confirmed even if the setting key switch is turned on in the following period (setting It may be configured so as not to shift to the confirmation state.
(1) Special game start demonstration time (2) Special game end demonstration time (3) Special game in progress (4) Main game pattern (1st main game symbol, 2nd main game pattern) in change (5) auxiliary game During the variation of the symbol (6) During operation of the ordinary electric role (for example, the second main game start opening electric role) (7) During specific effects (during execution of effects relating to RTC, etc.)
(8) Time reduction during gaming state (9) probability fluctuation during gaming state (10) specific error (door opening detection, magnet detection, etc.) occurring

<When returning from setting confirmation>
In this example, it is configured to be able to return from the setting confirmation state by turning the setting key switch from on to off in the setting confirmation state, but when returning from the setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) (setting key is off) In the case of (1), the following may be configured.
(1) Volume setting is set to initial setting (2) Light amount setting is set to initial setting (3) Demo screen is displayed (transition to game standby state)

<< Configuration of setting change mode >>
The configuration of the setting change mode applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be listed below. The configurations listed below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and one or more may be appropriately combined to supplement that there is no problem (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<When the power is cut off in the setting change mode>
If the power is cut off during the setting change mode and then recovered from the power cut (if the setting key switch remains on),
(1) The setting change mode is resumed (2) The setting change mode is ended (after that, when the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON, setting confirmation is in progress)
(3) Transition is made during setting confirmation. Note that by configuring as described in (1) above, whether to shift to the setting change mode by confirming the on / off status of the setting key switch when the power is restored It can be determined, and it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the transition to the setting change mode by simple processing.

<Operation in setting change mode>
(1) Entry to the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the auxiliary game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, and the second large winning opening C20 is invalid. (A part of the ball entry may be invalidated, and ball entry into the other ball entry may be effective. (2) 1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, assistance Entry to the game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20 remains valid (3) the operation of the firing handle D44 becomes invalid (the gaming ball is Not fireable)
(4) Operation of the firing handle D44 remains valid (the game ball can not be fired)
(5) Error detection is executable but error notification is not displayed on the effect display device SG (6) Error detection is executable, and the front layer is more than the display related to the setting confirmation in the effect display device SG Show error notification at (7) Do not display demo screen (do not shift to game standby state)
(8) The main gaming symbol (the first main gaming symbol, the second main gaming symbol) does not start to fluctuate (9) the auxiliary gaming symbol does not start to change

<When returning from setting change mode>
The operation when returning from the setting change mode may be configured as follows.
(1) Volume setting is set to initial setting (2) Light amount setting is set to initial setting (3) Demo screen is displayed (transition to game standby state)

<Operation 1 related to the setting confirmation state>
"The game ball is fired in a situation where there is no hold.-> The door unit D18 is opened in a situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area-> the setting key is operated by pressing the setting key switch-> the game ball is In the case of entering the first main game start port A10 → the first main game symbol changes start → the first main game symbol becomes a stop display in the big hit symbol,
(1) The jackpot is started while the set value is displayed. (2) The set value is still displayed, and the jackpot is not started. After that, when the setting confirmation state is ended by operating the setting key switch, the display of the setting value is not displayed and the big hit is started (3) It becomes an error and the progress of the game is stopped. Even if the game ball enters the first main game start slot A10 (or the second main game start slot B10) in the setting confirmation state, the ball entry may be invalidated. The hold based on the entry may occur, but the hold may not be digested until the setting confirmation state ends, and the symbol variation may not be started. In addition, even if it transfers to a setting confirmation state, since it does not affect the result of a game, by comprising like said (1), game progress can be performed smoothly.

<Operation 2 related to the setting confirmation state>
"The game ball is fired in a situation where there is no hold.-> The door unit D18 is opened in a situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area-> the setting key is operated by pressing the setting key switch-> the game ball is In the case of entering the first main game start opening A10 → start of fluctuation of the first main game symbol → stop display of the first main game symbol with a small hit symbol,
(1) The small hit is started while the set value is displayed. (2) The set value is still displayed, and the small hit is not started. After that, when the setting confirmation state is ended by operating the setting key switch, the display of the setting value is not displayed and the small hit is started (3) an error is generated and the progress of the game is stopped. It is also good. In addition, even if it transfers to a setting confirmation state, since it does not affect the result of a game, by comprising like said (1), game progress can be performed smoothly.

<Operation 3 related to setting confirmation state>
“The game ball has been fired → The door unit D18 is opened under the situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area → Operate the setting key switch to make the setting confirmation state → The game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 → In the case that the auxiliary game symbol has started changing → the auxiliary game symbol has hit and the stop display has been made with the symbol,
(1) The second main game start opening electric combination B11d (normal electric combination) starts opening while the set value is displayed (2) The set value remains displayed, and the second main game start opening electric combination The object B11d (normal motorized symbol) does not start to open. Thereafter, when the setting confirmation state is ended by operating the setting key switch, the display of the setting value is not displayed and the opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d (normally applied combination) is started. Even if it shifts to the setting confirmation state, there is no influence on the result of the game, so by configuring as in the above (1), the game progress can be smoothly performed.

<Operation 4 related to the setting confirmation state>
In the case where "set key confirmation is made by operating the setting key switch → power off occurs → power is restored while maintaining the setting key switch ON state",
(1) Return to the setting confirmation state based on the backup information at power off (2) Shift to the setting change mode (3) Do not shift to the setting confirmation state or the setting change mode (then turn the setting key switch off → on If you set
In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting value key switch is on at the time of power supply recovery, and if it is on, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode, whereby the transition to the setting change mode can be performed with simple processing. Since the determination can be made, the configuration of the above (2) is most preferable.

<Operation 5 Regarding Setting Confirmation Status>
In the case of "set the confirmation status by operating the setting key switch → power off occurs → turn off the setting key switch → turn on the power in the condition that the setting key switch is turned on again",
(1) Return to the setting confirmation state based on the backup information at power off (2) Shift to the setting change mode (3) Do not shift to the setting confirmation state or the setting change mode (then turn the setting key switch off → on If you set
In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting value key switch is on at the time of power supply recovery, and if it is on, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode, whereby the transition to the setting change mode can be performed with simple processing. Since the determination can be made, the configuration of the above (2) is most preferable.

<Action 6 Regarding Setting Confirmation Status>
When "Set key switch is operated to confirm the setting → Power is cut off → Set key switch is turned off → Power is restored while maintaining the setting key switch off state",
(1) Do not shift to setting confirmation mode or setting change mode

Seventh Embodiment
In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to display information regarding the ball entry on the ball entry status display device. An embodiment configured to execute processing such as generation / display of information relating to ball entry on the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) will be described in detail as a seventh embodiment.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, FIG. 127 is a main flowchart of the main control board M side in the seventh embodiment. The characteristic processing in FIG. 127 is the step 1001 (seventh), the step 1003 (seventh), the step 1000 (seventh), the step 1005 (seventh), the step 1001-1 (seventh), the step 1001-2. The seventh step, the step 1018-1 (the seventh), the step 1018-2 (the seventh), the step 1019 (the seventh), the step 1992 (the seventh), the step 7000 (the seventh). First, after the power is turned on, in step 1001 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch is off. If Yes in step 1001 (the seventh), the process proceeds to the processing of step 1000 (the seventh). In the case of Yes in step 1001 (seventh), the setting value backed up in the first RAM area at the time of power interruption is restored. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1001 (seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes setting change processing at step 1003 (seventh), and shifts to processing of step 1004. Next, in step 1000 (seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M calls, as processing in the first ROM and RAM area, second RAM area confirmation processing at the time of powering on of the second ROM and RAM area. Next, in step 1005 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the setting value stored in the first RAM area by the program of the second ROM, and sets the second RAM area corresponding to the setting value. . Therefore, the subsequent processing is performed using the second RAM area corresponding to the setting value (for example, when “1” is set as the setting value, it corresponds to setting “1” of the second RAM area) Use storage area). Next, in step 1001-1 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the second RAM area as processing in the second ROM and RAM area (for example, If “1” is set, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the storage area corresponding to the setting “1” of the second RAM area). If Yes in step 1001-1 (the seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area in step 1001-2 (the seventh) (for example, the first RAM area). And when "1" is set as the setting value, the data in the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" of the second RAM area is cleared). In addition, since the update of the first RAM area is performed only by the first ROM and RAM control and the update of the second RAM area is performed only by the second ROM and RAM control, the first RAM area is cleared. The process is performed in the 1ROM.RAM control, and the second RAM area is cleared in the process in the 2nd ROM.RAM control. Here, the second RAM area will be described using an image diagram. The second RAM area is provided to correspond to the setting value, and is provided with a second RAM area corresponding to setting 1, a second RAM area corresponding to setting 2, a second RAM area corresponding to setting 3, and the like. . That is, in the second RAM area corresponding to setting 1, the initial flag, display data switching flag 1, display data switching flag 2, normal prize ball number counter value, normal out number counter value, total out number counter value, etc. Similarly, in the second area stored and corresponding to setting 2 and setting 3, the initial flag, display data switching flag 1, display data switching flag 2, normal time award ball number counter value, normal time out number counter value, total An out number counter value or the like is stored. After executing the processing of step 1018 as processing in the first ROM / RAM area, the CPU MC of the main control board M loads the value of the input port of the power-off signal in step 1018-1 (seventh). Next, in step 1018-2 (seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the value of the input port is not a value indicating the occurrence of a power failure. For example, if the value of the input port is 0, it indicates that a power failure has not occurred, and if the value of the input port is 1, it indicates that a power failure has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 1018-2 (the seventh), in step 1019 (the seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls the entry state display device arithmetic processing of the second ROM • RAM area {ie, the first ROM. In the main loop process in the RAM area (steps 1018 to 1019 are repeated) call the entry state display device arithmetic processing (for example, call instruction) and enter the entry state display device arithmetic processing in the second ROM · RAM area Run}. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1018-2 (the seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the processing at step 1020 and step 1022 and stands by until the power is turned off. In the timer interrupt process, after executing the processes of step 2000 to step 1990, the CPU MC of the main control board M calls the ball entry state display device display control process of the second ROM / RAM area in step 1992 (seventh). . The RAM check in step 1008 (for example, the check sum recorded at the time of power interruption and the amount of information stored in the RAM area are compared) is a process of checking the first RAM area, and the second RAM area Process of checking the {The process of determining whether or not the specific data in the second RAM area is abnormal although the details will be described later (that is, the check process differs from the check of the first RAM area in step 1008)} is not. In addition, after the processing in the second ROM and RAM control is called in the main control board side main processing and the timer interrupt processing which is the processing in the first ROM and RAM control, not the first ROM and RAM area but the second ROM and RAM area Processing is performed using. Note that counters and control data (register values etc.) used for processing on the master control board M side are backed up, and therefore, in the same embodiment as the data stored in the first RAM area, All data stored in the second RAM area is also backed up. Also, in the seventh embodiment, the term "clear" is not limited to zero clear, but includes initialization (that is, the term "clear" is used for returning to the initial state which is the game start state) To do).

  Note that the order of processing in the main flowchart on the main control board M side illustrated in FIG. 127 is not limited to that described above, and, for example, after the game machine is powered on, step 1005 (seventh step) ) To step 1001-2 (seventh) may be configured to execute the process of step 1001 (seventh), step 1000 (seventh), or step 1003 (seventh). More specifically, after powering on the gaming machine, first, as processing in the first ROM and RAM area, it is checked whether there is an abnormality in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, all data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area are cleared. The data in the first RAM area is cleared as processing in the first ROM / RAM area, and the data in the second RAM area is cleared as processing in the second ROM / RAM area. Thereafter, as processing in the first ROM and RAM area, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on or off, and if the setting key switch is on, the setting change processing is executed, and if the setting key switch is off, step 1002 It may be configured to execute the subsequent processing. In this case, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on, processing relating to setting change of step 1001 (seventh) and step 1003 (seventh) (18th embodiment described later) When the processing related to the setting confirmation is configured to be executed at the time of power on as in the embodiment, after the processing related to the setting change or the processing related to the setting confirmation is performed, step 1018-1 (seventh) to step 1019 (seventh step) ) Is executed. By configuring in this way, processing relating to setting change (or setting confirmation) which is processing in the first ROM / RAM area and processing relating to the ball entry state display device J10 which is processing in the second ROM / RAM area are performed simultaneously (or It is possible to prevent confusion between the processing in the first ROM and RAM area and the processing in the second ROM and RAM area, which are not performed alternately and performed in different areas.

<Processing in Second ROM and RAM Area>
Next, FIG. 128 is a flowchart according to the entering state display device computing process which is control by the second ROM and RAM area called in step 1019 in FIG. 127 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8100, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the stack pointer (address is A) in the second RAM area. Next, in step 8200, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (address is B) in the second stack area. Although switching of the stack area is described in detail in FIG. 138 (seventh), the stack area used in the entry status display device arithmetic processing is changed from the first stack area to the second stack area by these processes It will be changed. Next, in step 8300, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the data of all the registers in the second stack area. Next, in step 8400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a second RAM area clear check process described later. Next, in step 8500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes section determination described later. Next, in step 8800, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes arithmetic processing described later. Next, in step 8900, the CPU MC of the main control board M restores the data of all the registers saved in the second stack area. Next, in step 8950, the CPU MC of the main control board M restores the stack pointer (A) from the second RAM area.

  Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a second RAM area clear check process which is control by the second ROM and RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8400 of FIG. 128 in the seventh embodiment. For example, when "1" is set as the setting value, the clear check process of the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" of the second RAM area is performed. First, in step 8401, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the initial flag stored in the second RAM area is AA55H. The initial flag is data indicating whether the second RAM area is to be cleared or not. 0000H indicates that the second RAM area is to be cleared, and AA55H indicates that the second RAM area is not to be cleared. Note that 0000H indicating that the second RAM area is cleared is configured to be stored in another process, and, for example, the normal out number counter value is compared with the total out number counter value, It is configured to be stored when the number counter value is larger. Further, in the determination (processing of step 8401), since it is determined whether or not AA55H, even if it is other than 0000H, if it is not AA55H, it corresponds to the determination condition of “not AA55H”. If Yes in step 8401, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second RAM area in step 8404 and proceeds to step 8402. The data to be cleared in step 8404 is data of the second RAM area other than the stack area, and according to the process, The section to be described later returns to the section A even if it is staying after the current section B; All counters are initialized, 3. The processing after step 8402 is configured to be continued. On the other hand, if the result of step 8401 is No, step 8404 is skipped and the processing of step 8402 is performed. Next, in step 8402, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the second RAM area. For example, when values of a display data switching flag 1 and a display data switching flag 2 described later are out of the range (other than 0, 1, 2), it may be determined that there is an abnormality. If Yes in step 8402, in step 8405, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second RAM area, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 8500). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 8402, step 8405 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8500). Note that the data to be cleared in step 8405 is data in the second RAM area other than the stack area, and according to the process, 1. The section to be described later returns to the section A even if it is staying after the current section B; All counters are initialized, 3. The process from step 8500 is configured to be continued.

  Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of section determination that is control by the second ROM and RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8500 of FIG. 128 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8502, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the display data switching flag 1 is 0 or not. The display data switching flag 1 is a flag indicating a section in the entering state display device arithmetic processing, and if the display data switching flag 1 is 0, the section A {for example, the total number of outs is predetermined after the first power on. If it is less than the number (for example, 300) and the display data switching flag 1 is 1, section B {for example, the total number of outs from the first power on is a predetermined number (for example, 300) or more and the specific number For example, if it is less than 60000) and the display data switching flag 1 is 2, it is switched every time the value of the total out number counter reaches a specific number (for example, 60000) in section N {for example, after section B It is a flag indicating that it is a section}. Further, the display data switching flag 1 is configured to be backed up so as not to be cleared even if a power failure occurs. Next, in the case of Yes in step 8502, in step 8600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes section A hour determination to be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 8800). On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 8502, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes determination at and after Section B described later at Step 8700, and shifts to the next processing (processing of Step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the section A-hour determination which is control by the second ROM • RAM region according to the subroutine of step 8600 of FIG. 130 in the seventh embodiment. First, at step 8602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 300 or more (the numerical value of "300" used here is an example, and at the time of manufacture of the gaming machine It may be a value larger than the assumed value counted in the inspection process in Next, in the case of Yes in step 8602, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 1 to the display data switching flag 1 in step 8608 (changes from 0 to 1). Next, in step 8610, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes counter clear, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 8800). The counters to be cleared here are a normal prize ball number counter, a normal out number counter, and a total out number counter. On the other hand, if No in step 8602, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes SW tabulation processing (switch tabulation processing), which will be described later, in step 8650 (the seventh), and shifts to the next processing (the processing of step 8800). Do. As a supplementary explanation, the SW tabulation process will be briefly described. Based on the detection information of each winning opening read out in the process of step 7500 described later, the normal time prize ball number counter, the normal out number counter, and the total out number counter are updated. Processing.

  Next, FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the determination in and after section B which is control by the second ROM and RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8700 of FIG. 130 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 60000 or more (the numerical value of 60000 used here is an example, and the game ball firing interval is 100 In the case of the number of pieces per minute, it is an assumed value that the launch time of the game ball has reached 10 hours). Next, in the case of Yes in step 8702, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 2 in the display data switching flag 1 in step 8706 (including resetting 2 in the display data switching flag 1). Next, in step 8707, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores the final base value of the section. Next, in step 8708, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes counter clear and shifts to the next process (the process of step 8800). The counters to be cleared here are a normal prize ball number counter, a normal out number counter, and a total out number counter. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 8702, at step 8650 (the seventh), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes SW tabulation processing described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing at step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of SW tabulation processing which is control by the second ROM and RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8650 of FIGS. 131 and 132 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 8651, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the entering flag of any of the entering sensors is on. In the case of Yes at step 8651, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines at step 8651-1 which ball entry sensor of the ball entry sensor is to be confirmed (which ball entry flag of the ball entry sensor Decide whether or not based on the value of α). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 8651, the process proceeds to the next process (the process at step 8800). First, when α = 0, in step 8652, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second large winning opening ball entry flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 8652, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second big winning entrance ball flag at step 8653, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second winning prize ball at step 8654. The flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8652, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 1, in step 8655, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first large winning opening ball entry flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 8655, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first big winning entrance ball flag at step 8656, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first winning hole prize ball at step 8657. The flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8655, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 2, in step 8658, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start opening ball entry flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 8658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start opening ball flag at step 8659, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns to the second main game start slot at step 8660. The prize ball flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8658, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 3, in step 8661, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start opening ball flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 8661, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start entry ball flag at step 8662, and the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the first main game start slot at step 8663. The prize ball flag is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8661, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 4, in step 8664, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning a prize winning slot 1 entering flag is on. If Yes in step 8664, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 1 entry flag in step 8665, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 1 prize ball flag in step 8666. In the step 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8664, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 5, in step 8667, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 2 entering flag is on. If Yes in step 8667, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 2 entry flag in step 8668, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 2 prize ball flag in step 8669. In the step 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8667, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 6, in step 8670, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 3 entry flag is on. If YES in step 8670, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 3 entry flag in step 8671, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 3 prize ball flag in step 8672. In the step 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8670, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 7, in step 8673, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 4 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8673, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 4 entry flag in step 8674, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 4 prize ball flag in step 8675 In the step 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8673, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8680). Next, when α = 8, in step 8676, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the total discharge confirmation sensor flag is on. If Yes in step 8676, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the total discharge confirmation sensor flag in step 8677, and the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out number counter addition flag in step 8678, step In step 8679-1, clear α and proceed to the next process (the process of step 8680). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 8676, α is cleared at step 8679-1 and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 8680). Next, in step 8680 (the seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes counter addition processing, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 8800). In addition, the ball entry sensors of a plurality of general winning a prize mouths may be put together into one, for example, in the case of the configuration in which the right strike is performed during the auxiliary gaming state (high base state), the general can enter the ball when hitting the left. A second general winning prize entry ball having a first general winning prize entry ball sensor for detecting entry into winning prize openings 1 to 3 and detecting entry into a general winning entry port 4 capable of entering the ball at the time of right hitting It is good also as composition provided with a sensor.

  Next, FIG. 134 is a flowchart of counter addition processing which is control by the second ROM and RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8680 of FIG. 133 in the seventh embodiment. First, at step 8682, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the addition of the normal ball number counter. In addition, there is a condition for executing the addition of the prize ball number counter at the normal time, and when the gaming state is the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the non-time shortening gaming state, and the big hit, the prize ball flag (second large Winning winning prize ball flag, first big winning winning ball flag, second main game starting mouth winning ball flag, first main gaming starting mouth winning ball flag, general winning opening 1 winning ball flag, general winning opening 2 winning ball flag When the general winning opening 3 prize ball flag and the general winning opening 4 prize ball flag are on, the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is executed. In addition, although it may be configured to execute addition of the regular prize ball number counter in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, In the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time shortening gaming state and when the position to be fired does not change (for example, left hit), addition of the regular prize ball number counter in the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state May be configured to perform If the position to be fired changes from the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time shortening gaming state (for example, it changes from left-handed to right-handed), the number of prize balls during normal probability gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state Preferably, it is configured not to perform counter addition. In the case of “1. non-probability fluctuation state and non-time shortening gaming state and the position to be fired does not change”, the number of winning balls in non-auxiliary gaming state (low base state) other than during a big hit It will be counted. When the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is completed, the prize ball flag is turned off. As a supplementary note, the normal prize ball number counter is configured with 2 bytes, and it is checked whether the value to which the prize ball number is added exceeds the upper limit (whether the carry flag is generated or not). If it exceeds, it is configured not to add (maintain at the upper limit of 2 bytes). Next, in step 8684, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes addition of the out-time counter. In addition, the condition to execute also in addition of the out number counter is provided, and when the gaming state is not in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the non-time shortening gaming state, and not being in big hit, the out number counter addition flag is In the case of being on, addition of the normal out number counter is performed. Also, the normal time out number counter may also be configured to execute addition in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, similarly to the normal time prize ball number counter, In the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time shortening gaming state, when the position to be fired does not change (for example, left hit), the addition of the normal out number counter in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state It may be configured to execute; If the position to be fired changes from the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time shortening gaming state (for example, it changes from left-handed to right-handed), the out-of-time counter in normal probability gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state Preferably, it is configured not to perform the addition of. When configured to "1. non-probability fluctuation state and non-time shortening gaming state and the position to be fired does not change", counting the number of out in non-auxiliary gaming state (low base state) other than during a big hit It will be done. As a supplementary note, the normal-time out number counter is made up of 2 bytes, and it is checked whether the added value exceeds the upper limit (whether a carry flag is generated) or not. It is configured not to add to (maintain at the upper limit of 2 bytes). Since the out number counter addition flag is also used for the addition of the total out number counter in the next step 8868, the out number counter addition flag is maintained in the on state without being turned off even when the addition of the out number counter is completed. Next, in step 8868, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes addition of the total out number counter. If the out number counter addition flag is on, the normal prize sphere number counter is added, and when the addition is completed, the out number counter addition flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 8800) Do. Supplementally, the total out number counter is configured by 2 bytes, and it is checked whether the added value exceeds the upper limit value (whether the carry flag is generated or not), and if it exceeds Is not added (maintained at the upper limit of 2 bytes).

  Next, FIG. 135 is a flowchart of arithmetic processing which is control by the second ROM and RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8800 of FIG. 128 in the seventh embodiment. First, at step 8802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a section change. If Yes in step 8802, in step 8804, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes base calculation. Here, the base value is calculated by an equation {(normal prize ball number counter value / normal out number counter value) × 100}. Next, in step 8806, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the base value (ball entry status information) calculated in step 8804 as the current base value (ball entry status information) on the ball entry status display device J10. Storage for display, and move on to the next processing (processing of step 8900). The base value (ball entry status information) stored here stores a value rounded to the first decimal place. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 8802, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 8900).

<Processing in Second ROM and RAM Area>
Next, FIG. 136 is a flowchart according to the ball entrance state display device display control processing which is control by the second ROM and RAM area called in step 1992 of FIG. 127 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 7100, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the stack pointer (address is A) in the second RAM area. Next, in step 7200, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (address is B) in the second stack area. Although switching of the stack area is described in detail in FIG. 138 (seventh), the stack area used in the entry state display device display control process from the first stack area to the second stack area is performed by these processes. Will be changed to Next, in step 7300, the CPU MC of the main control board M saves the data of all the registers in the second stack area. Next, in step 8400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a second RAM area clear check process. The second RAM area clear check process executed by the ball entry state display device control and the second RAM area clear check process executed by the ball entry state display device arithmetic process are the same process. Next, in step 7500, the CPU MC of the main control board M reads detection information of each winning opening in the first RAM. Specifically, in the program of the second ROM, it is determined that the detection information of the first RAM is on as having entered the ball by one edge detection (off → on), and it is determined that the presence of the ball is present. 2) Among the storage areas (2 bytes) of the entry information in the RAM area, set the flag of the storage area of the corresponding winning opening to ON (set 1). For example, when the detection information of the second main game start opening of the first RAM area is on, when it is determined that the detection information of the second main game start opening of the first RAM area is on by the program of the second ROM. If it is determined once that the switch is on, 1 is set to D1, which is a storage area of the ball entry information in the second RAM area. Then, the SW tabulation process of step 8650 is executed based on the ball entry information set here. The storage area of the ball entry information in the second RAM area is not limited to 2 bytes, and may be changed to 1 byte or the like according to the number of ball entry sensors. Next, in step 7600 (seventh), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes display content update processing. Next, in step 7700, the CPU MC of the main control board M restores the data of all the registers saved in the second stack area. Next, in step 7800, the CPU MC of the main control board M restores the stack pointer (A) from the second RAM area.

  Next, FIG. 137 is a flowchart of a display content update process according to the subroutine of step 7600 in FIG. 136 according to the seventh embodiment, which is control by the second ROM / RAM area. First, the functions of the first segment information and the second segment information will be described. First, the first segment information is information on the base value updated in real time in the current section, and the second segment information is information on the final value (final base value) in the section immediately before the current section. is there.

  Next, a flowchart of the display content update process will be described. First, in step 7610, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes updating of the blinking state. Here, when the first segment information is set to “blink” in step 7630 described later, the control of the blinking display to switch on and off every 0.3 seconds while displaying the first segment information If the second segment information is set to "blink" in step 7640, which will be described later, control of the blinking display is performed to switch on and off every 0.3 seconds while the second segment information is displayed. Run. Next, in step 7620, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes display switching processing of the first segment information and the second segment information. For example, the first segment information and the second segment information are switched every 5 seconds. The first segment information and the second segment information are composed of the identification segment and the ratio segment, and the two left 8-segment displays of the entry status display device J10 identify the segment (display the base value of the current section) (“B6.” Is displayed to indicate that the last base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed), and the two 8-segment displays on the right are displaying ratio segments (“ --- "or a base value is displayed.

  Next, in step 7630, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes setting (updating) of the first segment information. The display content of the first segment information is set so that “bL.” Blinks in the identification segment and “−−” in the ratio segment in the segment A (when the display data switching flag 2 described later is 0). Ru. In section B (when display data switching flag 2 is 1), “bL.” Blinks on the identification segment when the out number counter value is 0 to 5999 in the normal state, and the out number counter value is 6000 or more in the normal state “BL.” Is turned on, and the base value stored in step 8806 is displayed in the ratio segment. In section C (when display data switching flag 2 is 2), “bL.” Blinks in the identification segment when the out number counter value is 0 to 5999 in the normal state, and the out number counter value is 6000 or more in the normal state “BL.” Is turned on, and the base value stored in step 8806 is displayed in the ratio segment. In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “bL.” Blinks in the identification segment when the out number counter value is 0 to 5999 in the normal state, and the out number counter value is 6000 or more in the normal state “BL.” Is turned on, and the base value stored in step 8806 is displayed in the ratio segment. As already described above, the sections C and N are sections switched after the section B every time the value of the total out number counter reaches 60000.

  Next, in step 7640, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes setting (updating) of second segment information. The display content of the second segment information is set to blink “b6.” In the identification segment and “−−” in the ratio segment in the segment A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0). In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “b6.” Is blinked on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b6.” Is displayed on the identification segment and the final value (final base value) of the section B stored in step 8707 is displayed on the ratio segment. Ru. In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “b6.” Is displayed on the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the section N-1 is displayed on the ratio segment.

  Next, in step 7650, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the update of the display data switching flag 2. The display data switching flag 2 is a flag updated according to the display data switching flag 1, and is a display flag for displaying the base value on the ball entry state display device J10.

  Next, FIG. 138 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the seventh embodiment. This figure shows that data is stacked in the stack area and that the first stack area and the second stack area are switched, and the circled address indicates the set stack pointer. . First, processing is executed in the first ROM / RAM area, and a stack pointer A (address is A) for using the first stack area is set. Next, processing is executed in the first ROM / RAM area, and then processing in the second ROM area is called. Next, in the processing of the second ROM area, the stack pointer A is saved in the second RAM area, and the stack pointer B (address is B) for using the second stack area is set. Next, after saving all the registers to the second stack area, the address of the stack pointer B is changed. Next, the processing in the second ROM and RAM area is executed to restore all the registers. Next, the stack pointer A of the first stack area is restored to return to the caller of the first ROM area, and thereafter the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is executed.

  Next, FIG. 139 is a diagram of an entire electrical configuration in a modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. The feature in the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment is a flow path image view of the gaming ball. In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the number of sensors for detecting the number of game balls out is not only one of the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s but also two of the first discharge confirmation sensor and the second discharge confirmation sensor. ing. The first discharge confirmation sensor is mainly configured to detect a game ball entering a winning opening (first main game start opening A10, a general winning opening) entering the ball when hitting the left and an out opening, 2 Ejection confirmation sensor mainly to detect the game ball which entered the winning opening (the 2nd main game starting opening B10, the 1st big winning opening C10, the 2nd big winning opening C20) which is hit when hitting right It is configured. After being configured in this way, when it is configured to detect each winning opening in series in the SW tabulation process of step 8650 (that is, the second large winning opening → the first large winning opening → the second main gaming start) There may be a case where addition for two balls is performed by one counter addition processing, each time in the order of mouth → first main game start opening → general winning openings 1 to 4 → discharge confirmation sensor). At this time, the value of the total out number counter for which the section is to be changed may exceed 60000. In this case, the result of performing addition for two balls may be stored as the final base value of the section. In this way, in order to calculate the ball entry and prize balls generated simultaneously as the base value in the same section, the values of the normal time prize ball number counter and the normal out number counter are added by two balls, and It becomes possible to calculate an accurate base value.

  In the seventh embodiment and the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the entry state display device arithmetic processing is called and executed in the main loop processing, and the entry state display device display control processing is called and executed in the timer interrupt processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the timer interrupt process, the entering state display device arithmetic processing and the entering state display device display can be performed. It is also possible to configure to call and execute the control process. With this configuration, processing can be simplified and capacity can be reduced. For example, the display data switching flag may be configured to have only one display data switching flag, and the display data switching flag updated in the ball entering state display device arithmetic processing may be configured to be referred to in the ball entering state display device display control processing. Be

  In the seventh embodiment, the second RAM area clear check process is performed each time the ball entry state display device arithmetic processing and the ball entry state display device display control processing are executed, thereby causing a sudden abnormality due to noise or the like. Although the embodiment has been described in which it is possible to respond promptly when a problem occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and a check of the second RAM area is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, It is also possible to configure so as to be triggered by the counter value, the number of out-of-time counters, the fact that the total out-of-counts counter value has reached a predetermined number, etc.). With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve processing efficiency without excessively checking the second RAM area.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the RAM clear processing (clear processing of the first RAM area) occurs during the prize ball payout operation (for example, the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned off) It is assumed that power is restored after occurrence of power failure. For example, when RAM clear processing occurs at the completion of a predetermined number (for example, six) of payout balls during a specific number (for example, ten) of prize ball payout operations, the memory information of the remaining number of balls (for example, four) It is cleared and the payout operation is ended without executing the payout for the remaining number of winning balls, but in the entering state display device J10, the base value calculated by the value to which the number of winning balls for the specific number is added is Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that the ball entry information such as the base value can not be adjusted intentionally, and it is possible to generate composed ball entry information based on the number of balls entered into the winning opening.

  The ball entry state information for each set value may be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. For example, in the seventh embodiment, “bL.” And “b6. "" Is displayed. However, the ball entry state information (base value) for each setting may be confirmed by changing the display of "b" to "set value". Specifically, in the case of setting 1, “1 L.” “16.” is displayed on the left two 7-segment displays of the ball entering state display device J10, and in the case of setting 2, the ball entering state display device J10 "2L." "26." is displayed on the left two 7-segment displays. In addition, when the setting change button is operated, it is possible to be configured so that the ball entering state information in each setting can be confirmed by switching the ball entering state information in the setting value, and further, every predetermined time It is also possible to configure so as to be able to confirm the ball entry state information for each setting. In particular, when the target that can be different by changing the setting value is only the winning probability of the winning or losing lottery relating to the main gaming symbol, there is no difference in the base value for each setting value. If the target of the setting change extends to the probability of success or failure of the auxiliary gaming symbol or the probability of winning a small hit etc. (an example will be described later), a difference occurs in the base value for each setting value. By separately managing and displaying the ball entry state information for each value, it becomes possible to confirm the base value according to the setting value.

  Further, the ball entry state display device J10 may be configured to be capable of displaying other than the base value, and may be configured to be capable of displaying, for example, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio described above. In addition, you may be comprised so that only 1 type may be displayed among a base value, a character item ratio, and a continuous character item ratio, and you may be comprised so that multiple types may be switched and displayed. In addition, even when the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio are displayed on the entering state display device J10 as in the display of the base value, for example, the item currently displayed in the left two digits (base (base) It is preferable to be configured to display an identification display that can identify which value, character item ratio, continuous character item ratio) is. Also in the case of such a configuration, each item to be displayed may be configured to be displayable for each set value.

«Modified example of ball entry status display device»
Next, a modification of the configuration of the ball entry state display device J10 applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be illustrated.

Here, in the case of calculating the base value for each setting, it is necessary to measure the total number of shot balls of the game balls for each setting = total number of discharged balls, and the RAM area storing the measurement result of the total number of discharged balls. The maximum total number of discharge balls that can be stored in a 3-byte storage area is “256 ³ −1 = 16777215 balls”, and the total number of discharge balls per setting is 16777215 balls. If the total discharge ball number for each setting is stored in the RAM area (when the upper limit that can be stored in 3 bytes is reached), information indicating that the total discharge ball number for each setting has reached the upper limit The information is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM, and when information indicating that the total number of discharged balls per setting has reached the upper limit is stored in the predetermined area, the information is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. Do not execute measurement (measurement required to calculate the base value) It may be configured to.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to store information that the total number of discharged balls has reached the upper limit in a certain byte in the RAM, and to have such a one-byte storage area for each setting. . That is, when there are six types of setting values from setting 1 to setting 6 as setting values, a storage area (1 byte of information in which information indicating that the total number of discharged balls for each setting has reached the upper limit) is stored. The memory area may be configured to have six types.

As a display mode in the ball entry state display device J10, the base values in setting 1 to setting 6 may be repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds (after displaying the base value in setting 6 for 5 seconds) When the base value in setting 1 is displayed again, when configured as such, when the setting change button is operated, the identification display of the set value is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and then the base value in the set value May be configured to be displayed. In such a configuration, the identification display of the next setting value may be displayed by operating the setting change button again before the predetermined time has elapsed. In particular,
(1) Operate the setting change button → the identification display of setting 1 is displayed for 2 seconds → the base value in setting 1 is displayed for 5 seconds → the base value in setting 2 is displayed for 5 seconds (2) setting change button → the identification display of setting 1 is displayed → the setting change button is operated again after 1 second → the identification display of setting 2 is displayed for 2 seconds → the base value in setting 2 is displayed for 5 seconds → in setting 3 The base value may be configured to be displayed for 5 seconds.

  There is no problem if the display mode (time value for switching the display, the order of the items to be displayed, etc.) of the ball entry state display device J10 is properly changed, but the door unit When it is necessary to open the door unit, it is preferable that the player can not confirm the set value even if the door unit is opened. That is, when displaying the identification display according to the set value (for example, the identification display according to setting 1) on the ball entry state display device J10, the ball entry state display device at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize even if the door unit is opened. J10 may be set up so that the identification display according to the set value is not displayed on the entering state display device J10 unless the administrator installs a predetermined operation or the predetermined operation by the administrator (the predetermined operation can not be performed by the player). It is suitable.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, FIG. 141 is an example of a first main game use lottery table (second main game use lottery table) in the case of changing the winning probability of the main game symbol according to the set value in the eighth embodiment. is there. In this example, the profit rate given to the player is increased in the order of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3. More specifically, the winning probability for the setting 1 at the non-probability fluctuation game (big hit) is set to about 1/320, and the winning probability for the setting 2 at the non-probability fluctuation game is (big hit), It is set to about 1/318, and the winning probability for the setting 3 at the time of non-probability fluctuation game (big hit) is set to about 1/317. In addition, the winning probability for the setting 1 at the probability fluctuation game (big hit) is set to about 1/160, and the winning probability for the setting 2 at probability fluctuation game (big hit) is set to about 1/159 The probability of winning 3 wins for setting 3 at the time of probability fluctuation game is set to about 1/158. Therefore, the probability of winning (big hit) at the time of probability fluctuation game is approximately twice the probability of winning (big hit) at the time of non probability fluctuation game, and the ratio is configured to be common in all settings. . The same applies to the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side.

  Also, as shown in the same figure, even in the random value range determined to be hit (big hit) in setting 1 at the time of non-probability variation game, it is determined to be hit (big hit) in setting 2 at the time of non-probability variation game Also in the random value range, “0 to 204” is included as a common range in the random value range determined to be hit (big hit) in setting 3 at the time of non-probability fluctuation game. Therefore, for example, when a hold with any of “0 to 204” as a random value occurs at the time of the non-probability fluctuation game, the hold is hit before the hold is digested and a lottery for success or failure is performed ( In the case of notifying in advance that it is scheduled to become a big hit) (and in the case of a random number value determined to be out of the range of “0 to 204” (big hit), assuming that no prior notification is given), It is more likely that setting 3 will be set as the frequency of the pending is digested and the hit / off lottery is performed (as a result, a big hit occurs) without the advance notification (pre-reading effect) being executed It can also be configured to be able to suggest (in the order of setting 1, setting 2 and setting 3, there are more random number values determined to be out of the range of “0 to 204” (big hit) is there). In addition, it is applicable also at the time of a probability variation game about this point, and it is applicable similarly to the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side. Also, since the random value range determined to be hit (small hit) at a certain set value does not overlap with the random value range determined to be hit (big hit) at another set value, which is the set value? Regardless of the random number value belonging to the random number value range determined to be hit (small hit), the hold is hit before the hold is digested and the lottery for success or failure is performed (small If it is notified in advance that it is scheduled to become a hit, it will be possible to pre-notify the hit (small hit) regardless of the set value (it is possible to share in advance the pre-determination processing relating to the pre-reading effect).

On the other hand, it is also possible to configure so as not to suggest the setting value by the pre-reading effect, and an example thereof will be shown below. The pre-reading determination table in the following table is a table for pre-determination that the main control board M has. When the hold occurs, the main control board M refers to the prefetch determination table based on the random number value related to the hold, derives a prefetch code, and transmits it to the sub control board S. For example, if the main control board M side is setting 3, the sub control board S is in the case of any of the prefetch codes A, B, and C based on the information related to the setting value transmitted from the main control board M in advance. If the main control board M side is setting 2, perform advance notification to the effect that it is hit (big hit) only in the case of either of the prefetch codes A and B, and perform main control If the substrate M side is the setting 1, it is notified in advance that it is hit (big hit) only in the case of the pre-reading code A. With this configuration, it is difficult to estimate the setting on the main control board M side from the tendency of execution of pre-reading effect.

The ninth embodiment
As described above, in order to perform the prefetching effect, the random number value held as a hold in consideration of the gaming state (for example, non-probability fluctuation gaming) and the setting value (for example, setting 1) If it does not predetermine whether it belongs to a random value range (for example, “0 to 204”) determined to be a big hit), it may be inaccurate. At that time, as exemplified in the second embodiment, when the sub control board S is configured to determine whether or not the preread effect is to be performed, for example, as shown in step 2162 of FIG. There is a need to determine in advance on the side of the sub control board S whether or not the existing random number falls within the random value range determined to be a hit (big hit), in which case the setting value on the side of the sub control board S Information is needed. However, sending information related to the set value held by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is undesirable in terms of security or securing the fairness of the game {sending to the sub-control board S side There is a possibility that information on the setting value may be intercepted and abused at the time, and the information on the setting value is clearly notified to the outside on the side of the sub control board S (for example, the game arcade operator displayed for maintenance purposes) There is also the possibility that game players will be able to steal things}. Therefore, a method for accurately performing pre-reading effect without transmitting information on the setting value held by the main control board M to the sub control board S will be described in detail below as a ninth embodiment.

  First, in the ninth embodiment, when a new hold occurs, the probability of execution or non-execution of the prefetch effect lottery is different depending on whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. (That is, at the time of the pre-reading effect lottery, it is configured to refer to the information on the “incidence lottery random number” related to the new hold).

  In this case, a situation occurs in which the result of the winning lottery (whether or not it is a big hit) may differ for each setting even if the winning lottery random numbers pertaining to the new hold are the same. Furthermore, the winning lottery results are different As a result, even if the same variation mode lottery random number is acquired, a situation may occur in which the selected variation mode (for example, variation time) is different. As an example, in the case where the hold that "'in or out lottery random number" is' 206' and the variation mode lottery random number is' 900 'occurs, in the setting value 3, it becomes "big hit" and "the variation time is 60 seconds" It may be determined that the setting value 1 is "lost" and that "the fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds". In this case, in setting 3 (in order to notify that the big hit expectation degree related to the new hold is high), the pre-reading effect lottery is configured to be easily executed (in order to increase the pre-reading effect lottery probability) On the other hand, in setting 1, it may be desirable to configure so as to make it difficult to execute the pre-reading effect lottery (in order to lower the pre-reading effect lottery probability). However, if the sub control board S side does not have information relating to the current set value (the sub control board S side does not hold the current set value), the sub control board S has a lottery random number “206”. As a result of not being able to determine whether it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss", it is assumed that accurate pre-reading effect becomes difficult to execute.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine such as the sixth embodiment having a set value, when determining whether to perform or not perform the pre-reading effect lottery, (rather than drawing), without referring to the information on the “winning lottery random number” Only the information on the variation mode lottery random number and / or the "symbol lottery random number" may be referred to. As an example, it is determined that the fluctuation time related to the newly generated suspension is a long time (for example, 60 seconds) {in the case of “the fluctuation mode lottery random number belonging to such a random value range” For example, in the main gaming table 3 of FIG. 26, when it is any of "1000 to 1023", the variation mode of long time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected regardless of whether it is a big hit or not If it is determined that the preread effect lottery that wins with a specific probability (for example, 1/3) is executed, it is determined that the fluctuation time is a short time (for example, 10 seconds) { It is a case where it is a "variation mode lottery random number" belonging to such a random number value range, for example, it is a big hit when it is any of "0 to 2" in the main gaming table 3 of FIG. For a short time (eg, 1 If the fluctuation mode in seconds) is selected} is predetermined probability is low probability than the specific probability (e.g., to perform the prefetch effect random as a winner in 1/50), and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the pre-reading effect with regard to "predicting that the change time for the newly generated hold is scheduled to be a long time" as the pre-reading effect.

  Similarly, when performing a pre-reading effect lottery with reference to only the "symbol lottery random number", "when a new hold occurs, the pre-reading effect lottery is performed based only on the symbol lottery random number, and the newly generated hold is made It can also be read as “representation that suggests which stop symbol is such” (representation that suggests symbol type (whether or not it is a probability change jackpot symbol if the new hold was tentatively a big hit)) .

  Next, another method for accurately performing pre-reading effects without transmitting information on the set value held by the main control board M to the sub control board S (the main control side determines the pass / fail according to the set value) ) Will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process in the ninth embodiment. The difference with FIG. 23, which is the present embodiment, is that the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a pre-reading determination process in step 1316-1 (ninth).

  Next, FIG. 143 is a flowchart according to a subroutine of the pre-reading determination process in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 1316-1-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the current setting value is 3 (= setting 3). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-2, in step 1316-1 3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a yes / no determination table in setting 3 (the relevant determination table has the same content as the yes / no lottery table Since the reference timings are different, it is determined as a separate table whether or not the acquired second main game content determination random number is hit (big hit). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-3, in step 1316-1-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter value, the suspension information (number of reservations including the acquired random number value, variation mode random number) Based on the corresponding hit determination frequency table for determination (the determination table for determination has the same contents as the limitation frequency table, but the reference timing is different, so it is referred to as another table). , Determine the variation mode. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1316-1-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a corresponding frequency based on the limit frequency counter value and the hold information (number of holds including the acquired random number value, variation mode random number). The variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table of. Next, in the case of No in step 1316-1-2, in step 1316-1-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current setting value is 2 (= setting 2). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-6, in step 1316-1-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the pass / fail determination table in setting 2 (the determination table has the same contents as the pass / fail lottery table, Since the reference timing is different, it is determined as a separate table whether or not the acquired second main game content determination random number is hit (big hit). If Yes in step 1316-1-7, in step 1316-1-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter value, the suspension information (the number of reservations including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number) Based on the corresponding hit determination frequency table for determination (the determination table for determination has the same contents as the limitation frequency table, but the reference timing is different, so it is referred to as another table). , Determine the variation mode. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1316-1-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that there is a corresponding loss based on the limit frequency counter value and the hold information (number of holds including the acquired random number value, variation mode random number). The variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table of. Next, in the case of No at step 1316-1-6, at step 1316-1-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current setting value is 1 (= setting 1). In the case of Yes in step 1316-1-10, in step 1316-1-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the acceptance determination table in setting 1 (the determination table has the same content as the acceptance lottery table, Since the reference timing is different, it is determined as a separate table whether or not the acquired second main game content determination random number is hit (big hit). If Yes in step 1316-1-11, in step 1316-1-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter value, the suspension information (the number of reservations including the acquired random number value, the variation mode random number) Based on the corresponding hit determination frequency table for determination (the determination table for determination has the same contents as the limitation frequency table, but the reference timing is different, so it is referred to as another table). , Determine the variation mode. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1316-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that there is a corresponding loss based on the limit frequency counter value and the hold information (number of holds including the acquired random number value, variation mode random number). The variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table of. When the processing of step 1316-1-4, step 1316-1-5, step 1316-1-8, step 1316-1-9, step 1316-1-12, step 1316-1-13 is completed, step 1316- At 1-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a read ahead yes / no command and a read ahead variation mode command based on the determination result of the yes / no determination and the variation mode, and performs the processing of the next process (step 1318). Transition. Also in the case of No at step 1316-1-10, the processing shifts to the next processing (step 1318).

  As described above, when the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires a random number value (for example, a main game random number value, a variation mode random number value), the variation mode determination is performed after performing the propriety determination according to the setting value. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the main control side by transmitting the judgment result (pre-reading pass / fail command) and the variation mode result (pre-reading change mode command) to the CPUSC of the sub-control board S. It becomes possible to perform the execution judgment of pre-reading effect according to a yes-no result and a fluctuation mode, without receiving influence by.

  In this example, the pre-reading determination process is performed before holding the acquired random number value (that is, the random number value acquired in the acquired register is directly determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this. After storing the random number values in the RAM once, it is also possible to read out the stored random number values and perform pre-read determination processing.

  Next, FIG. 144 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect execution determination processing in the ninth embodiment. The difference from FIG. 69 (second) is step 2155 (ninth) and step 2158 (ninth). If YES in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold in step 2155. If YES, the process proceeds to step 2156. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2155, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142). In step 2158 (ninth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in advance the change time based on the prefetch change mode command transmitted from the CPUMC of the main control board M. In step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold based on the read-ahead pass / fail command transmitted from the CPUMC of the main control board M.

  Further, information on the random number value held as a hold on the main control board M can be transmitted to the sub control board S {e.g., the first main game content determination random number described above at the timing of step 1310 in FIG. (3 random numbers can be transmitted, ie, a lottery random number for determining the status, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol when hit, and a variation mode lottery random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol)} The main control board M transmits information on the occurrence of the special game to the sub control board S (for example, in step 1414 of FIG. 25) The secondary control base is transmitted by transmitting the success or failure lottery result relating to the game symbol, or, if it is a big hit, the special game start display instruction command is transmitted in step 1608 of FIG. It is possible to grasp at the S side. Focusing on such a premise configuration, there can be mentioned another method for accurately performing pre-reading effect without holding information on the setting value on the side of the sub control substrate S.

  More specifically, under the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, information related to the random number value held as a certain hold on the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as "204", When information indicating the occurrence of a special game is transmitted from the main control board M to the secondary control board S at the time of reserve termination, the main control is performed after execution of the special game and in a non-probability fluctuation gaming state When the information on the random number value held as another hold on the substrate M is transmitted to the sub control board S as "204", the sub control board S side is more likely than the other hold is digested. Since it can be inferred that a special game is scheduled to occur before, on the basis of this inference, the secondary control board S has a pre-reading effect (pre-notification) regarding a (big hit) before the other suspension is digested. It becomes executable.

  That is, on the secondary control board S side, information on the random number value held as a hold and an event that occurs when the hold is digested are accumulated as a game history (the secondary control board S learns In addition, the pre-reading effect based on the game history may be accurate as the advance notification regarding the hit (big hit).

  However, as described above, the information on the random number value held as hold and the event that occurred when the hold is digested are accumulated as the game history (the secondary control board S side learns) In the method of improving the accuracy of the pre-reading effect based on the game history, it is necessary as a precondition that the setting on the main control board M side is maintained (fixed) at a certain set value. When it is guessed / understood on the side of the sub control board S that the setting value on the side of the substrate M has been changed (for example, when power is shut off, a command to the effect that the setting value has been changed from the main control board M side In the case of transmission, it is desirable to clear and re-accumulate the information accumulated so far.

  In addition, when the first main game pass / fail lottery table (the second main game pass / fail lottery table) included in the main control board M is set in the random value range as shown in FIG. 141, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state Under the circumstances, the information on the random number value held as a hold in the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as “206”, and the special control is performed from the main control board M at the time of the digestion of the certain hold. When information indicating that there is a game occurrence is sent to the sub control board S, {only because setting 3 is determined that the random number value “206” is hit (big hit)}, the main control board M holds Even if information on the set value being set is not transmitted to the sub control board S (in other words, the sub control board S side does not hold information on the set value), the sub control board S side is the main control board M It is possible to understand that the side is setting 3 (that If sub-control board S side, the relationship of being a = set 3 to the random number value "206" is determined per (big hit) there is a need to previously held).

  Furthermore, the first main game pass / fail lottery table (the second main game pass / fail lottery table) included in the main control board M is set in the random value range as shown in FIG. 145, and even on the sub control board S side If the same table is used, that is, the random value range determined to be hit (big hit) at a certain set value does not overlap with the random value range determined to be hit (big hit) at another set value ( In this example, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and setting 1: 0 to 204, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and setting 2: 205 to 410, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and setting 3: 411 to 617), and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state Under certain circumstances, information on the random number value held as a hold on the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as any of "411 to 617", and the main control is performed at the time of the end of the certain hold. Substrate M When information indicating that there is a special game occurrence is transmitted to the sub control board S, even if information on the setting value held by the main control board M is not transmitted to the sub control board S (in other words, the sub control It is possible to grasp that the main control board M side is the setting 3 on the sub control board S side without holding information on the setting value on the board S side. Therefore, when configured in this manner, the sub control substrate S side can quickly grasp which set value is on the main control substrate M side.

  Similarly, under the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, information on the random number value held as a certain hold on the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S as any of “0 to 204”. If the information indicating the occurrence of a special game is not transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S at the time of the end of the certain suspension (in the case of "loss"), the sub control board S side is the main Since it is possible to grasp that the control board M side is the setting 2 or 3, from this point of view as well, the setting value of the main control board M side is the secondary control board S side (which is likely to be Can be quickly grasped.

  As described above, in each example described above (in particular, an embodiment having a plurality of setting values), the main control board M grasps the setting value information, and based on the grasped setting value information, the main lottery symbol lottery table Although processing such as selection has been performed, it is expected that strengthening against fraud etc. can be achieved by configuring so that the setting information can not be grasped not only in the sub control board S but also in the control program of the main control board M. . Therefore, as a modified example, a mode in which parameters such as a winning value according to the setting can be set independently of the control program of the main control board M (CPU) will be exemplified.

  Specifically, in the present modification, the winning probability data table according to the set value (three stages of settings 1 to 3 in the present modification) is an area different from the normal storage area. Among the data such as the winning value stored in the winning value data storage device Q20, the CPUMC of the main control board M may read the data such as the winning value according to the setting value set by the setting changing means Q10. It is configured to be able to. More specifically using the schematic block diagram of hardware in this modification of FIG. 146, the CPUMC of the main control board M and the winning value data storage device Q20 are connected by an 8-bit data bus and the winning value The lower address (for example, the lower 2 bits “A0 · A1” address signal line) of the data storage device (ROM) Q20 and the read request signal (for example, read signal) can be electrically connected. Further, the terminal corresponding to the upper address (for example, the address of "A14 · A15") of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 is connected to the setting changing means Q10, and the setting value output from the setting changing means Q10 is used. The corresponding signal is to be designated data of the upper address (for example, the address of "A14 · A15") of the winning value data storage device Q20.

  Next, the configuration of the setting changing means Q10 in the schematic block diagram will be described in detail. The setting changing means Q10 in the present modification example includes a setting key switch similar to a rotary switch, and three setting value display LEDs for notifying of setting values of 1 to 3 operated by the setting key switch. The setting key switch in this modification is configured to rotate in two steps to the right after inserting the setting key, and is biased to the first stage position between the first and second stages. There is. When the setting key is inserted into such a setting key switch and rotated one step to the right, the setting value display LED corresponding to the currently selected setting value is configured to light up. This state is the second step from this state The setting value is configured to be incremented by one each time it is rotated rightward to the rotatable position. The setting value is configured to return to the minimum value of 1 when it is rotated one more time in a state where the maximum value of the setting value of 3 is set. The setting value set by the setting key switch is held by the setting changing means Q10, and a 2-bit signal (“01” for setting 1, “10” for setting 2, “11” for setting 3) The data output as “1” is electrically connected to be input to the upper bit terminal of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 as described above.

  Next, the configuration of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 in the schematic block diagram will be described in detail. The winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 in this modification exemplifies a storage device having an 8-bit data storage area corresponding to a 16-bit address from 0000h to FFFFh, and is shown in the table of FIG. 146. As per the upper address "01" "10" "11" (ie "40h" "80h" "C0h"), the hit value for each setting value is non-probability fluctuation gaming state (low probability) · probability fluctuation gaming It is stored for each state (high probability). Further, the read terminal (terminal for requesting reading) of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20, the address of the lower 2 bits, and the data bus are connected to the CPU MC of the main control board M. Although not shown in the schematic block diagram, the address buses “A3” to “A13” are connected to GND, and access to areas other than the storage areas corresponding to the addresses shown in the table of FIG. 146 is performed. Is impossible.

(Action)
Next, the setting change means Q10 sets the setting value “1” for the flow of reading the winning value corresponding to each setting value in this modification, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state) An example will be described by way of example. The CPUMC of the main control board M wins an address corresponding to the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state) when executing a predetermined process to refer to the winning value (for example, when performing a lottery). The data of the designated address is read by designating the data address (00h) corresponding to the lower value of the value. Then, the upper address of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 is data of "4000h" because it is fixed to "4000h" corresponding to the setting value "1" by the output data from the setting changing means Q10. "11001100" is output from the data bus. Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily fetches the value of "11001100" output to the data bus into a register or the like, and subsequently, among the addresses corresponding to the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state), the winning value Specify the data (01h) that corresponds to the upper value of and read the data of the specified address. Then, since the upper address of the winning value data storage device (ROM) Q20 is fixed to "4000h" corresponding to the setting value "1" by the output data from the setting changing means Q10, "4001h" data ""00000000" is output from the data bus. Then, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily fetches the value of "00000000" output to the data bus into a register etc., and combines it with the data "11001100" of the lower address previously fetched, and is a 16-bit value "0000000011001100". (205 in decimal number) is obtained. Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M compares the random number value “N” for judging the acceptability with the winning value acquired as described above, and the random value “N” is less than the winning value (N ≦ winning value) If it is less than the winning value, it is determined to be a hit.

  By configuring as described above, although the CPUMC of the main control board M does not know which setting value is the first place, it is possible to realize a lottery according to the setting value, which is suitable for the measure against fraud A gaming machine can be provided.

  In this modification, although a storage device (ROM) storing a normal program and another storage device (ROM) are used, a common storage device (ROM) is used to obtain winning value data for a part of the area. It is also possible to configure such that the address to be read is allocated from the outside, as described above, as described above, which is allocated to the storage area. Further, in this modification, the storage area corresponding to the set value is read by the hardware, but it is also possible to secure the fraud prevention by performing a certain restriction by the software.

  Specifically, in the processing (initialization processing after power on) before shifting to the main routine in the main control board M in each embodiment, the output information (setting value) from the setting change unit Q10 is read and read. The storage area of the winning value according to the output information is specified (the storage area to be read at the time of the lottery for success or failure is specified). Then, other than the initialization process, that is, in the main routine process or the interrupt process which shifts after the completion of the initialization process, the specified storage area without providing the process of reading the output information (setting value) from the setting change unit Q10. Configure to use the winning value of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure a program that can not read the setting value information except at a specific time after power-on etc. (other than the initialization process), which can be expected to contribute to fraud prevention. .

  As described above, in each embodiment, according to the setting value, the storage area of the winning value table according to the setting value is designated by the hardware and software under predetermined conditions (under predetermined restriction). Since the set value information can not be confirmed in the normal processing routine on the main control board M while performing the lottery etc. at the set probability, the set value information not only on the main control board M but also on the sub control board S Can not be recognized, and it can be expected to effectively deter fraud such as stealing setting value information.

  In the pre-reading determination process described above, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is performed with reference to the set value that has been set, but is not limited thereto. Pre-reading effect is executed without referring to the setting value It may be configured to More specifically, the prefetch code A (random number range that makes a big hit regardless of the set value), the prefetch code D (random number range that makes a small hit regardless of the set value), and the prefetch code E (set value) If it is determined to be a random number range which becomes out of place regardless of, then it is possible to execute the pre-reading lottery, while it is determined to pre-reading codes B and C (random numbers that may be different from the big hit depending on the set value) If it does, the pre-reading lottery may not be executed.

  By configuring as described above, the sub control board can be configured to be able to execute the prefetching effect using the common processing regardless of the setting value.

  Incidentally, the sub control board S may be configured to be able to grasp the set value currently set by configuring so that information on the set value can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. When configured in such a manner, a specific advance notice effect may be configured to be executable, and the occurrence probability of the particular advance notice effect may differ depending on the set value, or a specific set value (for example, setting) It may be configured such that a specific preview effect can be performed only in the case of 6). In addition, for each setting value, the selection upper limit number (for example, the selection upper limit number is reset by RAM clear) is provided for a predetermined effect, and in setting 1 to setting 5, the setting upper limit number is less than the specific number, By configuring the upper limit number of times for selection to be equal to or greater than the specific number of times, the player may be able to recognize that the setting value is the setting 6 when the predetermined effect is performed for the specific number of times or more. By configuring as such, the player can execute the game while estimating the currently set setting value by paying attention to the presence or absence or the execution frequency of the specific effect, which is interesting Can provide a high game machine.

Tenth Embodiment
First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. The difference from FIG. 6 which is the present embodiment is that, in FIG. 147, the initial setting process of step 999 (tenth) performed after the game machine is powered on is illustrated. In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of setting values are provided, and the setting values are different, so that the denominators of the random number values used for the winning or losing lottery may be different (details will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of initial setting processing on the main control board side in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 999-1, the main control board M executes each port / register setting process. Next, in step 999-2, the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key (setting key switch) has not been operated. In the case of Yes in step 999-2, the process proceeds to step 999-4. On the other hand, if No in step 999-2, the main control board M executes setting change processing (the setting change processing is as shown in FIG. 125) in step 999-3, and in step 999-3-1, After executing the RAM clear, the main control board M shifts to the processing of step 999-4. Next, in step 999-4, the main control board M reads setting value information. Next, in step 999-5, the main control board M determines whether the set value is one. If Yes in step 999-5, the main control board M reads the data address corresponding to setting 1 in step 999-6, and in step 999-7, the main control board M reads the read data value (65535). ) Is set to the random number upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning lottery random numbers), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1002). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 999-5, the main control board M determines at step 999-8 whether or not the set value is two. If Yes in step 999-8, the main control board M reads the data address corresponding to setting 2 in step 999-9, and in step 999-10, the main control board M reads the read data value (65501). ) Is set to the random number upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning lottery random numbers), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1002). If No in step 999-8, the main control board M reads the data address corresponding to setting 3 in step 999-11, and in step 999-12, the main control board M reads the read data value (65301). ) Is set to the random number upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning lottery random numbers), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1002).

  Next, FIG. 149 is a table showing a random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random numbers set in the initial setting process. First, the non-probability fluctuation game time will be described. In setting 1, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65535 in the non-probability-variation game. As random number values, random number values 0 to 204 (number 205) are the big hit, and random number values 205 to 65535 are set as the loss. Next, in setting 2, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65501 at the time of the non-probability fluctuation game. As random number values, random number values 0 to 204 (number 205) are big hit, and random number values 205 to 65501 are set to be lost. Next, in setting 3, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65301 at the time of the non-probability fluctuation game. As random number values, random number values 0 to 204 (number 205) are big hit, and random number values 205 to 65301 are set to be lost.

  Next, the probability change gaming state will be described. In setting 1, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65535, as in setting 1 in the non-probability fluctuation game, during the probability fluctuation game. As random number values, random number values 0 to 409 (number 410) are big hit, and random number values 410 to 65535 are set to be lost. Next, in setting 2, at the time of probability fluctuation game, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65501 similarly to setting 2 at the time of non probability fluctuation game. As random number values, random number values 0 to 409 (number 410) are big hit, and random number values 410 to 65501 are set to be lost. Next, in setting 3, the random number upper limit value of the winning lottery random number is 65301 similarly to setting 3 in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state at the time of probability fluctuation gaming. As random number values, random number values 0 to 409 (number 410) are big hit, and random number values 410 to 65301 are set to be lost.

  By configuring in this way, the difference in the winning probability due to changing the setting value is caused by the difference in the random number upper limit value under the same gaming state (for example, at the time of non-probability fluctuation gaming, probability fluctuation) Become. For this reason, it is possible to make the determination table for the winning or losing lottery common while changing the winning probability for each setting, and to reduce the need to execute the individual processing for each set value in the prefetching process or the winning or losing lottery. .

  In the present embodiment, in the initial setting process (step 999), the process of confirming the information of the RAM after judging the operation status of the setting switch (step 1007), and the process of clearing the RAM (initialization) as necessary. Although (step 1004) is performed, a RAM check process (step 1008) may be performed in each port / register setting process (step 999-1). In this case, for example, in the RAM check process (step 1008), when it is determined that the data at the time of power interruption is not stored normally in the RAM using the checksum data of the RAM, the storage information of the setting value is normal. Whether or not it is 6 (in the case of 6-step setting, whether it is 1 to 6) (without determination), after clearing the necessary storage area, set the default setting value (for example, setting 1) Then, setting processing of each port is performed. The setting process of the built-in register of the CPU to be executed prior to the start of the program process is performed before the RAM check process. In the subsequent determination of the operation status of the RAM clear button (step 1002), processing for confirming information in the RAM after it is determined that the operation has not been performed (step 1007), and RAM clear (initialization) processing as needed (initialization) Step 1004) is omitted because it is redundant processing.

  As described above, by performing the RAM check before changing the set value, it is determined that the set value data itself is normal even though the data in the RAM is abnormal, it is determined as abnormal. Default settings can be set, and operation of the gaming machine based on unexpected settings can be restricted. It should be noted that at startup of the power supply, a notification of startup of the power supply different from normal (for example, changing the lighting pattern of the frame lamp, varying the notification time, etc.) so as to suggest that the default setting value has been set. It is also preferred to carry out.

The determination as to whether or not the storage information of the set value is normal may be performed at the following timing. Moreover, it may be executed at a plurality of timings as follows, or may be executed at only one timing, that is, the execution timings of determination of whether stored information of set values is normal or not may be combined in any way. Good.
(1) Immediately after the power is turned on (2) Before the start of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol (3) After the end of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol (4) The period from the stop of the big hit symbol to the start of the big hit (5) after the big hit end ( 6) Immediately before the performance of the lottery (7) period from the stop time of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit (8) after the end of the small hit (9) immediately after the transition of the gaming state (10) immediately after the suspension occurred Note that even if it is configured not to execute the determination as to whether the stored information of the set value is normal or not at the timing of (1) above, only the stored information of the set value is stored since the above-described RAM check process is executed. It does not have to be confirmed, and the capacity used can be reduced.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, a modified example in the case of changing the winning probability of the main gaming symbol according to the set value in the eighth embodiment will be described. The present modified example is largely different from the eighth embodiment in that a two-step lottery is performed based on the winning probability in the high probability state (probability fluctuation gaming state). Below, this modification is demonstrated, referring drawings.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart of random number acquisition processing according to the present modification, FIG. 150 (a) is a determination table provided for the first lottery processing in the main lottery processing, and FIG. 2 is a determination table provided for lottery processing. In FIG. 150 (a), the determination value for drawing is set for each setting value, but in FIG. 150 (b), the determination value for drawing is common to all setting values. is there.

  First, with reference to FIG. 150, a flowchart of random number acquisition processing according to the present modification will be described. Also in this modification, since the processing proceeds in the same flow as the flowchart in FIG. 7 of the present embodiment, the main game content determination random number acquisition according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. Of the processing, the flow chart portion relating to the first main game start port will be described.

  In the present modification, at step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game start opening ball insertion information from the first main game start hole ball detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a first main game start opening ball entry command, which is a command related to entering the first main game start opening A10, to the sub main control unit SM. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the holding balls for the main game (particularly, the first main game side) are within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires, as a first main game content determination random number, a first success / failure lottery random number, a second success / failure lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery Do. That is, in the present modification, as the first main game content determination random number, the success or failure lottery random number for determining the success or failure acquires two random numbers of the first success or failure lottery random number and the second success or failure lottery random number. As in the present embodiment, these four random numbers (in particular, the first and second decision random numbers) are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and sequentially acquired sequentially at this timing. It is supposed to

  Next, in step 1307, the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a prefetch process corresponding to each random number acquired to execute the prefetch effect based on the acquired random number. Specifically, each of the acquired first and second lottery random numbers is compared by a separate comparing means to determine whether each of the first and second lottery random numbers is a possible hit value, and the result To be able to set as a command in step 1310, which will be described later, the symbol lottery random number and the variation mode lottery, what symbol is selected or what variation mode is selected The information that can be predicted is processed so that it can be set as a command in step 1310.

  Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (pending generation command) to the effect that the first main game random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. It is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). In addition, in FIG. 150, since it is the same as the processing routine regarding the 1st main game start opening, it is added that the explanation of the processing routine regarding the 2nd main game start opening is omitted.

  Next, the process when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied will be described with reference to the table of FIG. Here, the flow of the entire process is the same as steps 1403 to 1500 in the present embodiment (see FIG. 25) except for the point regarding step 1410-1, and therefore, the description will be omitted.

  Also in this modification example, when the variation start condition is satisfied in step 1403 as in the present embodiment, the symbol variation related to the present symbol variation, which is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406 While reading out the first main game content determination random number, the first main game content determination random number is deleted from the RAM area, and the remaining temporarily stored information temporarily stored is shifted (pending reserve process).

  Thereafter, in step 1410-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M first determines whether or not the first success or failure random number will be a hit with reference to the first success or failure random number determination table shown in FIG. Next, it is confirmed whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability state) or the high probability gaming state, and if it is a high probability state, it is a hit without determining the second success or failure lottery random number judge. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the hand normal gaming state (low probability state) and the first hit lottery random number is a hit, the second hit lottery random number determination shown in FIG. 150 is further made. With reference to the table, it is determined whether or not the second success or failure lottery random number is a hit.

  Here, in this modification, the table of the first random number for the lottery random number is 2050/65536 (1 / 31.969) in setting 1, 2100/65536 (1 / 31.208) in setting 2, and 2150 in setting 3. / 65536 (1 / 30.482), and the table of the first success / failure lottery random numbers is 1 / 2.5 common to all settings. That is, in this modification, the probability of hitting (big hit) in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state) is 1 / 79.92 in setting 1, 1 / 78.02 in setting 2, and 1/76. The probability of winning (big hit) in the high probability gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state) is 1 / 31.996 in setting 1, 1 / 31.208 in setting 2, and 1 / 30.482 in setting 3. Therefore, in this modification, the probability change ratio between the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state is 2.5 times the common value in all the set values. In the same setting value, the ratio of the big hit probability of the big hit probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the big hit probability in the random fluctuation gaming state is referred to as a setting change ratio.

  As described above, the hit probability in the normal state (in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state) on the premise that the determination of the success or failure is performed using the random number value of the predetermined range by adopting the two success or failure lottery random numbers as in this modification. Even when is set finely, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning ratio with the high probability (probability fluctuation gaming state) can be made completely identical in each setting.

  In this modified example, when the current gaming state is the high probability gaming state, it is determined to be "hit" in the first main game without determining the second winning lottery random number. However, even in the high probability gaming state, it is possible to execute the second hit / off lottery after setting the second hit / off random number to 1/1 and setting the second hit / off lottery to be always “hit”. is there. By configuring in this way, since both lottery processes are executed in common under the condition that the storage number is different depending on the gaming state, uniform processing speed may be achieved regardless of the gaming state. it can.

(Modification from Eleventh Embodiment)
Further, in the eleventh embodiment, although the two-step lottery has been conducted based on the winning probability in the high probability state (probability fluctuation gaming state), about the second step lottery (determination process of the second success or failure lottery random number) Is provided with one determination table (one for low probability success or failure lottery table and one high probability for failure probability lottery table) for each gaming state as in this embodiment, and the first row of lottery ((1) It is also possible to perform a lottery using the determination table which is different for each set value, regarding the first determination result of the lottery random number).

  Specifically, in the process of obtaining the main game content determination random number in the eleventh embodiment, among the success or failure lottery random numbers for determining the success or failure, the first success or failure lottery random number is different for each setting value as shown in FIG. As a random number for comparison with the probability table, the second success or failure lottery random number is provided for each gaming state as shown in FIG. 151, and a lottery probability table common to each setting value (1 for non-probability fluctuation gaming state and 1 for probability fluctuation gaming state Each is acquired as a random number for comparison with. The prefetch determination and the like regarding the acquired random numbers are the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

  Next, the process when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied {the process after the fluctuation start condition is satisfied in step 1403 in the eleventh embodiment (refer to this embodiment if necessary) will be described. In steps 1405 and 1406, the first main game content determination random number related to the symbol variation this time temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is read out and deleted from the RAM area and temporarily stored Shift any remaining pending information (pending digest).

  Thereafter, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M first refers to the first hit / lottery random number determination table according to the set value shown in FIG. Determine if Next, it is confirmed whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state) or the high probability gaming state, and in the high probability state, the second probability lottery random number determination table for the high probability state The second success or failure random number is determined by using the second success or failure random number judgment table with reference to the second probability failure random number determination table for the low probability state if the normal gaming state (low probability state) is determined. It is determined whether or not Then, when any random number is hit, a flag or the like is set so that a big hit occurs in the symbol variation this time. If one lottery fails, the other process can be omitted as in the eleventh embodiment.

  Here, in the present modified example, the table of the first success or failure lottery random number is 98/100 for setting 1, 99/100 for setting 2, and 100/100 for setting 3, and the success or failure of the second success or failure lottery random number is Among the lottery random number judgment table, the table for low probability state is common to all settings 210/65536 (1 / 318.4), and the table for high probability state is all common to all settings 1001/65536 (1 / 65.5) It has become. That is, in this modification, the probability of hitting (big hit) in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state) is 1 / 318.4 in setting 1, 1 / 315.2 in setting 2, 1/312. It becomes 0, and the probability (big hit) in the high probability gaming state is 1 / 66.8 in setting 1, 1 / 66.1 in setting 2, and 1 / 65.5 in setting 3. Therefore, in this modification, the probability change ratio between the normal gaming state (low probability state) and the high probability gaming state is 100 1/210 times (4.766 ... times) common to all set values. . That is, in this embodiment, the ratio of the winning probability between the normal gaming state (low probability state) and the high probability state is the second probability lottery random number determination table for low probability and the second probability lottery random number determination table for high probability Ratio. For this reason, it is extremely easy to set the ratio uniformly, and as in the present embodiment, in particular, the number of random numbers per hit / off lottery table with high probability is made prime (in the present embodiment, 1001). Even in the case of the above, the probability ratio for each setting can be made the same. (This point is the same as in the eleventh embodiment).

  In this modification, whether or not the final big hit is largely dependent on the parameter of the second random number lottery random number, it is also preferable to determine the execution of the pre-reading effect based only on the information related to this parameter is there. More specifically, although the actual winning probability (the probability of becoming a big hit in the end) in the present embodiment is calculated by adding the winning probability of the first success lottery random number and the winning probability of the second success lottery random number, (1) Since the winning probability of the winning lottery random number is set very high (98/100 even in setting 1), it depends largely on the winning result of the second winning lottery random number. Therefore, in the pre-reading determination process of generating information for indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit, the parameter of the second success / failure lottery random number becomes important.

  Because of this, in the execution judgment of the actual pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading processing of the sub control board in this embodiment, etc.), in the process of determining the executability of the effect and the content determination It is preferable to set the degree of dependence of the information generated based on it high. (Of course, if the probability of winning the first random lottery random number is extremely high, as in this example of change, it may be possible to predict the probability of a read ahead judgment based only on the information based on the result of the second random lottery random number. .)

  Specifically, in the case of performing the pass / fail determination using the plurality of random numbers in a stepwise manner as in the present modified example and the eleventh embodiment, the pre-reading effect determination (including the pre-reading effect execution possibility and pre-reading determination processing etc. It is preferable to increase the degree of dependence of information on the one with lower winning probability (in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the determination result of the first success or failure lottery random number, and in the case of this modification, the determination result of the second success or failure random number). By this, it is possible to properly perform the function of hit indication by the pre-reading effect.

Twelfth Embodiment
In the second embodiment described above, when transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game, the probability fluctuation gaming state is ended (may also be referred to as a ST machine) depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol. Here, when a configuration having a plurality of set values as described in the eighth embodiment is applied to a configuration in which the probability fluctuation gaming state can be ended by the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol as in the second embodiment, The probability of winning a big hit (sometimes referred to as the probability of running continuously) by the probability fluctuation gaming state is different depending on the setting value, and the advantageous state for the player is not equal for each gaming machine There is a fear. Here, a configuration capable of solving such a problem will be described as a twelfth embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 152 is an example of a first main game use / lottery table (second main game use / lottery table) according to the twelfth embodiment. The first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table) and the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table), The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

  In the table referred to in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state in the first main game winning lottery table (the second main gaming winning lottery table), setting 1, setting 2 in order from the one in which the profit rate given to the player is low , Is the order of setting 3. More specifically, the winning probability for setting 1 in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state (big hit) is set to about 1/320, and the winning probability for the setting 2 in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state (big hit) Is set to about 1/318, and the winning probability for the setting 3 in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state (big hit) is set to about 1/317. On the other hand, in the table to be referred to in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state in the first main gaming success or failure lottery table (the second main gaming success or failure lottery table), hit probability (big hit) is the same at any set value It is configured. More specifically, in all setting values of setting 1, setting 2 and setting 3, the winning probability is set to about 1/159.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the twelfth embodiment, after the big hit is finished, regardless of the big hit symbol relating to the big hit, it is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation number counter MP51 c 80 times are set, in other words, the number of definite variations is 80 times. In addition, since the big hit probability in the probability variation gaming state is 412/65536, the probability (sometimes also referred to as consecutive probability) that can win a big hit in any of the 80 main gaming symbol variation that is the number of probability variation,
{1- (1-412 / 65536) ⁸⁰ } × 100 ≒ 39.62 (%)
That is, even if the setting values are different, the same consecutive probability is obtained.

Also, the ratio of the big hit probability of the big hit probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the big hit probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is
<Setting 1>
(412/65536) / (205/65536)) 2.01
<Setting 2>
(412/65536) ÷ (206/65536) ≒ 2.00
<Setting 3>
(412/65536) ÷ (2077/65536) ≒ 1.99
It is
When setting 1 which is the largest setting value of magnification is compared with setting 3 which is the lowest setting value of magnification,
2.01 と な っ 1.99 × 100 ≒ 101 (%) (The value of 101% may be referred to as a big hit ratio setting difference).
It should be noted that the setting difference of the jackpot ratio may be changed, and if it is reduced, the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state may be changed for each setting value, and in such a case, a gaming machine having significant euphoria In order not to do so, it is preferable to configure so that the setting difference of the big hit ratio is within 110 (%).

  By configuring as described above, the pachinko gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment has three setting values of setting 1, setting 2 and setting 3 as setting values, and in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state By configuring the jackpot probability to be different due to the difference in the setting value, it is novel novelty that the player proceeds with the game while deducing how favorable the setting value is to the current setting value. Can be taught, and by setting the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state to be the same jackpot probability even if the setting value is different, when transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game, the main gaming symbol In a gaming machine configured such that the probability variation gaming state ends (also referred to as a ST machine) depending on the number of variations, the continuous probability in the probability variation gaming state is set by the set value Create a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent different situations and the profit ratio provided in the probability variation gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, does not differ depending on the gaming machine to be played can do.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is not different depending on the set value, but it is not limited to this, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state may be different depending on the set value It may be configured. In such a configuration, the profit rate of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous to the player is not deviated too much by the set value (for the player to recognize that the probability fluctuation gaming state = the advantageous state) A big hit probability (for example, setting 1) × 100 ≦ 105 at a setting value for which the big hit probability of the probability fluctuation gaming state is the lowest (for example, setting 3) に お け る in the setting value at which the big hit probability of the probability fluctuation gaming state is the highest. It is preferable to be configured to be (%).

As in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration may be applied to the following configuration in which the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is not different for each set value.
(1) Has a small hit on the second main game side (2) The average value of the fluctuation time of the second main game side is relative to the probability change gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state It will be a short time (for example, 1 second), and it will be relatively long time (for example, 300 seconds) if it is other than the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (3) small hit of the second main gaming side The winning probability is almost 1/1
(4) Probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state If you win a big hit in the gaming state, after the big hit end may transition to gaming state other than probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (5) probability fluctuation gaming state and non When the time saving gaming state is configured as described above which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the higher the set value (for example, the setting 3 than the setting 1) the big hit probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state In the case of being configured to be high, it is likely that the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state will be terminated early (the average value of the number of times of symbol variation that can be executed until the termination is small). From such a reason, in the above configuration, by configuring the big hit winning probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state not to be different for each set value, the expected value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous for the player is It is possible to configure a fair gaming machine that is unlikely to be different for each setting.

(13th Embodiment)
<Overview of test terminal>
Here, the test terminal according to the present embodiment and the information output from the test terminal will be additionally described. In this embodiment, although not mounted on a game machine supplied to a market (game arcade), a buffer IC dedicated to the output of the connector and the test terminal only at the time of the test, in order to easily perform various ball testing and the like. By mounting a latch IC or the like (in the case where there is no dedicated IC, only a connector is mounted), various information of the gaming machine can be output. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the mounting area of the test terminal TS is formed at the upper center of the main control board, and the land (corresponding to the control circuit) corresponding to that area is electrically Can be output from the test terminal TS by mounting (soldering) one or a plurality of buffer ICs, latch ICs (for example, 74HC244 and 74HC541) and a connector so as to correspond to the circuit pattern). It becomes.

<Test terminal output information>
Next, the information output from the test terminal described above will be briefly described. As described above, the test terminal is intended to easily carry out a ball test and the like, and is thus configured to output information for grasping the state of winning balls and the progress of the game in real time as much as possible. In the present embodiment, "out ball count", "touch state", "normal symbol operation gate", "first main game start opening", and "second main game start opening", which are signals input to the main control board M for gaming. "Normal winning opening""1st big winning opening winning""2nd big winning opening winning" is output, "broken short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal""door opening signal""magnetic detection signal""radio wave detection as a signal about abnormality A signal "impact detection signal" is output, and as a signal related to the state of the gaming machine "condition device in operation""character continuous operation device in operation""first main game symbol""first main game symbol fluctuation" Medium "per second main game symbol""second main game symbol fluctuation""first main game high probability state""first main game fluctuation time shortening state""second main game high probability state""second Main game fluctuation time shortening state "" auxiliary game symbol high probability state "" auxiliary play Symbol fluctuation time shortening state "" auxiliary game opening extension state "" special electric role item in operation "" first large winning opening solenoid driving "" second large winning opening solenoid driving "" per auxiliary gaming symbol "" auxiliary gaming "During symbol fluctuation", "normal motor combination item in operation", "gaming machine error state" is output, and information on symbols other than "symbol data of main game symbol" and "symbol data of auxiliary game symbol" are output. In addition, when a setting device (a device for displaying setting values and setting changes provided with a setting change button, a setting key switch, etc.) is mounted, the operating state of the setting device (for example, in setting change mode) In the setting display mode, the information on the setting value is also output, and when the ball entry display device J10 is mounted, the information displayed on the display device is also output.

<Output processing of test terminal output information>
In the present embodiment, a wide variety of information is output from the viewpoint of test information. The output timing of these information will be briefly described below with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 153 describes only partial input / output in order to simplify the description.

<Signal to be input to main control board M regarding gaming and signal regarding abnormality>
With regard to these input signals, the signals input to the main control board M separately from the processing of the CPU MC are directly distributed and output through the test terminal buffer IC. As an example of the sensor input of the first main game start port, as shown in FIG. 153, the signal of the start port sensor input to the main control board M is converted by the input circuit into the level signal of the logic circuit, and the input buffer Is input to When it becomes the timing of the input in CPUMC (the winning determination process in the interrupt processing), CPUMC opens the input buffer by specifying the corresponding input port, and the signal level is specified by connecting the input circuit and the data bus. Store in the storage area of Here, the signal line connecting the input circuit and the input buffer is also connected to the test terminal TS via the test terminal buffer. As a result, a signal input to the main control board M regarding gaming is output from the test terminal TS in real time regardless of the processing status of the CPU MC. In other words, for example, regardless of whether the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the setting change process or the process related to the ball entry state display device, the signal input to the main control board M regarding the game is from the test terminal TS It is supposed to be output.

<Signal 1 concerning the state of the gaming machine>
A signal related to the state of the gaming machine (for convenience, the state of the gaming machine being output to the output driver via the output IC (generally a latch IC) as a signal to be output to various output devices of the gaming machine by the processing of the CPUMC The signal for the test terminal corresponding to the signal 1) is distributed from the signal line connecting the output IC and the output driver and is outputted through the buffer IC for the test terminal. As an example of the first large winning opening solenoid, as shown in FIG. 153, the driving signal of the first large winning opening solenoid output from the main control board M is the timing of the output in the CPU MC (solenoid output processing in interrupt processing) Then, the CPU MC latches the data bus signal output as driving data by designating the address corresponding to the corresponding output port (the first output IC in FIG. 153) to the output IC, and outputs the signal from the output IC. By outputting the signal to the output driver, the drive signal is supplied to the first large winning opening solenoid. Here, the signal line connecting the output IC and the output driver is also connected to the test terminal TS via the test terminal buffer. Thereby, the signal output from the main control board M regarding the game is output from the test terminal TS in real time according to the output process of the CPU MC. In other words, for example, when the CPUMC of the main control board M is performing setting change processing, processing such as a big hit is not executed, so the game related output (the first big winning opening solenoid) is driven. Is not output. On the other hand, even when the processing relating to the ball entry state display device is being performed, since the operation of the gaming machine is continued, these signals are output according to the state of the gaming machine.

<Information regarding signal 2 regarding the state of gaming machine and other symbols>
In addition, among the signals relating to the state of the gaming machine, signals different from those that directly operate the output device, such as “per first main gaming symbol” and “first main gaming symbol fluctuating” (signal 2 relating to the state of gaming machine for convenience) And other information related to the design, the CPUMC is configured to output to the test terminal through the dedicated output IC and the test terminal buffer using a dedicated program for outputting to the test terminal. . For example, when the first main gaming symbol is in fluctuation, the CPU MC performs an address corresponding to the second output IC shown in FIG. 153 in a predetermined test signal output process. The data bus signal output as the test signal data is latched at the second output IC by designating the signal, and the signal is output from the second output IC to the test terminal buffer, whereby the test terminal TS A signal indicating that the first main gaming symbol is being changed will be output. In other words, for example, when the CPUMC of the main control board M is performing the setting change process, a signal indicating that the first main game symbol is being changed is output if the specification does not perform the predetermined test signal output process. There is no (In the first place, in the present embodiment, the first main gaming symbol does not change during the setting change, so there is no effect depending on whether or not the processing is executed). Since the operation of the gaming machine is continued even in the case where the game is being performed, these signals are output according to the state of the gaming machine.

<Information indicating the operating state of the setting device>
As to whether the setting change mode or the setting display mode is in operation status of the setting device, use a dedicated program for the CPUMC to output to the test terminal, and use a dedicated output IC and test terminal buffer. It is configured to output to the test terminal via the same. For example, when the setting change mode is in progress, the CPU MC corresponds to the second output IC shown in FIG. 153 in the output process in the setting change mode or the predetermined test signal output process. The test terminal is specified by latching the data bus signal output as test signal data to the second output IC by designating the address to be output, and outputting the signal from the second output IC to the test terminal buffer. A signal indicating that the setting change mode is in progress is output from the TS. In the present embodiment, when the set value information display device is configured of LEDs, processing such as increasing the number of terminals is performed at the input destination of the test terminal in order to clearly indicate which value the fixed value is. As in the case of "signal 1 related to the state of the gaming machine", it is also possible to divide and supply the signal outputting the information to the test terminal TS as it is.

<Information showing the display content of the ball entry status display device>
As for the information indicating the display content of the ball entry status display device, a dedicated program for the CPUMC to output to the test terminal is used similarly to the information indicating the operation status of the setting device, and via the dedicated output IC and test terminal buffer Output to the test terminal. In the predetermined test signal output process, the CPU MC latches the data bus signal being output as test signal data to the second output IC by specifying an address corresponding to the second output IC shown in FIG. By outputting a signal from the second output IC to the test terminal buffer, a signal indicating the display content of the ball entry state display device is output from the test terminal TS. Therefore, for example, when the CPUMC of the main control board M is performing the setting change process, a signal indicating the display content of the ball entry state display device is output if the specification does not perform the predetermined test signal output process. I have not. (In the first place, since the display of the ball entry state display device is not performed during the setting change in the present embodiment, there is no effect depending on whether or not the processing is performed).

Fourteenth Embodiment
<< Configuration of Memory Map >>
Next, referring to FIG. 154, the configuration of part of the memory map in the RAM of the main control board M applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment (particularly the fifth embodiment) will be described in detail as the fourteenth embodiment. Describe. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) “set value data”: an area for storing information on set values (data of numbers for managing set values, etc.), (2) “external Signal-related data: An area for storing information related to external signal output, (3) "RAM checksum data": data used in checksum calculation processing executed at power on, and at power off An area for storing data calculated from data stored in the RAM, and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, “0”) in a checksum calculation process executed at power on, 4) "Control command buffer": An area for storing command information to be sent to the sub control board side. (5) "Stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when power is restored. Therefore, the area for storing the data stored in the current stack pointer when the power is turned off, and the information stored in the stack pointer when the power is restored, (6) "unused area": not used for gaming Areas for storing areas (7) "save data 1 to save data 8": The areas are ordered in the order in which the data to be saved is likely to be maximally written in design by the CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc. It is used. In such a configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer in design is "7FF8H", but if an unexpected failure (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, the higher address than "7FF8H" There is a possibility that the stack pointer may indicate the address of. In that case, there is a possibility that save data is stored beyond the area of “save data 1 to save data 8” secured as an area of data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, there is no influence on the progress of the game to an address (address close to “7FF8H”) which may be indicated by the stack pointer when the unforeseen failure occurs (less influence is given) It is preferred to be configured to store data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "set value data" at an address at least one address away from "save data 1 to save data 8" secured as an area of data to be saved in advance, the game It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not bring a disadvantage not only to the player but also to the game arcade. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data which is not used in a situation where a game is in progress after the power is restored, and (4) in the "control command buffer". Even if a command can not be sent to the side of the sub control board S, it is difficult to affect the progress of the game, and (3) "RAM checksum data" is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored (2) “external signal data” is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, and therefore, is data that has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "set value data" is information on set values that affect the outcome of the game, and for example, if it is cleared to zero, it is significantly disadvantageous to the player such as a lottery not properly executed. Will occur. As described above, (1) "set value data" is important data for the normal progression of the game. For such reasons, in (1) to (7) in the same figure, (1) "set value data" is the highest data (data stored in the upper address). In other words, at addresses between (1) “set value data” and (7) “save data 1 to save data 8”, (2) “external signal data”, (3) “RAM checksum data , (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "unused area" are stored. (2) "External signal data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", and (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses for storing the five data is changed, for example, even if the upper addresses are stored in the order of “(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)” It may be stored in the order of “(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)” from the upper address. Also, (6) the "unused area" may not be provided.

The following data may be stored in the area for storing “set value data” shown in FIG. 154, in other words, the area of (1) in FIG.
(A) Total score data: Data indicating the total score (B) Entry number counter to the large winning opening during the round execution: Determine whether the condition (the entry number) that will end the round is satisfied (C) data related to the gaming state: data indicating the current gaming state In addition, the above (A) to (C) and the "set value data" can be stored plurally (stored in different addresses) It may be configured to store only one of them. When a plurality of data can be stored, any of the plurality of data is stored (provided with an area for storing) at an address higher than the area of (2) to (7) in FIG. It is preferred to be configured to By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the game arcade. Furthermore, if the address is higher than at least the area of (6), the top address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" in design, but an unexpected failure (such as unexpected disconnection) has occurred. Although there is a possibility that the stack pointer may indicate an address higher than "7FF8H" in this case, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which does not give a disadvantage to the player or the game arcade.

  The setting value data is held in the area for storing the above-mentioned "setting value data" (the area of (1) shown in FIG. 154) even when the power is cut off by the backup power supply. . A backup power supply for holding the “setting value data” can be provided on the power supply unit E or on a relay board provided between the power supply unit E and the main control board M. The backup power supply for holding the “setting value data” is a substrate having a CPU such as the main control substrate M, the sub control substrate S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and the prize ball payout control substrate KH. Is not installed. With this configuration, when the control board storing the set value data is replaced, the set value data is always cleared, and unauthorized exchange of the control board can be suppressed. Of course, only the area storing the setting data can be backed up by the backup power source.

  Here, it is also preferable to back up an area storing setting value data and another area, or a RAM storing setting value data and another RAM using different backup power supplies. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the storage reliability of important set value data.

(Fifteenth embodiment)
In the above-described embodiment, as the termination condition of the probability variation gaming state, the case of termination by winning a big hit and the case of termination by the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol after the big hit are illustrated. The termination condition of the probability fluctuation gaming state applicable to the gaming machine is not limited to the configuration described above. Therefore, a configuration having an end condition of the probability variation gaming state different from the configuration described above will be described in detail below as the fifteenth embodiment, and only differences from this embodiment will be described.

  First, FIG. 155 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) or (2) in FIG. 24 in the fifteenth embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is steps 1448-1 (fifteenth) to step 1448-4 (fifteenth), that is, after performing the reserve digest at step 1406, the process at step 1448-1 (fifteenth) The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1448-1 (fifteenth), in step 1448-2 (fifteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/50) Execute a lottery to see if the state ends. Next, in step 1448-3 (fifteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a probability change fall lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1448-3 (fifteenth), in step 1448-4 (fifteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and shifts to step 1410-1. Even when the result of the step 1448-1 (fifteenth) or the step 1448-3 (fifteenth) is No, the process proceeds to the step 1410-1.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends in the same manner as this embodiment, the probability variation according to the number of times of main game symbol variation Under the condition where the gaming state is not ended, the probability changing fall lottery is executed every fluctuation of the main game symbol executed in the probability changing gaming state (timing immediately before the execution of the winning lottery), and the probability changing fall lottery is won In this case, by configuring the probability fluctuation gaming state to end (transition from the probability fluctuation gaming state to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state), the player pays attention to when the probability fluctuation gaming state ends, probability It is possible to improve the interest of symbol variation of the main gaming symbol in the variation gaming state.

(Modification 1 from the fifteenth embodiment)
In the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the probability change fall lottery is illustrated as the termination condition of the probability variation gaming state, but the aspect of the probability change fall lottery is not limited to that of the fifteenth embodiment . Therefore, the configuration of a gaming machine capable of executing a probability change fall lottery different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described in detail as only a change from the fifteenth embodiment as a first modification of the fifteenth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 156 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 24 in the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment. The points of change with the fifteenth embodiment are step 1448-5 (fifteenth variant 1) and step 1448-6 (fifteenth variant 1), that is, the main game probability change flag is at step 1448-1 (fifteenth). If it is determined that the setting is ON, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the current setting value in step 1448-5 (fifteenth modification 1) (in the fifteenth embodiment, the above-described in the sixth embodiment etc. Setting values are set, and any one of three setting values of setting 1 to setting 3 is set). Next, in step 1448-6 (fifteenth variable 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a probability change fall lottery with a probability based on the set value, and shifts to step 1448-3 (fifteenth). In the first modification of the fifteenth embodiment, the probability of winning the probability change lottery is different depending on the set value, and the probability of selection of the probability change lottery is set to 1: 1/109, setting 2: 1/104, setting 3: 1/99.

  Next, FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the configuration of a table on the main game side (main game table 1 to main game table 3). The point of change from the fifteenth embodiment is the table for winning lottery which is the main gaming table 1, and the big hit winning probability according to the set value set in any of the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side Are configured to be able to differ. Specifically, the winning probability of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is set as setting 1: 200/65536, setting 2: 210/65536, setting 3: 220/65536, and the probability of winning the probability fluctuation gaming state is Setting 1: 600/65536, setting 2: 630/65536, setting 3: 660/65536 are provided.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state can be different for each set value, and the higher the set value, The jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is configured to be higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1). On the other hand, the winning rate of the random change lottery is higher as the set value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1), and the probability change gaming state ends earlier if the winning ratio of the random change lottery is higher. Because it is easy, the higher the setting value, the easier it is for the probability variation gaming state to be finished earlier. By configuring in this manner, in the gaming machine set to a relatively high set value such as setting 3, the probability fluctuation gaming state is easily ended early, because it is easy to win a big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state, It is possible to configure a fair gaming machine in which the expectation value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous to the player is unlikely to be different for each setting.

In addition, an expected value that can be won by a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, in other words, the probability that it is possible to win a big hit by the end of the probability variation gaming state may be configured identically with all set values, in case of,
Big hit probability in probability fluctuation game state of setting 1: 1 / A
Big hit probability in probability fluctuation game state of setting 2: 1 / B
Big hit probability in probability fluctuation game state of setting 3: 1 / C
Winning probability of setting 1 random change lottery: 1 / X
Winning probability of setting 2 random change lottery: 1 / Y
Winning probability of setting 3 random change lottery: 1 / Z
If you
1- {1- (1 / X-1)} ^A = 1- {1- (1 / Y-1)} ^B = 1- {1- (1 / Z-1)} ^C
By configuring as described above, the probability of being able to win a big hit before the probability variation gaming state ends becomes the same for all setting values.

(Modification 2 from the fifteenth embodiment)
In the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment, by configuring the winning probability of the probability change fall lottery to be different for each set value, the expected value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous for the player is set for each setting. Such a configuration is applicable to a gaming machine which is configured to be difficult to differ, but does not have a random change lottery. Therefore, such a configuration will be described in detail below as only a modification of the fifteenth embodiment, as a modification 2 of the fifteenth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 28 in the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment. First, at step 1698-1 (fifteenth variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the current setting value. Next, at step 1698-2 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current setting value is setting 1. If Yes in step 1698-2 (fifteenth variation), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 109 as a predetermined number of times in the probability variation number counter 51c in step 1698-3 (fifteenth variation). Next, in step 1698-4 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1698-5 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 109 times, which is the same as the number set in the probability variation counter MP51c, as the predetermined number of times in the time reduction counter MP52c, step 1698 Shift to -13 (15th variant 2).

  If No in step 1698-2 (15th variant 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1698-6 (15th variant 2) whether the current set value is set 2 or not. judge. If Yes in step 1698-6 (fifteenth variation), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 104 as the predetermined number of times as the predetermined number of times in step 1698-7 (fifteenth variation). Next, in step 1698-8 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, at step 1698-9 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 104 times the same number as the fixed number of times counter MP51c as the predetermined number of times in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Shift to -13 (15th variant 2).

  If No in step 1698-6 (fifteenth variant 2), in other words, if the current set value is setting 3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1698-10 (fifteenth variant) Then, 99 times is set as the predetermined number of times in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, at step 1698-11 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, at step 1698-12 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time reduction counter MP52c 99 times the same as the number set in the probability change counter MP51c as the predetermined number, and step 1698 Shift to -13 (15th variant 2).

  Next, at step 1698-13 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag. Next, at step 1698-14 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary gaming time short flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1601). As described above, in the second modification of the fifteenth embodiment, the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions are configured to be different for each set value, and setting 3 is the smallest number and setting 1 is the largest number. ing. That is, as the set value becomes higher, the number of definite variations and the number of time reductions are reduced.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state can be different for each set value, and the higher the set value, The jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is configured to be higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1). On the other hand, the probability variation number given after the big hit is smaller as the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1), and the setting value is high, the probability fluctuation gaming state is easily finished earlier It is done. By configuring in this way, when it is set to a relatively high set value such as setting 3, etc., it is easy to win a big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state, while the number of probability variations decreases, while the relative one such as setting 1 etc. If it is set to a low setting value, it is difficult to win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, the number of probability variation increases, and the expectation value of the probability variation gaming status advantageous for the player is difficult to be different for each setting. A gaming machine can be configured.

In addition, an expected value that can be won by a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, in other words, the probability that it is possible to win a big hit by the end of the probability variation gaming state may be configured identically with all set values, in case of,
Big hit probability in probability fluctuation game state of setting 1: 1 / A
Big hit probability in probability fluctuation game state of setting 2: 1 / B
Big hit probability in probability fluctuation game state of setting 3: 1 / C
Number of definite variations of setting 1: X
Number of definite variations of setting 2: / Y
Number of definite variations of setting 3: / Z
If you
1- {1- (1 / X)} ^A = 1- {1- (1 / Y)} ^B = 1- {1- (1 / Z)} ^C
By configuring as described above, the probability of being able to win a big hit before the probability variation gaming state ends becomes the same for all setting values.

(Modification 3 from the fifteenth embodiment)
In the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment, by configuring the number of probability variations given after the big hit to be different for each set value, the expected value of the probability variation gaming state advantageous for the player is set. Although the gaming machine which is not easily different from one another is configured, such a configuration is not limited to only the configuration of the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, such a configuration will be described in detail as only a modification of the fifteenth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifteenth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 28 in the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment. The changes from the second modification of the fifteenth embodiment are step 1699-1 (fifteenth modification), step 1699-2 (fifteenth modification) and step 1699-3 (fifteenth), that is, After confirming the current setting value at step 1698-1 (fifteenth variation 2), at step 1699-1 (fifteenth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the probability variation time shorting number determination table (based on the setting value The number of definite variations and the number of time reductions are determined based on the current setting value with reference to a table for determining the number of definite variations and the number of time reductions to be given after the big hit. Next, in step 1699-2 (fifteenth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the determined number of probable variations in the probability variation number counter MP51 c, and shifts to step 1698-4 (fifteenth variation 2) . Next, after turning on the main game probability change flag at step 1698-4 (fifteenth change 2), at step 1699-3 (fifteenth change 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the time reduction counter MP52c. The number of times is set, and the process proceeds to step 1698-13 (15th variant 2).

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a table for determining the number of times of probability variation. As shown in this table, in the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the number of definite variations and the number of time reductions given after the big hit are determined based on the set value, and the number of definite variations and the number of reductions are It is comprised so that it may be determined by lottery from three types of 100 times, 80 times, and 60 times. In addition, the higher the setting value (for example, the setting 3 is higher than setting 1), the smaller the number of definite variations and the shorter number of time can be easily determined (for example, setting 1 is the number of definite variations and While 100 is determined as 400/1000 as the number of hourly reductions, setting 3 is determined as 300/1000 as the number of probability variations and 100 as the number of hourly reductions). That is, the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of average number of probability variations and the number of average number of time intervals. There is no problem in changing the number and the number of selection candidates for the number of definite variations and the number of time-saving selections.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state can be different for each set value, and is provided after the jackpot end. The number of definite variations and the number of time reductions are determined from a plurality of selection candidates. Furthermore, the higher the setting 3, etc., by configuring the selection candidate to be selected (decided) with a relatively small number of probability variations and time reductions given after the big hit as the setting value is higher. When set to a set value, it is easy to win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, while the number of probability variations decreases, while when set to a relatively low set value such as setting 1, the probability variation gaming state Thus, it is possible to configure a fair gaming machine which is hard to win a big hit and the number of probability variation increases, and the expectation value of the probability variation gaming state advantageous for the player is unlikely to be different for each setting.

(Modification 4 from the fifteenth embodiment)
In the second modification of the fifteenth embodiment and the third modification of the fifteenth embodiment, it is advantageous for the player by configuring the number of probability variations given after the big hit to be different for each set value. Although the game machine in which the expected value of the probability change gaming state is difficult to be different for each setting is configured, such a configuration is only for the configuration of the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment and the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment. Is not limited. Thus, such a configuration will be described in detail as only a modification 4 of the fifteenth embodiment, and only the changes from the modification 3 of the fifteenth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 28 in the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment. A change from the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment is step 1699-4 (fifteenth modification), that is, after the main game probability change flag is turned on in step 1698-4 (fifth modification). At step 1699-4 (fifteenth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the time reduction number counter MP52c, and step 1698-13 (fifteenth modification) Migrate to Further, although the fifteenth embodiment is configured to determine the number of probability variations and the number of time intervals given after the big hit end with reference to the probability variation time short determination table, in the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment Is configured to determine only the number of probability variations given after the end of the big hit with reference to the probability variation number determination table. The content of the probability variation determination table is the same as the content corresponding to the probability variation count in the above-described probability variation time / shortness determination table, and therefore the description will be omitted.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state can be made to be different for each set value, and is granted after the jackpot end. The fixed number of times is fixed to a predetermined number (100 times), and the number of probability variations given after the big hit is determined from a plurality of selection candidates. In addition, the predetermined number of times (100 times), which is the number of time reductions given after the big hit, will be the maximum value of the number of probability variations that can be determined, in other words, the time saving gaming state continues even after the probability fluctuation gaming state ends It was configured to get. By configuring in this way, when it is set to a relatively high set value such as setting 3, etc., it is easy to win a big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state, while the number of probability variations decreases, while the relative one such as setting 1 etc. If it is set to a low setting value, it is difficult to win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, the number of probability variation increases, and the expectation value of the probability variation gaming status advantageous for the player is difficult to be different for each setting. A gaming machine can be configured.

  In the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state which will shift after the big hit end, and the non-probability variation game which may shift after the symbol variation for the certain number of times of variation ends. Seeing from the player, the present gaming state is a probability fluctuation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state or a non-probability fluctuation game, in which state and time shortening game state are configured to be similar to the effect mode such as background effect It may be configured to be difficult to determine whether it is in the state and the time reduction gaming state. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of probability variations given after the big hit, so it becomes difficult to determine which one of the current set values is, and the set value is set low for the player. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the game is ended due to recognition of being done. In addition, until the time-saving gaming state ends (in this example, until the symbol fluctuation end after 100 times after the big hit end), the game can be progressed while holding a sense of expectation on how long the probability fluctuation gaming state continues It is possible to provide a more interesting gaming machine.

  In the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state are configured to be the same even when the set values are different. Well, in such a configuration, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to select a selection candidate having a relatively large number of probability variations. In other words, the higher the setting value, the average value of the number of probability variations given after the big hit ends By configuring so as to increase, it may be possible to design a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player by a higher set value.

  In addition, the game configured to determine the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions from the plurality of selection candidates based on the setting value, as described in detail in the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment and the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment In the device, there may be provided the number of probability variations or the number of time savings that can be selected only when being set to a specific set value (for example, setting 3). As an example, in the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment, in the case of setting 1 and setting 2, the number of time reductions given after the big hit end is only 100 times, while in the case of setting value 3 Alternatively, the number of times to be awarded after the big hit may be selected from two types, 100 times and 99 times (for example, selected as “100 times: 99 times = 99: 1”). By configuring in this way, when the time shortening gaming state ends after 99 times of symbol variation execution after the big hit end, the player is that the current setting value is the setting value 3 which is a relatively high setting value. It is possible to recognize and improve the game intention.

  In addition, by adjusting the probability of probability change fall lottery winning probability, the number of probability changes, etc. for each setting value, the configuration of the gaming machine in which the expected value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous for the player is difficult to differ for each setting The game machine may be configured such that the expected value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous to the player is unlikely to be different for each setting by adjusting and combining the above-described elements. Specifically, by appropriately adjusting the probability of winning the jackpot in the probability variation gaming state, the probability of winning the probability variation fall lottery, and the number of probability variations given after the big hit, the expected value of the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player is You may comprise the game machine which is hard to differ for every setting.

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is exemplified in which the big hit is executed after the small hit by the game ball entering a specific area (V winning opening) in the big winning opening during the small hit execution. Such a configuration is not limited to the fourth embodiment. Therefore, during the small hit execution different from the fourth embodiment, the game ball enters a specific area (V winning opening) in the big winning opening, and the big hit is executed after the small hit, by the game ball entering the As an embodiment, only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 161 shows a determination table for main lottery for main lottery (main game table 1) and a determination table for main symbol lottery (main game table 2) in the sixteenth embodiment. The difference from the fourth embodiment is that, on the main gaming table 1, the first main gaming side is not provided with a small hit, and the setting value is referred to when executing the second main gaming side winning lottery It is. Moreover, the difference in the main game table 2 is that the small hit symbol on the second main game side is only "7BK". As shown in the figure, the small hit winning probability is the lowest at setting 1 of "8200/65536" and the highest at setting 3 of "9200/65536".

  Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (sixteenth) in FIG. 28 in the sixteenth embodiment. First, at step 1682-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by the entry into the V winning opening C22 (in the sixteenth embodiment, the small hit) The special game is configured to be executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 during the game). In the case of Yes in step 1682-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1682-2 is a big hit symbol in which the stop symbol is the time saving jackpot symbol (shifting to the time saving gaming state after the end of the special game execution, this example Then, it is determined whether or not 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1682-2, then the process transitions to step 1682-5. Also in the case of No at step 1682-1, the process proceeds to step 1682-5.

  Next, at step 1682-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (two times in this example). Next, in steps 1682-6 and 1682-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process {the process of step 1700 (third process)}. Do. Incidentally, in the case of No at Step 1682-2, in other words, also in the case of the stop symbol being 4A which is a time-speaking big hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of Step 1700 (third)}. In the sixteenth embodiment, the second main game side has a maximum holding number of four, and the number of times the variation of the second main game symbol can be executed in the time-saving gaming state after the big hit is It is 4 times = 6 times which is the holding upper limit number of 2 times + 2nd main game side which is. In addition, small hit winning probability of the 2nd main game side has become 8200/65536 (setting 1)-9200/65536 (setting 3), whether or not it is possible to win a small hit by six times of symbol fluctuation It has become a game. In addition, the small hit symbol of the 2nd main game side is only “7 BK”, the small hit according to “7 BK” continues to shoot the game ball to the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit execution, Entry to the V winning opening C22 becomes almost definite, and after the big hit ending with “7 BK”, it shifts to the time shortening gaming state, so “the second main in the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ending It is constituted so that it will be elected 小 in the small hit of the game side.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment, the gaming machine continues to run in a row by winning a small hit on the second main gaming side in the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends. It is possible to design a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player as the set value is higher, by configuring the second main game side to have a higher winning rate for the second main game side as the set value is higher. .

<< Elements that can be differentiated by setting values >>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the small hit winning probability may be different depending on the set value. However, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the following elements may differ depending on the set value. In addition, only one element listed below may be applied, or a plurality of elements may be combined and applied.
(1) Big hit probability (big hit winning probability)
(2) Small hit probability (small hit winning probability)
(3) The winning probability of the auxiliary gaming symbol (the selection probability of the auxiliary gaming stop symbol that the ordinary electric character will operate)
(4) The opening time of the ordinary electric character (for example, the second main game start opening electric character B11d) may be open time (time from opening to closing once, or the auxiliary game that the ordinary electric character is to operate It may be the sum of the opening times of the ordinary motorized symbol when the symbol is single
(5) Selection mode of the big hit design (content of the table that determines the big hit design, random number distribution)
(6) Selection mode of small hit symbols (table contents to determine small hit symbols, random number distribution)
(7) The number of rounds at the time of big hit (The number of rounds in one big hit may be used, or the average value of the number of rounds for all big hits)
(8) Number of winning balls in a predetermined winning opening (9) Number of probability variations (10) Time reduction number (11) Probability of winning the lottery

  In addition, as described above, when configured as a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values, the setting value can be displayed on the display device controlled by the main control board M by providing the setting value display device on the front of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the player may be able to confirm the current setting value. In such a configuration, the administrator of the game arcade notifies the setting value, thereby enabling the player to select different specifications for each game arcade to play the game, and to allow the operation of the game arcade to have a width. Can. Note that, as a configuration that allows the player to confirm the setting value, the setting value may be configured to be displayable on a display device (for example, effect display device SG) controlled by the sub control board S.

In the case where the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with an element that can differ depending on the setting value, for example, it has three setting values of setting 1, setting 2 and setting 3 as setting values, When the probability is configured to be different, it may be configured to have a table having the same content for each set value, even for elements that do not differ depending on the set value. As a specific example,
(1) As a lottery table of the big hit symbol (for example, a table referred to at the time of the big hit in the main game table 2), it has three of the table for setting 1 of the same contents, the table for setting 2 and the table for setting 3 To configure.
(2) A table for setting 1 having the same contents, a table for setting 2 and a table for setting 3 as a lottery table for small hitting symbols (for example, a table to be referred to when making a small hit on the main gaming table 2) To have
(3) For the setting 1 of the same contents as a lottery table for determination of the fluctuation time which is the same gaming state and the same success or failure lottery result (for example, a lottery table for fluctuation mode determination referred to at the time of the short game state and big hit) It is configured to have three, a table, a table for setting 2 and a table for setting 3.
You may comprise as mentioned above. In addition, as a configuration in which one of the elements in the gaming machine may differ depending on the set value, all of the set values are the same, and all other set values are different. It may be configured to have a table at each set value. As an example, even for a gaming machine designed such that the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is “setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/300, setting 3: 1/290”, for setting 1 Configured to have three tables: a winning lottery table in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, a winning lottery table in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state for setting 2, and a winning lottery table in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state for setting 3 May be By configuring as such, when adjusting the design value of the gaming machine, etc., the content of the table is the same even if the setting value is different, and the content of the table may be different if the setting value is different. Even when changing to, it is possible to design simply without having to restructure complicated processing.

(Modification of the sixteenth embodiment)
In the sixteenth embodiment, the gaming machine has been illustrated in which various values are changed according to the set value, but in a similar game mode, even if only the probability of big hit is changed according to the set value, the big hit probability or small hit By setting conditions of probability, it is possible to create game characteristics different from conventional ones. Therefore, as a modification of the sixteenth embodiment, an outline of the setting condition of each storage number and the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, FIG. 187 is a game board surface view in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, FIG. 188 is an explanatory view showing the number of hits per set value in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game machine in the modification of a form. In FIG. 187, the same symbols are used for configurations having the same functions as the fourth embodiment or the sixteenth embodiment, and the detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 187, in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 is formed inside the center decoration D38, and compared to the fourth embodiment etc., the first main game start opening A10. It has a configuration in which it is difficult for the ball to hit the ball. Also, unlike the fourth embodiment, the second main game start opening B10 is structured so that it does not win unless the second main game start opening electric combination B11d (see the fourth embodiment) is operated and the opening of the start opening is enlarged. It has become. Furthermore, it is comprised so that a big hit game and a small hit game may be implement | achieved using one big winning opening which has a structure similar to the 2nd big winning opening provided with the specific area inside in 4th Embodiment.

  Moreover, in the modification of 16th Embodiment, as shown in FIG. 188, although it has a setting function which can change a setting value, the probability fluctuation function which fluctuates the hit probability of a special symbol is not mounted, In addition, with regard to the probability that the special symbol will make a big hit, an extremely high probability is set as compared with the sixteenth embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, in the lottery for the first main game and the second main game, the range (acquisition range) of the success or failure random numbers is set to 1 to 5, and the number (value) of the big hit is In case of setting 1, "1", in case of setting 2, "1" and "2", and in case of setting 3, "1", "2" and "3" are set. Also, although small hits are provided as gaming machines, the first main gaming side is not provided with a small hit number, regardless of the setting value as a small hit number for only the second main game side. "4" "5" is provided.

  Thus, in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, although the jackpot probability is not changed according to the gaming state, the jackpot probability for each setting value is set to 1: 1/5, set to 2: 2/5, and set to 3: It is 3/5, and the probability of the small hitting provided only on the second main game side is set to 2/5.

  In the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the gaming board configured as described above and the game are executed under the probability of hitting, but in the following, the flow of the game progress will be described in detail using FIG. 189. explain. In the normal gaming state, first, the player aims at the inflow of the gaming ball of the center decoration D 38 and adjusts the strength of the hitting ball (“A” in FIG. 189). Then, when the gaming ball having flowed into the center decoration D38 (center role) wins the first main game start port A10 ("ro" in FIG. 189), a lottery for judging the first main gaming symbol is performed, and the first main game is performed. The effect and the decoration pattern related to the lottery result of the game pattern are displayed in the display area (the decoration pattern display area SG11 etc.) of the effect display device SG, and the decoration pattern corresponding to the result of the acceptance lottery is controlled to be stopped. Ru.

  As a result of the lottery of the first main gaming symbol mentioned above, when the first main gaming symbol (and the decorative symbol) is hit and stopped and displayed in the hitting mode ("H" in Fig. 189), the big winning opening (the second large) By opening the winning opening C20), a big hit game for giving a profit to the player is performed ("D" in FIG. 189). Here, in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, after the end of the big hit game performed when the first main game symbol (and the decoration symbol) is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the second main game start opening electric motor is unconditionally It shifts to the electric support game (time saving game) where possibility of the entrance B of the starting opening expanding by operating the item B 11d is extremely high. In addition, the power support game (time short game) is continued until the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) change 100 times or a big hit game occurs.

  When you pass through the auxiliary game start port H10 (normal symbol operation gate) in the power support game state, the variation of the normal symbol is performed, and when the normal symbol stops in the hitting mode, the second main game start opening electric motor B11d is activated and the start opening The entrance of the center is enlarged ("H" and "H" in Fig. 189). If the second main game start opening B10 is hit when the second main game start opening electric motor B11d is activated and the entrance of the start opening is expanded (“T” in FIG. 189), the second main game The lottery result of the symbol is performed, and the effect and the decoration symbol related to the lottery result of the second main game symbol are displayed in the display area (decorative symbol display area SG11 etc.) of the effect display device SG and the result of the lottery Control is performed so that the corresponding decorative pattern is stopped.

  As a result of the lottery of the second main game symbol mentioned above, when the second main game symbol (and the decoration symbol) is hit and stopped and displayed in the hitting mode ("chi" lower figure in Fig. 189), the big winning opening (the second) By opening the big winning opening C20), a big hit game for giving a profit to the player is performed (the lower part of "nu" in FIG. 189). Here, in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, after the end of the big hit game performed when the second main game symbol (and the decoration symbol) is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the second main game start opening electric motor is unconditionally B11d is activated to shift to the normal gaming state where the possibility that the opening of the starting opening expands is extremely low or zero.

  On the other hand, when the second main gaming symbol (and the decorative symbol) is hit and stopped and displayed in the hit mode ("chi" in FIG. 189) as a result of the success or failure lottery of the second main gaming symbol ("chi" in FIG. 189) A small hit game in which the large winning opening C20) is opened for a predetermined time is performed, and a big hit game is performed when a hitting ball flows into a specific area C22 in the large winning opening (second large winning opening C20) during the small hitting game (see FIG. 189 "nu"). Here, in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the second main game symbol (and the decoration symbol) is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, and the line is based on the game ball flowing into the specific area C22 during the small hit game. After the end of the big hit game being played, the second main game start port electric motor B11d is operated unconditionally, and there is a high possibility that the entrance of the start port is expanded. In addition, as a result of the success or failure lottery of the 2nd main game symbol, when it comes off and the 2nd main game symbol (and the decoration symbol) comes off and it is stopped and displayed in the aspect ("chi" upper row of Figure 189) Subtract 1 from the remaining number.

  In the modification of the sixteenth embodiment configured as described above, the jackpot probability is set to a relatively high probability, but the ratio is largely different depending on the setting. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, when the setting value is 1, the probability of becoming a big hit is 1/5, which is lower than other settings, but after a big hit has occurred based on the first main game, The rate at which a big hit occurs based on the second main game, which is a substantial ending condition of the power support game, is also as low as 1/5, and based on the second main game symbol of the second main game becoming a small hit mode The rate of occurrence of big hit is set as high as 2/5. For this reason, rather than a big hit occurs based on the 2nd main game pattern of the 2nd main game becoming a big hit aspect, the big hit based on the 2nd main gaming pattern of the 2nd main game becoming a small hit aspect In the case of setting 1, the continuation rate of the electric support game becomes high due to the fact that the rate of occurrence of is high.

  Also, in the normal gaming state, when the setting value is 3, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than other settings with 3/5, but after a big hit occurs based on the first main game, The ratio of big hit occurrence based on the 2nd main game which is a substantial ending condition of sapo game is also high as 3/5, and the 2nd main game pattern of the 2nd main game is a big hit based on becoming a small hit aspect The rate of occurrence of is set to 2/5. For this reason, rather than a big hit occurs based on the 2nd main game pattern of the 2nd main game becoming a big hit aspect, the big hit based on the 2nd main gaming pattern of the 2nd main game becoming a small hit aspect In the case of setting 3, the continuation rate of the power support game is higher than that of setting 1 because the rate of occurrence of is low.

  As described above, in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, although the jackpot probability is constant regardless of the gaming state, the probability that the jackpot is substantially generated during the normal game is lowest in setting 1 and the setting 3 is the highest. Although the setting is high, the continuation rate after transition to the power support game is the highest in setting 1 and the lowest in setting 3. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having different game characteristics for each setting by changing only one parameter of the jackpot probability according to the setting value, without changing the other parameters.

  Note that various game machines can be provided without setting the jackpot probability extremely high as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, another mode of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In another form of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 190, in the first main game and the second main game lottery, the range of success or failure random numbers is set to 0 to 999, and the number of jackpots that will be a big hit (Value) is set to "1" to "10" in the case of setting 1, "1" to "12" in the case of setting 2, and "1" to "14" in the case of setting 3. ing. Also, although small hits are provided as gaming machines, the first main gaming side is not provided with a small hit number, regardless of the setting value as a small hit number for only the second main game side. “800” to “999” are set.

  As described above, although the jackpot probability is not changed according to the gaming state as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability for each setting value is set to 1: 10/1000, setting 2: 12/1000, setting 3 It is 14/1000, and the probability of small hitting provided only on the 2nd main game side is set to 20/1000, and it becomes a value close to the big hit probability of the so-called game console ing.

  On the other hand, also in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game performed when the first main gaming symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in the hitting manner, the second main game starting opening motor B11d is activated and started unconditionally Although it is common in that it shifts to the power support game (time reduction game) where the possibility of the mouth entrance expanding is extremely high, it is an end condition of the power support game (time reduction game) unlike the modification of the sixteenth embodiment. The number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol (first main gaming symbol, second main gaming symbol) is different depending on the hitting pattern aspect (symbols a to e) of the first main gaming symbol. Specifically, when the symbol a is displayed, the main gaming symbol (first main gaming symbol, second main gaming symbol) changes 20 times, and when the symbol b is displayed, the symbol 40 times, the symbol When c is displayed, it is set to 60 times, when symbol d is displayed, it is set to 80 times, and when symbol e is displayed, it is set to 100 times.

  On the above premise, if a hit is won in the second main game start port B10 in the power support game state, a lottery for judging the second main game symbol is performed as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, and the second main game symbol The effect and the decorative symbol related to the lottery result are displayed in the display area (the decorative symbol display area SG11 and the like) of the effect display device SG, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the acceptance lottery is controlled to stop.

  Here, a modification of the sixteenth embodiment after the end of the big hit game which is performed when the second main game symbol (and the decorative symbol) is hit and stopped and displayed in a hit mode as a result of the lottery result of the second main game symbol As in the example, the second main game start opening electric motor B11d operates unconditionally, and the possibility that the opening of the start opening is expanded is extremely low or it shifts to the normal gaming state where it becomes zero.

  On the other hand, when the second main gaming symbol (and the decorative symbol) is hit and stopped and displayed as a result of the winning lottery of the second main gaming symbol, the special winning opening (second large winning opening C20) is a predetermined time A small hit game to be opened is performed, and a big hit game is performed when a hitting ball flows into a specific area C22 in the large winning opening (second large winning opening C20) during the small hit game. Here, the percentage of hitting in the specific area C22 during the small hitting game is lower in this embodiment than in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment (the modification of the sixteenth embodiment is approximately 20% in the present embodiment as opposed to about 100%). %) And the probability that the big hit game will be executed when the small hit mode is displayed is set to about 1/20 in setting 1. In this mode also, the second main game symbol (and the decoration symbol) is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, and after the end of the big hit game played based on the flow of the game ball into the specific area C22 during the small hit game Is transferred unconditionally to the power support game (time saving game) in which the second main game starting opening electric motor B11d is activated to increase the possibility of the opening of the starting opening expanding.

  However, in the present aspect, as with the end of the big hit game performed when the first main game symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the main condition that is the termination condition of the power support game (time saving game) The number of times of variation of the game symbol (the first main game symbol, the second main game symbol) is different depending on the hit symbol aspect (the symbols f to j) of the second main game symbol. Specifically, when the symbol f is displayed, the main gaming symbol (first main gaming symbol, second main gaming symbol) changes 20 times, and when the symbol g is displayed, the symbol 40 times, the symbol When h is displayed, it is set 60 times, when symbol i is displayed 80 times, and when symbol j is displayed, it is set 100 times.

In this aspect (another aspect of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment) configured in this manner, the main gaming conditions differ depending on the type of the small hitting symbol, in addition to the non-winning of the big hit, the ending condition after shifting to the power support game. It is determined by a plurality of parameters such as the number of times of variation of symbols. For this reason,
Similar to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, not only can the different playability be realized depending on the set value, but also the continuation condition of the power support game becomes diverse, so the termination or continuation of the power support game state exemplified by the other embodiments. It is possible to provide a novel gaming machine in combination with the suggestive effect of the condition.

(Seventeenth embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of setting values are provided, and a configuration in which an arbitrary setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values is exemplified. However, the configuration in which the setting values can be set is the sixth embodiment. It is not limited to the configuration of. Therefore, as the seventeenth embodiment, only the differences from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail as the seventeenth embodiment regarding the configuration regarding the setting values different from the sixth embodiment (such as processing related to setting change).

  First, FIG. 163 is a functional block diagram according to the main control unit and the sub control unit in the seventeenth embodiment. The main control portion in the seventeenth embodiment is provided with a setting change device capable of transmitting and receiving signals with the CPU MC. In this example, the setting change device can detect ON / OFF, and can change to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (sometimes referred to as a setting display mode), a setting key switch, and a setting value. It comprises a setting change button that enables changing of selection candidates for setting values when changing, and a setting value display that can display setting values that have been set and selection candidates for setting values.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment, a setting key switch signal and a setting change button corresponding to on / off of the setting key switch of the setting change device are provided in the CPUMC of the main control unit (in the main control board M). A setting display output for displaying information relating to setting values output from the CPU MC of the main control unit (in the main control board M) is configured to be able to input a setting change button signal indicating that it has been operated An LED drive signal may be input to the setting change device). Further, as described above, the CPU MC of the main control unit (in the main control board M) can transmit the display instruction related information and the payout operation related information to the CPU SC of the sub main control unit SM.

  Next, as in the other embodiments described above, the sub-control unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment mainly includes a sub-main control unit SM that performs overall control related to effect, and an effect display device A sub-sub control unit SS which performs image control processing by SG or the like, an RTC (real time clock) capable of measuring the current time regardless of whether or not the power is supplied, and the like are provided. In addition, the sub main control unit SM in the seventeenth embodiment is a command analysis unit for analyzing a command received from the main control unit (main control board M etc.), and information for managing (storing) various information such as abnormality information. A management unit, an effect control unit for controlling an effect, and a time control unit for grasping the current time kept by the above-mentioned RTC (real time clock) and controlling the RTC are provided. Further, as in the other embodiments, the sub-sub control unit SS and the sub main control unit SM are configured to be able to mutually transmit and receive display control related information (for example, effect pattern command, display request command, acknowledge information, etc.). Current time information etc. can be transmitted from the RTC to the sub main control unit SM, and the current time information of the RTC is adjusted from the sub main control unit SM to the RTC (error between current time information and actual current time) And so on can be transmitted.

  The effect control unit in the seventeenth embodiment has an RTC effect control unit capable of controlling an effect based on current time information (information related to the current time) grasped by the time keeping control unit, although details will be described later, and current time information And a normal effect control unit capable of controlling an effect not using. The clock control unit controls an RTC (real-time clock), and an RTC control unit that can extract time information from the RTC, and a timer that measures an elapsed time from power on or a predetermined measurement start (for example, power on From a power-on timer for measuring the elapsed time after that, a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the end of the last big hit, a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the end of the player's firing operation, etc.) The timer control unit further includes a timer unit, and performs time control of time information for determining the presence or absence of so-called RTC effect and the contents of the effect based on information of the RTC control unit and the timer unit. In addition, the information management unit includes a setting information management unit for managing information related to setting values, and an abnormality information management unit for managing information related to abnormalities and frauds of the gaming machine such as errors and fraud detection related to winning balls. An open information management unit for managing that the openable and closable members such as the glass door D18 and the front frame D14 are open, and the time to extract the generation time of these information or to execute the calculation of time information And an arithmetic unit.

  Next, processing performed by the main control board M according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described using FIG. 164 to FIG. 166 in addition to FIG. 124 (a) of the sixth embodiment and processing unique to the seventeenth embodiment. Here, FIG. 164 shows the flow of setting change processing (step 1003) executed in the main processing on the main control board side (main processing on the main control board side of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 124 (a)). It is the flowchart shown. The other processes in the main process on the main control board side in the seventeenth embodiment are substantially the same as those in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Also in the seventeenth embodiment, when the power is turned on, the main process on the main control board side is the same as the sixth embodiment whether the setting key switch is off or not at step 1001 in FIG. If it is determined that the mode should be shifted to setting change etc. and the setting key switch is not off (if the setting key switch is on and the mode should be shifted to setting change etc.), as shown in FIG. Setting change processing (a subroutine of FIG. 164) according to the seventeenth embodiment corresponding to step 1003 of.

  At step 1003-14 in FIG. 164, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a RAM check process of the setting value storage area in the main control board M. Next, in step 1003-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the set value information is normal (1 to 6 in this example) with reference to the processing result of step 1003-14. Do. If Yes in step 1003-15, the process proceeds to step 1003-18. On the other hand, if No in step 1003-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1003-16 that the setting value information is abnormal, so the default value for the setting value information (in the present example, the largest hit probability) 1) which is the low setting value of the sub-control board, and in step 1003-17, the sub-control board is the setting value forced setting information (information indicating that the setting value information is set to the default value because the setting value information is abnormal). After the process of transmitting to the S side is executed, the process proceeds to step 1003-18.

  As described above, when the setting value information is abnormal, the setting value information which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player is set as the setting value information, whereby a setting value not intended by the game arcade manager (for example, the player By setting 6) which is the most advantageous setting value, it is possible to prevent the game arcade side from being subjected to unintended disadvantages. In addition, the fact that the setting value has been forcibly changed to the default value can be clearly indicated by the effect display device, the game effect lamp, the speaker or the like through the sub control board S. In this example, setting value information = 1 corresponding to setting 1 and setting value information = 2 corresponding to setting 2 are configured, but the setting value to be set and the setting value information are the same value. The setting value information corresponding to setting 1 = 0, the setting value information corresponding to setting 2 = 1, the setting value information corresponding to setting 3 = 2, and the setting value information corresponding to setting 4 Even if management is performed so that the setting value information becomes 1 smaller than the actual setting value, such as setting value information = 4 corresponding to setting 5 = 4 and setting value information corresponding to setting 6 = 5. Well, by configuring in this way, it is possible to execute initialization of the RAM, such as when setting a default value in the setting value information, and to perform correction processing to return to “1” when the setting value information becomes “0”. It becomes unnecessary, and processing time can be shortened and processing capacity can be reduced. It is also preferable to set an intermediate value “3” or “4” as a default value, in consideration of the profit balance between the player and the game arcade at the abnormal time.

  Next, in step 1003-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs the LED drive signal corresponding to the setting value information (setting value) to the setting change device (setting value display device) to the setting value display device. Display the set value. Next, in step 1003-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value information change operation (an operation for changing the setting value information, for example, the operation of the setting change button) has been performed. judge. The setting value information change operation applicable to this example will be described later. If Yes in step 1003-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value information in step 1003-20. Next, in step 1003-21, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the set value information exceeds the upper limit (6 in this example). If Yes in step 1003-21, in step 1003-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 1 as current setting value information, and the process shifts to step 1003-23. That is, in the present example, each time the setting value information change operation is performed, for example, whenever the setting change button is operated, the setting value information is “1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → It is comprised so that it may be changed like "2 ...". Even in the case of No in step 1003-19 or step 1003-21, the processing shifts to step 1003-23.

  Next, in step 1003-23, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting change (setting change mode) is completed. In addition, as an example of determining that the setting change mode has ended, the setting key switch can be exemplified as turning on and off. The setting change mode end operation applicable to this example will be described later. In the case of No at step 1003-23, the processing of step 1003-18 and subsequent steps will be repeatedly executed until the setting change is completed. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1003-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the setting value display displayed on the setting value display device in step 1003-24, and executes the next process (step 1004). Transition to processing). The situation in which the setting change process is being performed (in particular, the situation in which the process of steps 1003-14 to 1003-23 is being performed) may be referred to as a setting change mode or in a setting change mode. Here, in the seventeenth embodiment, since the ending condition of the setting change mode is set as "setting change completion", the game processing is not performed essentially staying in the setting change mode semi-permanently unless the condition is satisfied. It becomes. For this reason, when a predetermined period related to the operation time has passed, such as when continuing to stay in the setting change mode (for example, 5 minutes) despite the fact that the time required for the normal setting change has significantly exceeded A process of controlling the notification means to notify or a process of transmitting a command for notification to the sub control board may be provided.

  Next, the flow of timer interrupt processing in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the entire timer interrupt processing in the seventeenth embodiment. The main difference between the timer interrupt process and the sixth embodiment is that the process of step 3800 (the seventeenth) is executed at the beginning of the timer interrupt process, and the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a scheduled interrupt timing. Based on the interrupt request generated in the event of reaching the condition (b), the input determination process described later is performed in step 3700 (17th), and the process moves to step 1000-1. The processes other than the above-described input determination process are the same as those in the other embodiments including the sixth embodiment, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the input determination process of the step 3800 (the seventeenth) performed in the timer interrupt process of the seventeenth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the input determination process according to the subroutine of step 3800 (the seventeenth) of FIG. 164 in the seventeenth embodiment. First, at step 3802, the CPU MC of the main control board M receives from the prize ball delivery control board KH side prior to this processing, and reads (command analysis) input information stored in the storage area as appropriate. Next, in step 3804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the prize ball excess payout abnormality (the gaming ball exceeding the gaming ball originally paid out has been dispensed based on the input information read in step 3802). It is determined whether or not an error that occurs, which may be referred to as an overpayment error, has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3804 (if the prize ball is not abnormal in over payout), in step 3806, no over payout information (information indicating that the prize ball over payout abnormality has not occurred) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3810. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3804 (when the prize ball over-delivery abnormality is occurring), the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 3808 displays the over-delivery abnormality information (a fact that the prize ball over-payment abnormality is occurring Information) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3810.

  Next, in step 3810, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a winning ball device abnormality (a driving error of the winning ball device and may be referred to as a winning ball device error) has occurred. . If Yes in step 3810 (if the winning ball device is not abnormal), in step 3812, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets winning ball device normal information (information that the winning ball device abnormality is not generated), Control goes to step 3816. On the other hand, if No in step 3810 (if a winning ball device abnormality has occurred), in step 3814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the winning ball device abnormality information (a winning ball device abnormality has occurred). Information) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3816. Next, in step 3816, the CPUMC of the main control board M has an out-of-ball condition (an error that occurs when it is determined that the game ball that is not an error in the winning device is not properly paid out). In step 3816, if it is determined that the ball breakage is not abnormal, it is determined in step 3818 that the ball supply information (information indicating that the ball breakage abnormality has not occurred, non-ball breakage state) Is set, and the process moves to step 3822. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3818 (when there is a ball breakage abnormality) at step 3820, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets ball breakage information (information indicating that the ball breakage abnormality is occurring). , Shift to step 3822.

  Next, in step 3822, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects a game ball detected by a sensor for detecting a ball dish full tank because a large number of game balls are stored in the lower ball dish D 22. It is determined whether it is an error that occurs in some cases, and it may be referred to as a tray full error). If Yes in step 3822 (if not full bowl), in step 3824, full bowl non-full tank information (information indicating that full bowl is not generated) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3828. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3822 (when a tray full error has occurred), at step 3826, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives full bowl information (information indicating that full bowl has occurred). ), And proceeds to step 3828. Next, in step 3828, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the frame is open (the front frame D14 is open). If Yes in step 3828 (the front frame D14 is not opened), in step 3830, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets front frame closing information (information that the front frame D14 is closed). Proceed to step 3834. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3828 (when the front frame D14 is open), at step 3832, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs front frame open information (information indicating that the front frame D14 is open). Set and go to step 3834.

  Next, in step 3834, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the glass door D18 is not open. If Yes in step 3834 (if the glass door D18 is not open), in step 3836, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets glass door closing information (information that the glass door D18 is closed). , And proceeds to step 3840. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3834 (when the glass door D18 is open), at step 3838, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs glass door open information (information indicating that the glass door D18 is open). Set and go to step 3840. Next, in step 3840, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads input information (a signal for turning on or off the setting key switch) from the setting change device. Next, in step 3842, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the setting key is off, in other words, whether the setting key switch is off. If Yes in step 3842 (if the setting key switch is off), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the setting key off information (information indicating that the setting key switch is off) in step 3842 to proceed to the next It shifts to processing (processing of step 1000-1). Incidentally, after the determination process of the setting key switch in step 3842, the state (on / off) of the setting key switch in the determination process of the setting key switch performed before the determination process may be determined, and such a process By performing “setting key switch turned on from off” or “whether the setting key switch is continuously turned off”, return from the setting change mode or setting display mode described later First, it can be determined whether the setting change mode or the setting display mode has not been entered. In addition, when configured in this way, it may be configured to also set information before the setting key switch is turned off (when the setting key switch is turned on) as the information to be set in step 3842. For example, when the setting is changed in the setting change mode, information indicating that the setting change is performed (information that the setting change is not performed may be set) or the current setting value (changed) It may be configured to set information etc. regarding the subsequent setting value).

  If No in step 3842 (if the setting key switch is on), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets setting key-on information (information indicating that the setting key switch is on) in step 3846. Next, in step 3847, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting change mode is currently in progress. If Yes in step 3847 (in the setting change mode), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information in the setting change mode in step 3848 and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1000-1). . On the other hand, if No in step 3847, in other words, if it is currently in the setting display mode, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information in the setting display mode in step 3849, and the next process (step 1000-1). Move to Also in the seventeenth embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, in the setting display mode, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device (see the description of FIG. 124b if necessary). ). In addition, the information (input information) set by the process of FIG. 165 is transmitted as a control command to the sub control board S in the control command transmission process (see also the sixth embodiment) of step 1999 in FIG. Thus, with such a configuration, it is possible to manage and display input information (information on gaming machines) on the side of the secondary control board S.

  Next, processing on the side of the sub control board S when each information set in the above-described input determination process (FIG. 166) is transmitted to the side of the sub control board S as a control command, using FIGS. Explain. The processing on the side of the sub control substrate S is also mostly similar to the present embodiment and the sixth embodiment, so the characteristic parts different from those in the embodiment will be described in detail and in the same category. Descriptions of certain parts will be omitted (see FIGS. 48 to 54 if necessary).

  FIG. 167 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. The seventeenth embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment (present embodiment) in the sub main routine (main routine of the sub main control unit). Specifically, in the main routine of the sub main control unit of FIG. 167 (f), after the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the special game related display control processing in step 2900, the history storage is performed in step 2950 (17th). The difference is that the process is executed and the process proceeds to step 2999. The history storage processing in step 2950 (the seventeenth) will be described below using FIG.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart of history storage processing according to the subroutine of step 2950 (the seventeenth) of FIG. 167 in the seventeenth embodiment. First, at step 2952, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads (command analysis) input information (command) from the main control board M side stored at step 2006 of FIG. 167 (e). Next, in step 2954, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the read input information (received command) includes history storage information (whether or not it is a command related to history information), that is, the sub control board When the S side receives, it is determined whether the history information managed on the sub control substrate S side is information that can be newly stored. If Yes in step 2954 (if it is a command including history information or a command related to history information; hereinafter, it is also referred to as a history related command), in step 2956, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives RTC information (also current time information). Read (acquire) information and timekeeping information. Next, in step 2960, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the content of the history related command received this time with reference to the immediately prior excessive non-delivery information or the excessive payout abnormality information grasped from the previous history related command. , It is determined whether or not the extra winning ball state (whether or not the winning ball over-delivery abnormality is abnormal) has changed. In the case of Yes in step 2960 (when the extra winning ball state has not changed), the process moves to step 2964. On the other hand, if No in step 2960 (if the extra award ball state changes), in step 2962, the CPUSC of the sub control board S relates to the change time based on the RTC information and timekeeping information acquired in step 2956 as history information. The information and the received information on the winning prize ball (no over payout information or over payout abnormality information) are stored in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing a history, and the process proceeds to step 2964.

  Next, in step 2964, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the immediately preceding prize ball device normality information or prize ball device abnormality information grasped from the immediately preceding history related command, and the history related command received this time It is determined from the contents of (1) whether or not the winning ball device abnormal state (whether or not the winning ball device is abnormal) has changed. In the case of Yes in step 2964 (when the winning ball device abnormal state has not changed), the process moves to step 2968. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2964 (when the prize ball device abnormal state changes), in step 2966, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the history based on the RTC information acquired in step 2956 and the change time based on the clocking information. And the received status information (a prize ball device normality information or a prize ball device abnormal information) of the prize ball device are stored in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing a history, and the process proceeds to step 2968 Do. Next, in step 2968, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the immediately preceding ball supply presence information or the ball out information grasped from the immediately preceding history related command, and from the content of the history related command received this time, It is determined whether the out-of-ball condition (whether or not the out-of-ball condition is not abnormal) has changed. In the case of Yes in step 2968 (when the out-of-ball state has not changed), the process moves to step 2972. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2968, when the out-of-sphere state changes), at step 2970, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses history information as information on change time based on RTC information and timekeeping information acquired at step 2956 The received out-of-ball information (ball supply presence information or out-of-ball information) is stored in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing a history, and the process proceeds to step 2972.

  Next, in step 2972, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the immediately preceding ball bowl non-full tank information or ball bowl full tank information grasped from the immediately preceding history related command, and the history related command received this time It is determined from the contents of (1) whether or not the state of the bowl has changed. If Yes in step 2972 (if the bowl state has not changed), then the process goes to step 2976. On the other hand, if No in step 2972 (if the bowl state changes), the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2974 uses the history information as information on the change time based on the RTC information and timekeeping information acquired in step 2956 The state information of the bowl received this time (the bowl bowl non-full tank information or the bowl bowl full tank information) is stored in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing the history, and the process proceeds to step 2980. Next, in step 2976, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the immediately preceding front frame opening information or front frame closing information grasped from the immediately preceding history related command, and the content of the history related command received this time , It is determined whether or not the frame open state has changed. If Yes in step 2976 (if the frame open state has not changed), the process moves to step 2980. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2976 (when the frame open state changes), at step 2978, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the history information as information on the change time based on RTC information and timekeeping information acquired at step 2956. And the received status information (front frame closing information or front frame opening information) of the front frame D 14 received in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing a history, and the process shifts to step 2980.

  Next, in step 2980, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the immediately preceding glass door closing information or glass door opening information grasped from the immediately preceding history related command, and the content of the history related command received this time , It is determined whether the glass door state has changed. If Yes in step 2980 (if the glass door state has not changed), the process moves to step 2984. On the other hand, if No in step 2980 (if the glass door state has changed), in step 2982, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the history information as information on the change time based on the RTC information and timekeeping information acquired in step 2956 And the received state information of the glass door D18 in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing a history, and the process proceeds to step 2984. Next, in step 2984, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the immediately previous setting key off information, setting key on information, setting change mode information or setting display mode information grasped from the immediately preceding history related command. Then, it is determined from the content of the history related command received this time whether or not the setting related state has changed. In the case of Yes in step 2984 (when the setting related state has not changed), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2984 (when the setting related state has changed), at step 2986, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses history information as information on change time based on RTC information and timekeeping information acquired at step 2956 And the received setting-related information (setting key off information, setting key on information, setting change mode information, or setting display mode information) in a history storage area (details will be described later) for storing a history Transfer to next processing (processing of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2954 (when the history related command is not received), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999).

  Here, in the seventeenth embodiment, in addition to the state of the gaming machine described in FIG. 168, information such as “power on” and “power off” that can be determined by itself is also stored in the history information storage area. . Needless to say, “power on” and “power off” are stored in the history information storage area by grasping the situation based on the input information (command) from the main control board M side as well as other processing in FIG. 168. It is also possible to As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, based on input information (command) received from the main control board M side, a setting mode (setting change mode or a setting change mode or the By determining whether or not the state of the gaming machine has changed, such as setting confirmation mode), and based on the determination result, storing the timing (time) at which the state of the gaming machine has changed and the changed content as history information. These pieces of history information can be displayed or can be used to control a gaming machine.

  Next, the concept of the information on the game history stored will be illustrated using FIG. FIG. 169 shows the history storage area image 1 when storing the history information on the side of the sub control board S regarding the change in the state of the gaming machine which occurred on July 29, 2017 in the seventeenth embodiment. As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, based on time information and the like transmitted from the RTC to the sub control board S, the clock control unit is configured to be able to grasp the current time, and history storage processing (FIG. As described above, the history storage area, which is the RAM area of the sub control board S, is configured to store current time information and an item of updated input information.

  As items of input information, power on (power switch Ea on), power off (power switch Ea off), frame open (front frame D14 open), frame closed (front frame D14 closed), glass door open (Glass door D18 is open), Glass door is closed (Glass door D18 is closed), Prize ball excess (Prize ball excess payout abnormality occurs), Prize ball normality (Prize ball excess payout abnormality is resolved), Ball dish full Tongue (ball bowl full), ball bowl non-tank (no ball bowl full), setting key switch on (setting key switch on), setting key switch off (setting key switch off) , Setting value information reception (This is history information having received information related to the current setting value, and when there are three types of setting values 1, 2 and 3, setting (1) Information reception, setting (2 3) History information of information reception, setting (3) information reception, It is configured to be able to store 15 types of items: prize ball device normal (a prize ball device abnormality has been eliminated), and a prize ball device abnormality (a prize ball device abnormality has occurred); All types of items are configured to be stored chronologically in one storage area on a daily basis. Here, to describe a part of the state change in relation to the storage of history information corresponding to the state change of the gaming machine in the seventeenth embodiment, the power on switch Ea is turned on at 9:00 on July 29, 2017. Information that “2017/7/29 9:00 power on” is stored in the history storage area, and then the front frame D14 is released at 9:25 on July 29, 2017 “2017 / 7/29 9:25 "Open frame" information is stored in the history storage area, and then information corresponding to each state change occurs is stored in the history storage area, July 29, 2017 The information “2017/7/29 23:15 Power Off” is stored in the history storage area based on the fact that the power of the gaming machine is shut off at 23:15 on the day (in this example, July 2017 The historical information on the 29th is now complete.

  Thus, in the seventeenth embodiment, various types of input information can be stored in time series in one storage area, and the main control board M side indicates that the input information has been updated on the sub control board S side. Can be appropriately managed to manage the update history of the input information. Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to identify fraudsters. For example, when the setting value is changed during the operation of the game arcade, the fraudulent action is performed by confirming the security camera installed in the game arcade based on the time of frame opening information, setting key switch information, setting information, etc. It is possible to identify the

  Here, the storage mode of history information in the seventeenth embodiment is described in detail in FIG. 169, but in the seventeenth embodiment, history information may be stored in a storage mode different from that in FIG. 169. Such a configuration will be described in detail as a modification of the seventeenth embodiment in FIG. FIG. 170 is a history storage area image 2 at the time of storing history information on the side of the sub control substrate S in the modification of the seventeenth embodiment. As a storage mode of the history information in the figure, a storage area for storing a power on / off history including items of power on (power switch Ea on) and power off (power switch Ea off), and frame open Storage area for storing frame opening / closing history including items of (front frame D14 is open) and frame closing (front frame D14 is closed), glass door opening (glass door D18 is opening) and glass door closing (glass door closing (glass door) A storage area for storing the opening and closing history of the glass door including the item of D18 closed), an award ball excess (a prize ball overdelivery abnormality occurred), and a prize ball normality (a prize ball overdelivery abnormality was resolved) Ball device normal (Rise ball device abnormality has been eliminated) and Rise ball device abnormality (Rise ball device abnormality occurred) and ball bowl full tank (Ball bowl full tank occurred) and ball bowl non-full tank (Ball bowl full tank Memory of abnormal occurrence history including the item with Storage area, setting key switch on (setting key switch on), setting key switch off (setting key switch off) and setting value information reception (setting (1) information reception, setting (2) information reception, setting ( 3) A storage area for storing the setting related information history including the item of information reception), and a storage area capable of storing five types of history information, and the storage area according to the type of history information to be stored I am different.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured to store history information by making the storage area different according to the type of history information to be stored as in the modification of the seventeenth embodiment. There is no problem in changing the number of areas and the assignment of items to be stored. As an example, the memory area of the abnormality occurrence history, an area for storing the winning ball excess and the playing ball normal, an area for storing the winning ball device abnormality and the winning ball device normal, a ball bowl full and a ball bowl non The storage area may be divided into three areas, one for storing a full tank, that is, different storage areas for storing history information for each type of error. In addition, when managing operations related to setting change (for example, power on, front frame closing, opening / closing of setting cover, etc.), a series of operations (performed within a predetermined period of time and performed when changing settings) It may be configured to manage history information by determining whether setting change or setting confirmation has been performed depending on whether the operation to be performed is performed.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the variation of the seventeenth embodiment, input information is classified into a plurality of types of items and managed, and input information related to setting values is distinguished from other input information. By managing and displaying, it is possible to create a gaming machine which is easy to manage by the manager and easy to grasp the fraud on the gaming machine.

  In any of the seventeenth embodiment and the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, storage information can be sorted and displayed in an arbitrary order such as item order or date order when displaying history information. It is also preferable to be able to have a function, and to manage data by giving history information a suitable information (for example, a code number etc.) for sorting. In addition, there are also items such as setting changes, etc., in which a normal operation procedure or the like is grasped in advance. For such items, it is also possible to determine whether the change in the history information stored for each time series falls within the scope of a normal procedure. For example, in the setting change procedure in the seventeenth embodiment, the power switch Ea, the setting key switch, and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming machine (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 124 (b) if necessary). When changing settings in the state of being installed in a game island (hall), first open the gaming machine frame so that you can access the back of the gaming machine, and operate the power switch Ea to shut off the power. Insert the key and turn it to the on position, and operate the power switch Ea again to turn on the power. After that, after changing the setting value and confirming the setting value, it is general to return the setting key to the off state and remove the setting key, and close the gaming machine frame to cause the setting change and the setting confirmation operation. It is. Therefore, when performing a normal setting change or setting confirmation operation, history information in which each state has been changed in chronological order according to the above-described procedure is stored. Because of this, the procedure information corresponding to the time series about the elimination of the abnormality, the change of the setting, etc. is stored, and the order of the procedure information and the stored history information is different, or between the history information. When it is determined that the time exceeds the category of the normal procedure, as in the case where the estimated period is exceeded, it is determined that abnormal history information is obtained, and that effect is notified using appropriate means. Is also preferred.

  In the seventeenth embodiment or the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, input information can be transmitted from the main control substrate M side to the sub control substrate S side, but the main control substrate M side can transmit the input information for a predetermined time. It may be configured to transmit each time, or it may be determined whether or not the input information has changed every predetermined time, and if there is a change, the input information may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. It is also good.

  Also, as in the seventh embodiment, when the CPUMC of the main control board M is provided with the first RAM area and the second RAM area, the history storage area is provided in the second RAM area, and the history information is stored in the second RAM area ( It is also possible to configure to store the power on / off history, the frame opening / closing history, the abnormality occurrence history, the setting related information history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the seventeenth embodiment, an example is shown in which command data itself is used as input information to be confirmed in step 3802 (FIG. 166) of the input determination processing. It is also possible to process it into information which has been changed to an easy-to-use format and to execute the input judgment processing based on this information, which relates to the input information to be confirmed in step 2952 (FIG. 168) of the history storage processing. The same is true.

  Further, in the seventeenth embodiment, the prize ball excessive payout abnormality is triggered by a change in abnormality or not, but when information on the number of excessive payouts is received from the main control board M in addition to the abnormality or not In addition, when there is a change in the number of over-payments, the information on the over-payments is set together with the over-delivery abnormal information for prize balls (information that the over-delivery abnormality for winning balls is generated), and the sub main control It is also possible to output to a unit. By configuring in this way, it is also possible to determine in a multiplexed manner that over-winning balls are generated due to mechanical deterioration of the winning-ball device or the like.

Eighteenth Embodiment
In the sixth and seventeenth embodiments, a plurality of setting values are provided, and a configuration in which an arbitrary setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values is exemplified. However, a configuration in which the setting values can be set Is not limited to the configurations of the sixth and seventeenth embodiments. Accordingly, configurations (processes related to setting change, etc.) regarding setting values different from the sixth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment will be described in detail below as the eighteenth embodiment, and only differences from the seventeenth embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 171 is a main flowchart of the main control board M according to the eighteenth embodiment. The difference with the 17th embodiment is step 1030 (the eighteenth) and step 3850 (the eighteenth), that is, the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the setting key switch is on at step 1001 (sixth). If it is determined that the CPU clears the RAM clear button in step 1030 (the eighteenth), it is determined whether the RAM clear button is on. If Yes in step 1030 (the 18th), the process proceeds to step 1003 (the 17th) to execute setting change processing. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1030 (18th), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes setting confirmation processing described later at step 3850 (18th), and proceeds to step 1007. As described above, in the eighteenth embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON, the setting change mode is entered when the RAM clear button is ON, and the RAM clear button is OFF. In this case, it is configured to shift to the setting display mode. As the administrator's operation, if the setting switch is turned on and the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the setting transition mode is entered, and the setting switch is turned on and the power switch is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button. Then, it is configured to shift to the setting display mode. In addition, in the setting change mode, every time the setting change button is pressed, the display of the set value displayed on the displayed set value display device is switched as "1.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.3 .." The setting value is configured to be determined on the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device by turning the setting key switch from on to off. Alternatively, the setting confirmation mode may be terminated when the setting key switch is switched on from the setting confirmation mode. In addition, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear button turned on and it shifts to the setting change mode, the speaker outputs a voice saying "it has shifted to the setting change mode" and then the setting key switch is turned off. When the setting change mode ends, the speaker may output a voice saying "setting change mode has ended". In addition, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear button turned off and the mode shifts to the setting check mode, the speaker outputs a voice saying "the mode has shifted to the setting check mode" and then the setting key switch is turned off. When the setting confirmation mode is ended, the speaker may output an audio of “setting confirmation mode has ended”. In such a configuration, the frame lamp, etc. can be used not only for voice but also for various lamps such as a frame lamp and effect display devices in order to be able to determine whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Informing by various lamps such as frame lamp and effect display device so that display modes in various lamps and effect display devices can be differentiated, start or end of setting change mode, and start or end of setting confirmation mode can be determined. It may be configured as follows.

  As in the eighteenth embodiment, when it is configured to switch whether to shift to the setting change mode or to the setting display mode by turning on / off the RAM clear button, the sub control board S side Transition to the setting change mode and transition to the setting display mode by the lighting mode controlled by the sound output from the speaker D24 and the lamp for the effect (game effect lamp), the display by the effect display device SG, etc. You may comprise so that an effect etc. may be alert | reported. As an example, when transitioning to the setting change mode, an audio of "in setting change mode" is output, and when a transition to the setting display mode is performed, an audio of "in setting display mode" is output When the setting change mode is finished, the sound of "setting has been changed" is output. When the setting display mode is finished, the sound of "finishing the setting display mode" is output. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, FIG. 172 is a flowchart of setting confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 3850 (18th) of FIG. 171 in the eighteenth embodiment. First, in step 3852, the CPU MC of the main control board M displays the setting value corresponding to the current setting value information on the setting value display device. Next, in step 3854, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the CPUMC of the main control board M has completed the setting confirmation. The condition for determining that the setting confirmation is completed may be any of the conditions for ending the setting display mode described above. For example, the setting key switch may be turned off to determine Yes. In the case of No at step 3854, the processing of step 3852 and step 3854 will be repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if Yes in step 3854, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device in step 3856, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1007). . It should be noted that the setting confirmation process in the same figure is started immediately (for example, immediately before the process of step 3852) and immediately after the above-mentioned setting change process is started (eg, immediately before the process of step 1003-14). In the same manner as the process of step 1016, the process of permitting the timer interrupt may be executed.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the set value is displayed on the set value display device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value may be displayed on the entering state display device J10. When configured in such a manner, when the set value is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, information on the ball entry (for example, base value etc.) is not displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, When the set value is not displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, it is preferable to be configured to display information on the ball entry on the ball entry state display device J10. That is, it is preferable that the ball entry state display device J10 be configured to display one of the setting value and the information regarding the ball entry. In addition, when it is comprised like that, when displaying a setting value on the ball entering state display apparatus J10, the identification information to the effect that the setting value is displayed on 1 or several digits of the ball entering state display apparatus J10 For example, when the set value is 1, it may be displayed as "ST. 1". In addition, when displaying the base value on the ball entry state display device J10, only the base value regarding the current setting value may be displayed, or the base value for each setting value regarding all the setting values is specified. It may be configured to switch and display every time.

  As described above, in the eighteenth embodiment, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be shifted only when the power is turned on, and the set value is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. In this case, the processing sequence when the power is turned on as described above in the seventh embodiment may be configured. Specifically, after the game machine is powered on, first, as processing in the first ROM and RAM area, it is checked whether or not there is an abnormality in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, all data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area are cleared. The data in the first RAM area is cleared as processing in the first ROM / RAM area, and the data in the second RAM area is cleared as processing in the second ROM / RAM area. Thereafter, as processing in the first ROM and RAM area, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on or off, and if the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear button is on, the setting change process is executed and the setting key switch is on When the RAM clear button is off, the setting confirmation process may be executed. When the setting key switch is off, the process of step 1002 and the subsequent steps may be executed. In this case, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON, step 1001 (sixth), step 1030 (sixteenth), step 1003 (seventeenth) or step 3850 (seventh) is performed. After the process relating to the 18th setting change or the setting confirmation is performed, the process relating to the ball entry state display device J10 in step 1018-1 (seventh) to step 1019 (seventh) is performed. By configuring in this way, processing relating to setting change (or setting confirmation) which is processing in the first ROM / RAM area and processing relating to the ball entry state display device J10 which is processing in the second ROM / RAM area are performed simultaneously (or It is possible to prevent confusion between the processing in the first ROM and RAM area and the processing in the second ROM and RAM area that will not be executed alternately, and will be executed in different areas, and related to setting change During execution of the process regarding the process or setting confirmation, only the display regarding the setting value is displayed on the display of the ball entry state display device J10, and after execution of the process regarding the setting change or the process regarding the setting confirmation, the ball entry state display The display of the device J10 will only display information regarding the ball entry (for example, the base value)

  The main control of all the members (in the 18th embodiment, the setting change button, the RAM clear button, the setting key switch, and the power switch) may be required to change the setting values or to confirm the setting values. It may be configured to be attached to the substrate M, and a member other than the power switch may be attached to the main control substrate M among the members that may need to be operated when changing the set value or confirming the set value. It is also good. In addition, the first control member M may be configured to have one member that needs to be operated when changing the setting value or checking the setting value. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily prevent a situation in which setting values that may greatly affect the outcome of a game are changed in a situation not intended by the administrator. In addition, among the members that may need to be operated when changing the setting value or checking the setting value, the main control substrate M may be configured to control also members that are not attached to the main control substrate M. It is suitable.

  When the main control board M is enclosed in the lock cover, the setting key switch, the setting change button, and the RAM clear button may not be attached to the main control board M. As an example, the setting key switch The main control substrate M may be attached to a substrate different from the control substrate M so as to make a board-to-board connection (or a harness connection) between the main control substrate M and the other substrate.

  In the seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, the present time information can be acquired using the RTC. The RTC measures time by the vibration of quartz as in the case of a general quartz clock, so an error of about 0.3 to 2.0 seconds per day is caused due to the influence of the vibration, low temperature and high temperature. There is. Therefore, after acquiring current time information from the RTC at the time of power on of the gaming machine, a power on timer is used which is controlled on the side of the main control board M capable of measuring the elapsed time from the time of power on or RAM clear execution. Specifically, when the power is turned on, time keeping information received from the RTC is stored, and the power on timer is configured to be able to grasp the current time by adding a time elapsed after power on to the time information. Further, the history information may be managed by transmitting timing information from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side using the power on timer without using the RTC. When configured as such, the timing of transmitting the time measurement information may be configured as when the setting change mode starts, when the setting change mode ends, and when the setting display mode starts.

  Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, transition to the setting change mode or the setting display mode is possible only when the power is turned on. If it is possible to check the set value while the game is in progress, it is necessary to be able to check the set value in various situations (for example, during a big hit, during a symbol change, during a symbol stop). A capacity is required, but by configuring to be able to shift to the setting change mode or the setting display mode only when the power is turned on, a large amount of data capacity is reduced when the set value can be confirmed while the game is in progress. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting value becomes visible unintended while the game is in progress.

<Setting change mode and setting confirmation mode applicable to this example>
Next, setting change methods and setting confirmation methods applicable to this example will be illustrated with reference to FIGS. As described above, the setting change and the setting confirmation can be performed by a game clerk or the like instead of the player. In addition, it should be added that there is no problem in combining the configurations exemplified below, and that any configuration can be applied to all the embodiments described above.

First, FIGS. 173 and 174 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method (setting change button formula 1) using the setting change button. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) If the gaming clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, the process proceeds to the next procedure if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off and the setting key switch is off. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting key switch is on, it is turned off to proceed to the next procedure.
(3) A game clerk or the like rotates the setting key switch to the right to turn it on.
(4) When the game clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to display a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest probability of big hit), or may be configured to display the setting value currently set. It is also good. In addition, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is the setting change mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting change in progress”.
(5) Every time the game clerk or the like presses the setting change button (every time it is turned on from off), the setting value (sometimes referred to as setting value data or setting value candidate) is the next setting value (setting value data) The setting value (setting value data) is displayed on the setting value display device. In the figure, the setting value 1 is +1 and the setting value 2 is changed, but the setting is a jump number (for example, setting 1 → setting 3 → setting 5, setting 2 → setting 4 → setting 6, etc.) Even in the case of being configured, it is preferable to configure so as to be the next set value (for example, changed from set value 1 to set value 3). The setting may be decremented by one when the store clerk or the like presses the setting change button once. In this case, it is desirable that setting 6 be the setting with the lowest jackpot probability, and it is desirable to set the default setting value to 6. Furthermore, characters or symbols that can be displayed by the setting value display device of the 7-segment display may be used as the setting, and for example, L (LOW) or H (HIGH) can also be used. Here, the display of the setting value and the selection candidate of the setting value can be changed, and the setting is determined when the setting condition is satisfied. That is, the display of the setting value display device displays “1” when transitioning to the setting change mode, and the display changes as “1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2” each time the setting change button is operated. If the display of the setting value display device is “2” and the determination condition is satisfied, the setting value is set (fixed) to 2.

<Example of operation in setting change mode>
Here, as an example of the operation in the setting change mode applicable to the present example, the following configuration can be exemplified.
(A) “The display on the setting value display device when transitioning to the setting change mode is“ 1 ”as the default value → the display on the setting value display device is“ 2 ”by one operation of the setting change button It becomes → the power switch is turned off → the power switch is turned on → the display of the setting value display device becomes the default value “1”
(B) “The display on the setting value display device when the mode is changed to the setting change mode is“ 1 ”as the default value → the display on the setting value display device is“ 2 ”by one operation of the setting change button → The power switch is turned off → the power switch is turned on → the display on the setting value display device becomes "2" before the power is turned off "
You may comprise as mentioned above.

Returning to the explanation of FIGS. 173 and 174,
(6) The setting is determined by the game clerk or the like pressing the RAM clear button during the setting change mode (for example, 0.5 seconds on → off). Alternatively, the setting value may be determined by long-pressing the RAM clear button. In this case, rather than simply pressing the RAM clear button (for example, 0.5 seconds on → off), Malfunction when setting is determined is less likely to occur. When the setting is confirmed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device may remain displayed (in this case, it is erased in the next procedure) and the setting is confirmed. It may be configured to be erased to words for which a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 5 seconds have elapsed), or may be configured to be erased at a timing when the setting is determined. In the figure, the set values are still displayed.
(7) The setting change mode is ended when the game clerk etc. turns the setting key switch to the left and turns it off (returns to the original position). Here, since the set value is still displayed in the procedure one before, the display of the set value is erased in the procedure. It should be noted that if the setting key switch is turned off without the game clerk or the like pressing the RAM clear button and the setting is not confirmed, the setting is default setting or (setting change was not made in the setting change mode It is preferable that the setting is made before the setting change mode (the same operation as the setting display mode described later).
(8) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, the gaming machine can play a game. When the setting is changed, the RAM is cleared except for the setting storage area, so the decorative display is displayed on the effect display device SG as “331” as a display mode when the RAM is cleared. As shown in the figure, at the time of RAM clear execution accompanied by setting change, setting change is executed by configuring the display pattern of the decorative symbol to be a predetermined display mode (combination) like "331". Becomes clearer, and it becomes easier for a manager such as a game shop clerk to manage the gaming machine. Although not shown, when the setting change mode ends, information on the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the sub control board S side. Further, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) (for example, “setting has been changed” is output). In addition, you may comprise so that it can be gameable from the timing which turned off the setting key switch detailed by said (7).

Next, FIGS. 175 and 176 are transition diagrams showing another setting change method (setting change button type 2) using the setting change button. The setting change button type 2 is similar to the setting change button type 1, so only different procedures will be described.
About (1)-(5), since it is the same operation as composition of setting change button type 1, explanation is omitted.
(6) The setting is confirmed by the game clerk etc. turning the setting key switch to the left and turning off (setting change mode end), and the setting value display displayed on the setting value display device of the gaming machine is displayed. It is erased. The setting value may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the setting is determined.
(7) Close the front frame D14. It should be noted that the game may be executable when the setting is determined, or the game may be executable when the front frame D14 is closed.

  In setting change button type 2, the setting is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch (without operating the RAM clear button), so that the setting is set more easily than setting change button type 1. It has become possible.

  In the case where the setting change method is configured as shown in the figure, the setting key switch is turned off since the setting lever such as the start lever in the rotating game machine does not have an operation for fixing the setting value. When the value is determined and the display of the setting value is erased, there is a concern that the administrator may forget which setting value was selected (fixed). Also, in such a situation, if it is desired to check the set value, the power must be turned off again. Under these circumstances, if the setting value can be determined by turning off the setting key switch, the setting key switch is turned off and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is established after the setting value is determined. In the meantime, it is preferable that the set value determined is displayed on the set value display device (or the ball entry state display device J10). In such a configuration, when the setting key switch is turned off and the setting value is determined, the speaker may be configured to output a voice “setting value has been determined”. In the setting change mode, when the set value is not determined, the display of the set value blinks, and then, when the set value is determined, the set value is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). It may be configured to light up and display. It should be noted that such a configuration is applicable to any configuration that can display the set value according to the present example.

Next, FIG. 177 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method in the configuration provided with the setting change button. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) The power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on and the setting key switch is off.
(3) When a game clerk etc. turns the setting key switch to the right and turns it on, the gaming machine shifts to a setting confirmation mode (sometimes referred to as a setting display mode), and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. Is displayed. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting is being confirmed”, although the game is in progress, but the game sound (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output (the game sound output is stopped), and only the sound of "setting is being confirmed" may be output, and the game sound and "setting being confirmed" are simultaneously output. The configuration may be
(4) When the game clerk or the like turns off the setting key switch, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. At this time, it may be configured to output a voice of “finish setting confirmation”.
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game (variation of special symbol, etc.) is continued without a pause, so even if the front frame is closed while the special symbol is fluctuating, the effect display device SG The fluctuation of the decorative symbol and the effect display are continued. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game may be paused. In this case, when the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is entered, the progress of the game is paused, and the setting key switch is turned on. When turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends and the pause is canceled, and the game continues to progress. Here, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, unlike the case transitioning to the setting change mode, the probability state is maintained in the state immediately before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode.

Next, FIGS. 178 and 179 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using the setting switch. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off and the setting switch is off (the arrow of the setting switch points upward), the process proceeds to the next procedure. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting switch is on, then all are turned off and the process proceeds to the next procedure.
(3) A game clerk or the like turns the setting switch leftward to turn it on.
(4) When the salesperson or the like turns on the power switch Ea while maintaining the setting switch in the left direction, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to be displayed from a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or may be displayed from the setting value of the setting currently set. It may be configured. Further, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is the setting change mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting change in progress”.
(5) As described above, the setting switch returns to the original position (initial position) when the operator such as a game clerk releases the setting switch in an operated state (a state of being twisted left or right) It is configured. In addition, since the said procedure is description of a structure of a setting switch, it can skip and it can transfer to the following procedure.
(6) When a game clerk or the like rotates the setting switch to the right (sometimes referred to as twisting), the set value (sometimes referred to as set value data or set value candidate) is changed to the next set value . Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and the setting value 2 is changed. That is, it is configured to be changed to the next set value each time the setting switch is rotated rightward (every time it is turned on from off). In addition, it may be configured to be changeable (-1) as described in the “setting change button type 1 (5)”. Here, the display of the setting value is changeable, and the setting is configured to be changed when the determination condition is satisfied.
(7), (8) When the operator such as a game clerk releases the setting switch and the setting switch remains at the original position and the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the setting is decided (setting change mode end). If the setting switch is turned to the right again before the predetermined time elapses, the setting value is changed to the next setting value. Specifically, it shifts to the setting change mode and setting value 1 is displayed → turn the setting switch rightward within 5 seconds → change it to setting value 2 → turn the setting switch right within 5 seconds → setting The value is changed to 3 → 5 seconds elapsed → confirmed to setting 3 (setting change mode end). When the setting is confirmed (a predetermined time has elapsed), the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased.
(9) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, a game is possible. When the setting is changed, the RAM is cleared except for the setting storage area, so the decorative display is displayed on the effect display device SG as “331” as a display mode when the RAM is cleared. Furthermore, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

Next, FIG. 180 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using the setting switch. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 when the power switch Ea is on, the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on and the setting switch is off (initial position).
(3) When a game clerk or the like turns the setting switch to the left and turns it on, the gaming machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value of the current setting is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is in the setting display mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting in check”, although the game is in progress, but the game sound (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output, but may be configured to output only the voice of “setting confirmation in progress”, or may be configured to simultaneously output the game sound and “setting confirmation in progress”. In addition, it is preferable that the administrator can distinguish between the setting change mode and the setting display mode, and the setting change mode is currently in progress depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp and the display mode of the effect display device SG. It may be easily determined whether it is in the setting display mode. Although not shown, when the setting change mode is started (transition to the setting change mode), information on the fact that the setting change mode has started is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, When the setting display mode is started (transitioned to the setting display mode), information regarding the start of the setting display mode is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The game clerk or the like turns the setting switch off (initial position), and when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display device Is erased. If a game clerk or the like turns on the setting switch again (twisting to the right or twisting to the left) before the predetermined time elapses, the display timer of the setting value is reset at that time. In addition, when the setting switch is turned on again after the predetermined time has elapsed, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device because of the procedure (3).
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In addition, the game progress situation at this time is as having described in "the setting confirmation method (5) in the structure provided with the setting change button".

Next, FIG. 181 is a transition diagram showing a setting change method using the RAM clear button. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) If the gaming clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, the process proceeds to the next procedure if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is turned on, it is turned off to proceed to the next procedure.
(3) When the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button and turns on the power switch Ea, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to be displayed from a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or may be displayed from the setting value of the setting set before the power is turned off. It may be configured such that the display regarding the set value is not displayed. Also, in order to make it possible for the administrator to understand that the setting change mode is set, a sound of “setting change in progress” may be output.
(4) The setting value is changed to the next setting value each time the game clerk or the like depresses the RAM clear button (every time it is turned on from the off state). Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and the setting value 2 is changed. That is, it is configured to be changed to the next set value each time the RAM clear button is pressed (every time it is turned on from off). Also, the setting value may be changed (a configuration in which the setting value is changed) as described in the “setting change button type 1 (5)”. Note that the setting is confirmed when the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses while the setting change operation (the operation of the RAM clear button) is not performed (the setting change mode is ended), and the RAM is again performed before the predetermined time elapses. When the clear button is pressed, it is changed to the next set value. Specifically, transition to the setting change mode and setting value 1 is displayed → RAM clear button is pressed within 5 seconds → changed to setting value 2 → RAM clear button is pressed within 5 seconds → changed to setting value 3 → 5 seconds elapsed → Confirmed in setting 3 (setting change mode end). That is, when the RAM clear button is pressed (turned on) again before the predetermined time elapses, the display timer of the setting value is reset at that time. When the setting is confirmed (a predetermined time elapses), the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. Here, the display of the setting value is changeable, and the setting is configured to be changed when the determination condition is satisfied.
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, a game is possible. Since the RAM is cleared except for the setting storage area when the setting is changed, the effect display device SG has a display mode when the RAM is cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed as "331". Furthermore, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

  When configured as shown in Fig. 181, the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on with the RAM clear button turned on, but the setting is then made when the RAM clear button is turned off. The set value may be displayed on the value display device (the set value is not displayed on the set value display device at the time of transition to the setting change mode).

Next, FIG. 182 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using the RAM clear button. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 when the power switch Ea is on, and the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on.
(3) When the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button, the gaming machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value of the current setting is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting is being confirmed”, although the game is in progress, but the game sound (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output, but may be configured to output only the voice of “setting confirmation in progress”, or may be configured to simultaneously output the game sound and “setting confirmation in progress”. Further, as in the configuration described above, the progress of the game may be stopped during the setting confirmation mode.
(4) When the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button again, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. In addition, after a set value is displayed, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. In this case, if a game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button again before the predetermined time elapses, the display timer of the setting value is reset at that time. In addition, when the RAM clear button is pressed again after the predetermined time has elapsed, the setting value is displayed because of the procedure (3).
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In addition, the game progress situation at this time is as having described in "the setting confirmation method (5) in the structure provided with the setting change button".

Next, FIGS. 183 and 184 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using a setting change button provided with a lock cover. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure. In the configuration shown in the figure, the setting change button and the setting value display device are accommodated in the cover having the cover key, and when the cover is closed, the setting change button and the setting value display device can not be operated. It is configured as follows.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, if the cover key of the game machine is locked, the cover is closed, and the power switch Ea is off, the process proceeds to the next procedure. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is turned on, it is turned off to proceed to the next procedure. The cover is transparent so that the setting value display device and the button for changing the setting can be visually recognized from the outside.
(3) A game clerk or the like unlocks the cover key and opens the cover.
(4) If the game clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea while holding down the setting change button (while keeping it on), the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device . At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to be displayed from a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or may be displayed from the setting value of the setting currently set. It may be configured. In addition, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is the setting change mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting change in progress”. Thus, the setting change time button is a member that requires an operation when shifting to the setting change mode.
(5) The setting value is changed to the next setting value each time the game clerk or the like depresses the RAM clear button (every time it is turned on from the off state). Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and the setting value 2 is changed. That is, it is configured to be changed to the next set value each time the RAM clear button is pressed (every time it is turned on from off). In addition, it may be configured to be changeable (-1) as described in the “setting change button type 1 (5)”. Here, the display of the setting value is changeable, and the setting is configured to be changed when the determination condition is satisfied.
(6) When the game clerk or the like presses the setting change button again, the setting is confirmed, the game machine ends the setting change mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. At this time, the display of the setting value may be erased immediately after the setting change button is pressed, or the display of the setting value may be erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. .
(7) A game clerk or the like closes the cover and locks the cover key.
(8) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, a game is possible. When the setting is changed, the RAM is cleared except for the setting storage area, so the decorative display is displayed on the effect display device SG as “331” as a display mode when the RAM is cleared. Furthermore, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). In addition, when the front frame D14 is closed in a situation where the cover is not closed or the cover key is not locked, notification that the cover is not closed or the cover key is not locked is given. For example, "the cover or the cover key is open" is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the sound may be output as "the cover or the cover key is open". Alternatively, only the sound may be configured in common with other error sounds, and the effect display device SG may display “the cover or the cover key is open” and the sound may output an error sound. In order to configure in this way, a signal relating to the open / close status of the cover may be sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. In the setting change mode, in the situation where the front frame D14 is closed, the setting value candidates may be changeable by operating the RAM clear button, or the setting values may be changed and confirmed. In the setting change mode, in the situation where the preceding frame D 14 is closed, the setting value candidate may be configured to be unchangeable, or the setting value may be configured to be changeable and indeterminable. It is also good.

Next, FIGS. 185 and 186 are transition diagrams showing a setting confirmation method using the setting change time button provided with the lock cover. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) If the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 when the power switch Ea is on, the cover key of the gaming machine is locked, the cover is closed, and the power switch Ea is on, the process proceeds to the next procedure. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off, it is turned on to proceed to the next procedure. The cover is transparent so that the setting value display device and the button for changing the setting can be viewed.
(3) A game clerk or the like unlocks the cover key and opens the cover.
(4) When a game clerk or the like presses the setting change button, the gaming machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value of the current setting is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output a voice of “setting confirmation in progress”, although the game is in progress, but the game sound (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output, but may be configured to output only the voice of “setting confirmation in progress”, or may be configured to simultaneously output the game sound and “setting confirmation in progress”.
(5) When the game clerk or the like presses the setting change button again, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. In addition, after a set value is displayed, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. In this case, if a game clerk or the like presses the setting change time button again before the predetermined time elapses, the setting value display timer is reset at that time. In addition, when the setting change time button is pressed again after the predetermined time has elapsed, the setting value is displayed because of the procedure (4). In addition, the setting value may be configured to end the setting change mode by long-pressing the setting change button. In this case, the setting value may be confirmed rather than merely pressing the setting change button. It is less likely that the setting value will be erased due to a malfunction.
(6) A game clerk or the like closes the cover and locks the cover key.
(7) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In addition, the game progress situation at this time is as having described in "the setting confirmation method (5) in the structure provided with the setting change button". Furthermore, when the front frame D14 is closed in a situation where the cover is not closed or the cover key is not locked, notification that the cover is not closed or the cover key is not locked is given. For example, "the cover or the cover key is open" is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the sound may be output as "the cover or the cover key is open". Alternatively, only the sound may be configured in common with other error sounds, and the effect display device SG may display “the cover or the cover key is open” and the sound may output an error sound.

  If the power switch is turned on from the off state with the cover or the cover key open, the setting confirmation mode may be entered by pressing the setting change button, or the setting change Even when the hour button is pressed, the setting confirmation mode may not be entered, and a notification may be provided to indicate that the cover is not closed or the cover key is not locked. If the system is configured not to shift to the setting confirmation mode even if the setting change button is pressed, “Reclose the power switch again → close the cover and lock the cover key → turn on the power switch → open the cover → It may be configured to shift to the setting confirmation mode when the setting change button is pressed.

  In the above, although the setting confirmation method in the case where the setting confirmation is already performed when the power switch Ea is turned on has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. The setting confirmation is possible only when the power is turned on. May be configured not to confirm the setting.

<Other configuration of setting values>
In the sixth embodiment, the seventeenth embodiment, the eighteenth embodiment and the like described above, various examples have been illustrated for the method of changing and confirming the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine configured to have the setting value. As a configuration regarding setting values applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a configuration as described in detail below may be employed. It is to be noted that one or more configurations described in detail below can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments.

<Configuration 1>
It may be configured to shift to the setting change mode when the power switch is turned off in the setting change mode (the setting key switch is on) → the setting key switch is turned off → the power switch is turned on.

<Configuration 2>
The setting change mode is configured to be switched to when the setting change mode (setting key switch is on) turns off the power switch → turning off the setting key switch → turning on the setting key switch → turning on the power switch It is also good.

<Configuration 3>
Transition to the setting change mode if the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear button is turned on in the setting change mode (setting key switch is on) and then the power switch is turned on with the RAM clear button turned on It may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 4>
The setting change mode when the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear button is turned on while the RAM clear button is turned on and the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear button is turned on. It may be configured to shift to

<Configuration 5>
"In the setting change mode (setting key switch is on), with the RAM clear button on, turn off the power switch → keep the RAM clear button on, turn off the setting key switch → keep the RAM clear button on, turn on the power It may be configured to shift to the setting change mode when the switch is turned on.

<Configuration 6>
“When the power switch is off, open the front frame D14 → turn on the setting key switch → turn on the power switch. Enter the setting change mode and output the voice“ setting change mode is in progress ”, When the setting key switch is turned on → the power switch is turned on while the power switch is off and the front frame D14 is closed, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and the sound of "error operation detected" May be output.

<Configuration 7>
“When the power switch is off, open the front frame D14 → turn on the setting key switch → turn on the power switch. Enter the setting change mode and output the voice“ setting change mode is in progress ”, If "set key switch on → power switch on with power switch off and front frame D14 closed", "error operation detected" without entering the setting change mode You may comprise so that an audio | voice may be output.

<Configuration 8>
During the setting change (setting change mode), each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main gaming starting opening B10, first large winning opening C10, second large winning opening C20, left general winning opening P10, Even if the gaming ball enters the right general winning opening P20), the payout of the winning balls is not carried out, and the gaming ball has entered the starting openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main gaming starting opening B10) Also as the variation of the special symbol is not started, during the setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), each winning opening (the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first large winning opening C10, the second When the game ball enters the large winning a prize opening C20, the left general winning a prize opening P10, the right general winning a prize opening P20, the payout of the winning a prize ball is done, each starting opening (1st main game starting opening A10, 2nd main game When the game ball enters the starting opening B10), the change of the special symbol is started It may be.

<Configuration 9>
During the setting change, the game ball may not be fired when operating the firing handle D44, and the game ball may be fired when the shooting handle D44 is operated during setting confirmation.

<Configuration 10>
While changing settings, it is configured not to perform error notification by open circuit short circuit power supply abnormality detection, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, shock detection etc. During setting confirmation, open circuit short circuit power supply abnormality detection, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, shock detection , Etc. may be configured to be able to perform error notification.

<Structure 11>
While the setting is being changed, the operations of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are invalid (volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc. are impossible), and while the setting is confirmed, the operations of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 It is good also as composition which is effective (volume adjustment, light volume adjustment, etc. are possible). In addition, the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB may be invalidated during setting change or setting confirmation.

<Configuration 12>
While the setting is being changed, the operation of the sub input button SB is invalid, and the operation of the left button and the right button of the four-way controller SB-2 is valid (the volume can be adjusted). When the button operation is performed, the volume change is performed based on the operation of the left button or the right button of the cross key SB-2, but the image display indicating the current volume is not performed on the effect display device SG It may be configured as follows. During the setting confirmation, the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is effective, and the button display effect (If the player operates the sub input button SB, a new image is displayed on the effect display device SG When the sub input button SB is operated in displaying or changing the displayed image or gauge, the effect is executed based on the operation of the sub input button SB, and the cross key SB − When the operation of the left button or the right button of 2 is performed, the volume change is performed based on the operation of the left button or the right button of the cross key SB-2, and the image display indicating the current volume is the effect display device It may be configured to be performed by SG.

<Configuration 12>
During the setting change, the operation of the sub input button SB is invalid, and the operation of the upper button and the lower button of the four-way controller SB-2 is effective (the light amount can be adjusted). When the button is operated, the light amount is changed based on the operation of the upper button and the lower button of the cross key SB-2, but the image display indicating the current light amount is not performed by the effect display device SG It may be configured as follows. During the setting confirmation, the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is effective, and the button display effect (If the player operates the sub input button SB, a new image is displayed on the effect display device SG When the sub input button SB is operated in displaying or changing the displayed image or gauge, the effect is executed based on the operation of the sub input button SB, and the cross key SB − 2. When the upper button or the lower button is operated, the light amount is changed based on the operation of the upper button or the lower button of the cross key SB-2, and the image display showing the current light amount is the effect display device It may be configured to be performed by SG.

<Configuration 13>
During the setting change, it is possible to recognize that the player is not playing (or not able to play the game) on the effect display device SG, and a display capable of recognizing that the setting is being changed is displayed. It is possible to recognize that it is (or playable state), and furthermore, it may be displayed that it can be recognized that the setting is being confirmed. For example, during the setting change, the background image of the effect display device SG is black, and the characters “setting is being changed” are displayed, and during the setting confirmation, the stage background image, the big hit background image, the game standby demonstration image, etc. May be displayed, and may be configured to display the characters “settings are being confirmed”.

<Configuration 14>
In the seventh embodiment, the processing relating to display on the ball entry state display device J10 is configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM and RAM area, but processing relating to setting values (setting change processing and setting confirmation processing described above) , Etc.) may also be configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM and RAM area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the first ROM area and the first RAM area required to execute the process relating to the setting value. In addition, when the set value is configured to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, the process and the set value regarding the information related to the ball entry (for example, the base value) to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. Can be comprehensively executed as the processing in the second ROM and RAM area.

<Configuration 15>
Further, as described in Configuration 14, the processing relating to the display on the ball entry state display device J10 and the processing relating to the setting value (the setting change processing, the setting confirmation processing, etc. described above) are executed as processing in the second ROM and RAM area. If the RAM clear process is executed based on the transition of the setting change mode,
(1) All the ranges of the second RAM area and the first RAM area regarding the second RAM area related to the process related to the display on the ball entry state display device J10 and the process related to the setting value (the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, etc. described above) Clear the RAM (2) The second RAM area and the entire range of the first RAM area may be cleared in the process regarding the setting value (the setting change process, the setting check process, etc. described above).
Further, when the RAM check process (the process of step 1008) is executed and it is determined that the inside of the RAM is not normal, the process regarding the second RAM area and the setting value related to the process related to the display on the ball entry state display device J10 (described above The second RAM area and the entire range of the first RAM area relating to setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.) may be cleared in the RAM.
By configuring as described above, it is possible to execute the RAM clear for the appropriate range, and it is possible to appropriately execute the subsequent game progression.

<Configuration 16>
In the case where it is possible to shift to the setting display mode while the game is being executed (in a situation other than immediately after the power is turned on, for example, during a big hit, during symbol fluctuation, during symbol suspension)
(1) When transitioning to the setting display mode during execution of the big hit, the execution of the big hit is resumed from the situation before transitioning to the setting display mode after the setting display mode ends.
(2) If the setting display mode is entered during stop display of the symbol and during the variable fixed time, counting of the variable fixed time is resumed from the situation before the transition to the setting display mode after the setting display mode is ended. Specifically, in the case where the fluctuation fixing time is 3 seconds, when transitioning to the setting display mode one second after the fluctuation fixing time starts, the fluctuation fixing time ends when 2 seconds elapse after the setting display mode ends.
(3) When transitioning to the setting display mode during fluctuation display of symbols, after the setting display mode ends, timing and display of fluctuation display of symbols is resumed from the situation before transitioning to the setting display mode. Specifically, when the display shifts to the setting display mode 10 seconds after the start of the symbol fluctuation, the symbol stops when 20 seconds elapse after the setting display mode is ended, during the fluctuation display of the symbol whose fluctuation time is 30 seconds. indicate. In addition, in the situation where the symbols in the left row are stopped and the symbols in the middle row and the symbols in the right row are being displayed in a variable manner, when transitioning to the setting display mode, the left after the setting display mode is ended. The symbol variation in the row may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation may be resumed from the situation in which the symbol in the middle row and the symbol in the right row are being displayed in a variable manner.
(4) During the occurrence of an error, it may be configured not to shift to the setting display mode regardless of the type of the error.
(5) The progress of the game is stopped (the entry to the first main game starting slot A10 is invalidated, the symbol variation does not start, etc.) While the error is occurring, the setting display mode is not entered, while the game is It may be configured to be able to shift to the setting display mode while an error that does not stop the progress (such as a bowl full error or the like) occurs.
(6) Even during the occurrence of an error, it may be possible to shift to the setting display mode regardless of the type of the error.
(7) The system may be configured to shift to the setting display mode while an error is occurring and while displaying the error, and to restart the display regarding the error when the setting display mode ends.
(8) If an error occurs and the display related to the error is being executed, the setting display mode is entered, and if the setting display mode is ended, it is determined again whether the error has occurred, and the error is eliminated. In this case, the display related to the error may not be displayed, and when it is determined that the error has occurred, the display related to the error may be displayed (restarted).

  Although the various elements (big hit probability, number of winning balls, number of rounds, etc.) may be changed depending on the setting in the embodiment (the sixth embodiment and the like) having the settings described above, only the big hit probability is described. More preferably, it is configured to change By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to determine the setting of the gaming machine than when changing a plurality of elements, and there is no set value or one set value in terms of playability. It is possible to configure more complicatedly than a single game machine. For example, when the big hit probability is different, in the setting where the big hit probability is high, the possibility of occurrence of effects likely to be connected to the big hit becomes high.

<< Summary of Overview of Each Embodiment >>
Here, an outline of each embodiment described above will be described.

This Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as control of the main control board, the main control board main process which is a general process executed at power on and the process at power on in the main control board side main process are executed. The generation of the processing is permitted later, and the timer interrupt processing is performed to perform processing during the game. Furthermore, as a configuration relating to the playability, it is provided with two main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol), and is executed with priority given to the reserve digest of the second main game symbol to digest the big hit. Two large winning openings (1st large winning opening, 2nd large winning opening, during the big hit is to be absorbed by the right hit to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game board, about 70 after the big hit Probability fluctuation gaming state in which the probability of winning in the main lottery (special symbol) winning probability will be high until the next big hit occurs (% by the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol) is given 100% after the big hit end A high base state of 100 times (auxiliary game time short state, auxiliary game time short flag on) is to be awarded, and a general winning hole is provided in the vicinity of the large winning hole. Strike the right on the sub control board side It is made as to that beat divided into an instruction abet.

Second Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, 100% probability fluctuation gaming state is granted after a big hit as the configuration related to gaming characteristics, and the probability fluctuation gaming state is changed when it fluctuates 80 times in probability fluctuation state (ST) ing. Moreover, the lottery table for variation mode determination in the probability variation gaming state is divided into three stages. In addition, there is provided an open mode in which the open time of the ordinary electric character is the longest when the auxiliary game symbol in the low base state (non-auxiliary game mode short state, auxiliary game mode short flag off) wins the lottery. Furthermore, the pre-reading effect is configured to be executed based on the reserved random number values (e.g., the random number for random selection, the random number for pattern random selection, and the random number for random variation), and corresponds to the lottery table for variation mode determination during ST. The presentation stage is to be changed, and the pre-reading effect is not performed across the change of the presentation stage. Furthermore, special effects (ending effects) are performed when a big hit occurs continuously a predetermined number of times due to the probability variation gaming state or the auxiliary gaming time short state. Further, in the modification, it is configured to display a demonstration image (the number of acquired game balls, etc.) ending at the special game termination demonstration time.

Third Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the provision condition of the probability fluctuation state is changed from the second embodiment, and a special area where game balls can enter is provided inside the second large winning opening, and a big hit is made By entering the game ball into the specific area, probability fluctuation game is awarded after the big hit (ball game).
Fourth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the game ball passes through the specific area in the big winning opening when the small hitting occurs by the lottery of the main game design (incidence lottery, symbol lottery) (big winning opening by small hitting (In less than 1.8 seconds), it is a big hit and it is a game feature that can be won many balls. In addition, it does not have probability fluctuation in the main game design, after the big hit end becomes the auxiliary game state (time shortening game state, auxiliary game time short flag on) due to probability fluctuation of normal design. In addition, the small hit probability in the second main game symbol corresponding to the main game start port (second main game start port) provided with the normal electric role (second main game start port electric role) (1021/1024 ) Is higher than the small hit probability (4/1024) in the first main game symbol, and a small hit is frequently generated in the second main game symbol. In addition, two shielding members are provided at the upper part of the specific area in the special winning opening, and are configured such that there may or may not be cases of entering the specific area depending on the timing of the game ball entering the special winning opening. ing.

Fifth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the gaming balls are configured to circulate in the gaming machine. The pachinko game machine and the ECO unit installed outside the pachinko game machine are roughly classified (the game machine is configured to be separately attachable and detachable from each other). The pachinko game machine is roughly divided into a game board side and a game slot side, and on a payout control board provided on the game slot side, firing control of a game ball and awarding of a prize ball to a player (in the fifth embodiment Is configured to control addition / subtraction of ball data. Furthermore, it has an operation unit device, and is composed of a touch panel type interface, a ball number display section, a sub input button, etc. The touch panel type interface is a player's touch operation (contact type or non-contact type touch operation The game medium information recorded on the IC card (game medium recording medium) inserted in the ECO unit can be displayed and used by the game state information of the game machine or the operation). The prize ball payout control board is controlled to display the number of balls held {number of game balls which can be used for the game (fired in the game area)} in the ball number display section. Furthermore, authentication processing of the gaming frame and the gaming board (processing for determining whether or not the gaming machine is a legitimate gaming machine when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) is configured to be performed via the ECO unit. .

Sixth Embodiment
The pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment is provided with set values for changing the winning probability and the like of the acceptance lottery. The setting value can be changed by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and operating it, and then turning on the power. Further, the setting value can be confirmed by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and operating it after the power is turned on. The setting key insertion port is provided in the main control board. While changing (or checking) the setting value, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device provided on the main control board on the main control side, and setting change is being performed on the effect display device on the sub control side (or During confirmation) is displayed.

Seventh Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, the ball entry state information (base value) in the low base state (non-auxiliary game mode short state, auxiliary game mode short flag off) is displayed on the ball entry state display device provided on the main control board. It is configured to In addition, the main control board main processing which is control of the main control board is provided with the ball entry state display device arithmetic processing (base value calculation processing), and the timer interruption processing is the entry state display device display control processing (base value display processing ) Is provided. Main control board main processing and timer interrupt processing are provided as the processing in the first ROM and RAM area, and as the processing in the second ROM and RAM area, the entering state display device arithmetic processing and the entering state display device display control processing A ball entry state display device computing process which is provided in the main control board main process and which is a process in the second ROM and RAM area is called, and a timer state and an interrupt process display in the second ROM and RAM area. The control process is configured to be called. The ball entry status information is configured to be stored every predetermined period (for example, the number of outs is 60000, etc.), and the ball entry status display device is updated with base information ("bL.") Updated in real time. And the base information ("b6.") In the immediately preceding section can be displayed.

Eighth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, both the aspect in which the setting value can be estimated from the execution tendency of the pre-reading effect and the difficult aspect are described. The lottery table is configured so that the probability of winning (big hit) at the time of probability fluctuation game is about twice the probability of winning (big hit) at non probability fluctuation game, and the ratio is common in all settings. It is done. A random number range common to the set values (0 to 204) is provided as an aspect capable of deducing the set value from the execution tendency of the pre-reading effect, and the higher the setting, the more the random number outside the common random number range is configured, By being able to generate the pre-reading effect at the time of hitting (big hit) within the common hit random number range, it is possible to predict that the possibility of being higher setting is higher as the number of hitting (big hit) is increased without occurrence of pre-reading effect. As an aspect in which it is difficult to estimate the setting value from the execution tendency of the pre-reading effect, if pre-reading effect is always executed at the time of hitting, the effect mode to be hit differs depending on the difference of the setting value The configuration is configured so that it is impossible to determine the setting.

The Ninth Embodiment
The pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment is a method for accurately performing pre-reading effect without transmitting information on the setting value to the sub control board. First, in the first method, only the information on the variation mode lottery random number and / or the symbol lottery random number is referred to without referring to the information on the acceptance lottery random number. In the second method, the main control board performs the determination on the basis of the set value, and transmits the determination result to the sub control board. In the third method, on the secondary control board side, information on the random number value held as a hold and an event that occurred when the hold was digested are accumulated as a game history (the secondary control board side learns Will be configured. In the fourth method, by configuring the control program of the main control board so that the setting information can not be grasped, the setting value can not be grasped in both the main control board and the sub control board.

Tenth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment, the range of obtainable random numbers is different according to the set value. In addition, since the prefix number which becomes a hit (big hit) is common regardless of the setting value, the winning probability in the winning lottery is different depending on the difference in the range of the winning lottery random numbers according to the setting value.

Eleventh Embodiment
The pachinko gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to perform a winning lottery using a plurality of winning lottery determination tables. In the first hit lottery table, the winning probability differs depending on the set value, and in the second hit lottery table, the winning probability is configured in common regardless of the set value, and the first hit lottery table and the second hit lottery If both sides of the determination table have won, it will be won by a lottery.

Twelfth Embodiment
The pachinko gaming machine in the twelfth embodiment has three setting values of setting 1, setting 2 and setting 3 as setting values, and in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the jackpot probability is different because the setting values are different. It is configured to be different, and is configured to have the same big hit probability even if the set value changes the big hit probability in the probability variation gaming state.

13th Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment, the operating state of the setting device (for example, whether it is in the setting change mode or in the setting display mode) and the set value Information is configured to be output.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment, as information stored in the RAM area of the main control board, information (for example, setting value data) causing a great deal of damage to the game result when an abnormality occurs or is erased. ) Is configured to be stored in the upper address.

The fifteenth embodiment
The pachinko gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a probability change fall lottery in the probability variation gaming state.

<Modification 1 from the fifteenth embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine in the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be able to be different for each setting value, and the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1) However, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is configured to be high, and the probability change fall lottery can be executed, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the probability change fall lottery.

<Modification 2 from the fifteenth embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be able to be different for each setting value, and the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1) ) Is configured to increase the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state, and the probability fluctuation gaming state is ended by the number of fluctuations of the main gaming symbol, the number of fluctuation (number of probability variations) and the number of time reduction become smaller as the setting value is higher It is configured as follows.

<Modification 3 from the fifteenth embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be able to be different for each setting value, and the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1) However, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is configured to be high. In addition, probability fluctuation game state ends with the number of times of fluctuation of the main game design, the number of times of fluctuation (number of probability variations) and the number of time reductions are decided from multiple types of selection candidates. It is configured to be easy to select (determine) selection candidates that are relatively small as the number of times and the number of time reductions.

<Modification 4 from the fifteenth embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine in the fourth modification from the fifteenth embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine in the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state can be different for each set value, and the setting is made. As the value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1), the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is configured to be higher. In addition, probability fluctuation game state ends with the fluctuation frequency of the main game design, the fluctuation frequency (the probability fluctuation frequency) is decided from plural types of selection candidates, the higher the setting value, the relative fluctuation as the probability fluctuation frequency given after the big hit end The configuration is such that selection candidates having a very small number of times are easily selected (decided), and the number of time reduction times is configured to be the same number regardless of the set value.

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of set values are provided, and the higher the set value, the higher the win rate for small hits on the second main game side.

Seventeenth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment, input information is classified into a plurality of types of items and managed, and input information related to setting values can be managed and displayed separately from other input information.

Eighteenth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment, both of the setting change mode and the setting display mode can be shifted only when the power is turned on.

<< Summary of problems and effects in this example >>
Here, the problems and effects in the above-described embodiments will be described in detail below.

<Problems in the present embodiment>
There has been a demand for a gaming machine having a highly entertaining gaming board configuration.

<Effect of this embodiment>
When the game ball shot rightward is discharged from the rightward route outlet D50 during execution of the special game, if the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is open If the game ball enters the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) and the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is in the closed state, The game ball passes as it is and can enter the right general winning opening P20. Therefore, it becomes difficult to enter the right general winning opening P20 compared to when the right general winning opening P20 is installed upstream of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) {right When the general winning opening P20 is installed on the upstream side of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20), all the game balls flowed out from the right-handed route outlet D50 are right general winning combinations If the right general winning opening P20 is installed downstream of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) while flowing down the vicinity of the opening P20, it flows out from the right-handed route outlet D50 In order for only the game ball which did not enter the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) among the played balls to flow down the vicinity of the right general winning opening P20}. Therefore, for the player, while increasing interest in entering the right general winning opening P20 (without giving a disadvantage), the first large winning opening C10 (or second large winning opening C20) as a game Is in the open state, and the right general winning opening P20 is entered in the special game being executed than when the right general winning opening P20 is installed on the upstream side of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). Since it becomes difficult to play a ball, it is possible to suppress the influence on the number of winning balls obtainable when a special game is performed.

<Problem in Second Embodiment>
In the game during the probability fluctuation gaming state (and time shortening gaming state) with a limited number of times, the candidate of the fluctuation mode (variation time) to be selected is triggered by the fact that the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol has become a predetermined number. In gaming machines that are different (switched), it has been desired to improve the amusement.

<Effect of Second Embodiment>
In the game during the probability fluctuation gaming state (and time shortening gaming state) with a limited number of times, the candidate of the fluctuation mode (variation time) to be selected is triggered by the fact that the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol has become a predetermined number. It is configured to be different (switched). In addition, according to the change of the change mode, by switching the contents of the effect, if the aspect of the effect is different according to the progress of the game during the specific game {probability change gaming state (and time shortening gaming state with a limited number of times)} It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<The subject in the third embodiment>
There has been a demand for a gaming machine that can capture the player's sense of expectation in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state by the jackpot symbol.

<Effect of Third Embodiment>
Whether or not to transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed is determined by the presence or absence of the game ball to the particular region in the special game (transition to the probability variation gaming state with the specific region entered) Non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state fluctuation when it does not enter the probability fluctuation gaming state in the gaming machine (so-called, ball certain type gaming machine) game machine (so-called, ball probability type gaming machine) without entering the ball By making the mode (and effect) different from the fluctuation mode (and effect) in the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the player's profit mode. In addition, although it does not show in particular in this example, when performing a distribution game, the special effect (The effect which asks about whether the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 becomes long opening, the entry to the specific field C22 It may be configured such that an effect for asking whether or not a ball is played, an effect for notifying that the ball has been entered into the specific area C22, etc.) may be executed {not specifically limited to the execution mode, for example When it is the effect of notifying that the ball is entered into the specific area C22, it is preferable that the effect display device SG or the effect display device SG be at the timing when the ball is entered (preferably immediately after). It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a rendering device (for example, a so-called movable object, a light guide plate, etc.) provided on the front surface (for example, on the rendering display device SG) Display or play an image drawn as "V" The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}. In addition, when performing an effect to notify that the ball has been entered into the specific area C22, when a special game is won in a specific gaming state (for example, probability fluctuation gaming state) or a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) In a special game where an opening pattern designed to make entering the specific area C22 nearly definite, such as when the) is won, the image drawn as "V" is displayed sparingly (for example, In a situation where there is a possibility that a special game will not be executed where the opening pattern designed to make the ball entering the specific area C22 nearly definite, such as displaying small, etc. (entering the specific area C22 in the special game In a situation where the ease of sphere is unknown), then, if an opening pattern designed to make entering sphere into the specific area C22 nearly definite is executed, then entry into the specific area C22 is The also preferable to perform the effect different effect for notifying, thereby making it possible to perform an effect in priority as needed.

<The subject in the fourth embodiment>
In gaming machines having small hits, it has been desired to create more entertaining gameplay.

<Effect of Fourth Embodiment>
As pattern A, a new suspension does not occur between the occurrence of suspension related to small hits and the start of symbol variation related to small hits (pattern variation is difficult to start in a state where the number of reservations is 2 or more) = When the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 starts after the occurrence of the suspension for small hits is likely to be long), and as the pattern B, the suspension for small hits occurs after the occurrence of small hits A new hold will occur before the start of the pattern change (the pattern change tends to be started while the state of the number of hold is 2 or more is always maintained = the small cover is caused from the hold and then the upper shielding member The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 may change in the case where the time until the opening of the C24 starts is short). Furthermore, because the change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 makes it possible to change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match well. When the player wins a small hit, it can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that pays attention to whether to enter the V winning opening C22.

<The subject in the fifth embodiment>
Since the player can touch the game ball, there is a concern that various injustices may be made to the game ball.

<Effect of Fifth Embodiment>
A ball detection device (for example, the first ball detection device 111, the second ball detection device 211, the first prize detection device 311, the second prize detection device 321, etc.) provided on the game board side, and the game frame Prize ball permission sensors KS provided on the side (for example, the first main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 110KS, the second main game start mouth prize ball permission sensor 210KS, the first big winning mouth prize ball permission sensor 310KS, the first 2) Winning ball is detected on both the large winning opening winning ball permission sensor 320KS, general winning opening winning ball permission sensor, etc.), and the winning information (for example, winning opening type) transmitted from the main control board A side Since the information on the number of winning balls is configured to be awarded to the player only when the information on the number of winning balls is matched with the basic winning balls number information stored in the winning balls payout control board 3000 side. , To prevent winning balls by cheating It can be. In addition, by providing the prize ball permission sensors KS on the gaming frame side, it is possible to reduce the cost of the gaming board (type replacement of pachinko gaming machines is mainly performed by replacing only the gaming board, and the gaming slot is Because it is often used repeatedly). In addition, for a winning that has given a winning ball to the player, it is configured to be able to display the winning opening type and the number of winning balls on a predetermined display unit (for example, the winning information display device 60). Thus, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is easy for the player to know which winning opening and how many winning balls have been obtained.

<The subject in the sixth embodiment>
Since a pachinko game machine configured to have only one type of jackpot probability for one gaming state (for example, non-probability fluctuation gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state) is common, such as the operation rate is improved, than in the past A highly interesting pachinko gaming machine has been sought. In addition, it has been required to create a gaming machine that can increase the sales freedom of the salesperson (administrator) of the game arcade.

<Effect of Sixth Embodiment>
In consideration of the point based on the operation performed only by the administrator to change the setting, the effect control unit (for example, CPUSC of the sub control board S) is also shifted to the operation mode performed by the administrator, and the main control unit (for example, In the CPU MC of the main control board M and the payout control means (for example, the CPU of the winning ball payout control board KH), the game function is stopped. That is, also in the other control means, the process for the administrator is executed in accordance with the process of setting change, and the process regarding the game function is not executed. For this reason, a plurality of control means can execute management processing respectively corresponding to one operation of setting change as a starting point. On the other hand, in the case of the confirmation operation of setting display, by configuring to maintain the normal game processing as much as possible, appropriate processing can be realized without giving restrictions on control more than necessary.

<Problem in Modification Example 1 from Seventh Embodiment and Seventh Embodiment>
When the main control board M executes processing such as generation / display of information related to ball entry to be displayed on the ball entry status display device J10, the capacity for executing the processing such as the generation / display becomes enormous. I will.

<Effects of Modification Example 1 from Seventh Embodiment and Seventh Embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment and the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the entry state display device arithmetic processing is called and executed in the main loop processing, and the entry state display device display control processing is called and executed in the timer interrupt processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the timer interrupt process, the entering state display device arithmetic processing and the entering state display device display can be performed. It is also possible to configure to call and execute the control process. With this configuration, processing can be simplified and capacity can be reduced. For example, the display data switching flag may be configured to have only one display data switching flag, and the display data switching flag updated in the ball entering state display device arithmetic processing may be configured to be referred to in the ball entering state display device display control processing. Be

  In the seventh embodiment, the second RAM area clear check process is performed each time the ball entry state display device arithmetic processing and the ball entry state display device display control processing are executed, thereby causing a sudden abnormality due to noise or the like. Although the embodiment has been described in which it is possible to respond promptly when a problem occurs, the present invention is not limited to this, and a check of the second RAM area is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, It is also possible to configure so as to be triggered by the counter value, the number of out-of-time counters, the fact that the total out-of-counts counter value has reached a predetermined number, etc.). With this configuration as well, it is possible to improve processing efficiency without excessively checking the second RAM area.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the RAM clear processing (clear processing of the first RAM area) occurs during the prize ball payout operation (for example, the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned off) It is assumed that power is restored after occurrence of power failure. For example, when RAM clear processing occurs at the completion of a predetermined number (for example, six) of payout balls during a specific number (for example, ten) of prize ball payout operations, the memory information of the remaining number of balls (for example, four) It is cleared and the payout operation is ended without executing the payout for the remaining number of winning balls, but in the entering state display device J10, the base value calculated by the value to which the number of winning balls for the specific number is added is Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that the ball entry information such as the base value can not be adjusted intentionally, and it is possible to generate composed ball entry information based on the number of balls entered into the winning opening.

<The subject in the eighth embodiment>
Since a pachinko game machine configured to have only one type of jackpot probability for one gaming state (for example, non-probability fluctuation gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state) is common, such as the operation rate is improved, than in the past A highly interesting pachinko gaming machine has been sought. In addition, it has been required to create a gaming machine that can increase the sales freedom of the salesperson (administrator) of the game arcade.

<Effect of Eighth Embodiment>
By providing a plurality of setting values so that the jackpot probability of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state may differ depending on the setting value, the player can make the setting value of the gaming machine playing a game high for the player Since it is possible to proceed with the game while holding anticipation for being the setting value to be profited, by winning the big hit, the expectation that the game ball can be obtained and the expectation set to the setting value advantageous to the player You can get a feeling.

<The subject in the ninth embodiment>
In order to perform pre-reading effect, the random number value held as a hold is determined to be a hit (big hit) based on the gaming state (for example, non-probability fluctuation gaming) and the set value (for example, setting 1) It may be inaccurate if it is not determined in advance whether it belongs to a random value range (e.g., "0 to 204"). At that time, as exemplified in the second embodiment, when the sub control board S is configured to determine whether or not the preread effect is to be performed, for example, as shown in step 2162 of FIG. There is a need to determine in advance on the side of the sub control board S whether or not the existing random number falls within the random value range determined to be a hit (big hit), in which case the setting value on the side of the sub control board S Information is needed. However, sending information related to the set value held by the main control board M to the sub-control board S is undesirable in terms of security or securing the fairness of the game {sending to the sub-control board S side There is a possibility that information on the setting value may be intercepted and abused at the time, and the information on the setting value is clearly notified to the outside on the side of the sub control board S (for example, the game arcade operator displayed for maintenance purposes) There is also the possibility that game players will be able to steal things}.

<Effect of the ninth embodiment>
In the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, the setting value can be changed, and information on the setting value is configured not to be transmitted from the main control substrate M side to the sub control substrate S side. Even in the case, it is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect that does not cause wrinkles.

<The subject in the tenth embodiment>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values, the random number range of a winning lottery that is a big hit will differ depending on the setting values set.

<Effect of Tenth Embodiment>
By making the total of the success or failure lottery random numbers (the random number for the big hit, the random number for the loss, the random number for the small hit) different for each set value, even with the game machine the big hit probability may differ depending on the set value. The random number range can be the same for all set values.

<The subject in the eleventh embodiment>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of set values, the contents of the lottery table become complicated depending on the set value and the game state set, and the ratio of the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state to the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state It is difficult to design a gaming machine that is the same for all set values.

<Effect of Eleventh Embodiment>
The table has a first yes or no lottery random number determination table and a second yes lottery random number determination table as a yes or no lottery table, and in the first yes or no lottery random number determination table, the contents of the table (random number range ) Is different, but depending on the game state, the contents of the table (random number range to be hit) are not different, and the probability of winning if the result of the lottery that refers to the first random lottery judgment table becomes a hit, In the case of the variable gaming state, it is determined as a big hit without referring to the second winning lottery random number determination table, and in the non-probability changing gaming state, the lottery is executed with reference to the second winning lottery random number determination table In this way, it is easy to create a gaming machine in which the ratio between the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is the same for all set values. So that the can.

<The subject in the twelfth embodiment>
When transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game, the probability fluctuation gaming state is terminated (may also be referred to as a ST machine) depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol. Here, when a configuration having a plurality of set values as described in the eighth embodiment is applied to a configuration in which the probability fluctuation gaming state can be ended by the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol as in the second embodiment, The probability of winning a big hit (sometimes referred to as the probability of running continuously) by the probability fluctuation gaming state is different depending on the setting value, and the advantageous state for the player is not equal for each gaming machine There is a fear.

<The effect of the twelfth embodiment>
The game has three setting values, setting 1, setting 2 and setting 3, as setting values, and in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, it is a game by configuring it so that the jackpot probability may be different due to the setting values being different. Can teach the player the novel interest of proceeding with the game while deducing the advantageous setting value to the current setting value, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is the same even if the setting value is different By setting to become a big hit probability of, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, the probability variation gaming state is terminated (may also be referred to as a ST machine) depending on the number of times of variation of the main gaming symbol In the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the continuous probability in the probability variation gaming state differs depending on the set value, and the probability that the player is in an advantageous state Never differs by game machine margins to provide at Doyugi state is game, it is possible to create a user-friendly gaming machine.

<The subject in the thirteenth embodiment>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values, it has been necessary to properly output a test signal.

<The effect of the thirteenth embodiment>
The setting value can be set by outputting information on the operation state of the setting device (for example, whether it is in the setting change mode or the setting display mode) and the set value as a test signal from the test terminal. Appropriate information based on it can be output outside the gaming machine.

<The problem in the fourteenth embodiment>
Although the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, the situation where the stack pointer indicates an address higher than "7FF8H" when an unexpected failure (such as unexpected power interruption) occurs Can occur.

<The effect of the fourteenth embodiment>
In design, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H", which causes an unexpected failure (such as unexpected power interruption) and causes the stack pointer to indicate an address higher than "7FF8H". In this case as well, it is configured by storing information (for example, setting value data) which greatly damages the result of the game when an abnormality occurs or is erased, in the upper address. Can be created.

<The subject in the fifteenth embodiment>
There has been a demand for a gaming machine having an ending condition of a more novel probability fluctuation gaming state.

<Effect of the fifteenth embodiment>
By configuring the probability change fall lottery to be executable in the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to create novel playability.

<The problem in the first modification from the fifteenth embodiment>
In the gaming machine having a random change lottery, more innovative game characteristics have been required.

<The effect of the example 1 of change from the fifteenth embodiment>
The jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state may be configured to be different for each setting value, and the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state may be higher as the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1) ing. On the other hand, the winning rate of the random change lottery is higher as the set value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1), and the probability change gaming state ends earlier if the winning ratio of the random change lottery is higher. Because it is easy, the higher the setting value, the easier it is for the probability variation gaming state to be finished earlier. By configuring in this manner, in the gaming machine set to a relatively high set value such as setting 3, the probability fluctuation gaming state is easily ended early, because it is easy to win a big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state, It is possible to configure a fair gaming machine in which the expectation value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous to the player is unlikely to be different for each setting.

<Problem in Modification 2 of the fifteenth embodiment>
There has been a demand for a gaming machine in which the expectation value of the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous for the player is unlikely to be different for each setting, and which does not have a probability change fall lottery.

<The effect of the example 2 of a change from a 15th embodiment>
The jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state may be configured to be different for each setting value, and the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state may be higher as the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1) ing. On the other hand, the probability variation number given after the big hit is smaller as the setting value is higher (for example, setting 3 than setting 1), and the setting value is high, the probability fluctuation gaming state is easily finished earlier It is done. By configuring in this way, when it is set to a relatively high set value such as setting 3, etc., it is easy to win a big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state, while the number of probability variations decreases, while the relative one such as setting 1 etc. If it is set to a low setting value, it is difficult to win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, the number of probability variation increases, and the expectation value of the probability variation gaming status advantageous for the player is difficult to be different for each setting. A gaming machine can be configured.

<Problem in Modification 3 of the fifteenth embodiment>
There has been a demand for a gaming machine having a new configuration as a configuration of a gaming machine in which it is difficult for a player to change an expected value of a probability variation gaming state which is advantageous for each setting.

<Effect of the third modification from the fifteenth embodiment>
The jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be different for each set value, and is configured to determine the number of probability variations and the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot from a plurality of selection candidates. Furthermore, the higher the setting 3, etc., by configuring the selection candidate to be selected (decided) with a relatively small number of probability variations and time reductions given after the big hit as the setting value is higher. When set to a set value, it is easy to win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, while the number of probability variations decreases, while when set to a relatively low set value such as setting 1, the probability variation gaming state Thus, it is possible to configure a fair gaming machine which is hard to win a big hit and the number of probability variation increases, and the expectation value of the probability variation gaming state advantageous for the player is unlikely to be different for each setting.

<Problem in Modification Example 4 from Fifteenth Embodiment>
There has been a demand for a gaming machine having a new configuration as a configuration of a gaming machine in which it is difficult for a player to change an expected value of a probability variation gaming state which is advantageous for each setting.

<Effect of the fourth modification example from the fifteenth embodiment>
The jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is configured to be different for each set value, the number of time reductions granted after the big hit end is fixed to a predetermined number of times (100 times), and the number of probability variations given after the big hit end is a plurality of types It was configured to determine from selection candidates. In addition, the predetermined number of times (100 times), which is the number of time reductions given after the big hit, will be the maximum value of the number of probability variations that can be determined, in other words, the time saving gaming state continues even after the probability fluctuation gaming state ends It was configured to get. By configuring in this way, when it is set to a relatively high set value such as setting 3, etc., it is easy to win a big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state, while the number of probability variations decreases, while the relative one such as setting 1 etc. If it is set to a low setting value, it is difficult to win a big hit in the probability variation gaming state, the number of probability variation increases, and the expectation value of the probability variation gaming status advantageous for the player is difficult to be different for each setting. A gaming machine can be configured.

<The problem in the sixteenth embodiment>
A game machine having a new configuration as a configuration in which a big hit is executed after the small hit is required by the game ball entering a specific area (V winning hole) in the big winning opening during the small hit execution .

<Effect of the sixteenth embodiment>
Time saving after the big hit is completed by winning the small game of the 2nd main game side in the game state to be configured as a gaming machine that continues the continuous play, the higher the setting value, the smaller the win of the small game of the 2nd main game side By configuring the rate to be high, it is possible to design a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player as the setting value is higher.

<The subject in the seventeenth embodiment>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values and capable of setting an arbitrary setting value from the plurality of setting values, it has been required to be able to appropriately manage and display input information.

<The effect of the seventeenth embodiment>
By classifying and managing input information into a plurality of types of items, and managing and displaying input information relating to set values separately from other input information, it is easy for the administrator to manage and to easily grasp irregularities on the gaming machine A game machine can be created.

<The subject in the eighteenth embodiment>
When a plurality of setting values are provided and any setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, the data volume is compressed by the processing relating to the setting values.

<Effect of Eighteenth Embodiment>
By configuring the setting change mode and the setting display mode to be transitionable only when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set in various situations (for example, a big hit, a symbol change, a symbol stop) during game play. There is no need to provide a process for transitioning to the setting display mode, and the data volume required for the process relating to the setting value can be reduced.

<< combination of embodiment >>
In this specification, although it is possible to combine each embodiment and modification suitably, it lists below about the combination of the embodiment which becomes especially advantageous.
<This Embodiment + Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the present embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the setting values on the main control substrate side can be suggested on the sub control substrate side, for example, provided in the first embodiment during a big hit. When the gaming machine ball enters the general winning opening in the vicinity of the big winning opening, it becomes possible to configure to perform a suggested effect of the setting value.
<Second Embodiment + Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment, it is possible to configure to perform the effect lottery according to the setting value also in the effect content determination process on the sub control board side in the second embodiment. For example, a different effect drawing may be performed according to the setting value in a low probability state and a low base at a normal time (for example, the winning ratio of the preread effect and the effect content of the preread effect are different) At ST time, which is a high base, different effect lottery may be performed according to the set value. Here, if it is configured to execute not only the suggestion of the big hit by the advance notice etc. but also the suggestion of the set value in the big hit fluctuation, the high probability state is more likely to be a big hit than the low probability state, so A lot of suggested effects of value occur and it becomes easy to grasp setting. For example, it may be configured to include content suggesting the setting in the pre-reading effect (image), or the setting grasping may be possible by the occurrence frequency of the pre-reading effect. Further, it is also possible to configure to change the variation mode in the limited frequency table after the big hit according to the setting, and it is also possible to make the effect stage etc. different.
Third Embodiment (Fourth Embodiment) + Fifth Embodiment>
By combining the third embodiment (or the fourth embodiment) with the fifth implementation determination, a ball tray having a specific area (V winning opening) inside a winning opening such as a starting opening or a large winning opening, It is not possible to touch the internal game ball, and in this configuration, it is impossible to fire anything other than the game ball originally held by the game machine (a ball with a thread, etc.) from the ball tray into the game area Since it becomes possible or difficult, it becomes prevention of the goto act which makes a game ball etc. pass illegally to a winning a prize mouth or a specific field.
<Fourth Embodiment + Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the fourth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the opening mode of the shielding member of the V winning opening can be made different according to the set value, or the winning probability of winning (big hit) in the lottery based on the set value Change only the hit probability (small hit) does not change the winning probability (common regardless of the set value) configuration, according to the set value according to the winning lottery (small hit) only to change the winning probability hit (big hit) It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not change the winning probability of (common regardless of the set value), and changes the winning probability of both the (big hit) and the (small hit) according to the set value.
<Fourth Embodiment + Eleventh Embodiment>
By combining the fourth embodiment and the eleventh embodiment, the big and small lottery probability tables (two in the eleventh embodiment) execute the winning and losing lottery for the big hit, and for the small hit, one lottery for the small hit The probability table is configured to perform a winning lottery. In other words, for the big hit, it determines the success or failure in the two-step lottery, and for the small hit, it becomes the lottery method to determine the success or failure in the one-step lottery. Is complete.
<Fifth Embodiment + Sixth Embodiment>
By combining the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, it is possible to configure the setting value to be confirmed by the operation unit device. Specifically, the set value information can be transmitted from the main control board to the award ball payout control board, and the award ball payout control board can be configured to perform control to display the set value on the touch panel interface of the operation unit device. .

M main control board MN11ta-A first main game pass / fail lottery table, MN11ta-B second main game pass / fail lottery table MN11ta-H auxiliary game pass / fail lottery table, MN41ta-A first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta −B Second main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta −H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game start opening electric role thing opening Timer MP33c Winning Ball Counter, MP34t Special Game Timer MP52c Number counter, MT10 command transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entering ball detector, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display Part, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display section B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entrance ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric role thing B20 2nd 2 main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display area B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display area C 1st · 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection Device, C11d first large winning opening motorized combination C20 second large winning opening C21s second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21d second large winning opening electric combination, D30 game area D44 launch handle D3 Outer rail, D34 inner rail H auxiliary gaming peripherals, H10 auxiliary gaming start port H11s auxiliary gaming start slot entrance ball detection device, H20 auxiliary gaming symbol display device H21 g auxiliary gaming symbol display portion, H21 h auxiliary gaming symbol holding display portion S secondary control Board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative symbol display area SG12 first hold display unit, SG13 second hold display unit KH award ball payout control board KE award ball payout device, KE10 payout unit D16 transparent plate, KR award ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH Prize ball payout control board Ea power switch, D42 launcher E power supply unit, D40 launch control board DL10 left strike area, DR10 right strike area ML10 left strike route (first flow down route), MR10 right strike route (2nd flow down route)
D50 Right-handed route outlet NKc ball entry counter P10 Left general winning opening, P20 Right general winning opening HSc Left-handling instruction counter, MSc Right-handling instruction counter MP51c Positive variation counter, MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small hit gaming timer, MP41t -2 Discharge standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning opening), C20-1 Box-like member C23 Second large winning opening Discharge opening, C23s Second large winning opening discharge detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning combination Entrance ball detection device SM26c Pre-reading effect execution counter SM24t Power on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 continuous number counter SB sub input button, SBs sub input button input detection device KH award ball dispensing control board, KE award ball dispensing device 3100 Transmission / reception control means 311 0 reception control means, 3111 main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means, 3210 transmission control means 3300 payout control means, 3310 payout processing related information temporary storage means 3311a first main game start opening winning counter, 3311b 2nd main game start opening winning counter 3311c 1st big winning opening winning counter, 3311d 2nd big winning opening winning counter 3311e general winning opening winning counter, 3312 ball number counter 3313 enclosed gaming ball number counter, 3400 firing control means 3410 Launch control related information temporary storage means, 3500 Power off / power on reset Initial processing control means 3510 Power off information temporary storage means 40 Launch control device, 42 Launch device KS Prize sphere permission sensors, EU ECO unit 50 Operation part apparatus

Claims (1)

The first starting port where game balls can enter
The second starting port where game balls can enter
It is a variable member attached to a predetermined entrance, which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entrance as compared to the ball entering or closing state A variable member which is easy to enter and which is configured to be difficult to enter into the predetermined ball entry port when the gaming ball can not enter the ball or to the open state when displaced to the closed state;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit capable of displaying second main game identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first starting opening;
The first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information on the basis of the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, and then performs control to stop the first main game identification information. One main game identification information display control means,
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
The second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information on the basis of the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, and then performs control to stop the second main game identification information Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable game is variable until there is a predetermined number of entering balls in the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses It is possible to execute the special game which executes the unit game which can make the winning opening advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped at the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. After being displayed, a variable winning opening opening game in which a unit game which can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player until a specific period of time has passed or a specific period has passed is displayed. Special game control means that can be executed;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
It is possible to start variable display of the second main game identification information even while the first main game identification information is variable display, and even if the second main game identification information is variable display of the first main game identification information It is configured to be able to start variable display,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, Alternatively, the first main game identification information can not be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. ,
The game states related to the openability of the variable member include a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state.
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group becomes the predetermined probability, the first main game identification information or the second main game And a high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state Is configured to be relatively longer than
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state Is configured to be relatively longer than
In the case where the game ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting opening, the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state than in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state One is configured such that the expectation value related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player by the execution of the variable winning opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed becomes larger,
In the case where the gaming ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting opening, the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state than in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state One is configured such that the expectation value related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player by the execution of the variable winning opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed becomes larger,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
The effect display unit includes effect display content control means capable of displaying the secondary game identification information in the effect display unit based on the information regarding the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means,
In the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, when the information on the first main game identification information is received, the subsidiary game identification information based on the information on the first main game identification information is displayed on the display unit If the information regarding the second main game identification information is received in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, the secondary game identification based on the information regarding the second main game identification information is displayed. A pachinko game machine which is configured to display information in a display mode which does not display information on the effect display unit or which is more difficult to visually recognize than secondary game identification information based on information on first main game identification information.

Images